W 

S 
9 

K 
fc- 
CS 

IB 

£  6 

2  ° 

«    a, 
g   5 

O     J3 
h^     ^ 

H  .3 
o  s 


O    o> 

w  2 


Cotton  Spinning 


A  Complete  Working  Guide  to 

MODERN  PRACTICE  IN  THE  MANUFACTURE  OF    COTTON  YARN,   INCLUDING 

THE  NATURAL  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE   DIFFERENT   VARIETIES 

OF  COTTON,  GRADING  AND  MECHANICAL  TREATMENT  OF 

FIBER,     AND    CONSTRUCTION,     OPERATION, 

AND  CARE  OF  SPINNING  MACHINERY 


By  CHARLES  C.  HEDRICK 
f  r 

Mechanical  Engineer 
Lowell  Machine  Shop,  Lowell.  Mass. 


ILLUSTRATED 


COPYRIGHT  1908  BY 
AMERICAN  SCHOOL  OF  CORRESPONDENCE' 


Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall,  London 
All  Rights  Reserved 


Foreword 


HE  Textile  Industry  has  shared  to  such  an  extent  the 
modern  tendency  toward  specialization,  and  has  been 
marked  by  the  development  of  such  a  multiplicity  of 
types  of  machinery  and  special  mechanical  and  chem- 
ical processes,  that  the  various  branches  of  this  great 
industry  to-day  constitute  in  reality  distinct  though  closely  re- 
lated arts.  The  present  volume  is  intended  to  supply  a  working 
guide  to  the  latest  approved  practice  in  the  fundamental  branch 
of  Cotton  Spinning,  covering  every  detail  from  the  growth  and 
natural  characteristics  of  the  different  varieties  of  cotton  and 
the  grading  of  cotton  fiber,  to  the  mechanical  treatment  of  the 
raw  material  and  the  machinery  and  processes  involved  in  the 
creation  of  the  finished  product. 

CL    Special  stress  is  laid  on  the  practical  as  distinguished  from 
the  merely  theoretical  or  descriptive  form  of  treatment,  the. 
work  being  based  on  a  careful  study  of  conditions  and  needs  as 
developed  in  the  best  American  mills. 

C,  This  volume  will  be  found  especially  adapted  for  purposes 
of  self -instruction  and  home  study,  fitted  not  only  to  meet  the 
needs  of  the  beginner  in  textile  art,  but  also  to  serve  as  a  ref- 
erence work  and  instruction  manual  full  of  information  and 
suggestions  of  great  practical  value  to  the  most  advanced  and 
experienced  textile  worker. 

241093 


COTTON    FIBER. 


found  the  cotton  plant  growing  in  that  region  which  is  now  Texas 
and  Louisiana. 

Summing  the  matter  up,  we  are  led  to  believe  that  on  a  belt 
of  the  earth's  surface  coinciding  very  nearly  with  the  cotton  belt  of 
to-day,  the  plant  was  found  either  in  a  wild  or  cultivated  state  in 
the  earliest  ages  of  which  we  have  records. 

At  the  present  day  the  cotton-raising  territory  includes  practi- 
cally the  whole  of  India,  parts  of  China  and  Japan,  Central  Asia, 
the  valley  of  the  Nile  in  Egypt,  and  Syria  in  the  Old  World. 
In  the  New  World,  the  Southern  States  and  their  islands,  Mexico, 
Brazil,  Peru,  and  several  islands  in  the  Pacific. 

The  following  diagram  shows  approximately  the  proportions 
of  the  world's  crop  raised  in  the  various  countries  mentioned. 
The  figures  given  represent  bales  of  five  hundred  pounds  each. ' 


World's  Crop  1892-93  11,950,000 

United  States  1892-93  6,700.000 

India  1892-93  2,200,000 

China  1892-93  1,200,000 

Egypt  1892-93  1,000,000 

South  America  1892-93  225,000 


COTTON   IN   THE  UNITED   STATES. 

According  to  the  most  reliable  records,  the  first  cotton  culti- 
vated in  the  American  colonies  was  in  Virginia,  in  1609. 

A  more  extensive  effort  at  cotton  cultivation  was  undertaken 
in  the  same  colony  in  1621,  at  which  time  "cotton  wool "  was 
quoted  at  eight  shillings  per  pound.  English  colonists  in  the 
Carolinas  undertook  the  cultivation  of  cotton  about  1660. 

The  first  export  of  any  considerable  amount  of  cotton  occurred 
in  1770,  at  which  time  twenty  bales  were  shipped  to  Liverpool. 

One  hundred  years  later  the  exports  amounted  to  about  three 
million  bales,  and  at  the  present  time  the  export  of  American 
cotton  is  between  six  and  seven  million  bales  annually. 

The  following  diagram  allows  a  comparison  between  the 
world's  crop  and  the  crop  of  the  United  States  for  the  years 
1893  and  1900.  It  will  be  seen  that  in  1900  Texas  alone  pro- 
duced thirty-four  per  cent  of  the  crop  of  the  United  States,  and 
about  twenty-five  per  cent  of  the  world's  crop. 


12 


COTTON    FIBER. 


World's  Crop  1893  and  1900 

United  States  1893  and  1900 

Texas  1900 


The  following  table  gives  approximately  the  amounts  of  cotton 
raised  in  the  different  state.*  of  the  United  States  for  the  years 
1870,  1895  and  1900.  The  figures  given  represent  bales  of  five 
hundred  pounds  each. 

1870  1895  190O 

Alabama  429,500  1,000,000  1,023,000 

Arkansas  248,000  8')0,000  818,000 

Georgia  474,000  1,300,000  1,203,000 

Louisiana  351,000  600,000  705,000 

Mississippi  565,090  1,200,000  1,046,000 

North  Carolina  145,000  465,000  477,000 

South  Carolina  224,500  800,000  748,000 

Texas  350,000  3,270,000  3,438,000 

All  others  225,000  410.000  670,000 

Total  3,012.000  9,901,000  10,123,000 

BOTANICAL   VARIETIES. 

Cotton  is  the  most  widely  cultivated  and  manufactured  of  all 
the  textiles,  and  is  the  product  of  a  plant  belonging  to  the  Malva- 
ceae or  Mallow  family,  to  which-  family  also  belong  the  Mallow 
Hollyhock  and  Okia.  It  is  known  scientifically  by  its  generic 
name,  Gossypium. 

Among  the  early  botanists  much  confusion  existed  in  regard 
to  the  proper  classification  of  the  species  growing  in  different  parts 
of  the  world,  their  classifications  ranging  from  three  to  eighty-eight 
species.  It  is  generally  agreed  that  Dr.  Boyle's  classification 
covers  those  cottons  known  to  commerce,  and  can  be  accepted  as 
satisfactory  for  all  practical  purposes.  His  classification  gives 
G.  Arboreum,  G.  Barbadense,  G.  Herbaceum,  and  G.  Hirsutum. 

G-ossypium  Arboreum,  or  Tree  Cotton.  This  cotton  is  a  peren- 
nial, varying  in  height  from  six  to  twenty  feet,  and  sometimes 
attains  a  diameter  of  five  inches;  the  flowers  are  brownish  red, 
seed  green,  and  adhering  strongly  to  the  fibers.  The  fibers  are 
of  a  yellowish  tinge,  soft,  silky,  and  an  inch  or  less  in  length. 
This  cotton  cannot  be  considered  as  a  cultivated  variety,  and  com- 
paratively little  is  used. 

Grossypium  Barbadense.     This  species  is  so  called  from  the 


13 


6  COTTON   FIBER. 


fact  that  it  is  a  native  of  Barbadoes.  It  lias  a  yellowish  blossom, 
a  black  seed  which  is  free  from  the  hairy  covering  of  other  varie- 
ties, and  is  distinctly  shrubby  in  growth.  Height  from  six  to  ten 
feet.  Commercially,  this  is  a  very  valuable-  and  important  cotton, 
being  fine  and  long  stapled.  The  long,  silky  cotton  known  as 
Sea  Island,  and  the  more  valuable  of  Egyptian  cottons,  belong  to 
this  species.  By  cultivation  this  species  has  been  extended  to  the 
West  Indies,  the  coast  of  the  Southern  States  and  their  islands, 
Central  America,  Jamaica,  Porto  Rico,  Egypt,  Island  of  Bourbon 
and  Australia. 

The  yield  of  lint  from  Sea  Island  cotton  is  in  smaller  propor- 
tion than  from  any  other  kind  of  cotton  grown  in  this  country, 
but  on  account  of  the  length  and  quality  of  its  fiber  it  is  adapted 
to  the  finest  classes  of  goods,  and  on  that  account  can  be  considered 
a  very  valuable  variety. 

Gossypium  Herbaceum.  -This  is  undoubtedly  the  hardiest 
variety  of  cotton,  and  on  that  account  has  the  widest  geographical 
range.  Most  of  the  cotton  produced  in  the  Old  World  is  of  this 
species,  which  is  generally  considered  to  be  of  Asiatic  origin.  It 
is  an  annual,  and  herbaceous  in  nature ;  average  height,  five  feet. 
It  has  yellow  seeds  covered  with  a  gray  down,  fibers  adhering 
strongly  to  the  seeds.  Staple  of  medium  length.  This  cotton  is 
grown  in  Arabia,  India,  China,  Turkey  and  Egypt,  as  well  as  in 
this  country. 

G-ossypium  Hirsutum.  This  variety  is  so  named  on  account 
of  the  hairy  character  of  the  plant.  Maximum  height  about  six 
feet,  but  varying  greatly  in  different  locations  and  soils.  Seeds 
are  covered  with  a  greenish  down.  Staple  white,  and  regular  in 
length.  The  greater  proportion  of  Gulf  and  Upland  cotton  culti- 
vated in  the  United  States  belongs  to  this  species,  though  some 
varieties  have  more  of  the  characteristics  of  the  Herbaceum 
type. 

Another  species  of  cotton,  G.  Peruvanium,  is  often  given,  but 
many  botanists  include  this  with  G.  Barbadense.  This  cotton  is 
a  native  of  Peru,  and  is  of  some  importance.  Its  chief  character- 
istic seems  to  be  a  harsh,  woolly  condition  of  the  fiber,  though  of 
good  length. 


14 


COTTON  FIBER. 


CULTIVATION  OF   AHERICAN  COTTON. 

The  methods  of  cultivation  and  the  time  of  planting  and 
picking  vary  in  the  different  localities  of  the  cotton-raising  por- 
tion of  the  United  States,  and  is  due  to  differences  in  soil  and 
temperature.  Planting  is  done  as  early  as  possible;  in  fact  as 
soon  as  danger  from  frosts  has  passed.  There  can  be  considered 
two  distinct  periods  in  the  life  of  the  cotton  plant.  The  first  is 
from  the  time  of  planting  to  midsummer,  when  every  effort 
is  made  to  secure  a  strong,  vigorous  growth.  At  this  time  pleiit}r 
of  moisture,  sunshine  and  cultivation  are  necessary,  and  tropical 
conditions  are  desired  to  secure  and  store  the  strength  which  will 
later  go  to  the  seed.  The  second  period  is  from  midsummer  to 
the  time  of  picking.  Cultivation  is  now  stopped, 
the  ground  is  allowed  to  become  hard  and  com- 
pact, and  dry,  cooler  weather  is  desirable. 
These  conditions  tend  to  retard  the  further 
growth  of  the  plant,  and  allow  the  stored 
strength  to  go  to  the  seed. 

Cotton  is  planted  in  rows  three  or  four 
feet  apart,  and  appears  above  the  ground  in 
about  ten  days.  As  soon  as  the  plants  are 
large  enough  to  give  evidence  of  strength  the 
rows  are  "chopped  out,"  leaving  hills  from 
eight  to  fifteen  inches  apart,  and  from  .  these 
hills  the  weaker  plants  are  pulled.  From  this 
time  until  about  the  end  of  June  the  crop  is 
constantly  cultivated  by  means  of  shovel  plows, 
scrapers  and  "scooties,"  to  retain  the  moistuie  in  the  soil  and  to 
keep  the  field  clear  from  weeds  and  crab  grass. 

In  seventy-five  or  eighty  days  after  planting  the  blossom 
appears,  and  the  plant  continues  to  blossom  for  some  time.  These 
.blossoms  are  at  first  a. creamy  white;  the  second  day  they  turn 
pink  or  red,  and  the  third  day  a  purplish  blue,  at  which  time 
they  drop  off.  After  the  dropping  of  the  blossom  the  seed-pod, 
or  "boll,"'  commences  to  form,  and  attains  its  full  growth  in  from 
six  to  eight  weeks. 

When  fully  developed  the  boll  bursts,  commencing  at  the 
apex.  ;iii<l  th«'  separations  extending  down  the  sides  disclose  from 


Fig.  1. 


15 


COTTON    FIIJKIi. 


three  to  five  cells,  divided  by  walls  of  membrane.  (See  Fig.  1.) 
These  cells  contain  from  six  to  eleven  seeds  each,  or  from  twenty- 
eight  to  thirty-six  in  each  boll.  Each  sei±d  is  covered  With  the 
cotton,  fibers,  which  are  attached  at  one  end  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  hair  on  one's  head.  (See  Fig.  2.) 

When  a  sufficient  number  of  bolls  are  open,  picking  com- 
mences and  lasts  until  frost  kills  the  plant,  or  until  all  the  ripe 
fibers  are  picked,  which  may  be  some  time  after  frost  in  the  more 
northerly  sections.  It  is  desirable  to  pick  the  cotton  as  fast  as  it 
ripens  and  before  it  can  be  damaged  by  rain,  wind  and  dust. 
Cotton  fields  are,  as  a  rule,  picked  over  three  times,  generally  in 
September,.  October  and  November,  although  in  the  Gulf  States 
picking  commences  in  August  and  sometimes  lasts  through  De- 
cember. 

Picking  is  done  entirely  by 
hand,  and  the  cotton  placed  in 
bags  hung  around  the  neck  or 
waist  of  the  picker,  leaving  both 
hands  free  to  work.  These  b:igs 
are  emptied  into  baskets  as  fast 
as  filled,  and  a  record  of  the 
weight  taken,  as  all  picking  is 
paid  for  by  weight.  Seveial 

forms  of  cotton-picking  machines  have  been  tried,  but  without 
much  success,  as  they  gather  too  large  a  proportion  of  leaf  and  boll. 

The  price  paid  for  picking  is  from  forty  to  fifty  cents  per 
hundred  pounds  of  seed  cotton,  which  would  be  equal  to  from 
one  dollar  and  twenty  cents  to  one  dollar  and  a  half  per  hundred 
pounds  of  lint.  Pickers  have  been  known  to  gather  as  much  as 
four  hundred  pounds  of  seed  cotton  per  day,  but  this  is  the  highest 
record,  and  was  accomplished  under  the  most  favorable 'conditions. 
An  average  day's  picking  is  one  hundred  pounds. 

The  foregoing  prices  for  picking  apply  to  Uphmd  cotton 
under  ordinary  conditions.  The  picking  of  Sea  Island  cotton 
commands  better  prices.  From  a  cent  to  a  cent  and  a  half  per 
pound  is  generally  paid.  The  yield  of  Sea  Island  is  less  per  acre, 
and  more  territory  must  be  covered  by  the  pickers  for  each  pound 
secured.  -Owing  to  the  greater  value  of  Sea  Island  cotton  more 


Fig.  2. 


16 


COTTON   FT  HER. 


care  is  taken  in  picking,  and,  as  a  result,  the  cotton  is  more  fiee 
from  leaf  and  dirt  than  Upland  cotton.  The  seed  cotton  is  hauled 
from  .the  field  to  the  storehouse,  or  directly  to  the  cotton  gin, 
where  the  seed  and  lint  are  separated. 

GINNING. 

Ginning  is  the  operation  of  removing  the  cotton  fibers  from 
the  seed.  Of  cotton  picked,  two-thirds  hy  weight  consists  of  seed 
and  only  one-third  is  material  that  can  be  used  in  the  manufacture 
of  cloth.  Some  cottons  are  much  easier  to  gin  than  others,  as  the 
seeds  are  smooth,  free  from  down,  and  adhere  less  strongly  to  the 
fibers.  Sea  Island  and  Egyptian  cottons  belong  to  this  class. 

There  are  two  styles  of  gins  in  use:  the  roller  gin  and  the  saw 
gin;  there  are  also  several  forms  of  each,  differing  in  mechanical 
construction  but  similar  in  principle  and  operation. 

The  origin  of  the  roller  gin  dates  from  the  time  of  the  early 
cultivation  of  cotton  in  India.  The  original  roller  gin,  known  as 
the  foot-roller,  consisted  simply  of  a  flat  stone  and  a  round  wooden 
roll.  The  cotton  was  spread  over  the  stone  and  a  rolling  motion 
imparted  to  the  roll  by  the  foot  of  the  worker,  the  effect  being  to 
detach  the  fibers  from  the  seed  and  force  the  seed  aw.iy  from  the 
fibeis.  Tins  primitive  form  of  gin  was  employed  only  for  hard 
seeded  cotton,  and  the  product  of  one  person  was  only  about  five 
pounds  per  day. 

The  next  step  in  advance  gave  an  improvement  over  the  foot- 
roller,  and  was  known  as  the  "  Churka."  This  "  machine  "  is  of 
very  ancient  origin,  it  was  formerly  used  in  most  of  the  cotton- 
growing  countries,  and  can  be  found  in  some  districts  of  India 
to-day.  It  consisted  of  two  rollers :  an  upper  one  of  iron  about  half 
an  inch  in  diameter,  and  a  lower  one  of  wood  about  two  inches 
in  diameter.  These  rolls  were  revolved  toward  each  other,  and 
were  fixed  in  rigid  bearings,  very  close  together.  The  cotton  was 
fed  by  hand  to  these  rolls,  which  grasped  the  fibers  and  passed 
them  between  the  rolls.  The  fibers  were  freed  from  the  seed  by 
this  action,  as  the  seed  was  too  large  to  pass  through  the  limited 
space  between  the  rolls.  The  action  of  this  gin  was  very  easy  on 
the  cotton  fiber,  but  the  product  was  small,  about  eight  or  ten 
pounds  a  day  being  the  capacity  of  the  machine. 


17 


10  COTTON  FIBER. 


The  modern  roller  gin,  of  which  there  are  several  forms  used  in 
this  country  lor  Sealsland  cotton,  may  be  briefly  described  as  fol- 
lows :  The  seed  cotton  is  fed  on  a  table,  or  by  an  endless  apron,  to 
a  leather  roller,  generally  of  walrus  hide.  Along  the  face  of  this 
roller,  where  the  seed  is  delivered,  is  a  steel  blade,  the  edge  of 
which  is  set  close  to  the  surface  of  the  roll,  and  prevents  the 
passage  of  seed.  The  leather-covered  roll  revolves  toward  the 
steel  blade,  or  "  doctor,"  and  being  rough  on  its  surface  draws 
the  fibers  under  the  blade  and  away  from  the  seed. 

There  is  a  rapidly  oscillating  comb  which  knocks  the  seed 
away  from  the  "doctor"  after  its  fibers  have  been  engaged  and 
drawn  under  by  the  rapidly  revolving  roll.  The  cleaned  seeds 
fall  through  slots  in  the  feeding  table,  and  the  fibers  are  cleaned 
from  the  roll  and  delivered  by  a  revolving  brush. 

The  cotton  fiber  receives  little  if  any  damage  from  the  action 
of  the  roller  gin,  and  in  this  particular  the  roller  gin  is  considered 
far  superior  to  the  saw  gin.  The  chief  disadvantage  of  the  roller 
gin  is  its  limited  production,  being  under  average  conditions  about 
two  bales  per  day. 

A  late  form  of  roller  gin,  known  as  the  Prior  gin,  differs 
from  others  in  the  construction  of  the  cylinder.  In  this  gin  the 
revolving  cylinder  is  covered  with  a  lagging  composed  of  horse- 
hair and  rubber,  giving  a  rough  surface,  which  readily  grasps  the 
cotton  fiber.  The  production  of.  this -gin  is  somewhat  in  advance 
of  that  of  the  ordinary  roller  gin,  but  is  much  less  than  that  of  the 
average  saw  gin. 

Roller  gins  are  built  with  both  single  and  double  rollers. 

The  saw  gin  (Fig.  3),  wrhich  is  generally  used  in  this  country 
for  everything  but  Sea  Island  cotton,  was  invented  by  Eli  Whitney 
in  1794.  The  modern  saw  gin  consists  of  a  box  or  chamber,  M. 
into  which  the  seed  cotton  is  automatically  fed  by  an  endless  spiked 
apron.  .  One  side  of  this  receptacle  consists  of  a  grate  of  metal 
bars  or  ribs,  ('.  Through  the  .slots  of  this  grate  project  notched 
steel  discs  or  saws,  B,  from  forty  to  eighty  in  number,  arranged  on 
an  arbor  with  collars  between.  The  teeth  of  these  saws,  which 
revolve  at  a  speed  of  three  hundred  to  five  hundred  revolutions 
per  minute,  engage  the  fiber  and  pull  it  from  the  seed  and  through 
the  grate,  allowing  the  cleaned  seeds  to  fall  through  a  slot,  K,  at 


18 


COTTON  FIBER. 


11 


the  bottom  of  the  box.  The  cotton  fiber  clinging  to  the  teeth  of 
the  saws  is  removed  by  a  rapidly  revolving  brush,  H,  which,  aided 
by  the  current  of  air  which  it  generates,  throws  the  ginned  cotton 
on  the  floor  of  the  ginhouse,  or  against  condensing  cages,  which 
deliver  it. 

Saw  gins  are  also  built  with  a  double  set  of  saws,  but  their 
construction  is  substantially  the  same.  A  saw  gin  of  sixty  saws, 
at  a  speed  of  four  hundred  revolutions  per  minute,  will  giu  about 
ten  bales  per  day,  although  a  smaller  production  would  give  a 
better  quality  of  product. 


Fig.  3. 

There  are  several  conditions  which  will  cause  a  decided 
damage  to  the  cotton  in  the  operation  of  ginning.  An  experi- 
enced judge  of  cotton  can  readily  detect  the  result  of  improper 
ginning  by  an  examination  of  cotton  in  the  bale. 

Cut  staple  is  the  result  of  too  high  saw  speed,  or  of  having 
the  teeth  of  the  saws  too  sharp  on  the  edge.  This  damage  is  a 
serious  one,  as  it  greatly,  weakens  the  fibers  that  are  not  actually 
cut  by  the  operation. 


IS 


12  COTTON  FIBER. 


Neppy  cotton  is  another  serious  condition  which  may  arise 
from  ovprfi'o \vdJng_thA-gtn7  or  from  the  fact  that  the  saws  are  set 
too  close  to  the  Lars  of  the  grate.  Neps  are  little  tangled  fibers, 
or  tangled  bunches  of  fibers,  which  are  hard  to  remove  from  the 
cotton  in  the  after  processes,  and  the  presence  of  neps  in  any  con- 
siderable quantity  condemns  cotton  which  otherwise  might  grade 
well. 

Stringy  or  "tailed"  cotton  is  the  result  of  ginning  when  the 
cotton  is  too_wet.  Although  not  as  serious  a  defect  as  the  two 
preceding,  it  has  an  influence  on  the  grading  of  the  stock  and  on 
the  action  of  the  cotton  in  manufacturing  operations. 

The  damage  to  the  fiber  in  ginning  is  not  present  to  any 
extent  when  roller  gins  are  used,  and  for  that  reason  roller-ginned 
cotton  Avill  bring  a  better  price,  other  conditions  equal,  than  saw- 
ginned  cotton.  There  has  for  some  time  been  an  effort  to  secure 
the  adoption  of  some  form  of  roller  gin  in  the  South,  some  manu- 
facturers claiming  that  roller-ginned  cotton  is  worth  to  them  one- 
half  to  one  cent  per  pound  more  than  saw-ginned  cotton.  Up  to 
the  present  time  no  great  advance  has  been  made  in  this  direction, 
but  many  predict  that  the  roller  gin  will  eventually  displace  the 
present  form  of  saw  gin. 

BALING. 

After  being  ginned  the  cotton  is  ready  for  baling.  There 
are  several  forms  of  baling  press,  the  most  common  of  which  is 
the  screw  press  connected  with  the  ginhonse.  This  press  gives 
a  bale  which  on  reaching  the  market  or  shipping  point  is  again 
compressed. 

The  square  bale,  or  American  bale  (Fig.  4),  though  varying 
greatly  in  size,  is  supposed  to  be  fifty-four  inches  long,  twenty- 
seven  inches  wide,  and  to  weigh  five  hundred  pounds.  The  thick- 
ness depends  upon  the  amount  of  compression,  and  averages  about 
sixteen  inches.  This  bale  is  covered  with  coarse  burlap  bagging 
and  bound  with  iron  hoops  or  "  ties."  The  American  bale  has  the 
reputation  of  being  the  poorest  bale  made.  The  ties,  six  or  eight 
in  number,  are  hardly  sufficient  to  confine  the  bale,  the  covers  are 
generally  of  poor  quality,  and  the  weight  of  bagging  and  ties  a 
large  per  cent  of  the  gross  weight.  The  loss  of  room  in  shipping 


COTTON  FIBER, 


13 


and  the  loss  of  cotton  and  damage  is  considerable ;  in  short,  the 
bale  is  clumsy,  dirty,  expensive  and  far  from  satisfactory. 

Egyptian  cotton  is  received  in  this  country  in  much  better 
shape.  The  cotton  is  completely  covered  by  the  bagging  and 
bound  by  eleven  or  twelve  ties.  The  Egyptian  bale  (Fig.  5)  is 
compressed  to  a  density  of  about  forty-five  pounds  to  the  cubic 
foot,  and  weighs  on  an  average  seven  hundred  pounds. 

Peruvian  cotton  is  received  in  smaller  bales,  of  about  two 
hundred  pounds  weight,  and  generally  in  good  condition. 

There  are  two  other  systems  of  baling,  of  comparatively  recent 
date, 'which  are  attracting  considerable  attention  among  manufac- 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


turns  and  cotton  planters.  One  of  these  is  called  the  Bessonette 
or  "round-lap  "  system.  By  this  system  the  lint  as  it  comes  from 
the  gin  is  blown  into  a  reservoir  or  bat  former,  where  it  is  con- 
verted into  an  even,  continuous  sheet.  -  This  sheet  is  wound  around 
an  arbor  or  core  under  pressure,  the  pressure  being  light  at  first 
and  increasing  with  the  size  of  the  roll.  The  pressure  is  applied 
by  revolving  iron  rolls  until  the  bale  becomes  of  full  size  and 
density.  By  this  method  of  rolling  under  pressure,  bales  are 
produced  which  are  twenty-two  inches  in  diameter,  thirty-four 
and  forty-eight  inches  in  length,  and  averaging  275  and  425 
pounds  each.  The  density  of  this  bale  is  about  thirty-five  pounds 
to  the  cubic  foot  as  against  about  twenty-two  pounds  in  the 
American  bale.  With  tlie  Bessonette  bale  no  hoops  are  needed, 


14  COTTON  FIBER. 


as  the  bale  is  covered  with  a  strip  of  cotton  cloth  before  the 
baling  pressure  is  released,  and  the  ends  of  the  bale  are  capped 
with  cloth,  also.  Of  the  cotton  crop  of  1900,  about  five  hundred 
thousand  bales  were  of  this  type. 

Another  form  of  cylindrical  bale  is  the  "  Lowry  bale."  This 
bale  is  formed  by  feeding  the  cotton  loose  from  the  gin  into  a 
receptacle,  the  bottom  of  which  is  a  revolving  plate  containing 
several  slots  radiating  from  a  center  to  the  circumference.  -Undwr 
this  revolving  plate  is  a  cylindrical  chamber,  into  which  the  cotton 
is  first  packed  by  hand.  The  bottom  of  this  chamber  is  held  by 
hydraulic  pressure.  The  cotton  in  the  receptacle  passes  through 
the  slots  in  the  revolving  plate,  and  by  the  circular  motion  of  the 
plate  is  drawn  through  and  placed  very  compactly  in  the  chamber 
below.  As  the  bale  builds,  the  pressure  of  the  cotton  overcomes 
the  hydraulic  pressure,  and  the  bottom  of  the  cylinder  is  forced 
downward  until  the  bale  has  attained  the  required  length.  This 
bale  is  secured  by  several  wire  ties  placed  longitudinally  around 
the  bale  and  afterward  enclosed  in  cotton  cloth.  This  bale  is  of 
uniform  size,  eighteen  inches  in  diameter  and  thirty-six  inches  in 
length,  and  is  compressed  to  a  density  of  about  forty-five  pounds 
per  cubic  foot,  weighing,  with  cover,  about  250  pounds.  There 
were  122  presses  of  this  type  operated  throughout  the  country 
for  the  crop  of  1900,  producing  about  375,000  bales, 

There  are  several  advantages  possessed  by  both  of  these 
cylindrical  bales  over  the  old-style  American  bale.  They. are 
easier  and  cheaper  to  handle,  less  waste  from  sampling,  cleaner, 
smaller  percentage  of  bagging  and  ties,  less  risk  from  fire  and 
greater  salvage  in  case  of  fire.  The  insurance  and  freight  are 
also  lower.  The  Bessonette  bale  is  sometimes  called  the  Under- 
writers bale. 

The  tare,  or  bagging,  and  ties  on  the  American  bale  amount 
to  twenty-four  to  thirty  pounds  per  bale,  or  about  five  or  six  per 
cent.  On  either  form  of  cylindrical  bale  the  cover  weighs  two 
and  one-half  or  three  pounds  per  bale,  giving  less  than  two  per 
cent  of  tare. 

The  position  of  the  cotton  in  the  Bessonette  bale  can  be  com- 
pared to  a  roll  of  wide  tape.  In  the  Lowry  bale  its  form  is  more 
that  of  a  flat  coiled  spring. 


COTTOR  FIBER.  15 


COTTON   FIBER. 

Although  a  knowledge  of  the  diseases  to  which  a  cotton  plant 
is  liable^  the  insects  which  affect  its  growth,  and  the  cost  of  pro- 
duction in  various  localities  is  interesting  and  valuable,  a  considera- 
tion of  the  structure  of  the  fiber  and  the  commercial  varieties  and 
gradings  is  far  more  important* 

In  every  lot  of  cotton  three  classes  of  fibers  can  be  recognized: 
the  ripe,  half-ripe  and  unripe.  A  perfect  cotton  _fibex—ooftsi»ts  of 
four  parts  :  ^"'gty_aJi_iiiLt^_jii£mbra^^  rpa^  npll^lnsp^ 

which  constitutes  about  eighty-five  per  cent  of  the  fiber;  third,  a 
'central  spiral_deposit  of  harder  nature  ;  and  fourth,  a  centraL 
secretimi_corrfispDiiding  to  the  pith  of  a  quilL 

Covering  the  fiber  is  a  varnish  amounting  to  less  than  one 
per  cent  of  the  weight  of  the  fiber,  and  known  as  "cotton  wax." 
This  is  the  substance  which  makes  the  fiber  slow  to  absorb  mois- 
ture, and  which  in  absorbent  cotton  has  been  removed  by  chemical 
action. 

The  cotton  fiber,  which  appears  to  be  a  smooth,  round  fila- 
ment to  the  naked  eye,  has  under  the  microscope  a  very  different 
appearance.  The  ripe  cotton  fiber,  when  seen  under  the  micro- 
scope, has  the  appearance  of  a  collapsed,  twisted  tube  with  corded 
and  slightly  corrugated  edges,  and  somewhat  resembles  an  elon- 
gated corkscrew.  These  convolutions  or  twists  of  the  fiber  are 
peculiar  to  cotton,  and  are  not  present  to  any  extent  in  any  other 
fiber,  either  .vegetable  or  animal.  To  these  convolutions  is  due 
to  a  great  extent  the  value  of  the  cotton  fiber.  The  twisting 
which  the  fibers  receive  in  the  process  of  spinning  interlocks  these 
convolutions  of  the  fiber  and  gives  great  strength  to  the  yarn.  It 
also  overcomes  any  tendency  of  the  fibers  to  slip  over  each  other 
when  tension  is  applied.  Fig.  6  shows  the  appearance  of  various 
fibers  under  the  microscope.  A  and  B  represent  the  appearance 
of  fibers  of  wool,  showing  the  scales  which  in  spinning  are  inter- 
locked, which  gives  considerable  strength  to  woolen  yarn.  C 
represents  the  appearance  of  a  ripe  cotton  fiber,  and  shows  the 
twists  or  convolutions  and  the  corded  edges.  D  represents  a  fiber 
of  silk  and  E  of  camel's-hair.  These  twists  of  the  cotton  fiber  are 
not  as  numerous  in  half-ripe  fiber,  and  are  almost  lacking  in  the 
unripe  or  immature  fiber.  Owing  to  this  fact  the  unripe  fiber  is 


16 


COTTON  FIBER. 


of  little  value  to  manufacturers.  It  is  also  lacking  in  strength, 
and  is  slow  to  take  dye,  as  its  structure  is  less  porous.  Unripe 
fiber  can  be  detected  by  the  eye  on  account  of  its  glossy,  trans- 
parent appearance. 

Fig.  7  shows  the  appearance  of  several  cotton  fibers  at  dif- 
ferent stages  of  maturity.  A  and  B  are  the  unripe  fibers,  C  the 
half-ripe,  and  D  and  E  are  the  fully  ripe  or  matu.re  fibers. 

Fig.  8  represents  cross- 
sections  of  the  same.  A  rep- 
resents the  unripe  fibers,  B 
the  half  ripe  and  C  the  fully 
ripe. 

The  microscope  can 
therefore  be  depended    upon  • 
to  identify  the    cotton  fiber. 
Other  .tests,  however,  can   be 

v\    r^^^ 

made.  I  The  burning  of  the 
fiber  will  distinguish  between 
cotton  and  wool  or  silk.  The 
cotton  fiber  burns  with  a 
flash,  leaving  a  white  ash, 
while  wool  or  silk  emit  a 
disagreeable  odor,  leaving  a 
small  lump  of  carbonized  mat- 
Fig.  G.  (^  ter  on  the  end  of  the  fiber.! 


|A  strong  solution  of  caustic 
soda  will  entirely  destroy  wool  or  silk;  the  effect  of  wetting  a 
cotton  fiber  with  caustic  soda  is  to  distend  the  fiber  and  almost 
eradicate  the  convolutions,  leaving  it  stronger  than  before.!  It  also 
gives  it  the  appearance  of  a  round  glass  rod  which  has  Ueen  bent 
in  every  direction. 

The  value  of  cotton  depends  principally  on  the  lengtli, 
strength  and  fineness  of  the  staple.  The  diameter  of  cotton  fibers 
vary  from  %-§-$-$  inch  to  y^Q-  inch,  and  length  from  -*-  inch  to  2| 
inches.  De  Bowman  estimates  that  there  are  140,000,000  fibers 
to  t\\e  pound.  The  number  of  convolutions  or  twists  in  the  cotton 
fiber  is  greater  and  more  regular  in  some  varieties  than  in  others. 
In  Sea  Island  cotton  the  convolutions  are  very  regular,  and  have 


24 


COTTON  FIBE1I. 


17 


been  estimated  as  between  three  and  four  hundred  per  inch  of 
fiber  length.  Poorer  varieties  of  cotton  have  less  frequent  convo- 
lutions, as  low  in  some  cases  as  one  hundred  per  inch  of  length. 

As  the  authorities  on 
the  lengths  of  cotton  fiber 
do  not  entirely  agree  in  all 
cases,  it  will  be  safe  in 
treating  this  subject  to  give 
the  average  length,  diam- 
eter and  general  character- 
istics of  a  few  of  the  more 
important  commercial  vari- 
eties in  the  order  of  their 
length  of  staple.  The 
numbers  and  kinds  of  yarn 
for  which  the  different 
lengths  and  varieties  of 
cotton  are  used  will  be 

found  to  vary  widely  in  different  locations  and  under  different 
conditions.  These  numbers  are  for  warp  yarns,  and,  in  many 
cases,  the  cotton  can  be  spun  into  somewhat  finer  numbers  for 
filling  yarn,  as  the  required  strength  for  filling  is  not  as  great. 

Sea  Island  is  by  far  the 
finest  cotton  grown,  and  there- 
fore careful  attention  is  given  to 
the  picking,  ginning  arid  baling. 
The  best  of  Sea  Island  cotton  is 
grown  on  Edisto,  Port  Royal 
and  St.  Helena  Islands  off  the 
coast  of  South  Carolina,  and  the 
Cumberland  Islands  off  the  coast 
°f  Georgia.  Some  Sea  Island 
cotton  is  grown  on  the  low  por- 
tion of  the  coasts  of  these  States.  It  has  a  long,  glossy,  silky 
liber,  with  regular  convolutions,  and  contains  much  unripe  fiber  ; 
it  is  usually  combed.  The  black  seed  free  from  hairy  covering 
makes  the  ginning  comparatively  easy.  It  is  ginned  on  roller 
gins  only.  It  is  used  largely  for  the  manufacture  of  sewing  thread 


25 


18  COTTON   FIBER, 


and  for  the  finest  of  lawns  and  muslins.  It  is  regularly  spun 
from  150  to  300,  and  commercially  as  fine  as  600 ;  has  been  spun 
experimentally  as  high  as  2,000. 

The  territory  adapted  to  the  raising  of  this  crop  is  very 
limited,  which  accounts  for  the  comparatively  small  amount 
grown.  The  Sea  Island  crop  of  1900  amounted  to  88,294  bales, 
a  decrease  of  8,985  bales  from  the  crop  of  the  preceding  year. 
The  principal  markets  for  Sea  Island  cotton  are  Charleston,  S.  C., 
and  Savannah,  Ga.  The  average  price  obtained  for  1900  was  for 
South  Carolina,  $.256  ;  Georgia,  $.20,  and  Florida,  $.19  per  pound. 

Egyptian  Cotton.  The  brown  Egyptian  cotton  is  used  to  a 
considerable  extent  in  this  country.  It  is  a  long,  silky,  clean 
cotton,  from  a  dark  to  light  golden  color.  It  contains  a  large  per 
cent  of  short  fibers  and  is  generally  combed.  The  color  of  this 
cotton  is  due  to  the  presence  of  a  natural  substance  known  as 
"  Endochrome."  Length  of  fiber  from  1^  to  1*  inches,  a  large 
proportion  running  about  1  ^  inches.  This  cotton  ranks  next  to 
Sea  Island,  and  larger  amounts  are  being  imported  each  year.  It 
is  largely  used  for  the  better  grades  of  underwear  and  hosiery,  and 
to  some  extent  for  thread  for  lace  work.  The  yarn  made  from 
this  cotton  is  one  of  the  best  for  mercerizing,  as  the  fiber  is  natu- 
rally smooth.  It  is  grow.n  in  the  valley  of  the  Nile  in  Egypt. 
The  principal  market  is  Alexandria.  The  imports  of  this  cotton 
into  the  United  States  were  about  sixty  thousand  bales  in  1895. 

G-ulf  cotton,  or  New  Orleans  as  it  is  known  in  England,  is 
the  best  of  strictly  American  cotton,  for  Sea  Island  cotton, 
although  grown  in  this  country,  is  not  generally  ranked  as  an 
American  cotton,  but  occupies  a  class  by  itself.  Gulf  cotton 
properly  includes  many  varieties,  known  as  Peeler-Benders,  Red 
River,  Allan  seed,  etc.  These  last  varieties  of  Gulf  cotton  some- 
what resemble  the  poorer  Sea  Island  grades.  Peeler  is  one  of  the 
best  of  the  Gulf  cottons  that  are  raised  in  sufficient  amounts  to  be 
of  commercial  value.  It  is  long,  silky,  and  of  bluish  while  color, 
generally  combed,  and  a  fine  working  cotton,  somewhat  similar  in 
that  respect  to  Egyptian.  Gulf  cotton,  as  a  rule,  ranges  from  1| 
to  1|  inches  in  length  of  staple,  though  some  of  the  better  varie- 
ties are  longer.  Gulf  cotton  is  used  for  warps  from  30  to  50,  and 
for  filling  from  50  to  70. 


COTTON  FIBER.  19 


Upland  Cotton.  This  is  the  most  common  and  useful  cotton 
grown  and  constitutes  the  greater  part  of  the  world's  crop.  The 
fibers  are  very  uniform  in  length ;  color  generally  good,  and  is  a 
strong,  reliable  cotton.  This  cotton  is  grown  in  Georgia,  North 
and  South  Carolina,  Alabama  and  Virginia.  There  are  many 
varieties  of  Upland  cotton,  taking  their  names  from  States  or 
localities  where  they  are  grown.  Upland  cotton  is  used  for  warp 
yarns  up  to  38  and  for  filling  to  48.  Upland  staple  ranges  from  J 
inch  to  1^  inches  in  length,  a  large  portion  reaching  li  inches. 
The  average  price  for  middling  Upland  1|  inches  for  the  year 
1900  was  $.0896+  per  pound. 

Texas  cotton  is  somewhat  similar  to  Upland,  but  slightly 
shorter  and  more  harsh,  though  of  very  good  quality.  The  char- 
acter of  the  crop  varies  largely  from  year  to  year.  During  a  dry 
year  it  is  likely  to  be  unusually  harsh,  short  and  brittle,  and  is 
often  "tinged"  or  off  color.  The  production  of  Texas  cotton 
is  increasing,  and  more  care  is  constantly  being  given  to  its  culti- 
vation and  preparation.  Texas  cotton  is  especially  suited  for  warp 
varns  from  24  to  36.  Length  of  staple  from  I  inch  to  li  inches. 

«/  o  -L  o  5 

This  is  the  best  of  American  cottons  for  use  in  mixing  with  wool. 
Principal  market,  Galveston. 

Peruvian  cotton  is  comparatively  little  used  in  this  country. 
It  is  very  harsh  and  wiry.  Red  Peruvian  is  a  deep  reddish  brown 
in  color,  the  white  Peruvian  being  of  a  cream  tint.  The  small 
amount  that  is  consumed  is  used  largely  for  woolen  adulteration, 
as  the  fiber  more  nearly  resembles  wool  in  feeling  than  that  of  any 
cotton  grown. 

GRADING. 

The  grading  of  cotton  is  entirely  a  matter  of  judgment  and 
experience,  and  no  definite  rules  can  be  given.  The  cotton 
grader  is  one  who  from  long  experience  and  numberless  compar- 
isons has  educated  his  eye  and  hand  to  distinguish  between  the 
grades  and  recognize  the  differences  in  quality  which  would  add 
to  or  detract  from  the  market  value  of  the  cotton.  Cotton  is 
universally  sold  (except  in  some  districts  of  the  South)  by 
samples  and  not  by  inspection  of  the  bales.  It  is  also  graded  in 
the  same  way. 


27 


20  COTTON   FIBER. 


In  grading  cotton  the  principal  points  to  be  taken  into  con- 
sideration are  :  (First,  the  strength  and  evenness  in  length  of  the 
staple;  second,  its  freedom  from  "neps,"  "leaf-motes,"  sand  and 
other  foreign  substances,  and  third,  the  color  or  evenness  of  color.X 

The  strength  of  the  staple  is  important  in' determining  the^ 
grade,  as  that  is  one  of  "the  principal  points  of  value  of  the  stock. 

The  evenness  in  length  is  also  very  important,  for  a  cotton 
that  is  of  good  average  length  and  that  is  clean  may  contain  a 
large  proportion  of  very  short  fibers,  in  which  case  the  strength  of 
the  yarn  is  considerably  diminished. 

The  freedom  of  the  cotton  from  foreign  impurities  is  one  of  the 
principal  factors  in  determining  the  grade,  for  not  only  must  the 
impurities  be  considered  as  waste,  but  their  removal,  if  present  in 
considerable  amounts,  adds  greatly  to  the  cost  of  the  manufac- 
tured product.  The  presence  of  foreign  matter  is  largely  due  to 
carelessness  in  picking  and  ginning.  A  certain  amount  of  leaf, 
boll,  husk,  seed  and  sand  is  present  in  any  cotton,  and  if  this 
amount  is  considerable  the  grade  of  the  cotton  is  lowered  accord- 
ingly. The  presence  of  "  neps,"  "  motes  "  and  immature  fiber* 
also  detracts  from  the  value  of  the  cotton  and  influences  the 
grading. 

"Neps"  are  tangled  fibers  or  minute  panglens  of  several 
fibers.  Their  appearance  is  that  of  a  small  white  "fleck,"  hardly 
larger  than  a  grain  of  sand,  which,  if  examined  under  a  micro- 
scope, will  be  found  to  consist  of  a  ball  of  fibers  so  rolled  and 
knotted  together  as  to  make  their  separation  an  impossibility. 
"  Neps "  are  caused  by  improper  ginning  when  found  in  cotton 
samples,  though  they  are  often  produced  in  the  manufacturing 
process  in  the  picker  and  card. 

"  Motes  "  are  minute  pieces  of  seed,  or  immature  seeds,  and 
are  hard  to  remove  in  the  process  of  manufacture,  especially  if 
they  are  "bearded  motes,"  or  small  pieces  of  seed  to  which 
adheres  the  downy  seed  covering. 

Another  condition  to  be  taken  into  consideration  in  the  grad- 
ing is  the  color  of  the  cotton.  A  pure  white  cotton  is  desirable, 
and  it  is  important  that  the  color  or  tint  shall  be  uniform  through- 
out a  lot  of  cotton.  This  is  especially  true  if  the  cotton  is  to  be 
used  for  filling  yarn,  as  in  this  case  it  will  show  largely  on  the 


28 


COTTON   FIBER. 


21 


face  of  the  goods,  for  it  is  used  without  any  dressing  or  sizing, 
which  might  effect  or  modify  its  color.  Should  a  sample  of 
cotton  show  portions  that  were  .staine.l,  or  off  color,  the  grading 
would  suffer  accordingly,  and  in  some  cases  the  cotton  would  be 
classed  as  ;t  tinged." 

Cotton  is  usually  graded  according  to  a  standard  agreed  upon 
in  the  leading  cotton  markets.  The  American  system  consists  of 
seven  full  grades,  the  best  of  which  is  "  fair."  They  are  : 

Fail- 
Middling  Fair 
Good  Middling 
Middling 
Low  Middling 
Good  Ordinary 
Ordinary 

These  grades  are  subdivided  into  quarter,  half  and  three- 
quarter  grades,  which  express  the  minutest  difference  in  condition 
and  cleanliness.  In  the  market  the  quarter  and  three-quarter 
grades  are  seldom  recognized.  The  quarter,  half  and  three- 
quarter  grades  are  expressed  by  the  prefixes,  "barely,"  "strict" 
and  "  fully." 

The  following  table  presents  the  gradings  of  American  cotton 
in  as  comprehensive  a  manner  as  possible : 


QUARTER  GRADE. 

Barely  Fair 
Barely  Middling  Fair 
Barely  Good  Middling 
Barely  Middling 
Barely  Low  Middling 
Barely  Good  Ordinary 


HALF  GRADE. 

Strict  Middling  Fair 
Strict  Good  Middling 
Strict  Middling 
Strict  Low  Middling 
Strict  Good  Ordinary 
Strict  Ordinary 


THREE-QUARTER  GRADE. 

Fully  Middling  Fail- 
Fully  Good  Middling 
Fully  Middling 
Fully  Low  Middling 
Fully  Good  Ordinary 
Fully  Ordinary 


FULL    GRADE. 

Middling  Fair 
Good  Middling 
Middling 
Low  Middling 
Good  Ordinary 
Ordinary 
Egyptian  cotton  is  commonly  divided  into  four  grades.   They 

Good 

Fully  Good  Fail- 
Good  Fail- 
Fair 


29 


2-2  COTTON   FIBER. 


Brazilian  and  Peruvian  cotton  usually  have  these  grades : 
Good  Fail- 
Fair 

Middling  Fail- 
It  will  be  seen  from  the  foregoing  that  grade  really  means 
the  appearance  of  the  cotton,  particularly  as  to  cleanliness. 

In  buying  cotton  for  mill,  use  there  are  several  important 
points  to  be  considered.  First,  the  length  of  the  staple.  Second, 
the  strength  of  the  staple.  Third,  the  uniformity  in  length. 

These  facts  are  determined  by  a  process  known  as  "  pulling 
cotton."  This  process  consists  of  grasping  a  small  amount  of 
cotton' with  both  hands  and  pulling  it  apart.  One-half  is  then 
thrown  away,  and  the  ends  of  the  fibers  projecting  from  the  half 
which  is  retained  are  grasped  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  right  hand  with  the  thumb  held  uppermost  and  drawn  from 
the  mass  in  the  left  hand,  which  is  discarded.  We  now  have  a 
tuft  of  cotton  held  at  one  end  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  right  hand.  With  the  left  hand  this  tuft  of  fibers  is 
straightened  out,  the  short  fibers  removed  and  the  ends  grasped 
with  the  left  hand.  The  right  hand,  or  the  forefinger  and  thumb 
of  the  right  hand,  now  straighten  out  the  projecting  fibers  and  re- 
move the  shorter  fibars,  leaving  a  little  tuft  of  cotton,  the  fibers 
of  which  are  particularly  uniform  in  length  and  parallel.  This  tuft 
of  straightened  fibers  can  be  measured  to  determine  the  length  of 
staple.  They  can  be  broken  by  firmly  grasping  the  ends  with  the 
forefinger  and  thumb  of  both  hands,  and  the  power  required  to 
break  gives  the  expert  an  idea  of  the  strength  of  the  staple.  The 
amount  of  short  fiber  removed  in  the  pulling  process  determines 
approximately  the  proportion  of  short  fiber  in  the  sample. 

Something  of  harshness,  strength  and  spinning  qualities  of 
cotton  is  sometimes  determined  by  noting  the  sound  produced 
by  pulling  apart  a  bunch  of  cotton  held  close  to  the  ear. 

After  the  length,  strength  and  evenness  have  been  determined, 
the  next  points  are :  The  amount  of  sand  and  foreign  matter  con- 
tained ;  the  proportion  of  unripe  fibers ;  the  color  and  evenness 
of  color,  and  the  amount  of  moisture. 

In  examining  a  cotton  sample  to  determine  the  amount  of 
impurity  contained,  it  is  fair  to  assume  that  a  proportion  of  the 
sand  and  dirt  has  been  shaken  out  in  the  handling  which  a  cotton 


30 


COTTON   FIBER.  23 


sample  receives,  and  on  that  account  the  sample  will  be  slightly 
cleaner  than  the  original  stojk.  The  amount  of  dirt  in  the  cotton 
must,  however,  be  determined  by  the  appearance  of  the  sample 
and  the  amount  of  sand  and  dirt  on  the  paper  in  which  the 
sample  is  wrapped. 

Unripe  fibers  can  be  detected  by  the  eye  on  account  of  their 
semitransparent,  glossy  appearance.  "  Neps  "  and  "  motes  "  are 
also  evident  on  close  examination  and  inspection  of  the  sample. 

The  color  of  a  cotton  sample  can  best  be  determined  by  com- 
parison, and  for  such  comparisons  a  north  light  is  desirable.  A 
sample  of  cotton  may  seem  of  good  color  when  examined  alone, 
and  show  a  very  decided  tint  when  compared  with  other  cotton 
or  with  an  object  which  is  a  clean  white.  The  presence  of  blue 
paper  near  a  cotton  sample  has  a  tendency  to  neutralize  the  yellow 
tint  and  make  cotton  appear  a  pure  white. 

"  Tinged  "  cotton  is  cotton  which  is  stained  in  spots  from  the 
action  of  the  juices  from  the  crushed  seed  or  plant,  or  from 
the  presence  of  coloring  matter  from  the  soil.  Tinged  cotton 
should  be  avoided,  especially  for  the  manufacture  of  white  goods. 

The  amount  of  moisture  contained  in  the  cotton  cannot  be 
determined  from  the  sample  unless  the  sample  be  freshly  drawn, 
which  is  seldom  the  case.  The  odor  of  mildew,  which  is  easily 
detected,  is  an  indication  of  excess  of  moisture  in  the  bale  from 
which  the  sample  is  drawn. 

In  examining  a  bale  of  cotton  at  the  mill,  and  in  comparing  it 
with  the  sample  by  which  the  cotton  was  sold,  which  is  commonly 
done,  the  amount  of  moisture  contained,  if  excessive,  is  easily 
determined  by  the  feeling  of  the  cotton,  or  by  holdii.j  a  handful 
against  the  face.  A  more  correct  method  of  determining  the 

amount  of  moisture  is  by  the  "  furnace  test." 

nj 
n  this  case  a  handful  of  cotton  from  the  bale  is  very  care- 
fully weighed  on  delicate  scales  and  the  weight  noted.  The  cotton 
is  then  subjected  to  the  heat  of  a  gas  oven  for  several  hours,  at  a 
temperature  from  170°  to  180°,  and  weighed  again.  This  gives 
the  entire  amount  of  moisture  in  the  cotton.  The  cotton  is  now 
allowed  to  remain  for  some  time  in  the  air,  under  normal  condi- 
tions, until  it  has  absorbed  a  reasonable  amount  of  moisture  from 
the  air,  after  which  it  is  again  weighed.  The  difference  between 


31 


24  COTTON    FIBER. 


the  first  and  last  weighing  gives  the  excess  of  moisture  in  the 
cotton,  which  is  often  from  two  to  four  per  cent.  A  certain 
amount  of  moisture  is  desirable  in  working  the  stock,  but  manu- 
facturers do  not  care  to  pay  for  large  amounts  of  water/  (From 
five  to  eight  per  cent  of  moisture  is  normal.)  X 

One  very  important  condition  to  be  kept  in  mind,  in  selecting 
cotton  for  mill  use,  is  to  see  that  the  samples  are  "even  running" 
as  to  length  of  staple.  In  other  words,  to  see  that  one  or  more 
bales  of  longer  or  shorter  staple  have  not  been  mixed  in  with  the 
cotton.  Long-staple  cotton  is  more  valuable  than- short  staple,  all 
other  conditions  being  equal,  but  the  presence  of  long  staple  with 
the  short  causes  an  endless  amount  of  trouble  and  annoyance  in  the 
mill,  as  will  be  explained  later,  and  on  that  account  great  care  is 
exercised  to"  be  sure  that  the  cotton  in  the  several  bales  of  one  lot 
is  of  about  the  same  length  of  staple. 

The  purchase  of  cotton  by  the  mills  of  New  England  is  gen- 
erally made  from  November  to  February  inclusive,  at  which  time 
it  is  not  unusual  for  a  year's  supply  to  be  secured. 

Cotton  is  generally  sold  to  Northern  manufacturers  on  cash 
terms  and  delivered  at  New  York,  Full  River  or  Boston.  The 
cotton  is  invoiced  at  gross  weight,  no  allowance  being  made  for 
bagging  and  ties.  Cotton  shipped  to  England,  or  "  The  Conti- 
nent," is  invoiced  at  net  weight,  as  it  is  the  custom  to  purchase  it 
in  that  manner  in  those  countries. 

In  invoicing  cotton,  or  in  purchasing  cotton,  the  variety, 
grade  and  length  of  staple  are  mentioned  as  well  as  the  number 
of  bales  and  the  weight  of  each.  An  order  for-cotton  might  read 
as  follows:  One  hundred  bales,  Georgia  Midland,  Strict  Middling, 
inch  and  o'ne-eighth,  or 

500  Bales  — Texas  —  Low  Middling  —  One  inch. 

OPENING  AND  MIXING. 

The  opening  of  the  American  bale  simply  consists  in  cutting 
the  ties,  removing  the  bagging  and  ties,  and  breaking  up  and 
shaking  out  the  condensed  mass  of  cotton.  When  the  bale  is 
opened,  the  contents  will  be  found  in  sheets,  or  layers,  of  condensed 
cotton,  due  to  the  pressure  exerted  in  baling.  This  cotton  is  hard 
and  compact,  and  before  use  must  be  allowed  to  expand.  One 


COTTOX   FIBER 


25 


advantage  claimed  for  the  round  lap  bale  is  that  several  bales  can 
be  unrolled  and  fed  to  the  opener,  or  breaker  picker,  at  the  same 
time.  In  this  case,  however,  the  mixing  is  not  as  extensive  as  it 
is  when  the  cotton  is  taken  from  a  pile  consisting  of  many  bales. 
There  is  a  machine  in  general  use  in  England,  but  compara- 
tively little  known  in  this  country,  called  the  Bale  Breaker.  This 
machine  takes  the  condensed  sheets  of  cotton  as  they  come  from 
the  bale  aiid  tears  them  apart,  delivering  them  in  smaller  pieces, 
and  allowing  the  cotton  to  open  or  expand  in  the  process.  The 
bale  breaker,  a  common  type  of  which  is  shown  in  Fig.  9,  con- 
sists of  an  endless  apron,  or  lattice,  on  which  the  sheets  of  cotton 


Fig.  9. 

from  the  bale  are  placed.  Directly  in  front  of  this  traveling  lat- 
tice is  a  revolving  feed  roll  which  grasps  the  cotton  from  the 
lattice  and  passes  it  over  the  pedals  to  the  first  pair  of^fluted  and 
toothed  rolls.  There  are  usually  three  pairs  of  these  rolls  running 
at  increased  speeds.  As  the  cotton  passes  from  the  back  to  the 
front  of  the  machine  the  mass  is  pulled  apart. 

These  rolls  are  driven  by  spur  gearing  and  are  posjtive  in 
their  action ;  the  top  roll  in  each  case  being  weighted  by  stiff  coil 
springs.  7\The  surface  speed  of  the  middle  pair  of  rolls  is  about 
three  times  that  of  the  back  roll,  and  of  the  front  roll  about  seven 
times  that  of  the  middle  roll,  which  gives  the  surface  speed  of  the 
front  roll  about  twenty-one  times  that  of  the  back  rollfor  a  draft 


33 


26 


COTTON   FIBER. 


of  twenty-one.)  The  draft  of  the  bale  breaker,  or  the  relation  of 
the  surface  speeds  of  the  front  and  back  roll,  varies  according  to 
conditions,  but  is  commonly  twenty  to  one  to  thirty  to  one,  or  a 
draft  of  from  twenty  to  thirty. 

Another  form  of  bale  breaker  is  shown  in  Fig.  10.  In  this 
case  a  swiftly  revolving  beater  with  projecting  arms  is  employed 
to  still  further  open  the  cotton  and  remove  a  portion  of  the 
heavier  impurities. 

The  first  process  in  the  cotton  mill  after  the  bales  have  been 
opened  is  the  mixing.  This  is,  or  should  be,  a  part  of  the  process 
of  every  mill,  but  in  some  cases  its  importance  is  underestimited. 
By  mixing  we  do  not  necessarily  mean  only  the  mixing  of  differ- 


Fig.  10. 

ent  grades  or  varieties  of  cotton,  but  the  mixing  of  different  bales 
of  the  same  grade  and  variety.  This  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
produce  the  best  results,  for  even  when  the  different  bales  are  of 
the  same  variety,  the  same  grade,  and  grown  in  the  same  locality, 
and  supposed  to  be  of  the  same  length  of  staple,  there  are  likely 
to  be  found  slight  differences  in  length,  color  and  condition. 

There  is  also  a  great  difference  in  the  amount  of  moisture  in 
different  bales.  Some  are  too  dry  to  work  well  and  some  too 
moist,  and  by  mixing,  the  dry  absorbs  some  of  the  moisture  from 
the  damp  bales,  and  a  better  average  condition  is  secured.  The 
mixing  also  allows  the  "opening  up"  or  expanding  of  the  con- 
densed cotton,  leaving  it  in  better  shape  for  the  action  of  the 
beaters  in  the  picking  process.  The  common  method  of  mixing 
in  this  country  is  to  provide  extensive  floor  space  back  of  the 


34. 


COTTON   FIBER.  27 


feeders.  The  larger  the  better  within  reasonable  limits.  When 
the  bales  are  opened,  a  sheet  or  armful  of  cotton  is  taken  from  one 
or  more  bales  and  scattered  evenly  over  the  floor.  This  is  re- 
peated with  cotton  from  other  bales  until  a  pile  or  stack  is  formed 
containing  enough  cotton  for  several  days'  run.  This  pile  of 
cotton  is  composed  of  many  thin  layers,  each  layer  representing  a 
bale,  more  or  less.  When  this  cotton  is  fed  to  the  machines  it  is 
taken  in  as  nearly  vertical  sections  as  possible,  so  that  each  armful 
will  contain  parts  of  several  bales.  In  this  way  a  very  thorough 
mixing  is  secured,  giving  a  uniform  condition  of  cotton  from  start 
to  finish.  Large  mixings  are  to  be  preferred  to  small  ones ;  the 
size  being  limited  in  many  instances  only  by  the  floor  space 
available. 

Many  modifications  of  this  process  are  to  be  found  in  dif- 
ferent cotton  mills.  In  some  cases  the  bales  are  opened  in  the 
storehouse,  and  the  cotton  from  several  bales  fed  into  the  hopper 
of  a  distributor.  From  here  the  cotton  is  drawn  by  an  air  curmit 
through  sheet  metal  pipes  and  delivered  on  the  floor  of  the  picker- 
room  back  of  the  feeders. 

In  some  cases  the  mixing  is  done  in  large  bins  which  have 
movable  floors,  so  that,  as  the  cotton  is  used,  the  stack  can  be 
moved  forward  to  be  at  all  times  within  convenient  distance  of  the 
feeders,  and  mixing  can  be  carried  on  at  the  back  of  the  bin.  In 
this  case  the  cotton  from  several  bales  is  thrown  into  the  bin 
through  a  hole  in  the  floor  above.  With  this  arrangement  the 
mixing  is  a  continuous  operation  and  can  be  performed  at  the 
back  of  the  bin  while  the  cotton  from  the  front  is  being  used. 

In  English  spinning  mills  there  are  in  many  instances  elal>- 
orate  preparations  for  very  large  mixings ;  in  some  cases  sufficient 
amounts  to  last  during  a  month's  run.  This  is  necessary  on  ac- 
count of  using  so  many  different  grades  and  varieties  of  cotton,  in 
which  case  the  mixing  of  several  kinds  at  a  different  price,  each  to 
produce  a  certain  result  at  a  certain  cost,  becomes  a  fine  art. 

Variation  in  color  or  tint  in  the  yarn  produced  is  less  liable 
to  occur  where  large  mixings  are  used. 

When  different  cottons  should  be  mixed  in  exact  proportions, 
or  when  a  combination  of  colored  and  white  cotton  is  used  to  pro- 
duce a  certain  tint,  the  mixing  can  be  done  more  correctly  at  the 


28  COTTON   FIBE1I. 


intermediate  or  finisher  picker.  This  will  be  explained  more 
fully  later.  If  mixed  in  the  stack,  the  proportion  of  each  would 
not  run  evenly  from  start  to  finish,  therefore  producing  yarn 
which  would  vary  slightly  in  color  from  time  to  time. 


36 


u 

S5     C 


as  a 

w  <j 

§  .e 

.       be 

ou    s 

O    o 
Q    "5 

a: 

a« 

Q    cs 


COTTON  SPINNING. 

PART   I. 


OPENING   AND   PICKING. 

When  upland  cotton  has  been  ginned,  it  is  made  ready  for 
transportation  into  loosely  packed  bales,  in  which  form  it  is  often 
used  in  nearby  cotton  mills,  but  for  shipment  to  any  distance,  by 
railroad  or  steamship,  the  bales  are  collected  at  some  central  point 
and  compressed  by  heavy  presses  and  made  less  bulky,  saving 
much  space. 

The  dimensions  of  the  standard  bale  are  54  inches  length  by 
27  inches  width,  the  thickness  depending  upon  the  pressure  to 
which  it  has  been  subjected,  and  is  intended  to  weigh  500 
pounds.  But,  as  a  fact,  the  bales  vary  from  52  to  72  inches  in 
length,  from  24  to  30  inches  in  width,  18  to  24  inches  in  thick- 
ness, and  weigh  from  400  to  600  pounds. 

They  are  covered  with  bagging  and  bound  with  hoop-iron 
bands,  or  ties,  fastened  together  by  iron  buckles.  The  bagging 
is  of  such  coarsely  woven  stuff  that  it  is  very  easily  torn  and 
offers  but  scant  protection  against  dust,  rain  and  fire,  and,  as  the 
bales  are  often  allowed  to  stay  in  a  cotton  yard  some  time  before 
shipment,  the  cotton  on  the  surface  becomes  very  much  dam- 
aged. It  is  certain  that  this  method  of  baling  and  handling  can- 
not add  to  the  value  of  the  cotton,  and  custom  alone  seems  respon- 
sible for  it. 

Another  form  in  which  cotton  is  packed  is  the  "  round  bale." 
These,  as  the  name  implies,  are  cylindrical,  and  are  of  two 
lengths,  35  and  48  inches ;  and  22  and  25  inches,  respectively,  in  • 
diameter.  They  are  made  by  feeding  the  cotton  to  a  revolving 
core,  or  arbor,  which  is  held  in  position  between  two  iron  rolls  by 
a  heavy  rubber  belt.  One  of  the  rolls  is  stationary  and  the 
other,  which  is  kept  firmly  held  against  the  bale  by  hydraulic 
pressure,  recedes  as  the  bale  increases  in  size.  The  friction  of  the 
belt  and  rolls  causes  the  bat  to  be  wound  into  a  hard,  firm  roll, 


39 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


which  weighs  about  35  pounds  to  the  cubic  foot.  When  the  bale 
has  reached  the  full  diameter,  and  before  it  is  removed  from  the 
press,  it  is  wound  with  one  turn  of  cotton  cloth,  which  is  sewed  on. 

Cotton  that  is  grown  in  different  localities  varies  in  quality, 
and  as  bales  from  widely  separated  districts  are  likely  to  be  used 
in  the  same  mill,  careful  selection  i*  necessary.  Wide  experience 
and  good  judgment  are  required  to  get  the  be.st  results. 

To  obtain  as  nearly  as  possible  uniformity  in  quality,  length 
of  staple,  and,  for  some  varieties  of  work,  color,  and  the  cotton  is 
mixed ;  that  is,  the  bales  to  be  used  are  placed  on  edge,  the  ties 
and  bagging  removed.  "They  are  then  turned  on  their  sides,  and 
a  sheet  of  cotton  taken  from  each  in  turn,  by  hand,  and  thrown 
into  the  cotton  bin,  ready  for  the  opener.  By  this  means  an 
average  is  obtained. 

Cotton  which  is  to  be  spun  into  fine  yarn  must  be  long 
staple,  uniform  in  color,  and  clean,  while  that  to  be  used  for 
goods  which  are  to  be  bleached  may  require  long  staple,  while 
color  and  cleanliness  are  not  so  essential,  but  no  rule  for  mixing 
the  different  varieties  and  grades  can  be  followed.  Some  mills 
use  lower  grades  of  stock  than  others  for  the  same  class  of  work 
with  apparently  equally  good  results. 

In  many  of  the  smaller  mills  it  is  the  custom  to  mix  enough 
cotton  to  last  three  or  four  days,  or  even  longer,  if  space  in  the 
opening  and  mixing  room  will  permit,  and,  by  allowing  it  to  air 
for  several  days,  an  equalization  of  the  moisture  in  the  whole 
mass  takes  place.  In  large  mills,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  usually  the 
practice,  because  of  the  amount  consumed,  to  take  the  cotton  from 
the  bales  and  throw  it  directly  into  the  feeder  of  the  opener.  It 
is  not  necessary  to  air  the  cotton,  as  it  is  bought  in  large  quantities 
and  stored  in  cotton  houses,  where  it  of  ton  remains  for  a  long 
period  and  is  therefore  partially  dried. 

Opening  and  picking,  which  is  the  first  mechanical  process 
the  cotton  undergoes,  is,  briefly  stated,  the  removal  of  as  much 
foreign  substance  as  possible  with  the  least  injury  to  the  fibers. 
The  foreign  substances  found  are  particles  of  sand,  which  have 
been  blown  about  and  have  become  lodged  in  the  bolls  ;  dirt, 
which,  during  a  heavy  rain  has  spattered  upon  the  bolls,  which 
grow  low  upon  the  stalks;  particles  of  dried  leaves  and  stalks, 


40 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


gathered  in  picking,  and  pieces  of  «eed  and  husks,  broken  in 
ginning. 

The  various  styles  of  machines  used  in  picking  differ  but 
slightly  in  principle  and  design,  eacli  having  S'inie  features  pecul- 
iar to  each  particular  make.  They  are  arranged,  generally,  in 
sets  of  t\vo,  three  or  four,  the  number  of  sets  depending  upon  the 
production  required  and  the  number  of  machines  in  each  set; 
upon  the  quality  and  condition  of  the  stock  being  worked,  very 
dirty  cotton  requiring,  of  course,  more  picking  and  cleaning. 

There  are  four  systems  into  which  the  operation  of  picking 
may  be  divided : 

1.  That  in  ivhich  part  of  the  machinery  is  on  one  floor  and 
part  on  another. 

2.  That  in  which  all  of  the  machinery  is  on  one  floor  and  no 
cleaning  trunk  is  used. 

3.  That  in  which  all  of  the  machinery  is  on  one  floor  and  a 
cleaning  trunk  is  used. 

4-  That  in  which  the  bales  are  opened  in  an  adjoining  build- 
ing or  room  and  the  cotton  is  "  blown  "  into  the  picker  room. 

The  arrangement  of  the  several  machines  necessary  in  each 
system  depends  upon  the  location  of  the  carding  machinery;  the 
aim  being  to  have  the  laps  delivered  from  the  finisher  picker  upon 
the  same  floor,  and  as  near  the  cards  as  possible,  in  order  to  save 
time  and  expense  in  carrying  them  about  and  to  avoid  any  unnec- 
essary handling  of  the  cotton.  This,  of  course,  cannot  be  done 
always,  especially  in  some  of  the  old  mills,  but  in  planning  a  new 
one  this  should  be  borne  in  mind. 

SYSTEM   ONE. 

Fig.  1  is  a  plan  of  the  opening  room  of  a  modern  cotton  mill 
equipped  with  two  sets  of  picking  machinery,  arranged  on  the 
three-process  system,  a  style  in  use  in  many  mills  at  the  present 
time.  Fig.  2  is  a  plan  of  the  second  floor  of  the  same  mill,  and 
Fig.  3  is  a  sectional  elevation. 

The  machines  on  the  first  floor  are  an  automatic  feeder,  A, 
connected  to  an  opener,  B ;  and  on  the  second  floor  are  a  single 
beater  breaker  picker,  D,  with  a  condenser  and  gauge-box,  a  single 
beater  intermediate  picker,  E,  and  a  single  beater  finisher  picker, 


41 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


F.     A  cleaning  trunk,  C,  connects  the  opener  on  the  first  floor 
with  the  breaker  on  the  second. 

Beneath -the  opening-room  is  the  dust-room,  into  which  the 


o 
O 

«M 

O 

a 

08 


if 

£ 


dust,  dirt  and  fine  particles  of  cotton  are  discharged  from  the 
picker  by  fans,  through  the  galvanized  iron  pipes,  H.  These 
pipes  are  provided  with  an  automatic  closing  damper,  K,  which  is 


42 


cd 
W 

Pu,     O 

.  2 

«  d 


>  s 

H      . 


0     2 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


kept  open  while  the  picker  is  running  by  the  pressure  of  air 
in  the  pipe,  but  when  the  machine  is  stopped  the  pressure  ceases, 
and  the  damper  closes  of  its  own  weight,  assisted  by  the  pressure 
in  the  dust  mom,  produced  by  the  other  fans.  This  automatic 
closing  of  the  damper  prevents  the  dust  and  dirt  from  blowing 
back  into  any  machine  not  running. 

The  dust-room  is  provided  with  a  flue,  or  chimney,  which 
leads  through  the  roof  and  which  should  have  an  area  of  about  3 
square  feet  for  e.ich  fan.  It  usually  occupies  all  of  the  space  beneath 
the  opening-room  the  floor  should  be  cemented,  and  the  over- 
head woodwork  covered  witli  tin  or  any  fireproof  material.  The 
heavy  dust  and  leaf  settle  to  the  floor,  while  the  light  dirt  passes 
out  with  the  air. 

In  the  systems  shown  in  Figs.  1,  2  and  3,  the  cotton  is 
thrown  into  the  hopper  of  the  automatic  feeder,  A,  and  is  then 
delivered  to  the  feed  apron  of  the  opener,  B,  by  which  it  is  car- 
ried forward  between  the  feed  rolls  to  the  beater.  Most  openers 
have  a  three-bladed  beater  about  20  inches  in  diameter.  Beneath 
the  beater  is  a  grid,  over  which  the  dirt  is  driven  as  the  cot- 
ton  is  drawn  through  its  surface  and  up  through  the  cleaning 
trunk,  C,  to  the  breaker  picker,  D.  The  starting  and. stopping  of 
the  feed  of  both  opener  and  feeder  are  controlled  by  the  breaker 
picker. 

The  cleaning  trunk  is  provided  with  a  grid  surface,  over 
which  the  cotton  passes  to  the  breaker  picker.  The  dirt,  which  is 
heavier  than  the  cotton,  settles  between  the  grids  into  pockets 
directly  beneath,  which  can  be  cleaned  out  when  necessary. 

The  cotton  enters  the  breaker  picker  through  a  condenser 
and  gauge-box,  which  delivers  it  to  'the  feed  apron.  It  then 
passes  forward  through  the  feed  rolls  to  the  beater,  which  is 
usually  three-bladed,  where  it  receives  a  most  thorough  cleaning. 
Passing  forward  over  inclined  grid  bars,  through  which  some  of 
the  loose  dirt  falls,  it  is  deposited  upon  two  slowly  revolving 
cages  or  screens.  From  these  cages  it  is  drawn  forward  between 
several  calender  rolls,  formed  into  a  sheet  and  wound  upon  a  lap 
roll.  This  is  the  first  formation  of  a  lap  in  the  process. 

The  laps  from  the  breaker  are  now  taken  to  the  intermediate 
picker,  E,  to  undergo  another  cleaning  and  picking.  Four  laps 


43 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


are  placed  upon  the  apron  of  this  machine,  this  being  the  first 
doubling  of  the  laps.  The  cotton  next  passes  through  the  inter- 
mediate and  is  formed  into  a  lap  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the 
breaker  picker.  From  the  intermediate  it  passes  to  the  third 


machine,  the  finisher  picker,  F,  which  is  substantially  the  same  as 
the  two  previously  mentioned  machines,  the  laps  being  doubled 
four  into  one  on  the  apron.  Here  the  cotton  is  formed  into  a 


44 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


9 


finished  lap,  ready  for  the  card.  As  before  stated,  both  the  inter- 
mediate and  finisher  pickers  are  generally  provided  with  eveners, 
several  styles  of  which  will  be  shown. 


',^^S$»^S!SJ$^ 


CO 

fcic 


The  Old  Style  Feeder  contrasts  strongly  with  the  present 
automatic  or  hopper  feeder,  and  a  description  of  it  may  be  interest- 
ing to  some.  In  the  old  way  the  feed  apron  was  divided  off 


10  COTTON  SPINNING. 

every  yard  or  two,  usually  by  painting  some  of  the  apron  slats  a 
darker  color  than  the  rest,  and  the  attendant  would  place  an  arm- 
ful of  cotton  on  a  pair  of  scales  set  to  some  particular  weight 
and  then  spread  the  amount  between  the  divisions  on  the  apron. 
The  attendants  were  often  careless,  sometimes  the  weight  of  their 
arms  was  included,  while  at  other  times  they  simply  went  through 
the  motions  of  Aveighing,  not  even  looking  to  see  if  the  scales 
balanced  or  not.  Frequently,  when  pressed  for  time,  they  would 
take  an  armful  from  a  bale  and  throw  it  on  the  apron,  regardless 
of  the  amount.  It  "will  readily  be  seen  that  this  method  could 
not  be  satisfactory. 

The  Automatic  Feeder  and  Opener.  Fig.  4  shows  an  auto- 
matic feeder  connected  to  an  opener.  The  hopper  A  is  kept  about 
two-thirds  full,  in  order  that  the  cotton  shall  be  fed  as  evenly  as 
possible.  The  bottom  of  the  hopper  is  formed  by  a  horizontal 
apron,  B,  called  the  bottom  apron,  or  .lattice,  by  which  the  cotton 
is  carried  forward  against  the  elevating  apron  C1,  which  runs  in 
an  almost  vertical  position,  and  which  is  supported  at  intervals 
by  carrier  rolls,  and  consists  of  a  heavy  canvas  belt'  backed  with 
leather  strips,  to  which  are  fastened  wooden  slats.  Projecting 
from  these. slats  are  pins,  by  which  the  cotton  is  caught  and  car- 
ried upwards.  At  the  top  of  the  elevating  apron  is  situated  the 
spike  roll  D,  which  is  about  six  inches  in  diameter  and  has  steel 
pins  or  spikes  projecting  about  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  its 

»\ 

surface.  The  object  of  this  roll  is  that  it  should  strike  off  any 
surplus  bunches  of  cotton  which  cling  to  the  elevating  apron,  and 
to  regulate  the  amount  of  cotton  carried  forward  to  the  opener. 
Around  the  spike  roll  runs  an  endless  leather  apron,  E,  called  the 
spike-roll  apron,  which  has  slots  or  openings  in  it  corresponding 
in  position  to  the  pins  of  the  roll,  and  through  which  the  pins  pro- 
ject as  the  apron  passes  around  the  roll.  Any  cotton  that  is  dis- 
posed to  collect  on  the  pins  is  readily  stripped  off  by  this  means. 
The  amount  of  cotton  which  is  delivered  to  the  opener  is 
regulated  by  the  position  of  the  spike  roll,  which  is  adjustable 
horizontally ;  thus,  the  greater  the  space  between  it  and  the  elevat- 
ing apron,  the  more  cotton  is  allowed  to  pass.  In  order  that  the 
spike  roll  shall  stand  parallel  to  the  elevating  apron,  and  that  the 
roll  shall  be  moved  parallel  with  it  when,  changing  its  position, 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


11 


indexes  are  placed  on  the  outside  of  either  side  of  the  hopper,  by 
which  the  exact  position  may  be  noted.  Between  the  lower  end 
of  the  elevating  apron  and  the  end  of  the  bottom  apron  is  a  space 
of  about  I-*-  inches,  which  allows  dirt  and  foreign  substances  to 
fall  through  into  the  hopper  screen.  This  screen  can  be  dropped 
and  the  dirt  removed. 

The  cotton  which  is  left  upon  the  pins  of  the  elevating  apron, 
after  it  has  passed  the  spike  roll,  is  next  acted  upon  by  the  doffer, 
j\  This  is  driven  from  a  countershaft  by  the  belt,  K,  and  is 
about  15  inches  in  diameter,  and  has,  extending  across  its  whole 


Fig.  4.     Section  of  Automatic  Feeder  and  Opener. 

fare,  four  wooden  blades  faced  with  leather,  which  are  slightly  in 
contact  with  the  pins  of  the  elevating  apron,  and,  as  the  doffer 
runs  about  160  revolutions  per  minute,  a  continuous  series  of 
blows  is  given,  by  which  the  cotton  is  stripped  or  beaten  from  the 
pins  and  thrown  against  a  screen  or  grid  directly  beneath  the 
doffer,  called  the  doffer  screen,  through  which  any  loose  dirt  will 
fall.  Beneath  the  doffer  screen  is  a  dust  drawer,  G,  which  receives 
*  lust  and  dirt  that  is  beaten  out  by  the  doffer.  From  the  doffer 


12 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


screen  the  cotton  passes  clown  an  incline  on  to  the  .feed  apron  of 
the  opener,  H,  being  assisted  by  the  current  of  air  produced  by 
the  doffer. 


The  cotton  is  next  carried  forward  by  the  feed  apron,  pass* 


48 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


13 


ing  under  the  press  roll,  Lj_to  the  feed_rolls.  N.  The  press  roll 
condenses  the  cotton,  th:it  it  may  be  drawn  readily  between  the 
feed  rolls,  which,  being  small  in  diameter,  could  not  receive  it  in  a 
loose  form.  After  passing  the  feed  rolls  the  cotton  is  acted  upon 
by  the  blades  of  the  rigid  beater,  P.  This  consists  of  three  steel 
blades  running  across  the  widtli  of  the  machine,  which  are 
securely  riveted  to  four  or  five  sets  of  arms  or  spiders,  which  are 
fastened  to  the  beater  shaft.  These  blades  are  beveled  slightly 

nU*M**^i  n»*V<-A 


Fig.  6.     Section  of  Horizontal  Cleaning  Trunk. 

on  each  edge,  but  not  enough  to  cut  the  cotton,  and  as  they 
become  dulled  by  constant  use  the  beater  can  be  reversed  in  its 
bearings  and  the  other  edges  brought  into  use,  both  ends  of  the 
beater'shaft  being  made  alike  for  this  purpose. 

The  beater  generally  runs  1,200  revolutions  per  minute,  there- 
fore each  inch  of  cotton  delivered  by  the  feed  rolls  receives  a 
great  many  blows,  by  which  it  is  opened,  cleaned  and  removed 
from  the  rolls  in  small  tufts,  which  are  thrown  with  considerable 


Fig.  7.     Same  as  above,  with  pockets  Dropped  for  Cleaning. 

force  against  the  beaterjrrid^  ]\L  Thus  the  dirt,  seed  and  heavy 
impurities,  which  are  struck  down  with  the  cotton,  fall  between 
the  bars  into  the  space  below,  while  the  cotton,  which  is  very 
light,  is  prevented  from  passing  through  with  the  dirt  by  the  cur- 
rent of  air  which  draws  it  through  the  trunk  to  the  breaker  and 
which  is  produced  by  the  fan  in  the  gauge-lx)x  section  of  the 
breaker. 


40 


14  COTTON  SPINNING. 

Horizontal  Cleaning  Trunk.  Figs.  5,  6  and  7  show  details  of 
the  trunk  connecting  the  opener  and  breaker  picker.  Fig.  5  shows 
the  whole  length  of  the  grid,  or  cleaning  surface,  40  feet  being 
usually  sufficient  for  all  but  very  dirty  stock.  The  trunk  i.s  hung 
from  the  unde£j>idj3j)fJJie^^  about  10 

feet  apart,  lengthwise,  and  upon  each  side.  As  many  of  the  fires 
which  occur  in  the  picker  room  are  caused  by  the  beater  in  tha 
opener  striking  some  hard  substance,  means  must  be  provided  to 
prevent  injury  to  the  .trunk,  which,  being  of  wood,  takes  fire 
very  easily ;  hence  ajitpjn^tic^rjrinklersLS,  are  placed  at  inter- 
vals along  the  top  of  the  trunk  opening  into  the  passage 
through  which  the  cotton  is  drawn,  a  very  slight  fire  causing  the 
sprinklers  to  operate.  At  one  end  of  the  trunk  is  a  galvanized 
iron  pipe,  M,  connected  to  a  fan,  X.  This  is  for  cleaning  the  trunk, 
which  must  be  done  regularly.  Usually  the  fan  is  connected  to 
the  end  of  the  trunk  nearest  the  opener,  as  the  greater  portion  of 
dirt  falls  out  of  the  cotton  before  it  reaches  the  farthest  end  of  the 
grid  surface  ;  but  for  convenience  it  i.s  sometimes  connected  to 
the  other  end,  and  in  order  to  sliow  the  arrangement  Avithout 
obstructing  the  view  of  the  opener,  it  is  "placed  in  this  position  in 
Figs.  1,  3  and  5. 

Enlarged  sections  of  the  trunk  are  shown  in  Figs.  6  and  7. 
The  trunk  is  divided  vertically  into  three  sections.  The  top  one, 
0,  through  which  the  cotton  passes  to  the  breaker,  is  separated 
from  the  middle  one  by  a  grid ...suifiicjv-iir-  The  middle  section 
consists  of  a  series  of  pockets,  or  .compartments.  A.  into  which  the 
dirt  and  leaf  settle  as  the  cotton  passes  slowly  over  the  grid.^  The 
bottom  of  these  pockets,  D,  is  hinged  at  one  side,  the  hingo"  being 
connected  to  a  handle,  E,  on  the  outside  of  the  trunk,  which  is 
held  in  a  closed  position  by  a  spring,  J.  The  lower  section  of 
the  trunk  F  is' a  passage,  connected  to  the  exhaust  fan  L  by  the 
pipe  M.  The  bottom  of  the  pockets  opens  into  this  passage, 
which  is  closed  at  both  ends  by  the  doors  G  ami  N. 

When  it  becomes  necessary  to_cleaiL.  1jie_Jjmnk.  which  is  done 

from  tWIL  ^    fnnr    t.impg  ajj^LV-,  the  fepd.    nn    th"    npminr  JP    n^aTty 

stppped.  The  fan  L,  which  is  driven  separately  from  the  opener, 
from  a  countershaft,  is  started,  and  the  doors  (J  and  N  opened 
as  shown  in  Fig.  7,  this  producing  a  strong  current  of  air  through 


50 


COTTON  SPINNING.  15 

the  lower  section  or  passage  leading  to  the  fan.  TJie__sp_rings  on 
fhe  outside  of  the  trunk,  which  hold  the  bottom  of  "the  pockets  in 
position,  are  pressed  and  release  the  handles  and  allow  the  bottom 
of  the  pockets  to_faJl_mtQ_jLJgertic.al  position ,  a«  sh^w"  -q-t-I^— »-" 
Fig.  7.  The  refuse  falls  into  the  passage  and  is  carried  along 
by  the  air  current  and  discharged  into  the  dust  room.  Every 
other  pocket  is  usually  taken  at  one  cleaning. 

Breaker  Picker  with  Condenser  and  Grauye-box.  When  the 
breaker  picker  is  located  at  some  distance  from  the  opener 
and  is  connected  by  a  trunk,  as  in  Figs.  1,  2  and  3.  There  must 
be  considerable  cotton  in  transit  between  them  when  they  are 
in  operation.  As  the  feed  of  the  opener  is  stopped,  usually, 
for  a  brief  period  while  doffing  the  breaker,  it  is  evident  that  the 
cotton  in  the  trunk  would  be  drawn  forward  and  deposited  upon 
the  apron  of  the  breaker.  This  would  cause  a  thick  place  to  be 
formed  in  the  first  part  of  the  next  lap  wound,  followed  immedi- 
ately by  a  thin  place,  while  the  cotton  is  being  drawn  along  the 
trunk.  This  is,  of  course,  for  a  short  time  only,  but  in  order  to 
insure  tlie  laps  being  free  from  any  irregularities  in  weight  from 
such  cause,  the  receiving  end  of  the  breaker  is  provided  with  a 
condenser  and  gauge-box,  which  is  shown  in  the  section  of  the 
breaker  picker  in  Fig.  8. 

In  the  top  of  the  condenser  is  a  revolving  screen,  or  cage,_A^ 
on  the  inside  of  which  is  a  stationary  shiehl,  or  gradjg^Fl^which 
covers  a  little  more  than  one-half  of  its  surface,  the  air  current 
passes  through  the  perforations  of  the  cage  not  closed  by  the 
cradle.  The  cotton,  which  enters  from  the  trunk  C  through 
the  top  of  the  condenser  box,  is  deposited  upon  the  open  side 
of  the  cage.  Each  end  of  -this  cage  opens  directly  into  a  dust 
passage,  D  (shown  by  dotted  lines),  on  the  outside  of  the  gauge- 
box.  The  air  passes  out  through  the  ends  of  the  cage  and  down 
this  dust  passage  to  the  fan  E,  from  which  it  is  forced  out  through 
the  pipe  H  to  the  dust  room. 

As  the  screen  revolves  slowly,  the  cotton  which  is  deposited 
upon  its  surface  is  brought  around  between  the  screen  and  the 
roll  F.  At  this  point  the  cradle  covers  the  screen,  preventing 
the  passage  of  air;  the  cotton  is  thus  very  re.idily  stripped  from 
its  surface,  being  assisted  by  the  roll  G,.  whose  "surface  runs  in 


51 


16  COTTON  SPINNING. 

the  opposite   direction  to  the  surface  of  the  cage.     The  cotton 
passes  between  the  rolls,  F  and  G,  and  falls  upon  the  feed  apron,  J. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  roll,  G,  is  held  rigidly  in  its  bearings, 
but  the  roll,  F,  is  supported  at  either  end  by  a  lever,  G1,  which  is 
centered  at  F1.  The  short  end  of  this  lever  carries  the  roll,  while 
the  long  end,  being  heavier,  keeps  it  pressed  against  the  cage,  sub- 
ject to  the  varying  thickness  of  the  cotton  passing  through. 

The  gauge-box  is  divided  into  front  and  back  compartments, 
M  and  K,  by  a  swinging  partition,  L,  which  regulates  the  amount 
of  cotton  allowed  to  pass  forward  on  the  feed  apron.  The  front 
compartment,  which  receives  the  cotton  as  it  falls  from  the  con- 
denser roll,  is  usually  about  half  full,  but  with  the  stopping  of 
the  breaker  and  feed  of  the  opener,  the  cotton  is  drawn  out  of  the 
trunk  and  fills  this  compartment.  Any  surplus  will  fall  over  into 
the  back  compartment,  and  can  be  removed  by  opening  a  door  at 
K1.  With  the  starting  of  the  breaker,  the  cotton  that  is  contained 
in  the  front  compartment  serves  as  a  source  of  supply  until  the 
cotton  comes  through  the  trunk.  By  narrowing  the  front  com- 
partment by  the  swinging  partition,  L,  the  feed  may  be  made 
lighter,  as  a  smaller  portion  of  the  surface  of  the  feed  apron  will 
be  covered.  The  position  of  the  partition  is  regulated  by  a  pin 
which  fits  into  a  series  of  holes  drilled  in  the  under  side  of  the 
board,  L1,  which  forms  the  bottom  of  the  compartment,  K. 

From  the  feed  apron  the  cotton  is  drawn  between  the  feed 
rolls,  N1  and  N2,  and  brought  into  contact  with  the  blades  of  the 
rigid  beater,  P.  This  beater,  which  is  constructed  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  one  previously  described  in  the  opener,  runs  about 
1,500  revolutions  per  minute.  The  object  of  this  beater  is  to  con- 
tinue opening  and  cleaning,  the  dirt  being  driven  down  between 
the  bars  of  the  be'ater  grid,  G2,  by  the  force  of  the  blows  it  receives 
from  the  blades  of  the  beater. 

It  will  now  be  seen  that  a  double  operation  is  going  on,  the 
cotton  being  drawn  along  by  the  air  draft,  while  the  heavy  im- 
purities are  being  driven  through  the  grid  against  the  air  draft 
which  enters  from  below  and  passes  up  between  the  bars. 

The  speed  of  the  fan,  F,  which  is  about  1,000  revolutions  per 
minute,  plays  an  important  part  in  separating  the  dirt  from  the 
cotton.  If  the  draught  is  not  strong  enough  the  cotton  will  be 


52 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


17 


driven  down  through  the  grid 'with  the  dirt,  making  too  much 
waste,  while  if  it  is  too  strong,  the  dirt  will  be  drawn  along  with 
the  cotton  into  the  lap. 

The  beater  grid  consists  of  stationary  bars,  which  extend 
from  side  to  side  and  around  the  beater  for  a  quarter  of  its  cir- 
cumference. The  first  bar  under  the  bottom  feed  roll  is  set 
about  |  inch  from  the  circle  described  by  the  beater  blade,  while 


.<    •::.    c-        E--      •.;-.•-. 


Fig.  8.     Section  of  Breaker  Picker,  with  Condenser  and  Gauge  Box  Section. 

the  last  bar  is  set  about  1|  inches  away.  The  grid  bars  are  sup- 
ported by  brackets,  which  arc  adjustable,  and  are  bolted  to  the 
frame.  ?The  space  between  the  bars  is  graduated,  those  nearest 
the  feed  roll  having  the  widest  space  between  them,  as  the  greater 
part  oiythe  dirt  is  removed  before  the  cotton  passes  to  the  last  of 
them.  / 


53 


18  COTTON  SPINNING. 

The  cotton  is  now  under  the  influence  of  the  fan  draft,  by 
which  it  is  dra\\rn  forward  over  the  inclined  grate  bars.  R.  and  is 
collected  upon  the  revolving  cages,  C1  and__C£.  The  strip,  N, 
which  is  faced  with  leather,  prevents  it  from  collecting  above  this 
point  on  the  top  cage.  As  the  cotton  passes  over  the  inclined 
grate  bars,  the  dust  and  dirt  which  are  shaken  out  of  it  settle 
down  between  them  into  the  box,  T l .  A  dead-air  sjmcejs  formed 
by  every  fourttLbaiLfixtending  to  the  bottom  of  thejbox,  Itnus  pre- 
venting the  dirt  from  being  drawn  back  into  the  cotton. »  The  bot- 
tom of  the  box  is  kept  up  in  position  by  the  lever,~"T,  and  the 
weight,  W,  as  shown  by  dotted  lines  on  the  outside  of  the  picker. 
When  it  is  necessary  to  clean  out  the  box  the  weight  is  raised, 
allowing  the  bottom,  which  is  hinged  at  one  side,  to  swing  down. 
The  stripping  plate,  J2,  by  reason  of  being  set  close  to  the 
beater,  p'revents  the  cotton  from  following  around  with  the  air 
current  caused  by  the  beater.  The  air  draft  passes  out  at  both 
ends  of  the  cages,  through  the  openings,  D1  and  D2,  and  down 
the  dust  passage,  E1,  (represented  by  dotted  lines),  to  the  fan, 
F.  From  this  point  the  air  is  forced  out  through  the  pipe,  H, 
into  the  dust-room.  The  cages  thus  form  a  screen  which  assists 
in  cleaning  the  cotton,  the  fine  particles  of  dust  and  lint  pass- 
ing through  the  perforations  with  the  air  draft.  The  openings, 
D1  and  D2,  can  he  closed  by  dampers  when  it  is  desired  to  throw 
the  draft  all  on  one  side  of  the  cages,  as  the  lap  sometimes  be- 
comes thin  on  one  edge.  /The  perforations,  or  meshes,  in  the  top 
cage  are  generally  made  larger  than  those  in  the  bottom  cage,  thus 
allowing  a  greater  passage  of  air  through  the  top  cage,  and  conse- 
quently a  thicker  sheet  of  cotton  is  formed.  If  the  cotton  is  de- 
posited equally  on  each  cage,  although  formed  into  one  sheet  by 
passing  between,  there  is  a  tendency  to  separate,  or  split,&vhen 
unrolled  behind  the  finisher  picker  or  card,  but  as  the  sheet  from 
the  top  cage  forms  the  inside  face  of  the  lap,  this  trouble  is  in  a 
measure  overcome.^ 

'Another  method  for  preventing  the  splitting  of  the  laps,  and 
which  is  in  use  by  some  builders  of  machinery,  is  to  have  the  top 
cage  considerably  larger  in  diameter  than  the  bottom  one.\  By 
this  means  the  exposed  surface  of  the  top  cage  is  made  larger 
and  a  thicker  sheet  of  cotton  is  formed.  When  one  cage  is  used 


54 


COTTON  SPINNING.  19 

in  the  formation  of  a  sheet  the  laps"  are  not  as  likely  to  split,  since 
there  is  only  one  surface  upon  which  the  cotton  is  deposited. 

From  the  cages  the  cotton  is  stripped  off  by  the  stripping 
rolls  S1  and  S2,  and  drawn  between  the  calender  rolls  L2.  L3. 
L4  and  L6t  which  are  heavily  weighted,  and  being  slightly  differ- 
ent in  diameter,  thgjjices  oi-the  lap  .are  smoothed  or  ironedj  which 
also  t-eii4a — to — prpypiit,  them — from  splift.ing  After  leaving  the 
calender  rolls  the  cotton  passes  forward  under  the  press  roll  L5, 
and  is  wound  on  lap  roll  N3.  This  lap  roll  is  held  down  by  fric- 
tion and  rests  upon  two  fluted  rolls,  Y,  called  lap  calender  rolls, 
which  revolve  and  cause  the  lap  roll  to  wind  on  the  sheet  of  cot- 
ton as  it  comes  from  the  calender  rolls.  The  lap  is  thus  wound 
very  compactly  and  firmly. 

Leaving  the  breaker  picker,  the  cotton  passes  through  the 
intermediate  and  finisher  pickers.  The  principle  of  these  two 
machines,  so  far  as  the  opening  and  cleaning  is  concerned,  is  the 
same  as  in  the  breaker  picker,  with  the  addition  of  an  evener  and 
a  long  feed  apron.  The  design  is  also  practically  the  same,  differ- 
ing only  in  mechanical  construction. 

When  the  double-carding  system  was  used  almost  wholly,  not 
so  much  attention  was  given  to  the  weight  of  the  picker  laps,  but 
with  the  increasing  tendency  towards  spinning  finer  yarns,  and 
the  general  introduction  of  the  revolving  flat  card,  it  became  neces- 
sary to  produce  picker  laps  of  a  more  uniform  size  and  weight. 
This  led  to  the  adoption  of  single  beater  pickers  instead  of  using 
two  or  three  beater  machines  as  formerly. 

The  first  operation  of  doubling  is  placing  four  laps  upon  the 
apron  of  the  intermediate  picker,  so  that  the  thin  or  light  places 
will  be  distributed  over  its  surface.  If  the  laps  from  the  breaker 
are  unrolled  and  held  to  the  light,  there  will  be  seen  thick  and 
thin  places,  and  as  they  are  not  always  in  the  same  portion  of  the 
lap,  by  placing  one  lap  over  another  we  get  a  more  even  sheet, 
hut  one  four  times  as  thick. 

Intermediate  and  Finisher  Pickers.  A  section  of  an  inter- 
mediate picker  is  shown  in  Fig.  9.  The  laps  M,  B,  A  and  G,  from 
the  breaker,  rest  upon  the  feed  apron  D,  by  which  they  are  unrolled. 
It  is  advisable  that  they  be  of  different  diameters,  so  that  a  con- 
tinuous sheet  four  laps  thick  may  pass  through  the  feed  rolls. 


55 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


If  the  laps  are  all  of  the  same  diameter,  or  nearly  so,  there  is  a 
possibility  of  two  or  more  running  out  at  once,  and,  during  the 
time  required  to  replace  them,  a  break  is  likely  to  occur  in  the 
continuity  of  the  four  thicknesses ;  but  with  the  laps  of  different 


o> 
bb 


diameters,  the  replacement  of  one,  which  can  be  done  very  quickly, 
makes  a  break  in  the  doubled  laps  well-nigh  impossible.  The 
laps  are  carried  forward  on  the  feed  apron/ancfare  drawn  between 


5G 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


21 


X '' 

10.      Carding  Beater. 


the  evener  roll,  J,  and  the  sectional  plates,  E,  then  between  the 

feed  rolls,  N1  and  N'2.     From  this  point  the  cotton  is  treated  in 

exactly  the    same    manner  as    in    the 

breaker.     The  letters  of  reference  are 

the  same  on  the  sections  of  both  ma-      /'         1    A    I          \ 

chines. 

The  cotton   when  taken  from  the  ' 
'  intermediate  picker   goes    through    the  I 

third  process,  that  of  the  'finisher  picker.'\ 

It  is  treated  the  same  as  in  the  previous 

machiile,  the  only  difference  inJjie_JtsEQ— 

machines  being  the_car 

generally  in  the  finisher. 

Beaters.     Of  the  different  styles  of  pin  beaters  which  have 

been  in  use  from  time  to  time,  the  carding  beater  gives  the  best 

results.  A  section  of  this  beater  is 
shown  in  Fig.  10.  It  will  be  seen  that 
it  consists  of  three  wooden  lags,  A, 
securely  fastened  to  the  arms,  C,  of  the 
beater  shaft.  From  these  lags  project 
steel  pins,  B,  arranged  spirally,  each 
row  being  farther  from  the  center  than 
the  row  preceding  it.  The  carding  and 
beating  action  is  combined  in  this  beater, 

Fig.  11.    Two-bladed  Beater,  the  pins  penetrating  the  tufts  of  cotton, 

thoroughly  separating  and  dividing  them. 

In  this  way  the  cotton  is  deposited  on  the  cages  in  a  finer  and  more 

even  sheet,  and  the  work  of  the    card 

is  lessened  slightly.      Notwithstanding 

the  claim  made  by  many  to  the  contrary, 

the  carding  beater  is  capable  of  remov- 


\ 


ing  more  dirt  and  leaf  than  the  rigid 
beater.  Figs.  11  and  12  show  sections 
of  two-bladed  and  three-bladed  rigid 
beaters.  In  comparing  them,  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  two-bladed  one  must  be 
run  at  a  higher  speed  to  get  the  same 
number  of  blows  per  minute,  and  while 


Fig.  12.   Three-bladed  Beater. 


57 


22 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


some  object  to  this  necessary  high  speed,  it  is  certainly  cheaper 
to  construct  this  style.  The  three  bladed  beater  is  generally 
used  on  openers,  and  the  two  bladed  on  breakers,  intermediates 
and  finishers. 


Some  of  the  rigid  beaters  are  made  with  the  edges  of  the 
blades  of  hardened  steel,  but  these  do  not  wear  any  better  than 


58 


Pi 
I 
a 
i. 


<  ^ 

Q     •- 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


23 


the  ordinary  ones,  and  become  dulled  about  as  soon,  and  cannot 
be  sharpened  without  grinding,  which  is  considerable  trouble, 
while  the  others  can  be  sharpened  by  simply  planing  off  the  dulled 
edges. 

Picking  Machinery  on  Different  Floors.  This  is  shown  in 
the  sectional  elevation  of  a  cotton  mill  in  Fig.  13,  which 
is  very  similar  to  the  one  shown  previously  in  Fig.  3,  also 


Fig.  14.     Section  of  Inclined  Cleaning  Trunk,  with  Pockets  closed. 

a  three-beater  system.  The  horizontal  cleaning  trunk  is  dispensed 
with  and  an  inclined  trunk  used  in  its  place.  One  end  of  this 
trunk  is  connected  to  an  opener  on  the  first  floor,  the  other  to  a 
one-beater  breaker  picker,  with  a  screen  section  on  the  second 
floor.  The  distance  between  the  opener  and  the  breaker  is  short 
and  does  not  require  a  condenser  and  gauge-box  to  receive  the 
cotton,  otherwise  the  machinery  used  is  exactly  the  same  as  in 
Fig.  3.  The  inclined  cleaning  trunk  is  used  quite  extensively  in 


59 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


preference  to  the  horizontal  one,  as  the  length  of  grid,  or  cleaning, 
surface  is  considered  by  many  to  be  sufficient  for  the  removal  of 
nearly  all  of  the  loose  dirt,  and  the  cleaning  of  this  style  of  trunk 
can  be  very  quickly  accomplished. 

Inclined  Cleaning  Trunk.  Fig.  14  shows-  a  section  of  an 
inclined  trunk,  with  the  pockets  closed,  as  when  the  machine 
is  running.  It  is  suspended  from  the  floor  above  by  rods  R, 
and  consists  of  two  parts :  the  top  passage  C,  through  which  the 


Fig.  15.     Section  of  lucliiied  Cleaning  Trunk,  with  Pockets  open. 

cotton  passes  from  the  opener  to  the  breaker ;  and  the  pockets  D, 
which  receive  the  dirt  which  falls  out  of  the  cotton.  The  top 
passage  is  provided,  in  case  of  fire,  with  an  automatic  sprinkler, 
S.  The  pockets  are  separated  from  the  passage  by  the  grid 
surface,  which  consists  of  flat  iron  slats  placed  edgewise  and 
running  across  the  trunk  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the 
cotton  in  transit.  As  the  cotton  is  drawn  along  by  the  air  draft, 
eacli  slat  presents  a  narrow  surface,  against  which  it  strikes,  caus- 


60 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


25 


ing  the  dirt  to  be  shaken  out  and  to  fall  between  them  into  the 
pockets. 

The  bottom,  E,  of  these  pockets  is  made  in  one  piece,  extend- 
ing the  whole -length  of  the  trunk,  and  is  held  up  against  the 
under  side  of  them  by  levers  G,  which  are  fastened  at  each  end  of 
the  bottom  to  a  strip  which  runs  along  the  under  side.  These 
levers  are  controlled  by  a  handle,  F,  the  bottom  forming  a  connec- 
tion to  the  upper  lever.  Fig.  15  shows  a  trunk  with  the  pockets 


Fig.  16.     Section  of  Breaker  Picker,  with  Screen  Section. 

opened  for  cleaning.  The  handle  is  swung  down  into  the  position 
shown,  which  draws  the  bottom  away  from  the  under  side  of  the 
pockets.  The  refuse  slides  down  into  a  box,  or  basket,  placed 
beneath  the  lower  end  of  the  trunk.  Sometimes  the  trunk  is 
provided  with  a  connection,  by  which  the  dust  is  allowed  to  fall 
directly  into  the  dust  room. 

Breaker  Picker  with  Screen  Section.  Fig.  16  shows  a  section 
of  a  breaker  picker.  The  cotton  enters  from  the  trunk  C,  and  is 
deposited  upon  two  revolving  screens,  A  and  B,  which  form  the 


61 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


screen  section  and  are  simply  for  cleaning  the  cotton  and  form- 
ing it  into  a  sheet,  to  be  fed  to  the  beater.  As  the  distance 
traversed  by  the  cotton  between  the  opener  and  the  breaker 


be 


be 

£ 


is  short,  what  little  cotton  there  might  be  in  the  trunk  would 
not  materially  affect  the  weight  of  the  laps  by  the  stopping 
of  the  feed  of  the  opener  while  doffing  the  breaker,  and  this  may 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


be  entirely  overcome  by  doffing  without  stopping  the  feed.  Each 
screen  is  provided  with  an  opening,  D,  at  each  end,  which  leads 
into  a  dust  passage  to  the  fan  F,  by  which  the  dust  and  diit 
are  forced  through  the  pipe  H  into  the  dust  room.  As  the 
screens  revolve,  the  cotton  is  carried  around  to  the  stripping  rolls 
L  and  M,  and  removed  by  them.  Passing  forward  between  the 
feed  rolls  P  and  R,  it  comes  into  contact  with  the  blades  of  the 
rigid  beater  T.  From  this  point  the  cotton  undergoes  the  same 
treatment  as  in  the  machines  previously  described. 

Three-storied  Mill  Arrangement.  Fig.  17  shows  a  sectional 
elevation  with  a  three-beater  system.  The  openers  and  feeders  are 
placed  on  the  first  floor  and  connected  by  a  horizontal  cleaning 
trunk.  The  breaker  is  fitted  with  a  condenser  and  gauge-box, 
which  provides  for  the  long  distance  traversed  by  the  cotton. 

The  second  floor  is  used  for  opening  and  mixing  the  cotton, 
after  which  it  is  dropped  through  a  chute  to  the  feeders  on  the 
floor  below.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  fan  for  cleaning  the  trunk  is 
upon  brackets  which  are  fastened  to  the  wall  on  the  end  of  the 
trunk  nearest  the  opener,  instead  of  the  opposite  end,  as  in  the 
first  arrangement  shown  (Fig.  3).  Sometimes  only  a  part  of 
the  second  floor  is  used  for  opening  and  mixing,  while  often  the 
first  floor  is  used  for  this  purpose,  and  the  second  floor  devoted  to 
some  other  process. 

Another  way  of  arranging  this  system  is  to  divide  the  first 
floor  into  sections,  leaving  only  a  small  space  around  the  feeders 
for  the  cotton,  the  rest  of  the  floor  being  used  as  a  repair  shop. 

When  the  pipes  leading  to  the  dust  room  pass  through  the 
rooms  below,  it  is  customary  usually  to  bring  them  down  near 
the  side  walls  or  some  of  the  columns,  in  order  that  they  shall  be 
out  of  the  way  as  much  as  possible. 

SYSTEM  TWO. 

Fig.  18  shows  an  arrangement  with  all  of  the  machinery  on 
one  floor,  as  when  space  is  limited,  and  the  cotton  is  opened  and 
made  into  a  finished  lap  on  the  same  floor  as  the  card  room.  With 
this  arrangement  no  cleaning  trunk  is  used.  The  machinery  con- 
sists of  a  two-beater  breaker  with  an  automatic  feeder,  the  first 
section  of  the  breaker  corresponding  to  the  opener,  which  is  shown 


63 


28 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


-i. 


in  the  arrangement  with  the  trunk  system.  The  rest  of  the  ma- 
chinery is  a  single-beater  intermediate  picker,  also  with  an  evener 
and  a  carding  beater.  Any  of  these  single-beater  machines  can  be 

made  with  two  or  three 
beaters  when  the  nature  of 
the  cotton  requires  a  very 
thorough  cleaning  and  the 
floor  space  is  limited. 

For  spinning  fine  num- 
bers of  yarn  which  require 
long  staple  cotton,  the  fib- 
ers must  be  treated  as  care- 
fully as  possible,  and  as 
the  opening  and  cleaning 
process  is  an  unavoidable 
evil,  it  is  necessary  to  re- 
duce the  beaters  in  a  sys- 
tem to  the  least  number 
possible.  Fig.  19  shows  a 
system  which  consists  of  an 
automatic  feeder,  usually 
provided  with  an  evener, 
connected  to  a  single  beater 
breaker  picker,  and  a 
single-beater  finisher  with 
an  evener  and  rigid  beater. 
In  all  the  arrange- 
ments previously  describ- 
ed, the  carding  beater  has 
been  recommended  for  the 
finisher  picker,  as  giving 
the  best  results,  but  for 
the  treatment  of  very  long 
staple  cotton,  the  rigid 
beater  is  used  in  preference,  as  the  action  of  the  carding  beater  is 
considered  too  harsh. 

Combination  Machine.      When  in  small  mills  the  production 
per  day  is  not  large  enough  for  even  one  complete  set  of  machines, 


be 

£ 


64 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


21) 


a  combination  breaker  and  finisher  picker  with  a  feeder  attached 
is  used.  This  machine  is  shown  in  sectional  elevation  in  Fig.  20 
and  is  simply  a  finisher  picker  with  a  feeder  connected  to  the  end 
of  a  long  feed  apron. 

If  the  cotton  is  to  undergo  three  processes,  the  number  of 
pounds  required  for  the  day's  run  is  put  through  the  picker  and 
allowed  to  fall  in  a  loose  pile  in  front  of  the  calender  head,  and 
then  is  carried  to  the  rear  end  and  thrown  onto  the  feeder  again 
for  the  second  process,  when  it  is  formed  into  laps.  For  the  third 
process  the  laps  are  doubled,  three  or  four,  on  the  apron  and  made 
into  the  finished  lap  ready  for  the  card-room.  While  this  is  the 


Fig.   19.     Section  of  Mill  with  two  processes,  and  no  Cleaning  Trunk. 

usual  method  of  handling  the  cotton,  it  can  be  made  into  laps 
after  eacli  process,  if  desired.  When  two  processes  only  are  re- 
quired, the  cotton  should  always  be  formed  into  laps  the  first  time 
it  is  run  through  the  machine. 

The  combination  breaker  and  finisher  is  fitted  with  an  evener 
specially  adapted  for  running  loose  stock,  and  of  which  reference 
will  be  made  later.  It  should  have  also  a  rigid  beater,  as  the  pin 
beater  will  not  do  when  the  cotton  is  put  through  three  processes. 
Sometimes  this  style  of  machine  is  made  with  two  beaters,  when 
it  is  desired  to  give  the  cotton  a  very  thorough  cleaning  and  to 
put  it  through  twice  only.  The  front  section  may  then  be  pro- 
vided with  a  pin  beater  and  the  rear  with  a  rigid  beater. 


65 


30 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


66 


COTTON  SPINNING.  31 


SYSTEM  THREE. 

When  the  picking  machinery  is  all  upon  the  same  floor,  and 
a  trunk  is  used  for  connecting  the  opener  and  breaker,  the  machin- 
ery may  be  arranged  as  in  Fig.  21.  The  inclined  cleaning  trunk 
which  is  used  for  this  is  connected  to  the  condenser  of  the  breaker 
by  a  galvanized  iron  conveying  pipe  about  12  inches  in  diameter, 
which  extends  horizontally  above  the  finisher  and  intermediate 
to  the  back  of  the  breaker.  In  this  way  the  loose  cotton  is  fed  to 
the  opener  and  returned  in  the  form  of  a  lap  in  about  the  same 
part  of  the  opening  room. 

Another  method  of  arranging  the  machines  all  on  one  floor, 
with  a  horizontal  trunk,  is  shown  in  Fig.  22.  The  feeder  and 
opener  are  close  to  the  breaker  by  having  the  trunk  in  two  sec- 
tions of  20  feet  each,  one  just  above  the  other.  This  saves  con- 
siderable space  across  the  room.  The  trunk  is  cleaned  in  the 
manner  described  in  Figs.  6  and  7,  one  end  of  each  section  being 
connected  to  the  cleaning  fan. 

•Both  of  these  arrangements  are  frequently  used  in  a  one-story 
building,  but  in  the  drawings  shown  the  second  floor  is  used  for 
a  slasher  room. 

SYSTEM   FOUR. 

It  often  happens  that  the  bales  of  cotton  cannot  be  unloaded 
near  the  opening  room,  and  when  this  is  the  case  an  additional 
handling  is  necessary,  which  is  quite  an  expense,  particularly  in  a 
large  mill.  A  method  adopted  by  some  of  the  leading  manufac- 
turers is  to  connect  the  opening  room  with  the  cotton  house  (where 
the  bales  are  unloaded)  by  a  galvanized  iron  pipe  12  to  24  inches 
in  diameter  and  of  any  reasonable  length. 

In  the  cotton  house  is  an  automatic  feeder  which  is  connected 
to  one  end  of  the  pipe.  The  cotton  is  thrown  into  this  feeder, 
which  delivers  it  to  the  pipe,  through  which  it  is  drawn  by  a  strong 
current  of  air  produced  by  an  exhaust  fan.  This  fan  has  a  style 
of  wheel  known  as  a  wool  wheel,  which  is  ordinarily  used  for 
blowing  wool.  The  other  end  of  the  pipe  is  provided  with  a  con- 
denser, consisting  of  a  revolving  screen  about  18  inches  in  diameter, 
upon  which  the  cotton  is  deposited.  The  screen  is  connected  to 


32 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


H 

be 
a 


be 


68 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


33 


69 


34 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


70 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


35 


a  fan,  and  being  open  at  botli  ends,  the  light  lint  and  dust  pass 
through,  while  the  cotton  is  removed  as  the  screen  revolves  and 
falls  in  a  pile  upon  the  floor. 

A  system  of  this  kind  is  shown  in  Figs.  23  to  27,  inclusive. 
Fig.  23  is  a  plan  and  sectional  elevation  of  a  mill  and  storehouse, 
with  a  galvanized  iron  pipe  14  inches  in  diameter  connecting  them 
for  conveying  the  cotton,  arid  Fig.  24  is  a  plan  and  elevation,  on 
a  larger  scale,  of  the  automatic  feeders  for  this  system. 

One  end  of  the  cotton  house  is  partitioned  off  from  the  re- 
mainder of  the  building  by  a  brick  division  wall,  which  forms  a  room 
where  the  bales  are  opened.  In  this  room  are  two  automatic  feeders, 


ELEVATION 
OF    PIPI  NG 


Fig.  24.     Plan  and  Sectional  Elevation  of  Feeders  in  Storehouse. 

A  and  B,  with  especially  large  hoppers,  which  are  driven  by  an 
electric  motor  and  which  deliver  the  cotton  to  the  conveying  pipe, 
C,  through  mouthpieces  D.  The  fan,  E,  for  drawing  the  cotton 
through  the  pipe,  is  placed  in  the  opener  room  at  the  top  of  the 
upright  pipe. 

Fig.  25  is  a  plan  and  elevation  showing  the  piping  in  de- 
tail. Two  condensers  are  used  for  supplying  the  five  feeders. 
Thus  affords  an  opportunity  for  distributing  the  cotton  in  two  piles, 
so  that  it  may  be  readily  supplied  to  the  feeders. 

After  the  cotton  passes  through  the  fan,  it  enters  an  enlarged 
part  of  the  pipe,  rectangular  in  section  and  in  which  is  a  gate,  K, 


71 


36 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


shown  by  dotted  lines,  which  may  be  operated  from  the  outside  of 
the  pipe.  From  this  point,  the  pipe  divides,  line,  F,  leading  to  con- 
denser, G,  and  line,  H,  to  condenser,  J.  If  it  is  desired  to  send  all 
of  the  cotton  through  condenser,  J,  the  gate  is  moved  to  the  posi- 
tion shown,  which  closes  the  opening  in  pipe,  F,  all  of  the  cotton 
passing  through  pipe  H.  But  if  both  condensers  are  to  be  run, 


Fig.  25.     Plans  and  Sectional  Elevation,  showing  details  of  piping  for 
Blowing  System. 

the  gate  is   moved  straightway  of  the  pipe,  leaving  both  branch 
pipes  open  to  the  condensers. 

The  dust  and  dirt  from  the  condensers  are  discharged  into  the 
dust  room  through  the  pipe,  L,  by  the  fan,  M.  When  only  one 
condenser  is  running,  it  is  necessary  to  close  the  pipe  leading  to 
the  other  so  that  the  air  will  all  be  drawn  from  the  one  that  is 
running.  This  necessitates  the  wind  gates,  N  and  O.  If  thecon- 


72 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


37 


denser,  J,  is  running,  the  gate,  N,  should  be  closed,  while  if  G  is 
running,  O  is  closed.  When  both  are  in  operation,  the  gates 
should  both  be  left  open,  so  that  the  air  will  draw  equally  from  each, 
but  as  the  draft  from  the  condenser  nearest  the  fan  is  generally 
the  strongest,  it  is  often  necessary  to  slightly  close  one  of  the  gates, 
so  that  the  draft  from  each  condenser  shall  be  equal. 

When  a  small  quantity  of  cotton  is 
to  be  run  through  a  blowing  system,  in- 
stead of  having  an  automatic  feeder  as 
in  Fig.  24,  the  feed  end  of  the  pipe  is 


Fig.  26.     Straight  Pipe  Mouth  Pieces. 

made  as  shown  in  Figs.  26  and  27.  In  Fig.  26  it  is  enlarged  slight- 
ly, so  that  the  cotton  may  be  thrown  in  readily.  JThe  pipe  may 
be  inverted  and  the  cotton  drawn  up  instead  of  down  which  is 

much  better/ as  it  affords  an  op- 
portunity for  pieces  of  hoop  iron, 
nails  etc.,  to  drop  out,  while 
with  the  pipe  leading  down,  as 
in  the  drawing,  the  heavy  sub- 
stances simply  fall  to  the  bottom 
of  the  vertical  part  of  the  pipe 
and  have  to  be  removed.  Hand 
holes  are  made  in  this  part  of 
the  pipe  and  in  all  parts  where 
it  is  necessary. 

Fig.  27  shows  another  form 
for  the  feed  end  of  the  pipe,  which  embodies  the  points  of  both 
pipes  previously  referred  to  in  Fig.  26.  The  shape  of  the  pipe 
permits  the  cotton  to  be  dropped  in  and  the  vertical  part  allows 


Fig.  27.     Elbow  Mouth  Pieces. 


73 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


the  heavy  dirt  to  fall   to  the  bottom,  where  it  can  be   removed. 

It  is  considered  advisable  in  all  cases  to  use  an  automatic 
feeder  with  a  blowing  system  in  the  cotton  house,  as  the  lumps 
of  cotton  are  broken  better  by  being  tumbled  about  in  the  hop- 
per, and  the  danger  of  fire  is  less  from  the  fan  striking  a  hard 
substance,  particularly  when  putting  a  large  quantity  through  the 
pipe.  The  production  from  one  feeder  may  be  called,  safely, 
8,000  pounds  for  a  day  of  ten  hours,  without  crowding  the  machine. 

Eveners.  One  of  the  characteristics  of  good  yarn  is  even- 
ness. This  is  dependent  upon  the  successful  manipulation  of  the 
cotton  in  all  of  the  processes  which  it  undergoes.  Reference 
has  been  made  previously  to  the  doubling  of  the  laps  upon  the 
aprons  of  the  intermediate  and  finisher  pickers.  This  is  of  great 
importance  in  the  process  of  evening,  but  the  first  stage  in  the  for- 
mation of  the  lap,  which  is  upon  the  breaker  picker,  may  be  con- 
sidered as  the  starting-point  for  this  operation.  While  it  is  true 
that  a  carefully  made  lap  may  be  entirely  spoiled  by  the  careless 
handling  of  the  machines  before  it  is  spun  into  yarn,  as  is  often 
the  case,  the  sooner  we  commence  the  operation  of  evening  the 
mass  of  cotton,  the  better  final  result  will  be  obtained. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  when  the  hopper  of  the  automatic 
feeder  is  quite  full,  the  lap  is  apt  to  be  heavy,  and  if  the  cotton  is 
allowed  to  run  low  in  the  hopper,  the  lap  will  be  found  to  be  cor- 
respondingly light.  When  an  attendant  is  required  to  take  care 
of  quite  a  number  of  feeders,  the  laps  from  the  breaker  picker  vary 
considerably  in  weight,  owing  to  his  inability  to  keep  them  filled 
to  near  enough  a  uniform  height.  In  order  that  the  automatic 
feeder  shall  deliver  the  same  amount  of  cotton  to  the  opener  at  all 
times,  many  feeders  are  provided  with  eveners  of  some  description. 

Evener  for  Automatic  Feeder.  Fig.  28  shows  a  section  of  an 
automatic  feeder  which,  besides  having  an  evening  device,  possesses 
some  points  quite  distinct  from  all  other  feeders.  It  consists  of 
a  bottom  apronr  Ar  an  elevating  apron.B.  supported  by  carrier  rolls, 
and  a  doffer,  C.  Beneath  the  doffer  is  a  screen,  D,  and  a  dust 
drawer,  or  box,  E,  while  beneath  the  elevating  apron  is  also  a 
screen,  all  of  which  parts  are  common  to  most  feeders.  Instead, 
however,  of  having  a  spike-roll  to  remove  the  surplus  bunches 
of  cotton  from  the  elevating  apron,  '\£lji»  feeder  is  provided  with 


74  . 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


a  coinbx_FJ,  which  is  carried  by  several  arms,  jj.  These  arms  are 
fastened  to  the  comb  shaft,  H,  which  is  hung  from  the  shaft,  P,  by 
swing  stands,  M.  The  oscillations  of  the  comb  are  obtained  from 
a  pullejjjJ,  in  one  arm  of  which  is  fastened  a  stud,  T.  This  stud 
is  connected  by  a  pitman,  K,  to  a  similar  stud,  V,  in  the  arm,  L, 
which  is  fastened  to  the  comb  shaft. 

Fig. '29  shows  an  enlarged  section  of  a  part  of  the  feeder  and 
Fig.  30  an  elevation  of  the  same. 


Fig.  28.     Automatic  Feeder  with  Evener  Attached. 

The  device  for  regulating  the  feed  is  constructed  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner :  In  the  back  part  of  the  hopper  is  a  rac^»_R,  con- 
structed similarly  to  a  rake,  with  very  long  tines,  which  is  sus- 
pended from  each  side  of  the  hopper  by  studs,  U,  which  form  a 
center  about  which  it  swings.  Projecting  from  the  top  of  the  rack 
are  stands,  W,  connected  to  the  comb-shaft  swing  stands  by  arms,  N. 
By  this  arrangement,  any  swinging  motion  of  the  rack  will  be  com- 


75 


40 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


municated  to  the  comb  by  the  parts  described.     On  the  outside  of 
the  hopper  are  springs,  O,  connected  to  the  arms,  S,  which  are 


Fig.  29.     Section  Showing  Evener  Parts. 

fastened  to  the  outside  ends  of  the  studs,  U,  from  which  the  rack 
swings.      The   pull  of  the  springs  is  such  as  to  draw  the   rack 


Fig.  30.    Elevation  Showing  Evener  Parts. 

towards  the  elevating  apron.     When  the  hopper  is  full,  or  nearly  so, 
the  cotton  keeps  the  rack  in  an  almost  vertical  position,  but  as  it 


76 


COTTON"  SPINNING. 


77 


42 


COTTOX  SPINNING. 


gets  low  in  the  hopper,  the  springs  draw  the  rack  forward  towards 
the  elevating  apron  while  the  comb  is  drawn  slightly  away  from 
it.  By  thus  increasing  the  distance  between  the  comb  and  the 
apron  (which  is  shown  by  the  dotted  lines  in  Fig.  29),  more 
cotton  is  allowed  to  pass  forward  to  the  opener,  tending  to  keep 
the  delivery  of  the  feed  the  same  at  all  times. 

Another  style  of  automatic  feeder,  provided  with  an  evener, 
is  shown  in  connection  with  an  opener  in  Fig.  31.  With  this 
feeder  the  supply  of  cotton  delivered  to  the  opener  is  regulated  by 

the  speed  of.  the  elevating 
apron,  which  in  turn  is  gov- 
erned by  the  thickness  of  the 
sheet  of  cotton  passing  be- 
tween the  evener  rolls.  As 
the  quantity  of  cotton  in  the 
hopper  grows  less,  the 
amount  fed  to  the  opener  is 
lighter ;  thus  the  speed  of  the 
elevating  apron  and  the  feed 
rolls  on  the  opener  are  cor- 
respondingly increased,  so 
that  the  amount  of  cotton  de- 
livered shall  be  always  the 
same.  The  elevating  apron, 
A,  is  driven  by  frictional  con- 
tact with  the  top  apron  roll,  B, 

on  the  end  of  which  is  a  worm  gear,  C,  which  is  driven  from  the 
worm,  D,  upon  the  end  of  the  eone^  E.  This  cone  is  driven  from 
the  drum,.  F,.  by  the  belt,  G,  which  passes  around  the  carrier-rell, 
H,  and  the  binder_cone,  J. 

An  end  elevation  of  the  cone  is  shown  at  the  right  in  Fig.  31. 
On  the  end  of  the  beater  shaft,  and  shown  by  dotted  lines,  is  a 
pulley,  K^which  drives  the  drum,  F,  by  means  of  the  belt,  L,  pulley, 
M,  and  gears,  N  and  O,  the  last  being  upon  the  end  of  the  drum 
shaft.  On  the  top  apron  roll  is  a  gear,  P,  which  drives  a  similar 
gear,  R,  and  upon  the  hub  of  the  latter  is  a  sprocket  whealr-S,  which 
drives,  by  means  of  the  sprocket  chain,  T,  the  wheel,  W.  The  feed 
rolls,  A1,  are  driven  from  the  hub  of  this  sprocket  by  the  gears,  C1. 


Fig.  32. 


Section  Showing  Evener  Rolls 
and  Feed  Rolls. 


78 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


43 


and  D1,  and  the  evener  rolls,  B1  and  B2,  are  driven  by  the  gears, 
C1  and  E1.  It  will  be  seen  that  by  this  arrangement  any  change 
in  the  speed  of  thee  levating  apron  directly  affects  the  speed  of  the 
evener  and  feed  rolls. 

Fig.  32  is  a  section  showing  the  arrangement  of  the  evener 
rolls  and  feed'  rolls.  Fig.  33  is  a  view  of  the  evener  case  showing 
the  rolls,  levers  and  parts  connected. 


Fig.  33.    Elevation  Showing  Evener  Rolls  and  Levers. 

The  cotton  passes  along  en  the  feed  apron,  F1,  under  the  press 
roll,  G1,  and"  is  drawn  between  tlie  bottom  evener  rolls,  B1,  and 
the  top  evener  roll,  B2,  and  then  between  the  feed  rolls,  A1.  The 
bottom  evener  rolls,  wrnBh  are  about  2  inches  in  diameter,  are 
made  solid,  while  the  top  rofl>vwhich  is  driven  from  one  of  the  bot- 
tom ones  by  gears,  H2  and  H:JV  is  about  3  inches  in  diameter 
and  is  made  up  of  a  series  of  short  rolls^eight  in  number,. each  about 
5  inches  long  and  which  are  hollow  and  connected  as  shown  in 
Fig.  34.  In  the  face  of 
the  rolls,  and  near  each 
end,  is  a  hole  through 
which  is  driven  a  steel 
pin.  These  pins,  A2, 
are  connected  by  dogs, 

or  universal  joints,  A3.  In  this  way,  rotary  motion  is  communi- 
cated from  one  to  another,  while  a  vertical  movement  of  one  or 
more  can  take  place,  subject  to  the  varying  thickness  of  the  cotton 
passing  between  them  and  the  bottom  rolls.  The  whole  arrange- 
ment forms  gLvery  neat  flexible  roll. 

On  the.to  U)f  each  of  the  short  rolls  (Fig.  33)  rests  one  end  of 
a  small  saddle,  G2.     These  saddles  are  connected  by  other  saddles, 


Fig.  34.     Section  of  Flexible  Evener  Roll. 


79 


44 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


Hl,  while  a  main  saddle,  J1,  forms  a  connection  between  all  of 
them.  On  the  top  of  the  evener  case  is  the  evener  lever,  K1, 
which  is  connected  to  the  main  saddle  by  the  stem,  L1.  The  ful- 
crunmf  the  lever  is  at  M1  and  the  long  end  is  connected  to  a  rod, 

Fig.  3.5  is  a  side  elevation  showing  the  connections  between 
the  evener  lever  and  the  cone-belt  guide.  It  will  be  seen  that  the 
lower  end  of  the  rod,  N1,  is  connected  to  a  bell  crank-lever,  O1, 
which  turns  on  a  stud,  P l .  A  horizontal  rod,  Ri,  connects  the  ver- 
tical arm  of  this  lever  with  the  lever,  S1.  At  the  lower  end  of  the 


Fig.  35.     Elevation  Showing  Connections  from  Evener  to  Cone  Belt. 


latter  is  a  stud,  T1,  which  forms  n_-£nLp,rnin  aliont  which  the  lever 
turns  and  at  the  upper  end  is  connected  the  cone-belt  guide,  W"i. 
When  the  evener  roll  is  raised,  by  reason  of  an  unusual  thickness 
of  cotton  going  through,  the  evener  lever  also  raises  and  the  con- 
nections, just  described,  move  in  the  direction  shown  by  arrows. 
This  moves  the  cone  belt  towards  the  large  end  of  the  driven  cone, 
E  (Fig.  31),  -and  a  slower  movement  of  the  elevating  apron  takes 
place,  delivering  less  cotton  to  the  opener.  A  light  feed  will  cause 
a  reverse  movement  in  the  direction  of  the  cone  belt  towards  the 
small  end  of  the  driven  cone,  thus  increasing  the  speed  of  the 
elevating  apron.  This  style  of  evener,  for  regulating  the  feed  of 


80 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


cotton  when  in  loose  form,  ''raw  stock"  as  it  is  called,  is  one  of 
the  most  perfect  in  use. 

Eveners  for  Pickers.     The  operations  of  the  evener  on  the 
intermediate  and  finisher  pickers  depend  wholly  upon  the  thick- 


ness  of  the  sheet  of  cotton  which  passes  between  two  surfaces  and 
not  upon  the  weight,  as  is  also  the  case  when  the  evener  is  applied 
to  the  automatic  feeder  and,  unless  the  cotton  has  been,  thoroughly 


81 


46 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


opened,  the  same  weight  in  a  lap  may  be  slightly  different  in 
thickness,  consequently  the  evener  is  not  always  absolutely  perfect 
in  its  work. 

A  side  elevation  of  a  finisher  picker  provided  with  an  evener 
is  shown  in  Fig.  36.  The  evener  is  driven  from  the  draft  gear,  X, 
on  the  calender  head,  or  delivery  end  of  the  machine,  by  the  side 
shaft,  A.  On  the  back  end  of -this  shaft  is  a  drum,  B,  which  drives 
the  evener  cone,  C,  by  means  of  the  belt,  F,  which  passes  over  the 
carrier  roll,  G,  and  under  the  binder  cone.  H,  which  can  be  lowered 
to  take  up  the  slack  as  the  belt  stretches.  On  the  end  of  the 
evener  cone  is  a  worm,  K,  which  drives  the  worm  gear,  L,  which  is 
connected  directly  to  the  evener  and  feed  rolls. 

Fig.  37  shows  a  section 
through  the  evener  and  Fig. 
38  shows  a  side  elevation  and 
section  of  the  same. 

The  laps  are  carried  for- 
ward on  the  feed  apron,  D, 
and  are  drawn  between  the 
evener  roll,  J,  and  the  sectional, 
plates,  E,  then  between  the 
feed  rolls,  N1  and  N2.  The 
sectional  plates,  of  which 
there  are  sixteen,  extend 
across  the  whole  width  of  the 
face  of  the  evener  roll.  Rest- 


Fig.  37. 


Section  Showing  Evener  Rolls 
and  Feed  Rolls. 


ing  in  a  socket  on  the  top  of  each  of  these  plates  are  short  rods, 
B l ,  which  support  saddles,  C l .  These  saddles  are  connected  to 
the  stem,  D1,  by  other  and  larger  saddles  all  of  which  act  as  levers, 
the  stem  forming  a  connection  between  the  top  saddle,  E1,  and 
the  top  lever,  F1.  The  top  lever,  which  has  its  fulcrum  at  G1, 
is  connected  at  its  long  end  by  a  rod,  H1,  the  lower  end  of  which 
terminates  in  a  rack,  A1,  which  is  in  gear  with  a  pinion,  C4,  this 
last  being  on  the  quadrant  shaft,  J1.  On  the  outer  end  of  the 
quadrant  shaft  is  a  segment  gear,  K1,  called  the  quadrant,  the 
teeth  of  which  are  in  contact  with  the  teeth  of  the  cone-belt 
•guide,  L1. 

When  the  position  of  the  sectional  plates  is  changed,  by  reason 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


47 


of  a  difference  in  thickness  of  the  sheet  of  cotton  passing  under 
them,  the  quadrant  shaft  is  turned  slightly,  and -by  the  connections 
jus.t  described,  the  cone  belt  is  moved  to  a  different  position  on  the 
face  of  the  cone,  changing  the  speed  of  the  evener  and  feed  rolls. 
This  will  continue  until  the  thick  or  thin  place,  as  the  case  may 
be,  lias  passed  by  the  sectional  plates,  when  they  will  resume  their 
normal  position.  At  the  top  end  of  the  rod,  H1,  is  a  thumbscrew, 
C3,  by  which  the  position  of  the  cone  belt  maybe  changed  slightly 
when  adjusting  the  evener. 


Fig.  38.     Section  and  Side  Elevation  of  Evener  for  Picker. 

In  order  that  the  sectional  plates  shall  not  rise  too  easily,  a 
drum,  or  weight  pulley^^G^.,  is  fastened  to  the  quadrant  shaft. 
Around  this  pulley,  and  fastened  to  it,  passes  a  strap,  B^,  the  lower 
end  of  which  is  connected  to  a  weight  hook  upon  which  hangs  a 
weight,  D2.  By  this  means,  the  sectional  plates  are  pressed  {Irmly 
down  upon  the  lap. 

The  gearing  of  the  picker  is  so  arranged  that  the  feed  and 
delivery  of  the  cotton  can  be  started  and  stopped  while  the  picker 
is  running.  It  will  be  seen  that  in  Fig.  36  the  gear,  R,  which  is 
upon  the  delivery  calender  roll,  is  driven  from  the  pinion,  S, 
which  is  carried  by  the  drop  lever,  M,  and  that  the  feed  rolls  and 
evener  rolls  are  driven  from  the  draft  gear,  X,  which  is  on  the  end 
of  the  shaft,  N.  Both  the  pinion  and  draft  gears  are  driven  from 
the  calender  pulleys  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  calender  head  and 


S3 


48 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


revolve  all  the  time  that  the  picker  is  running.  The  drop  lever 
turns  on  a  stud  at  P.  To  the  lower  end  of  the  lever  is  fastened  a 
rod,  H5,  which  is  connected  to  the  lower  end  of  the  upright  shaft, 
T,  by  the  arm,  H4.  When  the  feed  rolls  are  started,  the  drop 
lever  is  raised  and  the  pinion,  S,  is  brought  into  contact  with  the 
gear,  R,  and  at  the  same  time,  the  evener  and  feed  rolls  are  started 
by  means  of  a  clutch  being  thrown  into  contact  with  the  worm 
gear. 

An  enlarged  section,  an  elevation  and  a  partial  plan  of  this 
clutch  and  worm  gear  are  shown  in  Fig.  39.  On  the  stud,  W,  is 
a  sleevei-Lir'  with  a 
gear  on  one  end  which 
drives  the  evener  and 
feed  «rolls  and  a  dog, 
or  driver,  L  2 ,  keyed  to 
the  other  end.  The 
clutch,  K2,  has  two 
lugs,  or  bosses,  N, 
which  project  be- 
tween the  arms  of  the 
dog.  The  worm  gear, 
L,  which  runs  loose 
on  the  sleeve,  has 
teeth  upon  one  side 
which  engage,  'with 
the  teeth  in  £he 


Fig.  39.     Clutch  and  Worm  Gear. 


clutch.  When  the  clutch  is  thrown  out,  the  worm  gear  runs 
without  imparting  motion  to  the  evener  and  feed  rolls  but  when 
the  calender  head  is  started,  the  shipper  rod,  H5,  which  is  drawn 
forward  by  the  raising  of  the  drop  lever  causes  the  clutch  to 
engage  with  the  teeth  of  the  worm  gear,  the  sleeve  being  driven 
by  the  lugs  projecting  between  the  arms  of  the  dog. 

Another  style  of  evener,  which  is  applied  to  intermediate  or 
finisher  pickers,  is  shown  in  three  views,  a  section,  an  end  elevation 
and  a  partial  plan  in  Fig.  40.  On  the  end  of  the  evenejrroll^,  is 
a  wxmnjreai^rj,  which  is  driven  by  a  "worm,  F,  on  the  upper  encTof 
the  driven  cone,  H.  This  cone  is  driven  by  a  belt,  J,  from  the 
driving  cone,  L,  which  in  turn  is  driven  from  the  side  shaft,  It, 


84 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


41) 


by  the  gears,  N  amjJP.     The  cotton  passes  on  the  feed  apron,  A, 
and  between  the  evener  roll,  and  the  pedals,  C,  then  between  the 


feed  rolls,  E  and  G. 
These  pedals,  eight  in 
number,  are  made  with 
one  end  a  flat  surface 
over  which  the  cotton 
passes,  and  are  balanced 
on  a  knife  blade,  K. 


To  the  long  end  of  the 
pedals  is  connected  a 
series  of  links  and  sad- 
dles, which  are  connect- 
ed to  a  main  saddle,  M, 
the  whole  arrangement 
being  similar  to  the 
e  v  e  n  e  r  shown  last. 
Directly  b  e  n  e  a  t  li  the 
main  saddle  is  a  shaft, 
O,  on  one  end  of  which 


L:J 


is  a  roll,  or  drum,  Q,  which  is  connected  to  the  main  saddle  by 
a  thin  steel  band,  S,  and  a  yoke,  U.     One  end  of  the  band  passes 


50  COTTON  SPINNING. 

r* ' — 

partially  around  the  drum  and  the  other  is  fastened  to  the  lower 
end  of  the  yoke.  On  the  other  end  of  the  shaft  is  a  quadrant, 
W,  which  is  connected  to  the  cone-belt  guide,  Y,  by  a  thin,  steel 
band,  X,  similar  to  the  one  connecting  the  main  saddle. 

When  the  position  of  the  pedals  is  changed  by  a  difference  in 
the  thickness  of  the  cotton  passing  between  them  and  the  evener 
roll,  the  shaft,  O,  is  rotated  and  the  cone  belt  moved  to  a  different 
position  on  the  face  of  the  cones.  An  adjusting  screw,  A1,  con- 
nects the  yoke  and  main  saddle,  by  which  the  cone  belt  ma}'  be 
moved  slightly  when  adjusting  the  evener  for  the  correct  weight 
of  lap. 

The  driven  cone,  H,  is  held  rigidly  in  its  bearings  but  the 
driving  cone,  L,  is  held  by  arms,  (11  and  C2,  which  swing  from 
the  shaft,  D1.  Fastened  to  the  shaft  is  a  lever,  E1,  on  the  end  of 
which  is  connected  a  chain,  F1,  and  weight,  G1,  the  chain  running 
over  a  pulley,  H1.  By  this  arrangement  the  cones  are  kept  apart 
and  the  cone  belt  tight. 

Evener  Cones.  The  question  often  arises  as  to  why  the  out- 
lines of  the  evener  cones  are  curved  instead  of  being  a  straight 
taper.  .  The  reason  for  this  is  very  simple  but,  in  order  that  it 
shall  be  understood,  a  few  words  on  the  subject  may  not  be  amiss. 

It  is  usually  customary  to  double  four  laps  on  the  apron  of 
the  picker  so  that  four  thicknesses  shall  pass  under  the  evener  roll, 
but,  if  one  of  the  laps  should  run  out,  it  is  evident  that  the  evener 
roll  ought  to  run  proportionately  faster  in  order  that  the  same 
weight  of  cotton  shall  be  fed  to  the  beater  in  a  given  time. 

A  diagram  of  a  pair  of.  cones  and  an  evener  roll  is  shown  in 
Fig.  41.  The  roll,  A,  is  9  inches  in  circumference  or  2|  inches 
in  diameter.  On  the  end  of  it  is  a  worm  gear,  B,  of  sixty 
teeth,  which  is  driven  by  a  single  threaded  worm,  C,  on  the 
upper  end  of  the  driven  cone,  D.  The  driving  cone,  E,  runs 
at  a  constant  speed  of  480  revolutions  per  minute  and  is  driven 
from  the  side  shaft,  H,  by  gears,  F  and  G.  Let  us  suppose  that 
four  laps,  each  weighing  12  ounces  per  yard,  are  passing  under 
the  evener  roll,  the  speed  of  which  is  8  revolutions  per  minute ; 
now,  as  the  i*oll  is  9  inches  in  circumference,  there  would  be  fed 
into  the  machine  72  inches,  or  2  yards,  of  cotton  weighing  48 
ounces  per  yard,  9C  ounces  in  all.  With  the  evener  roll  at  8 


86 


COTTOX  SPINNING. 


51 


revolutions,  the  cone  will  make  480  revolutions  C8  X  60  -f- 1  = 
480)  the  cone  belt  being  midway  of  the  ends  of  the  cone.  Now 
suppose  one  lap  runs  out,  leaving  only  three  thicknesses,  or  36 
ounces,  passing  into  the  machine,  it  is  evident  that  the  evener  roll 
should  increase  enough  in  speed  to  feed  in  an  equal  amount,  weigh- 
ing 36  ounces  per  yard  in  the  same  time  as  when  that  weighing 


6  LAPS       SPEED   3ZO 


Fig.  41.     Evener  Cones  with  Correct  Outline. 

48  ounces  per  yard  is  going  in.  To  accomplish  this,  the  speed  of 
the  roll  must  be  increased  to  10.66  revolutions  per  minute,  which 
will  feed  in  2.66  yards,  which,  weighing  36  ounces  per  yard,  brings 
the  total  to  96  ounces.  To  give  the  evener  roll  10.66  revolutions 
per  minute,  the  driven  cone  would  have  to  run  640  revolutions  per 
minute  and  as  the  driving  cone  runs  480  revolutions,  it  is  easily 
seen  that  the  belt  should  move  to  a  point  on  the  face  of  the  cones 


87 


52 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


where  the  diameter  will  be  such  as  to  give  640  revolutions  to  the 
driven  cone. 

The  cones  in  the  diagram  are  made  with  a  difference  in  diame- 
ter between  the  large  and  small  ends  to  provide  for  a  range  in 
speed  adapted  to  pass  in  from  two  to  six  laps,  and,  as  the  cones 
are  16  inches  long,  the  difference  of  one  lap  in  the  thickness  of 
the  sheet  will  move  the  cone  belt  up  or  down  the  face  of  the  cones 
4  inches.  Therefore,  with  three  thicknesses  of  lap  going  through, 
the  cone  belt  will  move  down  the  cones  to  the  fourth  position  and 
the  speed  of  the  driven  cone  will  be  640  revolutions  per  minute. 
The  diameters  of  the  cones  at  this  point  should  be  5.14  inchea  for 
the  driving  cone  and  3.86  inches  for  the  driven  cone. 

The  following  table  shows  the  speeds  of  the  evener  roll  and 
driven  cones  and  the  corresponding  diameters  of  the  cones  neces- 
sary for  the  different  speeds.  From  the  table,  it  will  be  seen  that 
the  diameters  of  both  cones,  taken  at  the  same  points  and  added 
together,  give  the  same  total. 


CM  *H 

03                                 OQ 

<2  *> 

*•"     tH 

O  (U 

O  Q> 

-*3    t- 
JH    1> 

a  * 

5  a> 

V    . 

u  *^ 

00 

CO  " 

MA 

rt  ^ 

•§g 

y    g 

S'O    . 

"2  .a"  • 

C<1> 

fl^i 

'<l>   00 

--  bC 
S 

58 

•M    ^ 

0  «- 
«-  0 

>»0? 

O  C 

•-  o 

°o 

o 

«H  O 

o  £ 

.S  «« 

flfl 

a  v  t> 

-u  O 

•d  :: 

A 

**H      ^ 

'^  >  53 

3  1  2 

3  a-2 

S  h  _2 

0   fl 

.9  3  • 

QJ    bC 

_g'> 

II 

ill 

£.£  a 
S'd  u 

III 

Q3  S'S 

S  a  =s 

I.S 

B  0 
3  Sao 

.1 

K 

<s  o 

* 

3 

«* 

05 

o  "  ' 

fc 

Q 

5 

96 

1.33 

320 

5.33 

72 

6 

3.6 

.5.4 

96 

1.60 

384 

6.40 

60 

5 

4 

5 

96 

2.00 

480 

8.00 

48 

4 

4.5 

4.5 

96 

2.66 

640 

10.66 

36 

3 

5.14 

3.86 

96 

4.00 

960 

16.00 

24 

2 

6 

3 

Fig.  42  shows  a  diagram  of  a  pair  of  straight  taper  cones  which 
serve  for  comparison  with  .those  of  correct  outline  shown  in  the 
previous  diagram.  The  large  end  of  each  is  6  inches  in  diameter, 
the  small  end  3  inches  in  diameter  and  the  middle  4£  inches 
in  diameter;  the  speed  of  the  driving  cone  is  480  revolutions 
per  minute.  While  the  speeds  of  the  driven  cone,  with  two 
and  four  laps  going  in,  are  960  and  480  revolutions  per  minute 


88 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


respectively  and  are  correct,  at  all  other  points  the  diameters  of  the 
cones  are  such  as  to  give  incorrect  speeds  as  will  be  seen  by  com- 
paring the  two  diagrams. 

Friction  Let-off.  The  friction  let-off,  by  which  the  laps  on  the 
picker  are  caused  to  be  wound  firmly,  is  constructed  very  similarly 
by  all  builders.  Three  views,  a  front  elevation,  a  side  elevation 
and  a  section  of  this  device  are  shown  in  Fio-.  43. 


480  REVS. 


6  LAPS      SPEED  240  _ 


672 -3.75DIA. 4TH. 


Fig.  42.     Evener  Cones  with  Incorrect  Outlines. 

The  lap,  which  is  wound  upon  the  lap  arbor,  N3,  is  held  in 
contact  with  the  lap  roll,  Y,  by  the  racks,  K  and  K1,  which  bear 
upon  either  end  of  the  lap  roll.  The  top  of  the  racks  is  recessed 
to  receive  two  rolls,  A  and  B,  which  form  roller  bearings  and 
which  greatly  reduce  the  friction  and  wear  upon  the  lap  roll.  The 
lower  end  of  the  rack,  K  is  in  gear  with  the  pinion,  W,  while  K1 


89 


54 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


is  in  gear  with  the  pinion,  D ;  both  pinions  are  secured  to  the  rack 
shaft,  G.  The  gear,  R,  also  on  the  rack  shaft,  is  connected  with 
the  pinion,  O,  which  is  on  the  hub  of  the  break  pulley,  N,  by 
the  gears,  S  and  P.  These  gears  turri  loose  on  the  shaft,  L,  and 
are  held  in  position  by  the  collars,  F  and  H.  The  break  pulley, 
N,  is  free  to  turn  on  the  rack  shaft  and  is  held  hi  position  by  the 
collar,  C.  Loose  upon  the  shaft,  L,  is  the  break  lever,  E,  which 
bears  against  the  under  side  of  the  break  pulley  and  is  kept  in  con- 


SIDE  ELEVATION 


Fig.  43.     Friction  Let-off. 

fcact  with  it  by  the  weight,  M.  The  face  of  the  break  lever  which 
bears  against  the  pulley  is  lined  with  leather. 

As  the  lap  increases  in  diameter,  it  draws  up  on  the  racks 
which  are  kept  from  rising  by  the  friction  of  the  break  lever  against 
the  break  pulley.  When  it  has  been  wound  to  its  full  diameter, 
the  attendant  presses  down  upon  the  break  lever,  releasing  it  from 
contact  with  the  break  pulley;  then  the  rack  can  be  raised  by 
turning  the  handwheel,  J,  on  the  end  of  the  rack  shaft. 

In  order  to  bring  both  racks  to  the  same  height,  so  that  the 
lap  will  be  wound  equally  in  diameter  on  each  end,  the  pinion,  D, 
which  gears  into  the  rack,  KI,  is  keyed  directly  to  the  rack  shaft 


90 


Q  S 

W  2 

<  "S 

i  1 

s  < 

Crt 


it 


W 

Z 

8  I 

BS  £ 
a 

z  =3 

Cd    _ 


S  B 


COTTON  SPINNING.  55 


while  the  pinion,  W,  which  gears  into  the  rack,  K,  is  connected  to 
the  rack  shaft  by  a  lug  projecting  between  the  arms  of  a  dog,  or 
carrier,  T,  which  is  keyed  to  the  rack  shaft.  In  the  arms  of  the 
dog  are  adjusting  screws,  T1  and  T2,  which  bear  against  the  pro- 
jecting lug  of  the  pinion  and  by  turning  these  screws  the  pinion 
can  be  moved  a  slight  distance  around  the  rack  shaft  in  either 
direction  and  the  rack,  K,  brought  exactly  in  line  with  the  rack, 
10. 

On  warm,  damp  days,  the  leather  facing  of  the  break  lever 
adheres  closely  to  the  break  pulley  and  it  is  often  necessary  to 
move  the  weight,  M,  in  from  the  end  of  the  break  lever,  thus  re- 
ducing the  pressure  of  the  lever  against  the  break  pulley.  Some- 
times it  is  necessary  to  remove  the  weight  as  too  great  pressure 
tends  to  break  the  lap  rolls  and  to  wind  too  hard  laps,  which  may 
split  when  unrolled. 

Care  should  be  taken  in  oiling  to  avoid  getting  oil  upon  the 
break  pulley  as  the  friction  is  rendered  well-nigh  useless  and  the 
lap  is  consequently  too  soft. 

Automatic  Safety-stop.  It  is  necessary  that  the  laps,  particu- 
larly those  from  the  finisher  picker,  shall  be  as  free  as  possible  from 
foreign  substances  which,  if  by  accident  are  wound  into  the  lap, 
cause  considerable  injury  to  the  card.  Most  pickers  are  provided 
"vvith  some  form  of  device  to  prevent  this.  Two  views  of  an  auto- 
matic safety-stop  are  shown  in  Fig.  44,  a  side  elevation  and  a 
partial  front  elevation. 

The  calender  rolls,  feed  rolls  and  cages  are  all  driven  by  the 
pinion,  S,  through  the  gear,  R,  which  is  upon  one  of  the  calender 
rolls,  consequently,  by  disengaging  these  gears,  the  calender  rolls 
and  parts  connected  are  stopped.  This  is  accomplished  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner  :  The  cotton,  after  leaving  the  cages,  passes  between 
the  top  and  second  calender  rolls,  L  and  N.  Resting  on  the  top 
of  .the  bearings,  at  either  end  of  the  top  calender  roll,  is  a  lever, 
F,  called  the  top  lever.  The  rolls,  which  are  heavily  weighted, 
are  connected  to  the  weight  by  the  top  lever,  the  rod,  H,  and  the 
weight  lever,  G,  upon  which  is  the  weight,  J.  The  weight  lever 
has  its  fulcrum  at  K.  Directly  above  a  part  of  the  weight  lever 
is  the  knock-off  lever,  A,  which  turns  on  the  shaft,  C,  and  has  a 
s-j  -ew,  D,  near  its  inner  end  by  which  it  is  adjusted  and  which 


91 


56 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


bears  against  a  lug,  projecting  from  the  weight  lever.  When  it  is 
in  its  normal  position,  its  outer  end  is  just  clear  of  the  under  side 
of  the  knock-off  latch,  E.  This  latch  turns  on  the  stud,  T,  and 
has  a  notch,  B1,  in  its  upper  end  by  which  the  drop  lever,  M,  that 
carries  the  pinion,  S,  is  held  in  position.  Should  any  foreign  sub- 
stance be  drawn  between  the  calender  rolls,  the  unusual  thickness 
of  the  lap  caused  by  it  will  lift  the  top  calender  roll,  and,  through 
the  connection  just  described,  the  knock-off  lever  will  be  raised 
and  its  outer  end  brought  in  contact  with  the  knock-off  latch 


Fig.  44.     Automatic  Safety  Stop. 

which  in  turn  will  be  moved  to  one  side,  allowing  the  drop  lever 
to  fall,  disengaging  the  gears,  R  and  S,  and  stopping  the  calender 
rolls.  The  adjusting  screw  enables  the  picker  to  be  set  so  that  a 
very  slight  increase  of  thickness  in  the  lap  will  cause  the  picker  to 
knock  off,  as  it  will  also  when  the  evener  fails  to  take  care  of 
unusually  heavy  laps. 

Knock-off  Device.  In  order  to  get  the  best  results,  the  laps 
should  be  as  near  the  same  weight  as  possible ;  not  that  each 
square  yard  of  lap  must  weigh  the  same,  but  the  total  wei^U1 
of  each  lap  must  be  within  one-half  pound  variation  of  a  ion,}' 
pound  lap.  In  some  cases,  for  very  fine  work,  particularly  with 


92 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


57 


single  carding  and  the  revolving  flat  card,  each  lap  from  the 
finisher  picker  is  weighed,  and,  if  found  to  vary  from  the  limit, 
which  has  been  established  as  a  standard,  is  not  allowed  to  p:iss 
to  the  card-room.  Sometimes  every  other  lap  is  weighed  and 
often  they  are  weighed  every  hour  though 'in  some  mills  it  is  not 
considered  necessary  to  weigh  them  more  than  once  or  twice  a  day. 

Calculations.  The  weight  of  the  lap  is  governed  by  the  num- 
ber of  yards  it  contains  and  is  measured  by  the  revolutions  of  the 
lap  roll,  the  picker  being  stopped  automatically  after  the  required 
number  of  yards  has  been  wound.  The  device,  by  which  this  is 
regulated,  is  called  the  knock-off,  a  diagram  of  the  gearing  of 
which  is  shown  in  Fig.  45,  which  should  be  used  in  connection 
with  Fig.  44; 

The  knock-off,  or  change  gear,  K,  is  driven  from  the  calender 
by  the  side  shaft,  B.  Loose  upon  the  hub  of  this  gear  is  a  dog, 


SINGLE:  WORM 
/ 


LAP  ROLL  9"DlA 
Fig.  45.     Diagram  of  Knock-off  Gearing. 


CHANCC 
GETAR 


W,  driven  by  a  phi,  V,  which  forms  part  of  the  gear.  As  the  lat- 
ter turns,  the  dog  is  brought  against  the  upper  end  of  the  knock- 
off  latch,  E,  moving  it  out  and  allowing  the  drop  lever,  M,  to  fall, 
disengaging  the  pinion,  S,  and  the  gear,  R,  and,  as  the  .dog  assumes 
a  vertical  position,  by  reason  of  being  loose  on  the  hub  of  the 
gear,  the  picker  can  be  started  immediately  after  it  has  knocked 
off  and  the  lap  has  been  removed.  The  knock-off  gear  makes  one 
revolution  for  each  lap  wound,  so  a  change  in  the  number  of  teeth 
it,  contains  gives  a  different  number  of  yards  in  a  lap. 

When  the  weight  per  yard  and  the  total  weight  of  the  lap 


93 


58  COTTON  SPINNING. 

have  been  established,  the  constant  number  or  factor,  by  which 
the  number  of  teeth  in  the  knock-off  gear  is  calculated,  can  be 
figured.  The  lap  rolls  are  9  inches  in  diameter,  or  28.27  inches  in 
circumference,  therefore  1.27  revolutions  will  be  required  to  wind 
one  yard,  thus :  36  -4-  28.27  =  1.27. 

On  the  end  of  the  lap  roll  is  a  gear  of  37  teeth  which  is  driven 
from  a  pinion  of  18  teeth.  Compounded  with  the  pinion  is  a  gear 
of  73  teeth,  which  is  driven  from  the  calender  shaft  by  a  pinion 
of  14  teeth.  On  the  right  end  of  the  calender  shaft  is  a  pinion, 
S,  of  13  teeth  which,  drives  the  gear,  R,  of  80  teeth.  On  the  hub 
of  the  latter  is  a  single-threaded  worm  which  drives  a  gear  of  35 
teeth  which  is  upon  the  side  shaft.  On  the  opposite  end  of  the 
side  shaft  is  a  pinion  of  18  teeth,  which  drives  the  knock-off,  K, 
through  the  intermediate  gear  of  30  teeth. 

Following  are  the  rules  governing  the  calculations  for  tks 
picker : 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  factor  for  the  knock-off  gear,  multiply 
the  drivers  together  and  divide  the  product  by  the  product  of  the 
driven  gears  multiplied  by  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  lap 
roll  necessary  to  wind  one  yard,  leaving  out  all  intermediate  gears 
and  the  knock-off  gear. 

35.X  80X14X18  87Q 

Example  :  =  .879 

18  X  1  X  13  X  73  X  37  X  1.27 

Rule  2. .  To  find  the  number  of  yards  in  a  lap,  multiply  the 
factor  by  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  knock-off  gear,  30. 

Example:     .879  X  30  =  26.37 

Rule  3.  To  find  the  number  of  yards  in  a  lap,  without  using 
the  factor,  multiply  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  knock-off  gear  by 
the  product  of  the  drivers,  and  divide  that  product  by  the  product 
of  the  driven  gears  multiplied  by  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the 
lap  roll  necessary  to  wind  one  yard,  leaving  out  all  intermediate 
gears. 

W  30  X  35  X  80  X  14  X  18 

ExamPle:     18  X  1  X  13  X  73  X  37  X  1.27  : 

Rule  4.     To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  knock-off  gear, 
divide  the  number  of  yards  in  the  lap  by  the  factor. 
Example  :     26.37  -f-  .879  =  30 


94 


COTTON  SPINNING.  59 

The  weight  of  the  laps  from  the  finisher  picker  depends  upon 
the  production  required,  the  counts  of  yarn  it  is  desired  to  make 
and  the  class  of  cotton  used.  It  will  run  from  10  to  16  ounces 
per  yard.  T/he  laps  on  the  apron  of  the  finisher  picker  will  aver- 
age about  15  ounces  per  yard,  and  as  there  are  four  laps  on  the 
apron  at  one  time,  the  combined  weight  of  the  laps  entering 
the  finisher  is  60  ounces  per  yard,  and  as  the  weight  of  the  lap 
from  the  finisher  is  between  10  and  16  ounces  per  yard,  it  is 
evident  that  some  means  must  be  employed  to  reduce  this  weight 
to  that  required.  This  is  accomplished  by  introducing  a  certain 
amount  of  draft  between  the  feed  rolls  and  the  lap  rolls.  By  the 
word  draft,  as  applied  to  cotton  machinery,  is  meant  the  ratio  of 
the  length  of  lap  passing  the  lap  rolls  in  a  given  time,  to  the  length 
of  lap  which  passes  the  feed  rolls  in  the  same  time.  If  the  circum- 
ferential velocity  of  the  feed  rolls  is  25  feet  per  minute,  while  in 
the  same  time  the  velocity  of  the  lap  roll  is  one  hundred  feet  or 
four  times  as  much,  there  is  a  draft  of  four.  It  follows  if  the  com- 
bined weight  entering  the  feed  rolls  is  60  ounces  per  yard,  the 
weight  delivered  will  be  one-fourth  as  much,  or  15  cunces  per 
yard. 

To  make  this  clear  to  those  not  familiar  with  the  subject,  we 
will  call  the  weight  of  each  of  the  laps  on  the  apron  of  the  finisher 
16  ounces  per  yard  and  that  of  ihe  lap  delivered  by  the  finisher 
15  ounces  per  yard.  The  draft  will  be  found  in  the  following  way : 

Rule  5.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  finisher,  multiply  the  num- 
ber of  laps  on  the  apron  by  the  weight  per  yard  and  divide  the 
product  by  the  weight  of  the  lap  being- delivered. 

Example  :        =  4.2 

15 

Rule  6.  To  find  the  weight  of  lap  being  delivered,  draft 
being  known,  multiply  the  number  of  laps  on  the  apron  by  the 
weight  per  yard  and  divide  the  product  by  the  draft. 

4  X  16 

Example  :     =  15. 

4.2 

After  the  draft  has  been  calculated,  which  in  this  case  we 
have  found  to  be  4.2,  the  draft  factor,  or  constant  number,  must 


95 


60 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


be  found  by  which  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear  may  be 
determined.  A  diagram  of  the  gearing  of  a  finisher  picker  is 
snown  in  Fig.  46. 


Pi 

it 


The  feed  roll  is  2£  inches  in  diameter  and  has  upon  the  end 
a  spur  gear  of  12  teeth,  which  is  driven  from  the  evener  roll  by  a 
gear  of  16  teeth.  Compounded  with  this  gear  is  one  of  28  teeth, 


96 


COTTON  SPINNING.  61 

which  is  driven  from  the  apron  roll  by  a  gear  of  20  teeth.  On 
the  outer  end  of  the  apron  roll  is  a  worm  gear  of  85  teeth  that  is 
driven  by  a  single-threaded  worm  which  is  upon  one  end  of  the 
evener  cone.  The  diameter  of  the  evener  cone  is  taken  at  a  point 
midway  of  the  ends  and  is  3^  inches.  The  cone  is  driven  from  a 
10-inch  diameter  drum  on  the  side  shaft.  On  the  front  end  of  the 
side  shaft  is  a  bevel  gear  of  54  teeth,  driven  from  a  similar  gear  of 
40  teeth  compounded  with  a  spur  gear  of  30  teeth,  which  is  driven 
from  the  draft  gear,  E,  (on  the  end  of  the  driving  shaft)  through 
an  intermediate  gear  of  60  teeth.  On  the  other  end  of  the  driving 
shaft  is  a  pinion  of  14  teeth,  which  drives  the  lap  rolls  through 
gears  of  76,  14,  73,  18  and  37  teeth.  The  last  gear  is  upon  the 
lap  rolls  which  are  nine  inches  in  diameter. 

Rule  7.  To  find  the  constant  number,  or  factor,  of  the  picker, 
multiply  the  diameter  of  the  lap  roll  by  the  drivers  and  divide  the 
product  by  the  product  of  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roll  multiplied 
by  the  driven  gears,  leaving  out  all  intermediate  gears  and  the 
draft  gear. 
.  Example  : 


9  X  18  X  14  X  14  X  30  X  54  X  3}  X  85  X  28  X  12 


__  ^ 


2|  X  37  X  73  X  76  X  40  X  10  X  1  X  20  X  16 

Rule  8.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear,  divide 
the  draft  factor  by  the  draft,  42. 

Example  :     85.51  -4-  4.2  =  20 

Rule  9.  To  find  the  draft,  when  the  number  of  teeth  in  the 
draft  gear  is  known,  divide  the  draft  factor  by  the  number  of  teeth 
in  the  draft  gear,  20. 

Example  :     85.51  -~  20  =  4.2 

Rule  10.  To  find  the  draft,  without  first  finding  the  factor, 
multiply  the  diameter  of  the  lap  roll  by  the  drivers  and  divide  the 
product  by  the  product  of  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roll  multiplied 
by  the  driven  gears  and  the  draft  gear,  leaving  out  the  inter- 
mediate gears. 

Example  : 

9  X  18  X  14  X  14  X  30  X  54  X  3*  X  85  X  28  X  12  _  1  2 
2*  X  37  X  73  x  76  X  20  X  40  X  10  X  1  X  20  X  16  ~ 


97 


62  COTTON  SPINNING. 


Rule  11.  To  find  the  speed  of  the  beater,  multiply  the  speed 
of  the  countershaft  by  the  diameter  of  the  pulley,  A,  (24  inches) 
and  divide  the  product  by  the  diameter  of  the  beater  pulley,  B,  (8 
inches) . 

^  500  X  24        1CA/ 

Example:  -  =  1500. 

8 

Rule  12.  To  find  the  speed  of  the  fan,  multiply  the  speed  of 
the  beater  by  the  diameter  of  the  pulley,  C,  (5  inches)  and  divide 
the  product  by  the  diameter  of  the  pulley,  D,  (8  inches). 

Example:     150°  X  5  =  937.5 

Rule  1 3.  To  find  the  factor  for  the  production  of  the  picker, 
multiply  together  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  beater  shaft, 
the  circumference  of  the  lap  roll  and  the  drivers  and  divide  the 
product  by  the  product  of  the  diameter  of  the  pulley  on  the  calen- 
der head  (24  inches)  multiplied  by  the  driven  gears  and  36  (num- 
ber of  inches  in  a  yard). 

1500  X  28.27  X  14  X  14  X  18 

Example:  -  =  .8435 

24  X  76  X  73  X  37  X  36 

Rule  14.  To  find  the  production  of  the  picker,  multiply  the 
factor,  the  diameter  of  the  feed  pulley,  F,  (4|  inches)  the  minutes 
run  per  day  (600)  and  the  weight  of  the  lap  per  yard  (15  ounces) 
together  and  divide  the  product  by  ounces  per  pound. 

.8435  X  4J  X  600  X  15 
Example:     ? ==  2135.10  Ibs. 


98 


COTTON  SPINNING. 

PART  II. 


CARDING. 

After  the  cotton  has  passed  through  the  opening  and  clean- 
ing process,  there  still  remains  a  considerable  amount  of  leaf, 
sand,  particles  of  seed  and  small  clusters  of  unripe  fibers  which 
must  be  removed  before  it  can  be  spun  properly  into  yarn.  If  we 
examine  carefully  a  lap  from  the  finisher  picker,  we  shall  see  that 
in  addition  to  these  impurities,  the  fibers  lie  in  different  direc- 
tions in  small  tangled  tufts  of  unequal  thickness  and  density, 
also  that  it  is  necessary  to  comb  or  card  them  to  disentangle, 
straighten  and  clean  them. 

Arrangement  of  Card  Room.  The  cotton  card,  like  all  other 
machines  used  in  cotton  spinning,  has  grown  from  a  very  primitive 
form.  At  the  present ,time,  the  revolving  flat  card  is  used  almost 
exclusively.  Before  entering  upon  a  description  of  the  card,  some 
attention  should  be  given  to  the  placing  of  the  machinery  in  the 
card  room.  An  arrangement  adopted  in  many  mills  is  shown  in 
plan  in  Fig.  47  and  in  sectional  elevation  in  Fig.  48. 

The  cards  are  placed  in  rows,  extending  lengthwise  of  the 
mill,  six  to  seven  feet  on  centers  except  where  a  line  comes 
between  columns.  The  alleys  should  be  about  four  feet  wide  if 
space  will  permit.  This  allows  a  lap  truck  to  pass  down  the 
alley,  clear  of  the  machines,  a  point  which  should  be  considered, 
as  laps  are  frequently  torn  by  coming  in  contact  with  the  machin- 
ery. The  cards  in  two  adjoining  lines  should  be  placed  with  the 
coilers  towards  each  other,  except  when  the  width  of  the  mill  is 
such  as  to  cause  an  odd  number  of  rows,  us  shown  in  the  draw- 
ings. In  that  case  the  odd  row,  is  placed,  usually,  in  the  center  of 
the  room. 

The  shafting  for  driving  the  cards  should  be  placed  over  the 
front  or  coiler  alley,  so  that  the  driving  belt  will  not  interfere 
with  the  application  of  the  flat  grinder  which  is  attached  at  the 


101 


64 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


back  on  most  cards.  In  no  case  should  the  shafting  be  placed 
over  the  cards,  as  oil  is  very  apt  to  work  out  of  the  hanger  boxes 
and  drop  on  to  the  clothing  of  the  flats  and  destroy  it  completely. 
The  cards  should  be  so  arranged  that  each  is  driven  from  a 
separate  pulley.  'This  is  more  necessary  than  it  seems  at  first 


thought.  If  the  cards  are  not  erected  exactly  parallelly  with  the 
shaft,  the  driving  belt  may  run  to  one  side  of  the  face  of  the 
pulley  and  to  overcome  this  the  pulley  is  moved  slightly  along 
the  shaft.  If  two  cards  were  driven  from  the  same  pulley,  this 
could  not  be  done.  With  the  old-fashioned  top  flat  cards  it  was 


102 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


65 


customary  to  drive  two  from  the  same  pulley,  the  pulley  having  a 
flange  in  the  center  of  the  face,  which  formed  a  division  between 
the  two  belts.  If  the  cards  were  not  set  parallelly  with  the  shaft, 


iSSSSS?^^!::^^^^^ 


eS 

6 


QO 
i* 

bo 


the  belt  would  run  to  one  side.     To  remedy  this,  the  cards,  instead 
of  the  pulleys,  were  moved  enough  to  cause  the  belt  to  run  true,  but 


103 


66 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


bfl 

p 

> 

"3 

> 

0) 

K 


be 

E 


104 


COTTON  SPINNING.  67 

with  the  revolving  flat  cards,  it  is  not  considered  advisable  to  move 
them,  as  the  settings  are  easily  disturbed. 

Theory  of  Carding.  In  the  sectional  elevation  shown  in 
Fig.  49,  the  lap,  A,  from  the  finisher  picker,  is  placed  in  the  lap 
stands  and  rests  upon  the  lap  roll,  B,  by  which  it  is  revolved 
slowly,  the  surface  speed  of  the  lap  roll  being  just  sufficient  to 
unwind  the  lap  at  the  same  speed  that  it  is  received  by  the  feed 
roll.  It  then  passes  forward  on  the  feed  plate,  C,  and  under  the 
feed  roll,  E.  As  the  fibers  pass  up  over  the  curved  part  or  nose 
of  the  feed  plate,  they  come  in  contact  with  the  teeth  of  the 
leader  or  licker-in,  G,  which  is  about  9i  inches  in  diameter  and  is 
covered  with  steel  teeth,  inserted  in  its  surface,  which  resemble 
the  teeth  of  a  saw.  The  action  of  the  leader  is  twofold ;  that  of 
removing  dirt  and  that  of  combing  and  straightening  the  fibers. 
When  the  teeth  of  the  leader  (the  surface  speed  of  which  is  about 
1,050  revolutions  per  minute)  strike  the  fibers,  the  force  of  the 
blow  strikes  down  and  partially  removes  the  dirt.  The  fibers, 
which  have  now  advanced  far  enough  beyond  the  bite  of  the  feed 
roll,  are  removed  and  carried  by  the  leader,  while  those  which  are 
held  by  the  feed  roll  are  combed  and  straightened.  The  fibers 
thus  receive  a  very  effectual  cleaning,  more  dirt  being  removed  at 
this  point  than  in  any  part  of  the  card.  As  they  are  carried 
around  by  the  leader,  the  fibers  are  drawn  over  the  top  edge  of 
the  mote  knife,  D,  which  also  aids  in  cleaning.  Directly  under 
the  leader  is  a  screen  or  grid,  F,  called  the  leader  screen.  The 
part  of  the  screen  with  which  the  fibers  come  in  contact  first  con- 
sists of  a  series  of  bars,  running  across  from  side  to  side  of  the 
card;  the  rest  of  the  screen,  fcom  the  last  bar  to  a  point  where  it 
is  hinged  to  the  cylinder  screen,  is  perforated  with  small  holes. 
The  object  of  this  screen  is  to  prevent  the  cotton  from  leaving  the 
leader,  and  to  allow  foreign  substances,  which,  being  heavier,  are 
thrown  out  by  centrifugal  force,  to  drop  through  these  perfora- 
tions. 

The  fibers,  which  have  been  brought  around  by  the  leader, 
are  now  taken  up  by  the  cylinder,  H;  the  surface  velocity  of 
which  is  a  little  more  than  twice  that  of  the  leader.  The  wire 
teeth  (card  clothing)  of  the  cylinder  are  much  finer  than  those  of 
the  leader,  and  as  both  surfaces  run  in  the  same  direction,  the 


105 


68  COTTON    SPINNING. 


fibers  are  readily  stripped  from  the  teeth  of  the  leader  and  are 
carried  forward  under  the  flats,  B5,  to  the  doffer,  L.  The  flats  are 
faced  with  card  clothing,  similar  to  that  of  the  cylinder,  and 
embrace  a  little  more  than  one- third  of  its  circumference  and 
travel  slowly  in  the  same  direction  as  the  cylinder.  As  the  fibers 
are  carried  under  each  successive  flat,  they  become  more  thor- 
oughly cleaned  and  straightened.  The  speed  of  the  cylinder 
plays  an  important  part  in  this  operation.  If  the  fibers  are  short, 
they  will  be  removed  by  the  flats,  but  if  sufficiently  long,  they  will 
hold  to  the  cylinder  and  be  combed  by  them.  The  fibers  are  now 
transferred  to  the  doffer.  Just  how  this  is  done  may  be  perplex- 
ing to  many,  but  if  we  stop  to  consider  a  moment,  it  will  be  found 
very  simple.  Although  the  surfaces  of  the  cylinder  and  doffer 
run  in  the  same  direction,  the  clothing  of  each  stands  at  a  differ- 
ent angle,  the  doffer  clothing  presenting  a  series  of  hooks  upon 
which  the  fibers  are  caught  and  drawn  from  the  cylinder.  If  we 
examine  the  cylinder  closely,  we  will  see  that  many  of  the  fibers 
stand  out  from  its  surface,  not  in  straight  lines  parallel  with  the 
circumference,  but  in  a  loosely  tangled  mass  which  is  effected 
partly  by  centrifugal  force  but  more  by  the  naturally  irregular 
disposition  of  the  cotton,  and,  as  most  of  the  fibers  are  carried 
around  by  the  cylinder  a  great  many  times  before  they  are  trans- 
ferred to  the  doffer,  their  repeated  passing  beneath  the  flats 
changes  their  position  and  finally  results  in  their  withdrawal 
from  the  cylinder.  Then,  too,  the  fibers  cross  and  recross  each 
other,  so  the  withdrawal  of  one  or  more  easily  affects  the  others. 

Beneath  the  cylinder  is  the  cylinder  screen,  K,  which  extends 
from  the  leader  screen  almost  to  the  doffer  and  which  is  made  in 
two  parts,  hinged  in  about  the  center.  For  the  greater  part  of 
the  length,  each  half  consists  of  a  series  of  bars,  running  from  side 
to  side.  If  no  screen  is  used  under  the  cylinder,  its  high  surface 
velocity  (about  2,150  feet  per  minute)  will  cause  the  fibers  to 
stand  out  and  finally  become  detached  but  with  a  screen,  this  can- 
not happen  while  the  heavier  impurities,  thrown  out  by  centrifu- 
gal force,  fall  between  the  bars. 

The  doffer,  which  is  24|  inches  in  diameter  outside  of  the 
wire  clothing,  runs  at  a  very  slow  speed,  not  over  twenty  revo- 
lutions per  minute  at  the  most.  Consequently  the  fibers  are 


106 


«    'Si 
1/3      « 

I       fl 

51 

S  B 


COTTOX    SPINNING. 


69 


FEED  ROLL 


it    is    condensed 
a    soft,  rope-like 


Fig.  50.     Feed  Plate  for  short  staple  cotton. 


deposited  on  its  surface  in  a  more  condensed  form  tlia:i  on  the 
cylinder  and  they  are  carried  around  and  combed  off  by  the 
doffer  comb,  N,  which  draws  them  from  the  points  of  the  teeth, 
and,  as  they  ,lie  very  loosely  upon  the  surface  of  the  doffer,  they 
are  detached  easily. 

The  fleece,  or  web, 
is  now  passed  between 
the  calender  rolls,M,  by 
which 
into 

mass,  called  sliver. 
From  here  it  is  drawn 
upwards  and  enters  the 
coiler,  R,  where  it  is 
coiled  very  compactly  into  the  can,  S. 

Feed  Plates.  The  operation  of  carding  having  been  consid- 
ered in  general,  the  details  of  the  card  will  now  be  described, 
starting  with  the  feed  plate. 

Figs.  50,  51,  52  and  53  show  sections  of  different  feed 
plates,  which  provide  for  the  various  lengths  of  fibers,  so  that  they 
miy  be  coaibed  without  injury  to  the  staple.  Fig.  50  shows  a 
feed  plate  used  for  short  staple  and  waste  cotton.  The  distance 
from  the  bite  of  the  feed 
roll  to  the  lower  edge,  or 
point  where  the  teeth  of 
the  leader  are  nearest 
to  the  face,  is  quite 
short.  The  next  plate, 
Fi;r.  51,  is  for  medium 

o 

length    staple    and    the 

distance  from    the    bite 

of  the  feed  roll  to    the 

lower  edge  of  the  face  of 

the  feed  plate  is  considerably  greater  than  in  Fig.  50,  and  the  nose 

much  sharper.     Fig.  52  is  for  long  staple  Egyptian  cotton.     It 

will  be  seen  that  the  distance  from  the  bite  of  the  feed  roll  to  the 

lower  edge  of  the  plate  is  greater  than  in  either  of  the  others  and 

the  nose  is  still  more  pointed. 


FEED  ROLL 


Fig.  51.    Feed  Plate  for  medium  staple  cotton- 


107 


70 


COTTOX  SPINNING. 


FEED  ROLL 


Fig.  52.     Feed  Plate  for  Egyptian  Cotton. 


The  last  plate,  shown  iu  Fig.  53,  is  for  Sea  Island  cotton. 
In  this  style,  the  length  of  the  face  is  greater  than  on  the  plates 
used  for  all  other  varieties  of  cotton.  The  exact  size  and  outline 
of  the  no.se  and  face  of  the  plates  are  shown  at  the  right  hand  of 

the  drawing  in  all  four 
views;  the  distance  between 
the  bite  of  the  feed  roll  and 
the  lower  edge  of  the  plate 
is  indicated  by  dotted  lines. 
in  all  cases,  this  distance 
should  be  slightly  more 
(from  |-  to  -|  of  an  inch) 
than  the  average  length  of 
staple  being  worked,  other- 
wise, the  fibers  will  be 
broken  by  the  leader  teeth  trying  to  take  them  away  before  they 
are  liberated  from  the  bite  of  the  feed  roll.  The  angle  of  the  face 
of  the  feed  plate  should  be  such  as  to  cause  the  teeth  of  the  leader 
to  comb  the  fibers  for  about  two-thirds  their  length  before  they 
become  detached. 

In  Fig.  54  is  shown 
a  section  of  an  adjust- 
able feed  plate,  intended 
to  provide  for  different 
lengths  of  fibers.  This 
plate  consists  of  two 
parts ;  a  top  piece,  A , 
which  is  movable  and 
is  adjusted  by  the  screw, 
C,  and  a  base  piece,  B, 
which  is  fastened  to  the 
side  of  the  card.  Strips 
of  wood,  D,  of  different 

thicknesses,  are  used  to  fill  the  space  between  the  pieces.     This  plate 
possesses  no  merits,  not  giving  good  results  when  put  into  use. 

Fig.  55  shows  the  method  used  for  feeding  the  card  before 
the  feed  plate  became  generally  adopted.  It  may  be  found  still 
on  the  old  style  of  stationary  top  cards.  Instead  of  a  single  feed 


FEED  ROLL 


Fig.  53.     Feed  Plate  for  Sea  Island  Cotton. 


108 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


71 


roll,  two  rolls  were  used  which  were  about  1|  inches  in  diameter. 
The  cotton  was  carried  forward  between  them  to'  the  leader,  or 
cylinder,  many  of  the  older  cards  having  no  leader.  The  distance 
from  the  bite., of  the  feed  rolls  to  the  point  of  contact  with  the 

leader  (indicated  by 
radial  lines  A  and  B) 
was  about  1|  inches, 
and,  unless  the  h'  b  e  r  s 
were  at  least  1]  inches 
long,  they  became  de- 
tached from  the  bite  of 
the  rolls  before  they  had 
received  any  combing 


Fig.  54.     Adjustable  Feed  Plate. 


FEED  ROLL 


and  the  cotton  was  de- 
livered to  the  cylinder 
in  small  tufts.  .  To 

remedy  this,  the     rolls    were  made   small   in    diameter    but    this 

introduced    another   evil ;    the    rolls  would   spring   apart  in  the 

center  and  cause  the  lap   to  be    fed    very   unevenly. 

The  half-tone  in  Fig.  50  shows  two  sections  of  laps  taken 

from  cards.     The  one  marked  A  was  from  a  card  provided  with  a 

feed  plate  while  B  was 

taken   from    an   old 

style  card   with    two 

feed  rolls.   The  point, 

where  the  fibers  were 

liberated,  is  indicated 

by  a   horizontal    line 

and  it  will    be    seen 

that  in  section  A,  they 

were  combed    and 

cleaned    for  a  much  greater  portion    of  their  length    than  were 

those  in  section  B  which  received  very  little  combing,  before  being 

taken  away  by  the  leader.     The  fibers  are  always    more    or  less 

broken  by  this  method. 

Leader,  Cylinder  and  Flats.     A  section  of  the  leader,  the 

cylinder  and  the  parts  connected  and  a  section  of  a  flat  in  relation 

to  the  cylinder  are  shown  in  Fig.  57. 


Feed  Rolls  lor  old  style  cards. 


109 


72  COTTON    SPINNING. 

The  mote  knife,  D,  is  adjusted  in  either  direction,  horizontally 
by  moving  the  bracket^  D1,  by  which  it  is  attached  to  the  leader 
shroud,  and  vertically  by  the  screw,  D2.  The  correct  distance 
from  the  teeth  of  the  leader  may  be  obtained  in  this  way  very 
easily,  and  as  the  leader  shroud  moves  with  the  leader  shaft  when 
the  position  of  the  leader  is  changed,  the  mote  knife  moves  with 
it,  avoiding  the  necessity  of  resetting;  Over  the  leader  is  a  steel 


Fig.  56.     Section  of  card  sliver. 

bonnet,  J,  called  the  leader  bonnet.  At  the  point  where  this  cover 
and  the  back  plate,  T,  come  together  is  placed  a  round  iron  rod,  P, 
covered  with  flannel,  which  serves  as  a  fill-up  piece,  preventing 
the  dust  and  short  fibers  from  blowing  out.  Resting  upon  the 
feed  roll  and  between  it  and  the  leader  bonnet  is  another  rod,  P, 
similar  to  the  one  just  described.  At  this  point,  the  rod  performs 
double  duty,  keeping  the  dust  from  blowing  out  and  also  acting 
as  a  clearer  for  the  feed  roll. 

In  the  section  of  the  flat  and  the  cylinder,  it  will  be  seen  that 
the  space  between  the  wires  of  each  is  greater  at  the  toe,  or  point, 
where  the  cotton  enters  than  at  the  heel  where  it  leaves.  By 
inclining  the  flat  in  this  manner,  the  fibers  receive  combing  from 


no 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


73 


the  greater  portion  of  its  wires,  and,  as  they  stand  out  slightly 
from  the  surface  of  the  cylinder  by  -being  drawn  into  a  small 
space,  are  more  easily  dealt  with  than  they  would  be  if  the  flat 
were  brought,  close  at  the  toe. 

Cylinder  Doffer  and  Flats.  In  Fig.  58  is  shown  a  partial 
section  through  the  cylinder,  doffer  and  parts  directly  connected. 
The  flats,  B3,  pass  around  the  front  block,  W1,  in  the  direction 
shown  by  the  arrow  and  the  short  fibers,  or  strippings,  which 


Fig.  67.    Section  of  cylinder,  leader  and  flat. 

adhere  to  them,  are  removed  by  the  stripping  comb,  W2.  Passing 
along  toward  the  rear  of  the  card,  they  are  cleaned  by  a  revolving 
brush,  W3,  called  the  stripping  brush  which  is  itself  cleaned  by  a 
stationary  comb,  W4,  called  the  stripping  brush  comb.  Directly 
beneath  the  stripping  comb  is  the  strip  roll,  W5.  This  is  a 
wooden  roll  about  li  inches  in  diameter,  covered  with  flannel  and 
supported  at  either  end  by  arms,  W6.  As  the  flats  pass  around 
the  front  block,  the  strippings,  which  are  removed  by  the  comb, 


111 


74 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


are  wound  upon  the  roll  which  revolves  by  being  held  lightly  in 
contact  with  the  flats. 

It  was  the  custom,  formerly,  to  allow  the  strippings  to  drop 
upon  the  doffer  cover  in  a  loose  mass  and,  when  an  amount  had 
collected,  it  was  removed.  With  the  strip  roll  the  strippings  are 
wound  in  a  neat  and  very  compact  form  and  can  be  removed  very 


Fig.  68.     Section  of  cylinder  and  doffer. 

quickly,  and  by  reason  of  the  compactness,  the  removal  does  not 
have  to  be  performed  so  often. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  grind,  or  strip,  the  cylinder,  the  door, 
W7,  which  is  hinged  to  the  front  plate,  can  be  turned  down  as 
shown  by  dotted  lines.  Over  the  doffer  is  a  cover,  L1,  called  the 
doffer  bonnet,  which  is  fastened  to  the  doffer  shroud,  L2,  which, 
in  turn,  is  fastened  to  the  doffer  bearing,  L3. 

The  main  cylinder  is  made  50"  in  diameter  by  40"  or  45"  face. 


112 


COTTON    SPINNING.  75 

The  doffer  is  made  24",  27"  or  28"  in  diameter  and  40"  or 
45"  face.  The  clothing  adds.  ^"  to  the  diameter.  The  flats  are 
1|"  wide  and  there  are  104  or  110  in  a  chain.  With  104,  there 
are  39  at  work  arid  with  110,  there  are  44  at  work. 

Settings.  A  few  words  may  be  said  now  in  regard  to  the 
settings  of  the  various  parts  of  the  card,  a  detail  which  is  very 
often  slighted  .and  the  quality  of  the  work  suffers. 

The  construction  of  the  revolving  flat  card  is  such  as  to 
require -very  fine  adjustment  and  too  much  attention  cannot  be 
given  to  grinding,  setting,  stripping  and  cleaning,  as  the  results  of 
poor  carding  cannot  be  rectified  in  any  of  the  subsequent  processes. 
Very  close  setting,  with  the  card  freshly  ground,  will  produce 
extra  good  work  but  the  wires  will  become  dull  much  quicker 
than  with  more  open  settings,  which  are  productive  of  good  aver- 
age carding  from  one  grinding  to  the  next. 

Gauges.  For  setting  the  doffer,  leader,  feed  plate,  screens 
and  back  and  front  plates,  most  machinery  builders  supply  a  four- 
leaf  gauge  of  the  following  sizes:  ^o/,  ^co"'  i%"  and  iiJ/ 
thickness.  For  setting  the  tops,  three  gauges  with-  detachable 
handles  are  used;  these  are  I-QQ-Q",  ^V'  and  ikon"  *n  thickness. 

To  understand  fully  the  setting  points,  reference 'should  be 
made  to  Figs.  49,  57  and  58.  The  settings  given,  although  liable 
to  slight  changes  under  different  conditions,  are  recommended. 

Cylinder  Screen.  For  setting  the  cylinder  screen,  openings 
are  provided  in  the  sides  of  the  screen  for  inserting  the  gauge. 
The  front  part,  or  nose,  of  the  screen  is  adjusted  by  the  rod,  K3, 
while  at  the  back,  where  it  joins  the  leader  screen,  the  vertical 
adjustment  is  obtained  by  the  rod,  K1,  and  the  lateral  movement 
is  governed  by  the  rod,  K2.  The  center  of  the  screen  is  adjusted 
by  the  lever,  K4,  which  turns  upon  a  stud,  KJ.  One  end  of  the 
lever  is  connected  to  the  screen  by  a  pin,  K*,  the  other  end  is 
tapped  to  receive  an  adjusting  screw,  K6,  which  is  held  between 
the  projecting  lugs  of  a  stand,  K7. 

The  usual  setting  of  the  screen,  from  the  cylinder  wire,  at  the 
back  and  center,  is  about  ^OT"  (four  gauges,  5,  7,  10  and  12). 
At  the  front,  or  doffer  end,  it  is  set  from  £"  to  £"  from  the  cylin- 
der wire.  The  setting  of  the  front  half  of  the  screen  controls  the 
side  waste  and  droppings  under  the  doffer.  By  setting  it  away 


113 


76  COTTON    SPINNING. 

from  the  cylinder,  it  allows  the  fibers  to  be  drawn  gradually  be- 
tween the  screen  and  cylinder.  If  set  too  close,  a  great  amount  of 
waste  is  made  as  the  fibers  are  thrown  off  the  cylinder. 

Sack  Plate.  The  back  plate,  T,  which  extends  from  the 
leader  to  the  flats,  is  set,  at  its  lower  edge,  about  ^fa"  (two 
gauges,  5  and  10)  from  the  cylinder '  wire.  At  the  upper  edge, 
the  best  results  are  obtained  by  setting  it  about  ^ fa"  (four 
gauges)  from  the  cylinder  wire.  This  allows  the  fibers  to  free 
themselves  and  stand  out  a  little  from  the  cylinder  before  they 
meet  the  flats. 

Leader  and  Leader  Screen.  The  leader  is  set  to  the  cylinder 
with  a  ^fa"  gauge.  The  leader  screen  is  set  to  the  leader,  at 
the  point  where  it  is  hinged  to  the  cylinder  screen,  with  a  jo-f-g-" 
gauge.  The  nose  of  the  screen,  with  which  the  fibers  first  come 
in  contact,  is  set  away  from  the  x leader  wires  from  -^f-g-"  to 
1^oo*r.  This  depends  upon  the  condition  of  the  cotton  and  the 
amount  of  fly  it  is  desired  to  remove.  By  so  setting  the  screen, 
the  fibers  are  drawn  gradually  into  a  more  compact  space,  as  they 
pass  around  on  the  leader,  and  present  a  more  even  sheet  to  the 
teeth  of  the  cylinder.  When  it  is  desired  to  use  the  cotton  for  a 
very  fine  grade  of  work,  it.  is  best  to  remove  as  much  fly  as  possi- 
ble, at  this  point,  rather  than  let  it  fall  out  between  the  rolls  of 
the  drawing  frame  or  during  other  processes.  This  may  be  accom- 
plished by  setting  the  nose  of  the  screen  close  to  the  leader,  but 
not  too  close,  as  it  is  possible  to  remove  much  good  cotton.  Cor- 
rect setting  depends  upon  the  judgment  of  the  carder.  The  screen 
may  be  adjusted  by  the  rod,  F1,  the  lower  end  of  which  passes 
through  a  bracket  fastened  to  the  card  side. 

Mote  Knife.  The  mote  knife  is  set  from  the  leader  with  a 
^10.^"  gauge,  and  care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  set  exactly  paral- 
lel with  the  leader.  The  percentage  of  waste  may  be  increased 
by  changing  the  height  of  the  knife  which  is  adjusted  by  the 
screw,  D2. 

Feed  Plate.  For  setting  the  feed  plate  from  the  leader,  the 
gauge  used  depends  somewhat  upon  the  weight  of  the  lap  being 
carded.  For  a  lap  weighing  12  ounces  per  yard  or  under,  a  ^-J-jj-ff" 
gauge  is  generally  used,  while  for  laps  above  12  ounces  per  yard, 
the  setting  is  sometimes  as  great  as  l^l^"  (two  gauges). 


114 


COTTON    SPINNING.  77 

Stripping  Plate.  Extending  from  the  doffer  to  the  flats  is  a 
polished  steel  cover,  W,  called  the  front  or  stripping  plate.  Upon 
the  correct  setting  of  this  plate,  depends  the  removal  of  the  strip- 
pings  from  the  flats.  Usually,  it  is  set,  at  its  lower  edge,  about 
itffV  fr°ra  the  cylinder  and  about  j •§•$•/'  at  the  top  edge.  If  set 
too  close  at  the  top  edge,  the  strippings  will  be  removed  from  the 
flats  by  the  cylinder  when  they  reach  the  edge  of  the  plate,  and,  on 
the  other  hand,  if  set  away  at  the  top,  the  fibers  will  cling  to  the 
flats  and  be  combed  off  when  they  reach  the  stripping  comb. 

Doffer.  The  doffer  is  set  J-J/OT"  from  the  cylinder,  close 
enough  for  any  class  of  work. 

Doffer  Comb.  For  setting  the  doffer  comb,  the  ^fa"  Sauoe 
should  be  used,  although  with  a  very  light  sliver,  a  l  -$-§-§"  gauge 
may  be  used. 

Stripping  Comb.  The  stripping  comb  should  be  set  to  the 
flats  with  a  j^f  Q""  gauge. 

Flats.  In  setting  the  flats,  it  is  necessary  to  remove  five  at 
certain  intervals  in  the  chain,  so  that  the  gauge  may  be  admitted 
at  points  nearly  under  the  sprocket  stand,  back  block,  center  block, 
quarter  block  and  grinder  bracket.  The  spacing  varies,  depend- 
ing upon  the  number  of  flats  in  the  chain  and  the  make  of  the 
card. 

The  flats  should  not  be  set  closer  than  j^^-"  to  the  cylinder, 
and  as  the  setting  necessitates  a  thorough  understanding  of  the 
principles  and  construction  of  the  flexible  bend,  it  should  be  con- 
sidered in  reference  to  it. 

Gearing.  The  method  of  driving  the  various  parts  of  the 
card  will  now  be  considered  and  illustrated  by  Fig.  59,  an  eleva- 
tion of  the  right-hand  side  of  a  left-hand  card,  and  Fig.  60,  an 
elevation  showing  the  left-hand  side. 

To  determine  the  hand  of  a  card,  the  custom,  followed  by  all 
cotton  machinery  builders  in  this  country,  is  to  face  the  machine 
at  the  delivery,  or  doffer,  end  and  whichever  side  the  driving  pul- 
ley is  upon  decides  the  question.  Fig.  61  shows  a  right-hand 
card.  Upon  the  leader  is  a  pulley,  B,  driven  from  a  large  pulley, 
D3,  which  is  upon  the  cylinder  shaft,  by  the  crossed  belt,  E.  The 
doffer  comb  is  driven  from  the  groove  in  this  pulley  by  the  band, 
D1,  which  passes  to  a  double  grooved  carrier  pulley,  C1,  from 


115 


78 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


which  passes  another  band,  E1,  to  the  comb  pulley,  II,  also  double 
grooved. 


The  flats,  B3,  which  pass  slowly  over  the  cylinder  in  tlie 
direction  indicated  by  an  arrow,  are  driven  from  a  sprocket  wheel 


1  it. 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


79 


which  is  fastened  to  the  inside  of  the  front  block,  "W1.      Motion 
is  communicated  to  the  latter  from  the  small  pulley,  C,  which  is 


r; 
C 


upon    the   cylinder   shaft,    by    the   belt,    H1,    the   pulley,    A3,    the 
worm,  J,  the  worm  gear,  F1,  the  worm,  L1,  and  the  worm  gear 


117 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


A1,  which  is  upon  the  front  block  shaft.     The  usual  speed  of  the 
flats  is  about  three  inches  per  minute. 

The  stripping  brush  is  driven  from  a  groove  on  the  inside  of 
the  pulley,  A3,  by  the  band,  B1,  and  the  pulley,  J1,  while  the 
dandy  brush,  by  which  the  backs  of  the  flats  are  cleaned  before 
they  pass  around  the  front  block,  is  also  driven  from  a  small 
groove  on  the  inside  of  the  pulley,  A3,  by  the  band,  C2,  and  the 
pulley,  D2. 

The  feed  roll  is  driven  from  the  doffer  by  the  gears,  K l  and 

L4,  the  side  shaft,  C3,  and  the  gears 
G2  and  D.  The  front  bearing  for 
the  side  shaft  is  made  so  that  it  may 
be  moved,  horizontally,  disengaging 
the  gears,  K1  and  L4,  when  it  is  de- 
sired to  stop  the  feed  roll.  The  lap 
roll  is  driven  from  the  feed  roll  by 
the  gears  G,  K,  L  and  M1. 

On  the  opposite  side  of  the  card 
(Fig.  60)  is  the  main  pulley,  A, 
by  which  the  card  is  driven.  The 
doffer  is  driven  from  a  pulley,  Z, 
which  is  upon  the  leader  by  the  belt, 
T!,the  barrowpulley,  S1,  the  pinion, 
T,  and  the  gear,  P1.  Compounded 
with  P.1  is  a  pinion,  V1,  which  drives 
the  doffer  gear,  Q.  The  gears,  T, 
P1  and  Vi,  and  the  barrow  pulley 
are  fixed  upon  studs  which  are  carried 
by  a  lever,  P,  called  the  barrow  bar. 

By  this,  the  driving  of  the  feed  roll,  doffer,  calender  roll  and 
coiler  is  controlled.  When  it  is  desired  to  stop  these  parts, 
the  lever  k  dropped  which  disengages  the  pinion,  V1,  from  the 
gear,  Q. 

The  calender  rolls  are  driven  from  the  doffer  gear,  Q,  by  the 
gears  U,  H2  and  O.  The  gear,  U,  is  called  the  rifle  gear  and 
revolves  upon  a  sleeve,  or  bushing,  which  is  connected  to  a  handle, 
Y2.  By  turning  this  handle  about  one-quarter  of  a  revolution, 
the  rifle  gear  is  drawn  sideways  and  out  of  gear  with  Q  which  is 


Fig.  61.    Plan  of  R.  H.  Card. 


118 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


81 


necessary  when  is  it  desired  to  stop  the  calender  rolls  and  coilei 
and  still  have  the  doffer  turning. 

Coiler.  We  will  direct  our  attention  now  to  the  gearing  of 
the  coiler,  a  vertical  section  of  which  is  shown  in  Fig.  62.  The 
cotton,  after  passing  between  the  calender  rolls,  M  and  D,  enters 
ths  coiler,  R,  through  the  trumpet,  C4,  and  is  drawn  between  the 
calender  rolls,  D4,  and  passes  down  an  inclined  hole  (or  spout) 
in  the  coiler  gear,  S2,  to 

the  can,  S,  in  which  it  is  auiilll>l,^ c^   h 

laid    in    eyen    and    regular 
coils. 

The  calender  rolls  are 
driven  from  the  upright 
shaft,  L2,  by  the  gears,  N 
and  N1.  L2  is  driven 
from  the  bottom  calender 
roll  on  the  card  by  the 
gears  Y1,  R2,  V  and  Qi. 
By  the  revolutions  of  the 
coiler  gear,  the  inclined 
hole  describes  a  circle  of 
a  little  more  than  half  the 
diameter  of  the  can. 

The  can  rests  upon  a 
plate,  L3,  called  the  turn- 
table, .by  which  it  is  re- 
volved slowly  in  the  oppo- 
site direction  from  the 
coiler  gear  and  just  fast 
enough  so  that  the  coils 
shall  not  overlap  and 
crowd  each  other. 

On  the  under  side  of  the  turn-table  is  a  gear,  driven  from  the 
upright  shaft,  L2,  by  the  gears  D^,  O1,  P2,  Y,  X  and  Z1.  O1 
and  P2  are  compounded  and  run  loose  on  an  upright  stud,  and  Y 
and  X  are  compounded  and  run  loose  on  the  upright  shaft.  X 
drives  the  turn-table  through  the  intermediate  gear,  Z1.  A  plan 
of  this  gearing  is  shown  in  Fig.  63. 


Fig.  62.     Vertical  section  of  coiler. 


lit 


COTTON   Sl'IXMXCr. 


Fig.  64  is  a  plan  of  the  coiler  top.  .The  trumpet,  C4,  is  made 
in  the  form  of  a  large,  flat  plate  which  covers  almost  the  whole  of 

the  top.  When  it  becomes  necessary  to 
oil  the  calender  roll  bearings,  it  can  be 
done  easily  by  pushing  the  plate  to  one 
side,  as  shown  in  the  drawing.  By  this 
means,  piecing  is  avoided,  a  feature  which 
will  be  appreciated  by  all  carders  who  have 
had  to  break  the  sliver  to  oil  the  coiler. 
Fig.  65  shows  a  plan  of  a  coiler  with 
the  top  raised.  The  calender  rolls  are 
ke'pt  together  by  a  spring,  N2,  on  the  end 
of  which  is  a  lever,  L.  When  a  wind-up 
occurs  on  the  calender  rolls,  the  tension 
upon  the  spring  is  removed  by  turning  the 
lever. 

Stop  Motion.  One  of  the  recent  improvements,  which  has 
been  applied  to  the  revolving  flat  card,  is  a  calender  roll  stop- 
motion  which  stops  the  revolutions  of  the  feed  roll  and  doffer 
instantly,  when  from  any  cause,  the  sliver  is  absent  from  between 
the  calender  rolls. 


Fig.  63.     Plan   of  turn- 
table Bearing. 


Fig.  64.     Plan  coiler  top. 


Fig  65.     Plan  of  coiler  with  top  raised 


It  happens  quite  frequently  that  the  comb  band  breaks  or 
jumps  from  the  score  pulley,  stopping  the  vibrations  of  tha  doffer 
comb.  If  this  is  unnoticed  and  the  doffer  runs  for  several  minutes 


180 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


the  card  wires  get  filled  with  fibers  and  the  clothing  of  the  cylinder, 
doffer  and  flats  becomes  badly  strained. 

When  the  sliver  breaks  down  from  any  cause,  it  often  happens 
that  it  will  wind  around  the  comb-blade.  Should  the  doffer  be 
allowed  to  run  in  this  condition,  a  bad  jamb  in  the  wires  of  the 
doffer  is  likely  to  occur. 

When  the  clothing  is  injured  from  causes  of  this  kind,  con- 
siderable time  is  spent  in  stripping  and  brushing  out  the  card, 
straightening  the  wires  and  grinding.  Frequently,  the  clothing 
is  rendered  useless,  as  the  foundation  for  the  wires  is  strained  so 
badly  that  its  elasticity  is  destroyed  and  it  is  necessary  to  redraw 
it  on  both  the  cylinder  and  the  doffer. 


Fig.  66  and  67.     Elevations  of  calendar  roll  stop  motion. 

The  stop-motion  is  shown  in  three' views,  irt  Figs.  66,  67  and 
68,  which  should  be  used  in  connection  with  Fig.  60.  In  Fig.  66, 
which  is  a  side  elevation,  the  sliver,  A,  is  shown  passing  between 
the  calender  rolls,  M  and  D.  Upon  the  top  calender  roll,  M,  is  a 
segment  gear,  F,  which  rotates  with  the  calender  roll,  while  a 
similar  segment,  L,  is  fastened  to  a  sleeve,  B,  which  is  loose  upon 
the  bottom  calender  shaft,  N.  On  the  outer  end  of  this  sleeve  is 
a  lever,  E,  whose  end  rests  under  the  handle  of  the  lever,  H,  by 
which  the  barrow  bar,  P,  is  thrown  in  and  out  of  gear.  The 
barrow  bar  is  raised  and  in  gear,  as  shown  by  the  horizontal  posi- 


121 


84 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


tion  of  the  lever,  H,  and,  with  the  silver  between  the  calender 
rolls,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  teeth  of  the  segment,  F,  are  raised  so 
that  it  may  revolve  without  imparting  motion  to  the  segment,  L. 
Should  the  sliver  break  or  from  any  cause  allow  the  calender  rolls 
to  come  together,  the  teeth  of.F  would  engage  with  those  of  L  and 
give  to  the  latter  a  partial  revolution,  which  would  turn  the  sleeve, 
B,  and  with  it  the  lever,  E.  This  would  cause  the  lever,  H,  to  as- 
sume the  position  shown  in  Fig.  67  and  to  drop  the  barrow  bar, 
P,  and  disengage  the  gears,  driving  the  doffer.  A  plan  of  this  device 
is  shown  in  Fig.  68. 

Flexible  Bend.  As  the  flats  pass  forward  over  the  cylinder, 
they  are  supported,  as  we  have  already  seen,  by  what  is  called  the 
flexible  bend.  The  surface  of  the  bend  is  concentric  with  the  cyl- 
inder. By  this  means,  the  distance  between  the  wires  of  the  flats 


Fig.  68.     Plan  of  calendar  roll  stop  motion. 


and  the  cylinder  is  maintained  and  upon'  the  correct  se'tting,  or 
distance  between  the  surfaces,  depends,  in  a  great  measure,  the 
successful  working  of  the  card.  If  the  flats  are  set  too  far  away, 
it  will  be  found  that  the  sliver  contains  little  rolls  of  tangled 
fibers,  called  neps,  and  if  set  too  close,  it  will  show  raw,  uncarded 
places  and  look  cloudy  and  rough,  and  the  wires  of  the  clothing 
will  become  faced  from  rubbing  together.  These  defects  are 
easily  distinguishable  in  the  fleece,  as  it  passes  from  the  doffer 
comb  to  the  calender  rolls.  The  flats  should  be  set  as  close  as 
possible  without  injury  to  the  fibers.  An  average  setting  is 
of  an  inch. 


182 


X 

I   S 


g  §* 

<  2 

u  -3 

H  ffl 


J 

O 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


85 


The  wire  teeth  of  the  flats  and  cylinder  require  grinding,  from 
time  to  time,  owing  to  their  becoming  dulled  on  the  points,  and, 
as  the  grinding  operation  shortens  them  slightly,  the  space  between 
the  wire  surfaces  is  increased.  In  order  to  preserve  the  correct 
relation  between  these  two  surfaces,  the  flats  have  to  be  reset,  and 


pq 


<o 
be 


as  the  grinding  also  affects  each  of  the  flats,  it  will  be  understood 
that  they  must  be  lowered,  bodily,  to  the  same  extent  towards  the 
center  of  the  cylinder.  This  is  accomplished  by  changing  the  radius 
of  the  flexible  bend. 

The  most  common  form  of  device  for  changing  the  radius  is 


123 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


called  the  five-point  adjustment  and  is  shown  in  Fig.  69.  This 
differs  slightly  in  design  among  machinery  builders  but  the  prin- 
ciple remains  the  same.  The  bend  is  supported  at  five  equidistant 
points,  the  sprocket  stand,  A,  quarter  block  stand,  B,  top  block 
stand,  C,  grinder  stand,  D,  and  back  block  stand,  E.  At  the 
points,  A  and  E,  a  stud,  H,  is  screwed  into  the -bend,  the  outer  end 
of  which  passes  through  a  slot  in  the  stands,  G.  In  the  lower  end 
of  the  stands  is  an  adjusting  screw,  L,  which  passes  through  the 
web  of  the  arch  upon  each  side  of  which  are  nuts.  At  the  points, 
B  and  E,  the  bend  is  supported  by  another  adjusting  screw,  M, 
which  also  passes  through  the  web  of  the  arch,  the  upper  end  bear- 
ing against  the  under  side  of  the  bend.  At  the  center  point,  C, 
the  bend  is  supported  by  an  adjusting  screw,  N,  which  passes 
through  the  web  of  the  arch,  as  at  other  points,  and  the  upper  end 
of  the  screw  is  screwed  into  the  under  side  of  the  bend. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  change  the  setting  of  the  flats,  the 
screws  and  nuts  on  each  side  of  the  card,  by  which  the  bend  is 
secured  to  the  stands,  are  loosened.  The  screw,  M,  at  B  and  D, 
should  be  dropped  clear  to  the  bend.  The  adjusting  screws  at 
each  of  the  five  points  are  operated  upon  in  turn,  the  center  point, 
C,  first,  then  A  and  E,  and  last  the  points,  B  and  D.  By  so  doing, 
the  radius  of  the  bend  is  made  smaller  and  the  flats  are  drawn 
radially  towards  the  center  of  the  cylinder.  It  will  be  seen  that  at 
the  center  point,  C,  the  adjusting  screw  enters  the  bend  so  that  in 
lowering  it  this  point  must  fall  radially.  But  at  the  points,  B 
and  D,  the  adjusting  screws  simply  support  the  bend,  while  at 
the  ends,  A  and  E,  the  studs,  H,  pass  through  slots  in  the  stands, 
G,  permitting  a  slight  movement  of  the  bend  endwise.  The 
reason  for  this  is  very  simple.  As  the  radius  of  the  bend  is  made 
smaller,  it  occupies  a  greater  proportion  of  the  circle,  and  as  the 
center  point,  C,  falls  in  a  radial  line,  the  points  A  and  E,  and  B 
and  D,  must  partake  of  a  combined  movement,  radial  and  circum- 
ferential. The  slots  in  the  stands  at  A  and  E  permit  this,  while 
at  B  and  D,  the  screw,  by  simply  bearing  against  the  under  side  of 
the  bend,  offers  no  resistance  to  this  movement. 

Another  style,  shown  in  Figs.  70  and  71,  is  called  the  scroll 
adjustment.  The  bend,  D,  is  supported  at  three  points  by  arms, 
A,  B  and  C,  instead  of  five,  as  in  the  first  one  shown,  the  bend 


124 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


87 


being  made  proportionately  heavier  and  stiff er.  The  arms.  A  and 
C,  are  connected  to  the  bend  by  a  stud,  F,  which  passes  through  a 
slot  in  the  bend.  The  movement,  endwise,  is  obtained  by  having 
the  slot  in  the  bend  instead  of  the  arm.  The  center  arm,  B,  is 
not  fastened  to  the  bend,  but  acts  as  a  support  for  it.  A  pin,  E, 


£ 

"s. 


in  the  arm,  prevents  any  circumferential  movement  of  the  bend. 
The  arms  are  all  made  in  two  pieces,  partly  for  convenience  in 
manufacturing  and  in  order  to  set  them  alike  when  the  card  is 
first  erected.  Adjusting  screws,  L,  are  provided  for  the  two  end 


125 


88 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


ones,  which.  aftev  being  set  properly,  are  secured  permanently  by 
dowel  pins.  The  lower  end  of  the  arms  is  provided  with  teeth, 
or  threads,  which  work  in  the  threads  of  a  geared  scroll,  H,  the 
pitch  of  which  is  one-half  inch.  The  scroll  turns  in  a  recess  in 
the  arch  which  is  concentric  with  the  cylinder.  Around  the 
periphery  of  this  scroll  is  cut  a  gear  of  110. teeth,  which  is  in  gear 
with  a  pinion,  J,  of  11  teeth,  which  is  fastened  to  one  end  of  a 
Btud,  P ;  an  index  wheel,  K,  having  50  teeth,  or  notches,  is  fas- 
tened to  the  other  end. 


Fig.  71.     Section  and  elevation  of  scroll. 

It  will  be  seen  that,  as  the  pitch  of  the  scroll  is  one-half 
inch,  two  revolutions  will  be  necessary  to  give  the  arms  and  bend 
one  inch  movement,  radially,  and,  as  the  scroll  has  110  teeth,  to 
give  it  two  revolutions,  would  require  twenty  turns  of  the  11 
toothed  pinion,  which  would  be  equal  to  1,000  notches.  Thus,  if 
1,000  notches  are  required  to  change  the  radius  of  the  bend  one 
inch,  a  movement  of  one  notch  will  change  the  radius  j-g^-g-  of  an 
inch.  After  the  card  has  been  adjusted,  a  latch,  N,  can  be  pushed 
between  the  notches  of  the  index  wheel  and  locked,  preventing 
the  setting  from  being  changed. 


126 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


89 


Flat  Chain.  After  the  card  has  been  run  some  time,  the 
chain  stretches  so  that  it  requires  taking  up.  This  is  done,  ulti- 
mately, by  removing  a  link  in  the  chain,  but  not  until  it  has 
stretched  enough  for  that ;  in  the  meantime,  it  is  customary  to  put 
in  a -quarter  block  of  larger  diameter,  which  is  replaced  by  the 
original  when  the  link  is  removed. 

A  great  deal  of  trouble  comes  from  having  the  flat  chain  too 
tight.  All  that  is  necessary  is  to  keep  the  flats  against  the  back 
block.  This  point  should  not  be  overlooked.  If  the  chain  is 
slack  and  the  flats  hang  off  as  they  pass  around  the  back  block, 
they  are  liable  to  catch  and  give  trouble,  and  on  the  other  hand, 
if  very  tight,  the  links  and  bushings  will  soon  wear  out  and  the 


Fig.  72.     Adjustable  Cylinder  Bearing. 

flats  will  give  trouble  in  grinding  by  not    resting  freely  on  the 
grinding  former. 

Adjustable  Cylinder  Bearing.  While  a  great  deal  depends 
upon  careful  setting  of  the  flats,  many  evils  arise,  such  as  the 
wearing  of  the  bearings,  due  to  the  weight  of  the  cylinder,  the  puli 
of  the  belt  and  various  minor  causes,  all  tending  to  alter  the  posi- 
tion of  the  cylinder  and  thus  destroying  its  concentricity  with  the 
bend.  When  such  wear  takes  place,  some  means  must  be  pro- 
vided to  restore  the  cylinder  to  its  concentric  position. 


90  COTTON    SPINNING. 

In  Fig.  72  a  section  and  a  side  elevation  of  an  adjustable 
cylinder  bearing  are  shown.  The  cylinder  boxes,  or  bearings,  are 
supported  by  pedestals,  H2.  The  lower  part  of  each  pedestal 
rests  upon  a  slightly  tapered  plate,  H3.  Upon  either  side  of  the 
pedestals  are  lugs,  H4,  which  are  securely  fastened  to  the  card 
frame.  From  the  plate,  H3,  projects  a  screw,  C2,  which  passes 
through  one  of  the  lugs,  while  from  the  pedestal,  H2,  projects  a 
screw,  C3,  which  passes  through  the  other  lug. 

When  a  vertical  adjustment  of  the  cylinder  is  required,  the 
tapered  plate  is  given  a  horizontal  movement  by  turning  the  nuts 
on  the  screw,  C2,  but  when  a  lateral  adjustment  is  desired,  the 
pedestal  and  plate  are  moved  together,  both  parts  being  fastened 
to  the  card  frame  by  cap  screws,  C4. 

Sometimes,  oil  from'tlie  cylinder  bearings  runs  down  on  the 
cylinder  head,  particularly  if  the  card  has  been  standing  idle  for 
several  days.  When  this  occurs,  the  oil  may  get  upon  the  cloth- 
ing of  the  cylinder,  softening  the  cement  with  which  the  several 
layers  in  thejoundation  are  stuck  together  and  causing  them  to 
separate  and  puff  up  in  places  and  destroy  the  holding  power  of 
the  wire  teeth.  To  prevent  this,  the  pedestal  is  made  with  a  lip, 
D4,  projecting  from  the  back  side,  directly  under  the  bearing. 
Any  oil  that  drops  will  be  caught  by  this  lip  and  carried  to  the 
outer  side  of  the  card  frame,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines. 

Leader  Clothing.  The  saw-tooth  clothing,  with  which  the 
licker-in  is  covered,  is  made  from  thin,  flit,  steel  wire,  about  one- 
quarter  of  an  inch  in  width  and  one-sixty-fourth  of  an  inch  thick, 
with  a  shoulder  on  one  edge.  The  teeth  are  formed  by  cutting 
out  a  portion  of  the  thin  edge  of  the  wire,  making  it  resemble  the 
edge  of  a  saw.  The  wire  is  inserted  in  grooves  which  are  cut 
spirally  in  the  shell  of  the  ricker-in,  and  there  are,  usually,  eight 
per  inch,  giving  eight  rows  of  teeth  for  each  inch  in  the  length  of. 
the  face  and  about  112  teeth  for  each  row  in  its  circumference. 

Two  views  of  saw-tooth  clothing  are  given  in  Fig.  73,  show- 
ing a,  portion  of  the  licker-in  shell  with  the  teeth  inserted  and  a 
side  elevation  of  the  teeth  with  the  shell  in  section. 

Fig.  74  is  an  enlarged  front  view  of  the  teeth,  showing  the 
depth  to  which  the  wire  is  let  in  to  the  shell,  the  shoulder  of  the  wire 
coining  just  below  the  surface.  After  the  wire  is  inserted,  the  edge 


128 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


91 


<- a«  i  INCH  -> 


of  the  groove  next  to  the  shoulder  is  upset  slightly,  by  passing  a 
hardened  steel  disc  over  its  surface,  which  prevents  the  wire  from 
pulling  out.     A  licker-in,  covered  with 
this  style  of  clothing,  requires  no  clean- 
ing, stripping  nor  grinding  and  is  sup- 
erior in  every    respect  to  the  licker-in 
covered  with  leather  clothing,  which  is 
used    on    the  old    style    stationary  flat 
cards. 

Clothing  for  Cylinders,  Doffer  and 
Flats.  The  clothing  for  the  cylinder, 
doffer  and  flats  consists  of  a  foundation 


made  up  of  from    three  to  five  thick-    . 

Fig.  73.     Saw  tooth  clothing. 

nesses   of   cotton,  wool,  linen  or  other 

materials  cemented  firmly  together,  in  whicli  is  set  the  wires, 
forming  the  teeth,  as  shown  in  Fig.  75 — a  side  elevation.  The 
wire  extends  from  the  back  side  of  the  foun- 
dation at  an  angle,  until  a  point  nearly  half  way 
of  its  length,  called  the  knee,  is  reached  and 
then  bends  forward,  the  upper  end  returning 
to  a  point  about  over  the  lower  end,  as  shown 
by  the  vertical  line,  A — B. 

Fig.  *76,  which  is  a  front  view,  shows  that 
the  teeth,  which  are  made  from  a  coil  of  wire, 
are  bent  into  the  form  of  a  staple.     The  two' 
upward   projecting  prongs  are   called   points   and   the   horizontal 
part  connecting  them  is  called  the  crown. 

Defects  in  Cloth- 
ing. A  matter  of 
great  importance, 
often 

the 

B 


Fig.  74.  Section 
of  leader  shell, 
showing  saw  tooth 
clothing. 


one    which    is 
overlooked,    i  s 
amount  of   angle   or 
pitch    given    to    the 
tooth  and    the  posi- 
tion of  the  .point  in 
relation    to    the   crown. 

In  one  sense,  the  teeth  are  a  series  of  hooks  by  which  the 


Fig.  75.  Fig.  76. 

Clothing  for  cylinder,  doffer  and  flates. 


129 


92 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


fibers  are  caught  and  carried  forward.  If  the  forward  inclination 
of  the  point  is  not  sufficient,  the  teeth  lose  some  of  their  holding 
power,  while  if  the  inclination  is  too  great,  the  holding  power  is 
such  as  to  cause  serious  defects  in  carding.  To  explain  this  more 
fully,  Figs.  77,  78,  79  and  80,  which  show  several  enlarged  views 
of  card  teeth,  will  be  considered. 

In  Fig.  77,  the  crown  of  the  tooth  is  marked  A,  the  knee  is 
marked  B  and  the  point,  C.  The  angle  of  that  part  of  the  tooth 
between  A  and  B  is  about  fifteen  degrees  from  a  vertical  line,  and 
this  is  the  average  of  the  wire  for  cotton  card  clothing.  If  the 
angle  is  increased,  as  shown  in  Fig.  78,  it  is  evident  that  the  tooth 
must  have  a  much  greater  holding  power,  which  will  cause  the 
short  fibers,  neps  and  dirt  to  be  forced  to  a  considerable  distance 


Fig.  77.  Fig.  78.  Fig.  79. 

Enlarged  views  of  card  teeth. 


Fig.  80. 


beneath  the  point.  Otherwise,  they  would  be  caught  by  the  flats 
or  thrown  off,  to  fall  through  the  screws.  In  this  way,  the  spaces 
between  the  teeth  fill  rapidly,  which  necessitates  stripping  the  card 
much  oftener  than  would  be  required  with  the  wire  set  properly 
and  it  also  makes  the  removal  of  the  strippings  much  more  difficult. 

Another  point  in  connection  with  the  angle  of  the  wire 
being  too  great,  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  79.  If  the  point  of  the  tooth  is 
pushed  back  by  a  tuft  of  cotton,  there  is  a  liability  of  its  straight- 
ening at  the  knee,  which,  acting  as  a  fulcrum,  causes  the  point  to 
rise  into  the  position  shown  by  dotted  lines. 

Quite  a  common  defect  in  card  clothing  is  shown  in  Fig.  80. 
If  the  point  of  a  tooth  stands  too  far  forward  of  an  imaginary  ver- 
tical line,  drawn  through  the  crown,  and  the  tooth  is  forced  back 
while  at  work,  it  will  rise  above  its  natural  plane  to  such  an  extent 


190 


COTTON    SPINNING.  93 

as  to  cause  the  point  to  become  faced  by  contact  with  the  other 
wire  surfaces  of  the  card.  The  height  of  the  tooth  from  crown  to 
point  is  usually  three-eighths  of  an  inch  and  the  knee  is  about 
three-sevenths  of  the  distance  from  the  crown.  Many  times,  the 
causes  of  bad  carding  can  be  attributed  to  some  of  these  faults 
rather  than  to  the  construction  of  the  machine. 

Foundation  for  Clothing.  The  foundation  for  the  teeth 
should  be  of  material  that  has  the  least  possible  amount  of  stretch, 
in  order  to  hold  the  wire  firmly  enough  to  carry  around  the  fibers 
which  become  attached  and  yet  it  should  be  flexible  enough  so 
that  the  wires  shall  spring  back  to  their  original  position  when 
they  have  been  deflected  by  grinding,  or  by  the  strain  put  upon 
them  when  the  card  is  in  operation.  If  the  foundation  is  drawn 
on  too  tightly,  the  wires  are  apt  to  break  at  the  point  where  they 
leave  the  foundation. 

The  material,  composing  the  several  layers  of  the  foundation, 
is  varied  somewhat  to  suit  the  different  requirements.  For  the 
cylinder  and  doff  ere,  it  is  generally  four-ply :  first  a  thickness  of 
twilled  cotton  cloth  for  the  crown  side,  then  a  layer  of  coarse 
linen  threads,  added  to  give  strength  and  running  lengthwise  of 
the  clothing,  next  a  thickness  of  heavy  woolen  cloth  and  last 
another  facing  of  twilled  cotton  cloth.  Sometimes,  an  additional 
facing  of  rubber  is  used,  which  answers  a  double  purpose,  giving 
an  elastic  support  to  the  wire  where  it  leaves  the  foundation  and 
protecting  the  foundation  from  dampness. 

For  the  flats,  a  three-ply  foundation  is  almost  always  used, 
called  double  covered  or  cotton  wool  and  cotton.  The  crown  and 
face  sides  are  of  the  twilled  cotton  and  between  them  is1  a  layer  of 
closely  woven  heavy  woolen  cloth.  The  rubber  facing  is  seldom 
added,  as  the  flats  in  passing  back  over  the  cylinder  are  often 
exposed  to  the  sun's  rays,  which  cause  the  rubber  to  harden  and 
disintegrate. 

A  comparison  of  tests,  made  of  several  kinds  of  foundations, 
show  that  a  strip  two  inches  wide  of  the  four-ply  above  referred 
to,  when  put  under  a  tension  of  300  pounds,  became  elongated 
2  per  cent.  Four-ply  foundation,  cotton,  wool  and  cotton,  with 
rubber  face,  became  elongated  6^  per  cent  and  leather  foundation 
elongated  14|  per  cent. 


131 


94 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


Applying  Clothing.  The  clothing  for  the  cylinder  and 
doffer  is  made  in  continuous  strips  and .  is  called  fillet.  That  used 
for  the  cylinder  is  usually  2  inches  wide  and  that  for  the  doffer  is 
11  inches  wide.  It  is  drawn  on  to  the  surface  by  a  device  called 
a  clothing  machine,  which  registers  the  tension  put  upon  it,  the 
cylinder  being  clothed  under  a  tension  of  about  350  pounds  and 
the  doffer  under  about  275  pounds. 

Fig.  81  shows  a  front  and  a  rear  elevation  of  a  doffer.  On 
account  of  the  fillet  being  wound,  spirally,  around-  it,  the  teeth 
must  strike  the  fibers  at  a  slight  angle.  It  is  desirous  that  this 
angle  be  as  small  as  possible,  that  the  danger  of  the  teeth  break- 
ing or  being  turned  from  their  correct  position  will  be  reduced  to 


1 


REAR  VIETW 


fRONT      VIEW 


Fig.  81.     Front  and  Rear  Views  of  Doffer. 

a  minimum  and,  as  the  doffer  is  about  one-half  the  diameter  of 
the  cylinder,  the  clothing  is  made  narrower  so  that  the  angle 
of  the  spiral  shall  be  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  the  cylinder. 

In  putting  on  the  fillet,  it  is  usually  cut  so  as  to  form  what  is 
called  an  inside  taper,  which  leaves  a  straight  edge  extending  the 
whole  distance  around  on  the  outside  of  each  end  of  the  doffer.  The 
clothing,  which  starts  at  A,  is  three-quarters  of  an  inch  wide  and 
continues  this  width  until  half  around  the  doffer,  where,  at  B,  it 
commences  to  widen,  and  when  it  has  passed  around  to  the  point, 

C,  beside  the  starting  point,  A,  it  is  the  full  width,  l£  inches. 
At  C,  the  fillet  is  again  cut  down  to  half  its  width,  the  portion 
cut  out  tapering  until  it  reaches  a  point  half  around  the  doffer  at 

D.  From  here,  it  extends  in  full  width  to  the  opposite  end  of  the 
doffer  where  it  is  tapered  to  finish  in  the  same  manner  as  at  the 
starting  point. 


132 


COTTON     SPINNING. 


95 


In  Fig.  82  is  shown  a  strip  of  fillet  with  the  portion  cut  away 
for  an  inside  taper.  The  letters  of  reference  used  are  the  same  as 
in  the  preceding  illustration. 

The  fillet  for  the  cylinder  is  put  on  with  an  inside  taper,  also, 
and  in  the  same  manner,  but,  as  the  cylinder  is  more  than  twice 
the  diameter  of  the  doffer,  a  strip  of  considerable  length  has  to  be 
cut  away  before  the  full  width  is  reached. 


Fig.  82.     Strip  of  Doffer  Fillet. 

Number  of  Wire  and  Points  per  Square  Foot  in  Clothing. 

The  wire  teeth  are  set  into  the  foundation  of  card  clothing  in 
three   different  ways,  known   as  open   set,   seldom    used   at   the 
present/  time,  twill  set,  which  is  used 
for  the  flats     and  rib  set,  which  is 
used  for  the  cylinders  and  doffers. 
The  effect  on  the  face  of  the  clothing 
is   about   the   same,    as    far   as    the 
arrangement    of   the    points   is   con- 
cerned, in  all  styles  of  setting. 

A  plan  of  the  back  or  crown  side 
of  a  strip  of  fillet  with  the  rib  setting 
is  given  in  Fig.  83.  The  crowns, 
extending  across  the  width  of  the 
fillet,  are  four  to  the  inch,  conse- 
quently, across  a  strip  of  one  and 
one-half  inch  width,  there  are  six 
crowns,  and,  as  the  foundation  is 
about  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  wider 
than  the  wire  surface,  a  one  and 
one-half  inch  fillet  covers  a  surface 


h     H 


L-  4   Cf 


! 


Fig.  83.     Rib  Set  Fillet. 


about  one  and  nine-sixteenths  inches  wide. 

The  noggs,  which  run  lengthwise  of  the  fillet,  are  from  ten  to 
twenty-eight  to  the  inch.  A  nogg  consists  of  a  group  of  three 
crowns,  and,  of  course,  to  each  crown  are  two  points.  The  points 
per  square  foot  can  be  found  in  the  following  way: 

Rule. —  To  find  the  number  of  points  per  square  foot,  mtilci- 


133 


96  COTTON  SPINNING. 

ply  together  the  number  of  noggs  per  inch,  the  crowns  per  inch,  the 
crowns  per  nogg,  points  per  crown  and  the  number  of  inches  in  a 
square  foot.  Example :  In  Fig.  83,  there  are  fourteen  noggs  to  the  inch ; 
the  points  per  square  foot  will  be!4X4X3X2X  144,  or  48,384. 

Each  nogg  added  per  inch  increases  the  number  of  points  per 
square  foot  3,456.  Thus,  by  multiplying  the  number  of  noggs 
per  inch,  by  this  number,  the  points  per  square  foot  can  be  found. 

Example:  3,456  X  14  =  48,384. 

The  twill  set  is  shown  in  Fig.  84.  The  crowns  extend  length- 
wise of  the  strip  and  are  four  to  the  inch.  The  noggs  are  counted 
across  and  are  from  five  to  fourteen  per  inch.  In  each  nogg  there 
are  six  crowns  instead  of  three,  as  in  the  rib  set,  but  the  number 
of  points  per  square  foot  can  be  calculated  in  the  same  way.  To 
illustrate  this,  it  will  be  seen  that  in  Fig.  84,  there  are  only  seven 
noggs  per  inch,  but  as  there  are  just  twice  as  many  crowns  to  each 
nogg,  the  points  per  square  foot  will  be  the  same  as  in  Fig.  83,  which 
has  fourteen  noggs  per  inch. 

Example:   7X4X6X2X144=  48,384. 

For  the  twill  setting,  each  additional  nogg  per  inch  increases 
the  number  of  points  per  square  foot  6,912. 

When  carding  low  grades  of  cotton,  the  wires  of  the  clothing 
are  coarser  and  the  number  of  points  per  square  foot  less,  and  when 
carding  long  staple  cotton,  the  wire  is  finer  and  the  number  of  points 
per  square  foot  on  all  the  clothed  surface  except  the  leader  is  gen- 
erally increased. 

Some  machinery  builders  recommend  that  the  cylinder  and 
flats  be  covered  with  the  same  clothing,  while  others  think  that 
the  doffer  and  flats  should  be  the  same.  No  rule  can  be  given  by 
which  the  number  of  points  per  square  foot  and  the  size  of  the  wire 
can  be  determined  that  will  fit  all  cases.  For  coarse  work,  No. 
29  wire  with  62,208  points  per  square  foot  is  usually  used  for  the 
cylinder  and  flats  and  No.  30  wire  with  65,664  points  per  square 
foot  for  the  doffer.  For  medium  work,  the  cylinder  and  flats  are 
usually  covered  with  No.  30  wire,  65,664  points  per  square  foot 
and  the  doffer  with  No.  31  wire,  72,576  points  per  square  foot. 
For  fine  work,  the  cylinder  and  flats  should  have  No.  31  wire,  72,576 
points  per  square  foot  and  the  doffer  No.  32  wire  with  79,488  points 
per  square  foot. 


134 


COTTON  SPINNING.  97 

The  following  tables  give  the  points  per  square  foot  for  both 
rib  and  twill  set  clothing : 

RIB  SET  CLOTHING. 

Noggs  per  inch,  Points  per  square  foot. 

10  34,560 

11  38,016 

12  41,472 

13  44,928 

14  , 48,384 

15  51,840 

16  55,296 

17  58,752 

18 62,238 

19  65,664 

20  69,120 

21 72,576 

22 76,032 

23 79,488 

24  82,944 

25  86,400 

26 89,856 

27  93,312 

28  96,768 

TWILL  SET  CLOTHING. 

Noggg  per  inch.  Points  per  square  foot. 

5     34,560 

&X 38,016 

6     41,472 

6# 44,928 

7 48,384 

7X 51,840 

8 55,296 

8>£ "... 58,752 

9    _ 62,208 

9>£ 65,664 

10 : 69,120 

10^ 72,576 

11     76,032 

UK 79,488 

12 82,944 

12# 86,400 

13 89,856 

13# 1 93,312 

14     96,768 


135 


98 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


Kinds  of  Wire  for  Card  Clothing.  In  considering  the  kind 
of  wire  to  be  used  for  the  teeth,  a  question  arises  concerning  which 
there  are  many  opinions.  With  the  leather  foundation  used  on 
the  old  style  stationary  flat  card,  it  is  the  universal  practice  to  use 
round  iron  wire,  but  on  the  revolving  flat  card,  this  kind  be- 
comes dulled  quickly  on  account  of  the  extra  amount  of  work 
done  on  this  machine.  We  now  use 
mild  steel  wire  which  has  been  sub- 
jected to  a  process  of  hardening  and 
tempering.  It  is  claimed  by  many 
that  the  round  iron  wire  tooth  is 
preferable  when  quality  of  production, 
and  not  quantity,  is  desired,  as  it  deals 
more  gently  with  the  fibers,  conse- 
quently they  can  be  given  a  more 
thorough  carding  without  excessive 
injury. 

The  various  kinds  of  wire  used 
are  shown  on  a  very  much  enlarged 
scale  in  plan  and  elevation  in  Fig.  85. 
The  one  marked  A    is  the    ordinary 
round   wire.     B    represents    the   so- 
called   needle-pointed,  or   side-ground    wire,    and  is    made  fron? 
wire  of  round  section  by  grinding  two  sides  for  a  short  distance 
below  the  point.     C  is  the  plough-ground  wire,  also  made  from  a 
round  section  by  grinding  on 
opposite  sides  about  fifty  per 
cent    of   its  original  area  as 
far  as  the  knee.      The  grind- 
ing is  done  by  drawing  the 
fillet     over     a    flat    surface, 
crown  side  down,    the  teeth 
passing  between  a   series    of 
emery  discs.     The  wire  marked  D  is  double  convex  and  is  oval 
in  section.     E  is  made  triangular  in  section   by   rolling   and   is 
used  for  napping  machines. 

With  regard  to  the  respective  merits  of  needle-pointed  and 
plough-ground  wire,  the  latter  seems  to  find  the  most  favor,  and 


Fig.  84.     Twill  Set  Fillet. 


Fig.  8S.     Card  Tooth  Wire. 


136 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


137 


100  COTTON  SPINNING. 

at  the  present  time,  is  used  almost  wholly  for  the  revolving  flat 
card.  It  is  a  matter  hard  to  decide,  how  much  better  results  are 
obtained  with  it,  but  it  certainly  affords  a  trifle  more  space  between 
the  wires  for  the  reception  of  dirt,  nep  and  short  fibers. 

When  the  card  is  first  put  into  operation,  it  is  difficult  to  re- 
move the  strippings  from  plough-ground  wire,  but  after  the  sides 
of  the  teeth  become  smooth,  by  constant  stripping,  they  can  be 
removed  much  easier  and  better  than  with  any  other  wire. 

Grinding.  It  is  necessary  to  grind  the  cylinder  and  doffer 
after  they  are  clothed  to  make  the  card  work  successfully.  The 
first  grinding  requires  generally  about  ten  days,  depending  upon 
the  condition  of  the  clothing.  If  the  wires  are  too  hard,  and  if 
some  are  higher  than  others,  it  often  takes  much  longer. 

After  the  first  grinding,  it  is  necessary,  in  the  ordinary  run- 
ning of  the  card,  to  grind  the  cylinder  and  doffer  about  once  in 
four  weeks.  When  carding  long  staple  cotton,  the  time  is  reduced 
to  three  or  even  two  weeks.  The  period  depends  oftentimes  on 
the  ability  of  the  grinder  to  perform  his  allotted  duty  rather  than 
the  actual  need  of  the  clothing.  It  is  considered  that  frequent  and 
light  grinding  is  better  than  to  wait  until  the  wires  have  become 
so  dull  that  a  severe  grinding  is  necessary  to  restore  the  points. 

Fig.  86  shows  a  side  elevation  of  a  card  with  the  grinder 
rolls  in  position.  The  lap  is  withdrawn  and  the  cylinder  and 
doffer  are  stripped  and  brushed  clean.  The  card  is  run  until  all 
the  flats  have  passed  the  stripping  brush  and  comb  and  have  been 
made  clean.  The  main  belt,  C,  is  then  changed  and  the  cylinder 
is  run  backwards  or  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  which  is  re- 
quired in  carding.  The  side  shaft  is  slid  out  of  gear  and  the  barrow 
bar  is  dropped,  the  doffer  being  driven  by  a  belt,  F,  and  pulley,  J, 
from  the  pulley,  D3,  which  drives  the  leader  when  carding.  On 
the  end  of  the  grinder  rolls  are  score  pulleys,  N,  which  are  driven 
from  two  scores  in  the  pulley,  D3,  by  the  bands,  D  and  D.  A 
score  pulley,  E,  is  placed  on  the  opposite  end  of  the  doffer  for 
driving  the  traverse  motion  of  the  grinder  rolls  by  means  of  the 
band,  H,  and  pulley,  P. 

Another  method  of  driving  the  grinder  rolls,  which  is  more 
simple  and  is  used  considerably,  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  87.  This 
also  requires  the  belt,  F,  band,  H,  and  pulleys,  J  and  E,  but 


138 


APPARATUS  FOR  GRINDING  FLATS  FROM  THEIR  WORKING  SURFACES 

Mason  Machine  Works. 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


101 


0© 


139 


102 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


instead  of  using  the  two  bands,  D  and  D,  for  driving  the  grinders, 
a  single  band,  E2,  is  used  that  runs  from  the  groove  in  the  pulley, 
D3,  around  the  pulley,  N,  on  the  doffer  grinder,  then  around  the 
pulley,  N1,  on  the  cylinder  grinder,  and  then  down  around  the  in- 
termediate comb  pulley,  N2,  to  the  pulley,  D3. 

On  s»me  makes  of  cards,  this  cannot  be  done,  as  there  is 
no  intermediate  pulley,  the  comb  being  driven  directly  from  the 
groove  in  the  pulley,  D3. 

Long-roll  Grinder.  For  the  first  grinding,  the  long-roll 
grinder,  shown  in  Fig.  88,  is  used.  After  this,  in  the  periodical 
grinding,  unless  the  wires  become  jammed  or  badly  worn,  it  is 
seldom  used. 

It  consists  of  an  iron  roll,  seven  inches  in  diameter,  which 
extends  across  the  whole  width  of  the  surface  to  the  ground.  The 
roll,  which  is  wound  with  emery  fillet,  is  supported  at  either  end 
by  bearings,  B,  which  are  mounted  in  the  grinder  brackets,  C. 


Fig.  88.     Long  Roll  Grinder. 

On  one  end  is  a  score  pulley,  N,  by  which  the  roll  is  driven,  and 
attached  to  the  other  end  is  a  worm,  D,  which  drives  a  worm  gear, 
E.  This  gear  is  enclosed  in  a  case,  F,  which  is  shown  in  section, 
and  which  forms  a  bearing  for  it  to  turn  in.  In  the  hub  of  the 
gear  is  a  pin,  K,  which  is  set  eccentrically,  so  that  as  the  gear 
revolves,  the  pin  describes  a  circle  of  about  three-eighths  of  an 
inch  radius.  Attached  to  the  piri  is  one  end  of  a  yoke,  H,  the 
other  end  of  which  is  fastened  to  a  downward  projecting  arm,  Js 
of  the  bearing.  The  revolutions  of  the  grinder  roll  cause  the 
worm  gear  to  turn,  and,  through  the  pin  in  its  hub  and  the  con- 
necting yoke,  the  roll  is  given  a  movement,  endwise,  of  about 
three-fourths  of  an  inch.  This  is  done  to  prevent  the  high  wires 
of  the  clothing  from  receiving  grinding  from  the  same  portion  of 
the  face  of  the  roll  at  all  times,  this  preventing  the  emery  fillet 
from  becoming  worn  and  hollow  in  places. 


140 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


103 


Traverse  Grinders.  After  the  long  grinder  has  been  used  a 
sufficient  time,  the  short  or  traverse  grinder,  shown  in  elevation 
and  section  in  Fig.  89,  is  used.  The  grinder  roll,  L,  which  is  the 
same  diameter  as  the  long  grinder,  is  about  four  inches  wide  on 
the  face.  It  is  mounted  upon  a  shell,  M,  which  has  a  slot,  D, 
extending  throughout  its  length.  Within  the  shell  is  a  recipro- 
cating screw,  A,  to  which  the  grinder  roll  is  connected  bv  a  dog, 
E,  which  slides  in  its  threads.  A  score  pulley,  N,  by  which  the 
shell  is  driven,  is  fastened  to  one  end  while  the  screw  is  driven 
from  the  other  end  of  the  shell  by  a  train  of  gears,  H,  J,  S  and  T, 
which  have  22,  16,  15  and  23  teeth,  respectively.  H  is  fastened 
to  the  shell  and  drives  J  which  is  compounded  with  S  and  runs 
loose  on  a  stud,  B.  T  is  fastened  to  the  screw  and  is  driven  by 


F   H 


Fig.  8P.     Traverse  Grinder. 

S.  The  gears  are  enclosed  in  a  case,  F,  which,  to  prevent  its 
turning,  is  fastened  to  the  grinder  bracket,  C,  by  a  lug.  By  this 
means,  the  shell,  which  carries  the  grinder  roll,  is  run  at  a  greater 
speed  than  the  screw,  causing  the  grinder  roll  to  move  longitudi- 
nally along  the  shell,  and  as  the  screw  is  cut  with  right  and  left 
hand  threads,  a  reciprocal  movement  is  given  to  the  grinder,  which 
causes  it  to  move  back  and  forth  from  one  side  to  the  other  of  the 
surface  being  ground. 

For  each  hundred  revolutions  of  the  shell,  the  screw  turns 
89.67  revolutions  in  the  same  direction  (10.33  revolutions  less 
than  the  shell)  and  as  the  screw  is  one  and  one-half  inches  pitch, 
10.33  revolutions  will  move  the  grinder  roll  15i  inches  along  the 
shell. 


141 


104  COTTON  SPINNING. 

Another  style  of  traverse  grinder  is  shown  in  Fig.  90,  which 
consists  of  a  roll,  L,  a  screw,  A,  a  dog,  E,  and  a  shell,  M,  with  a 
slot,  D,  all  of  which  are  the  same  as  on  the  grinder  shown  previ- 
ously. On  one  end  of  the  grinder  is  a  pulley,  N,  which  drives  the 
shell ;  on  the  other  end  is  a  similar  pulley,  P,  of  slightly  different 
diameter.  The  shell  and  screw  are  thus  run  at  different  speeds 
and  the  roll  is  traversed  to  and  fro  on  the  shell.  This  style  of 
grinder  requires  the  pulley,  E,  and  band,  H,  as  shown  in  Figs.  86 
and  87  to  drive  the  screw  for  the  traverse. 


U  L 

Fig.  00.     Traverse  Grinder. 

Speed  of  Grinder  Rolls.  The  surface  speed  of  the  cylinder 
is  about  2,200  feet  per  minute  and  that  of  the  doffer  is  1,921 
feet  per  minute.  The  surface  speed  of  the  grinders  is  about  900 
feet  per  minute  in  the  opposite  direction  from  the  cylinder  and 
doffer.  This  gives  a  total  surface  speed  for  the  cylinder  grinder 
of  2,200  feet  plus  900  feet,  which  makes  3,100  feet  per  minute, 
and  for  the  doffer,  it  is  1,921  feet  plus  900  feet,  which  makes  2,821 
feet  per  minute.  This  is  considered  as  high  speed  as  hardened 
and  tempered  steel  wire  will  stand.  The  doffer  is  run  at  a  slightly 
slower  surface  speed  as  it  does  not  require  as  much  grinding  as 
the  cylinder. 

When  grinding  the  flats,  there  is  no  loss  in  production  from 
stopping  as  the  work  is  done  while  the  card  is  in  operation. 

Flat  Grinders.  The  flat-grinding  device,  which  is  a  part  of 
the  card,  is  attached  in  different  positions.  Upon  some  cards,  the 
grinding  is  done  as  the  flats  return  over  the  top  of  the  cylinder 
between  the  front  sprocket  and  center  block ;  other  makers  grind 
just  back  of  the  center  block,  while  upon  some  cards,  the  flats  are 
ground  directly  above  the  licker-in  as  they  pass  around  the  back 
block. 

With  the  grinding  device  attached  in  either  of  the  first  two 
positions  mentioned,  the  flats  are  ground  in  an  inverted  position. 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


105 


By  some,  this  is  considered  an  evil,  the  claim  being  made  that  the 
flats  deflect  slightly  in  the  center  by  their  own  weight  and  cause 
the  grinding  roll  to  bear  harder  on  the  ends  and  when  they  pass 
around  on  to  the  cylinder,  the  deflection  is  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion, which  produces  a  convex  surface,  making'  the  wires  in  the 
center  a  trifle  closer  to  the  cylinder  than  at  the  ends.  This  makes 
an  error  in  setting. 

When  the  flats  are  ground  as  they  pass  around  the  back 
block,  their  working  face  is  downward,  in  the  same  position  as 
when  they  rest  upon  the  bend.  By  grinding  in  this  position,  the 


Fig.  91.     Elevation  of  Grinder  Roll  and  Flat. 

disadvantage  arising  from  deflection  is  eliminated.  Opinions 
are  divided  in  regard  to  which  is  in  the  best  position.  The  exist- 
ing evil,  if  it  can  be  called  such,  caused  by  deflection,  is  often 
magnified  and  no  perceptible  difference  in  the  working  of  the 
card  can  be  seen. 

To  have  the  flats  alike  and  perfectly  accurate,  they  should  be 
ground  from  the  same  surface  which  bears  upon  the  bend,  but 
owing  to  their  being  closer  to  the  cylinder  at  the  heel  than  at  the 
toe,  this  surface  is  not  parallel  with  the  face  of  the  flat.  This 
presents  a  problem  which  has  been  given  considerable  attention 


143 


106 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


and  which  will  be  understood  better  by  referring  to  Fig.  91. 
The  surface  of  the  flat  whicli  bears  upon  the  bend  is  indi- 
cated by  the  horizontal  line,  A  —  B,  and  the  face  by  the  line, 
C  —  D,  the  heel  of  the  flat  by  E  and  the  toe  by  F.  The  center  of 
the  grinding  roll  is  indicated  by  the  vertical  line,  G  —  H,  which  is 
at  right  angle  to  the  line,  A  —  B.  As  the  flat  which  passes  in  the 
direction  shown  by  the  arrow,  comes  over  the  center  of  the  grind- 
ing roll,  the  wires  on  the  heel  will  receive  grinding,  but  as  it  ad- 


Fig.  92.     Elevation  Showing  Position  of  Flat  Grinders  When  in  Use. 

vances  until  the  toe  comes  to  this  point,  it  is  evident  that  it  will 
receive  no  grinding,  owing  to  the  inclination  of  the  wire  face. 
The  flats  must  therefore  be  tipped,  as  they  pass  the  grinding  roll, 
so  that  they  shall  be  ground  parallelly  to  their  Avorking  face. 
This  necessitates  a  special  surface,  called  a  "grinding  former,"  lor 
the  flats  to  bear  upon. 


144 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


107 


A  device  for  grinding  the  flats  with  the  face  down  is  shown 
in  Fig.  92.  The  grinding  roll,  L,  is  mounted  in  self-adjusting 
bearings,  D,  which  are  supported  by  brackets,  E,  and  which  are 
adjustable  from  the  grinding  former,  A,  by  means  of  the  screw,  B. 
The  grinding  former  and  bracket,  which  are  connected  to  the  lever, 
F,  are  pivoted  upon  a  stud,  C.  A  weight  lever,  G,  pivoted  upon 


Fig.  93.     Elevation  Showing  Position  of  Flat  Grinder  When  Not  in  Use. 

a  similar  stud,  H,  is  connected  to  the  lever,  F,  by  a  curved  arm,  J. 
The  weight  lever  is  thrown  forward  and  holds  the  former  firmly 
in  position  against  the  bearing  surface  of  the  flats  as  they  pass 
around  the  sprocket  wheel,  M.  The  surface  of  the  former  is  so 
shaped  as  to  tip  the  flats  enough  to  cause  grinding  to  take  place 
across  the  whole  width  of  the  face. 

Fig.  93  shows  the  position  of  the  grinding  apparatus  when 


145 


108 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


the  card  is  not  being  ground ;  the  weight  lever  is  thrown  back, 
dropping  the  grinding  former  out  of  contact  with  the  flats. 

An  attachment  for  grinding  the  flats,  in  an  inverted  position 
over  the  cylinder,  is  shown  in  Figs.  94  and  95.  The  grinding  roll, 
L,  is  mounted  in  bearings,  A,  which  are  adjusted  from  the  grinding 
bracket,  C,  by  the  screws,  B.  The  grinding  former,  D,  is  fastened 
securely  to  the  grinding  bracket  with  the  bearing  surface  down- 


H 


Fig.  94.     Elevation  Showing  Flat  Grinder. 

ward.  The  flats  are  kept  in  contact  with  the  former  by  a  weight 
lever,  F,  which  is  pivoted  upon  a  stud,  G,  and  which  has  a  weight, 
H,  upon  its  outer  end.  As  the  flats  pass  along  to  the  grinding 
former,  they  are  supported  upon  the  projecting  arms,  E,  of  the 
bracket,  but  as  they  come  directly  under  the  grinding  roll,  they 
are  raised  slightly  by  the  rounding  end  of  the  weight  lever,  and, 
by  means  of  the  weight,  are  held  firmly  against  the  former. 

Grinding  Former.     Figs.  96,  97  and  98  show  the  grinding 


14€ 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


109 


former  with  the  flats  in  three  positions.     It  will  be  seen  that  the 
former  is  made  with  an  offset,  directly  under  the  center  of  the  grind- 


Fig.  96.    Section  Showing  Flat  Grinder. 


Fig  96.    Position  of  Flat  before  Grinding. 

ing  roll,  equal  to  the  difference  in  the  height  of  the  bearing  surface 
between  the  heel  and  toe  of  the  flat. 


147 


110 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


In  Fig.  96,  the  flat  is  shown  advancing  towards  the  grinding 
roll  with  the  wire  face  at  an  angle.  Fig.  97  shows  the  flat  in 
contact  with  the  grinding  roll.  The  offset  in  the  former  tips  the 


Fig.  97.     Position  of  Flat  when  Grinding. 

flat    just    enough    to    cause    the    wire    face    to    pass    horizontally 
beneath    the   grinding   former.     Fig.    98   shows    the  flat  as  having 


Fig.  98.     Position  of  Flat  after  Grinding,. 

passed  the  grinding  roll,  its  wire  face  assuming  an  angular  posi- 
tion. When  the  flats  are  not  being  ground,  the  weight  lever  is 
raised  and  held  up  by  the  hook,  J.  (Figs.  94  and  95.)  This 


148 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


Ill 


drops  the  short  end  of  the    lever  out  of  contact   with  the  flats 
which  pass  along  clear  of  the  grinding  former. 

Burnishing.  It  is  necessary,  usually,  to  burnish  the  teeth  of 
the  card  clothing,  after  the  card  is  first  ground,  to  remove  the 
burrs  and  rough  edges  which  are  formed  sometimes  upon  the 
teeth,  particularly  when  they  are  overground.  Burnishing  is 
also  resorted  to  when  the  teeth  become  rusty.  Otherwise,  the 
sliver  will  show  streaks  of  cloudy  and  uncarded  cotton. 

Burnishing  is  done  by  a  re- 
volving wire-toothed  brush  which 
is  mounted  in  suitable  bearings. 
Its  teeth  penetrate  from  ^  to  Jg- 
of  an  inch  below  the  points  of  the 
caid  teeth  and  it  is  usually  about 
seven  inches  in  diameter  over  the 
points  of  the  teeth.  It  is  shown 
in  end  elevation  in  Fig.  99.  The 
brush  consists  of  a  wooden  roll, 
wound  with  straight  wire  fillet, 
number  32  wire  being  used,  with 
about  6^  noggs  per  inch.  The 
wires  are  about  |  of  an  inch  high, 
above  the  crown,  and  stand  radially  from  the  center  of  the  roll. 

An  elevation  of  the  card  with  the  burnishing  brushes  in 
position  is  shown  in  Fig.  100.  The  cylinder  and  doffer  are 
burnished  at  the  same  time.  The  device  for  driving  the  various 
parts,  although  very  simple,  requires  some  explanation.  The 
brushes,  D,  D,  are  supported  at  each  end  by  stands  which  are 
adjusted  from  the  arches  of  the  cylinder  and  doffer.  Upon  the 
ends  of  the  brush  shafts  are  pulleys,  E  and  E.  In  place  of  the 
usual  barrow  bar  pulley  is  a  pulley,  H,  the  face  of  which  has 
grooves  for  the  bands,  B,  M  and  N. 

In  the  face  of  the  loose  pulley,  A,  on  the  end  of  the  cylinder 
shaft,  is  a  groove  which  carries  the  band,  B,  for  driving  the  pulley, 
H,  while  the  burnishing  brushes  are  driven  from  H  by  the  bands, 
M  and  N.  The  doffer  is  also  driven  from  the  pulley,  H,  by  the 
gears,  T,  P1,  V1  and  Q,  the  last  being  upon  the  doffer  shaft.  On 
the  opposite -end  of  the  doffer,  shown  by  dotted  lines,  is  a  pulley, 


Fig.  99. 


Elevation  of  Burnishing 
Brush. 


148 


112 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


113 


J,  by  which  the  cylinder  is  driven  through  the  belt,  F,  and  pulley, 
D3.  As  motion  is  transmitted  to  all  parts  of  the  machine 
through  the  band,  B,  it  must  be  kept  reasonably  tight. 

The  main  belt,  C,  is  run  on  the  loose  pulley,  A,  which  should 
be  caused  to  turn  backwards,  or  in  the  same  direction  as  the 
cylinder,  when  grinding  and  burnishing.  This  may  seem,  at  a 
glance,  to  be  unnecessary,  as  the  band,  B,  can  be  crossed  to  give 
the  proper  direction  to  the  cylinder  and  doffer,  but  should  the  belt 
by  any  cause  be  moved  on  to  the  tight  pulley,  considerable  damage 
might  be  done  to  the  teeth  of  the  cylinder,  as  it  would  be  turning 
in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  loose  pulley,  but  with  the  loose 
pulley  turning  in  the  same  direction  as  the  cylinder,  no  accident 
can  happen  to  the  cylinder  clothing  if  the  belt  should  slip  on  to 
the  tight  pulley. 

Stripping.  Under  ordinary 
conditions,  the  card  requires  to  be 
stripped  twice  each  day.  For 
waste  and  very  short  and  dirty 
cotton,  it  should  be  done  four  times 
a  day. 

The  operation  consists  in  re- 
moving the  dirt  and  short  fibers 
which  become  lodged  in  the  wires 
of  the  cylinder  and  doffer  while 
the  card  is  at  work. 

The  stripping  brush,  shown  in 
end  elevation  in  Fig.  101,  is  of 
about  the  same  size  and  general 
appearance  as  the  burnishing  brush, 

except  that  the  wires  are  bent,  similarly  to  the  card  clothing 
teeth,  instead  of  being  straight. 

Fig.  102  shows  the  card  in  elevation  with  the  stripping 
brush  mounted  in  the  stands  in  position  for  cleaning  the  cylinder 
and  doffer.  It  is  set  so  that  its  wires  penetrate  about  |-  of  an 
inch  into  the  card  teeth  and  it  is  driven  from  a  groove  in  the 
loose  pulley,  A,  by  a  band,  P,  and  pulley,  S. 

The  main  belt,  C,  is  run  on  to  the  tight  pulley  just  far 
enough  to  turn  the  cylinder  around  very  slowly,  one  revolution 


Fig.  101.     Elevation  of  Stripping 
Brush. 


151 


114  COTTON    SPINNING. 

being  sufficient.  The  surfaces  of  thb  cylinder  and  brush,  which 
are  in  contact,  turn  hi  the  same  direction,  but,  as  the  brush  runs 
at  a  much  greater  speed,  the  dirt  is  removed  very  easily.  The 
band  is  then  taken  off  and  the  brush  is  placed  in  position  for 
stripping  the  doffer,  being  driven  by  a  band,  E,  in  the  same 
manner  as  is  the  cylinder.  Previous  to  stripping  the  doffer,  the 
driving  belt  is  moved  on  to  the  tight  pulley  and  allowed  to 
remain  while  the  brush  is  being  placed  in  position  and  is  then 
moved  back  on  to  the  loose  pulley  for  driving  the  brush.  The 
barrow  bar,  which  has  remained  down,  is  now  thrown  into  ge;ir; 
the  doffer  is  allowed  to  make  one  revolution  and  is  driven  through 
the  regular  gearing,  from  the  momentum  acquired  by  the  cylinder, 
while  the  belt  was  on  the  tight  pulley. 

It  -will  be  seen  that  the  surface  of  the  doffer  runs  in  the 
opposite  direction  from  the  brush,  but  the  wires  of  each  are  bent 
at  such  an  angle  that  the  work  is  easily  accomplished.  After  the 
card  is  stripped,  the  brush  itself  needs  cleaning,  which  is  done  by 
a  hand  card. 

Calculations.  The  production  of  the  card  is  governed  by  the 
weight  of  the  sliver  per  yard  and  the  number  of  revolutions  of 
the  doffer  per  minute.  Although  the  doffer  is  not  the  actual 
delivery  roll,  it  is  considered  in  the  calculations.  To  have  this 
fully  understood,  diagrams,  showing  the  gearing  of  four  of  the 
leading  makes  of  revolving  Hat  cards,  are  shown  in  Figs.  103,  104, 
105  and  106.  The  gearing  of  all  is  very  similar  so  that  what- 
ever calculations  are  made  upon  one  may  be  very  easily  followed 
through  upon  another.  These  calculations  are  figured  from  the 
gearing  shown  in  Fig.  106. 

The  doffer  is  24|^  inches  in  diameter  on  the  face  of  the  cloth- 
ing, therefore,  each  revolution  that  it  makes  will  deliver  a  length 
of  sliver  equal  to  its  circumference  which  is  77.75  inches.  But 
after  leaving  the  doffer,  the  sliver  passes  between  the  calender 
rolls  on  the  card  and  then  between  the  calender  rolls  in  the  coiler 
box,  where  in  each  case  it  is  subjected  to  a  slight  draft.  This  addi- 
tional draft,  or  elongation,  reduces  the  weight  of  the  sliver  some- 
what from  what  it  weighed  at  the  doffer,  so  that,  as  the  calender 
rolls  in  the  coiler  are  the  actual  delivery  rolls,  the  length  de- 
livered by  them  at  each  revolution  of  the  doffer  should  be 


1012 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


115 


a 

c« 
M 
tc 

c 

'i 

o 


163 


116  COTTON    SPINNING. 

considered  in  figuring  the  production.  These  rolls  are  2|  inches 
in  diameter  and  make  13.22  revolutions  to  one  of  the  doffer.  This 
gives  a  delivery  of  88.25  inches  for  each  revolution,  instead  of 
77.75  inches,  as  when  taking  the  actual  circumference  of  the  doffer. 
Rule  1.  To  find  the  production  of  the  card:  Multiply  to- 
gether the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  doffer  per  minute  (13), 
the  number  of  inches  delivered  at  each  revolution  (88.25),  the 
weight  of  the  sliver  per  yard  (60  grains)  and  the  number  of 
minutes  run  per  day  (600).  Divide  the  product  by  7,000  (the 
number  of  grains  in  one  pound)  multiplied  by  36  (number  of 
inches  in  a  yard). 

Example:         13  X  ^  *  ^  X  6-°°  -  i««  «o      • 

In  the  above  example,  the  time  run  per  day  is  given  as  600 
minutes,  or  ten  hours,  no  allowance  having  been  made  for  the  time 
lost  in  stripping  and  cleaning,  which,  under  ordinary  circum- 
stances, amounts  to  about  5  per  cent. 

Rule  2.     To  find  the  factor  for  the  production  of  the  card  in 
10  hours :  Proceed  as  in  Rule  1  but  omit  the  revolutions  of  the 
doffer  and  the  weight  of  the  sliver. 
88.25  X  600 

Exampl6:  7000  X  36       :'21011 

Rule  3.  To  find  the  production  with  factor  given:  Multi- 
ply the  factor  by  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  doffer  and  the 
weight  of  the  sliver. 

Example:         .21011  X  13  X  60  =  163.89 

Rule  4.  -  To  find  the  speed  of  the  doffer :  Multiply  together 
the  driving  gears  and  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  cylinder 
(165  R.  P.  M.)  and  divide  their  product  by  the  product  of  the 
driven  gears.  [The  driving  gears  are  D3,  Z,  T  (change  gear,  30 
teeth)  and  V1.]  (The  driven  gears  are  B,  S*,  P1  and  Q.) 

165  X  18  X  6  X    30  X  20 
ExaraPle :      7   X  12X40X192  =  16'57  R'  R  M' 

Rule  5.  To  find  the  factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer ;  Pro- 
ceed as  in  rule  4,  but  omit  the  doffer  change  gear. 

Io5  X  18  X     6  X     20 
Example:  7  X  12  X  40  X  192  =  '°52 


154 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


117 


L18 

21  JE  ii  n  2>DIA 

N    I       CALENDER  ROLL 


PH 


o 

*o 

£ 
ce 

c« 
5 

I 
t'c 


155 


118  COTTON    SPINNING. 

Rule  6.  To  find  the  speed  of  the  doffer:  Multiply  the  fac- 
tor by  the  number  of  teeth  (30)  in  the  doffer  change  gear. 

Example:  .552  X  30  —  16.5G 

Rule  7.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  doffer  change 
gear  that  will  give  the  required  revolutions  of  the  doffer  :  Divide 
the  required  number  of  revolutions  by  the  factor. 

Example:  16.56  ^  .552  =  30 

In  Rule  5,  the  factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer  is  figured 
with  the  cylinder  at  165  R.  P.  M.,  but  as  the  cylinder  is  often 
run  at  other  speed,  it  is  convenient  to  have  a  factor  which  can  be 
.used  with  the  cylinder  at  any  speed. 

Rule  8.  To  find  the  factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer  with 
the  cylinder  at  any  speed  :  Multiply  together  the  driven  gears  and 
divide  the  product  by  the  product  of  the  driving  gears,  omitting 
the  doffer  change  g-ear. 

.  7  X  12  X  40  X  192 
Example:  18  X     6  X  20 

Rule  9.  To  find  the  speed  of  the  doffer:  Multiply  the  num- 
ber of  revolutions  of  the  cylinder  by  the  number  of  teeth  in  the 
doffer  change  gear  and  divide  the  product  by  the  factor. 

165  X  30 
Example:  .     =  16.57  R.  P.  M. 


Rule  10.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  doffer  change 
gear  when  the  speeds  of  the  cylinder  and  doffer  are  given:  Mul- 
tiply the'  factor  by  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  doffer  and 
divide  the  product  by  the  revolutions  of  the  cylinder. 

298.66  X  16.5T 
Example:  ~T65~  "  29'" 

Rule  11.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  card  between  the  feed 
roll  and  the  calender  rolls  in  the  coiler  box:  Multiply  together 
the  driving  gears  and  the  diameter  of  the  coiler  calender  roll  and 
divide  the  product  by  the  product  of  the  driven  gears  multiplied 
by  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roll,  omitting  all  intermediate  gears. 
[The  driving  gears  are  G2,  L4,  Q,  Y1,  V  and  N,  and  the  driven 
gears  are.  D,  (change  gear  16  teeth)  K1,  O,  R2,  Q1  and  N*.]  As  L* 


156 


COTTOX    SPINNING. 


119 


Lie 

IT!  DIA. 

CALENDER  ROLL 

M  15 


157 


120  COTTON    SPINNING. 

and  K1,  V  and  Q1  and  N  and  N1  are  in  pairs,  they  may  be  omitted 
in  the  calculation.'  In  order  to  avoid  fractions,  the  diameter  of 
the  feed  roll,  which  is  2^  inches,  can  be  called  18,  as  there  are  -^ 
in  2|  inches,  and  the  diameter  of  the  coiler  calender  roll,  which  is 
2^,  can  be  called  17. 

120  x  192  X  31  X  IT 
Example :  16  X.  80  X  16Xl»  =  98'68 

Rule  12.  To  find  the  draft  factor:  Proceed  as  in  Rule  11 
but  omit  the  draft  change  gear. 

120  X  192  X  31  X  17 
ExamPle:  30  X     15X18 

Rule  13.  To  find  the  draft:  Divide  the  factor  by  the  num- 
ber of  teeth  in  the  draft  change  gear  (16). 

Example:  1499.02  -f-  16  =  93.68 

Rule  14.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear 
when  the  draft  is  given :  Divide  the  factor  by  the  draft. 

Example  :  1499.02  4-  93.68  =  16 

Rule  15.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  card  necessary  to  make  a 
sliver  of  a  certain  weight  from  a  lap  of  a  given  weight:  Multiply 
the  weight  of  the  picker  lap  in  ounces  per  yard  (14)  by  the  num- 
ber of  grains  in  one  ounce  (437.5)  and  divide  the  product  by  the 
weight  of  the  sliver  in  grains  per  yard,  that  it  is  desired  to  make 
(60). 

Example:  ^^  =  102.08 

In  the  foregoing  rule,  no  allowance  has  been  made  for  the 
loss  in  weight  in  carding  due  to  fly  and  stripping,  which 
amounts,  on  an  average,  to  5  per  cent,  which  should  be  con- 
sidered. 

14  X  437.5  X   95 
Example:  -^-  =  96.97 

Rule  16.  To  find  the  length  in,  feet  of  fillet  necessary  to 
cover  a  cylinder  or  doffer:  Multiply  together  the  length  of  the 
face  of  the  doffer  (41")  by  its  diameter  and  3. 1410  and  divide  the 


153 


COTTOX    SPINNING. 


121 


2"    DIA- 

CALENDER  ROLL. 
38  H      A 18  K 


159 


122  COTTON"    SPINNING. 


product  by  the  width  of  the  fillet  (1^")  multiplied  by  12  inches. 

41  X  24  X  3.1416 

Example:  1  1  NX  10  --  =  171.74 

i^  X  -L^ 

The  following  are  the  draft  factors  and  factors  for  the  speed 
of  the  doffer  for  the  cards  shown  in  Figs.  103,  104  and  105. 

Fig.  103.  Draft  factor  .  The  driving  gears  are  B,  F,  H,  P  and 
N.  The  driven  gears  are  D  (change  gear),  E,  S,  M  and  L.  E 
and  F  are  in  pairs.  The  feed  roll  is  2|  inches  in  diameter  and 
the  coiler  calendar  roll  is  2  inches  in  diameter.  Their  diameters 
can  be  called  9  and  8  respectively 

120  X  190  X  23  X  21  X  8_ 

21  X    17  X  18  X     9 

Factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer  with  the  cylinder  at  165 
R.  P.  M.  The  driving  gears  are  A,  R  and  T  (change  gear). 
The  driven  gears  are  C,  G  and  H. 

165  X  18  X  4 


7X  18  X  190- 

Fig.  104.  Draft  factor.  The  driving  gears  are  B,  F,  H,  P 
and  N.  The  driven  gears  are  D  (change  gear)  E,  S,  M  and  L. 
E  and  F  are  in  pairs.  The  feed  roll  is  2^g  inches  in  diameter,  or 
|9,  and  the  coiler  calender  roll  is  1-J-l-  inches  in  diameter,  or  ^|- 
The  diameters  may  be  called  39  an'd  27,  respectiv  ly. 

130  X  190  X  29X.24X  27 
28  X    15  X  18  X  39 

Factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer  with  the  cylinder  at  165 
R.  P.  M.  The  driving  gears  are  A,  R  and  T  (change  gear). 
The  driven  gears  are  C,  G  and  H. 

165  X  "18x4 

=  -5< 


Fig.  105.  Draft  factor.  The  driving  gears  are  S,  E,  M,  C,  J 
and  V.  The  driven  gears  are  D  (change  gear),F,  P,  H,  K  and  R. 
E  and  F  and  V  and  R  are  in  pairs.  The  diameter  of  the  feed  roll 
and  the  coiler  calender  roll  can  be  called  9  and  8,  respectively. 


160 


COTTON    SPINNING. 


25  DIA. 
CALENDER  ROLL 


161 


124  COTTON    SPINNING. 

160  X  192  X  39  X  36  X  8 

^ "  907^04. 

.      27  X    38  X  18  X     9 

Factor  for  the  speed  of  the  doffer  with  the  cylinder  at  165 
R.  P.  M.  The  driving  gears  are  N,  L  and  T  (change  gear). 
The  driven  gears  are  B,  G  and  M.  The  diameter  of  L,  which  is 
4^  inches,  can  be  called  17,  and  the  diameter  of  G,  which  is  15| 
inches,  can  be  called  62. 

165X18X17  Q    . 

7  X  62  X  192  — 'bl 


162 


COTTON  SPINNING. 

PART  m. 


COMBING. 

In  the  manufacture  of  the  finer  qualities  of  yarn  which  de- 
mand long  staple  cotton,  the  combing  process,  which  is  necessary, 
follows  carding,  although  the  card  sliver  is  very  often  subjected 
to  one  process  of  drawing  before  it  is  combed.  Briefly  speaking, 
the  operation  of  combing,  which  is  entirely  different  from  all  other 
branches  of  cotton  spinning,  consists  in  removing  the  short  fibers 
and  neps  which  remain  in  the  sliver  after  carding. 

Combed  yarns  are  used  for  various  purposes,  among  which 
may  be  mentioned  hosiery  and  underwear,  sewing  thread,  laces 
and  fine  cotton  fabrics. 

In  considering  the  uses  for  combed  yarns,  three  important 
points  should  be  kept  in  view  in  order  to  thoroughly  understand 
the  merits  of  combing ;  first,  the  length  of  the  cot.ton  fibers,  sec- 
ond, the  twist  per  inch  in  the  yarn  and  third,  the  counts  of  yarn 
spun. 

Yarn  depends,  mainly,  for  its'  strength  upon  the  amount  of 
twist  it  contains  and  the  length  of  the  fibres.  For  hosiery  and 
underwear,  it  must  be  soft  twisted  so  that  it  will  be  smooth  to  the 
touch,  and,  in  order  that  it  shall  be  sufficiently  strong,  long  staple 
cotton  must  be  used. 

Yarn  for  thread  and  fine  cotton  fabrics  is  much  harder 
twisted,  and,  as  the  fine  numbers  of  yarn  contain  comparatively 
few  fibers  per  cross  section,  they  must  be  long  enough  to  receive 
a  sufficient  number  of  twists.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  fibers 
in  combed  yarn  must  be  approximately  uniform  in -length  which 
result  can  be  obtained  only  by  combing. 

Arrangement  of  Combing  flachines.  There  are  generally 
three  machines  used  in  the  combing  process,  viz :  The  sliver  lap 
machine,  the  ribbon  lapper  and  the  comb,  although  very  often  the 
ribbon  lapper  is  not  used.  In  that  case,  the  slivers,  after  leaving 
the  card,  are  put  through  one  process  of  drawing  and  from  the 


165 


126  COTTON  SPINNING. 

drawing  frame  are  put  through  the  sliver  lap  machine  and  made 
into  a  lap  for  the  comb.  When  all  three  machines  are  used,  the 
drawing  process  is  usually  omitted  before  combing  and  the  ribbon 
lapper,  which  corresponds  to  it,  is  used  instead.  But  in  all  cases, 
the  sliver  lap  machine  is  necessary  to  prepare  the  laps  for  comb- 
ing and  two  or  three  drawing  processes  are  necessary  after 
combing. 

To  make  this  .perfectly  clear,  the  different  arrangements  of 
the  machines  used  in  combing  are  given  below. 

With  the  ribbon  lapper  the  machines  used  are : 

1.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

2.  Rrbbon  lapper. 

3.  Comb. 

When  the  ribbon  lapper  is'  omitted,  the  machines  used  are : 

1.  Drawing  frame. 

2.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

3.  Comb. 

When  the  drawing  frame  is  used  with  the  ribbon  lapper,  the 
following  machines  are  used: 

1.  Drawing  frame. 

2.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

3.  Ribbon  lapper. 

4.  Comb. 

Sometimes  double  combiny  is  resorted  to  for  the  very  best  yarn. 
The  machines  are  then  arranged  in  one  of  the  two  following  orders  : 

1.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

2.  Ribbon  lapper. 

3.  Comb. 

4.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

5.  Ribbon  lapper. 

6.  Comb. 

If  the  ribbon  lapper  is  omitted. 

1.  Drawing  frame. 

2.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

3.  Comb. 

4.  Drawing  frame. 

5.  Sliver  lap  machine. 

6.  Comb. 


166 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


127 


Sliver  Lap  riachine.  The  sliver  lap  machine  prepares  the 
laps  for  the  comb  by  If.ying  the  card  or  drawing  frame  slivers,  as 
the  case  may  be,  in  the  form  of  a  narrow  sheet  which  is  wound 
upon  a  wooden  core,  or  spool,  into  a  lap  12  inches  to  14  inches  in 
diameter.  The  number  of  slivers  at  the  back  of  the  machine 


depends  upon  their  weight  and  the  width  of  the  lap  to  be  made. 
In  the  earlier  types  of  these  machines,  the  laps  were  made  7  to  9 
inches  in  width  but  the  present  ones  are  built  to  make  a  lap  10 
to  11  inches  wide.  This  will  require  fourteen  to  twenty  slivers, 


128 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


and,  as  the  laps  must  be  free  from  thin  places,  the  machine  is  pro- 
vided with  a  stop  motion,  which  instantly  operates,  when  a  sliver 
breaks  or  a  can  becomes  empty. 

An  elevation  of  the  machine  is  shown  in  Fig.  107  and  a  sec- 


tion in  Fig.  108.  From  the  cans,  A,  the  slivers  are  drawn  over 
the  stop-motion  spoons,  B,  and  through  the  guides,  C,  and  between 
three  pairs  of  draft  rolls,  D,  E  and  F,  where  they  are  subjected  to 
a  slight  d.-aft,  from  two  to  three  usually  being  sufficient,  as  all 


168 


COTTON  SPINNING.  129 

that  is  required  is  to  straighten  the  slivers  slightly,  so  that  the 
needles  of  the  comb  may  deal  more  gently  with  the  fibers,  particu- 
larly when  the  ribbon  lapper  is  omitted  between  the  sliver  lap 
machine  and' the  comb.  From 'the  draft  rolls,  the  slivers  next 
pass  between  two  pairs  of  heavily  weighted  smooth  calender  rolls, 
H  H,  and,  H  II,  and  are  formed  into  a  thin,  fleecy  sheet  which  is 
drawn  forward  and  wound  upon  a  wooden  spool  into  a  lap,  which 
is  revolved  by  contact  with. a  pair  of  fluted  lap  rollsj  X  X.  The 
ends  of  the  laps  are  formed  by  a  pair  of  plates,  M,  which  revolve 
with  the  lap,  making  very  even  selvages. 

Directly  beneath  the  lap  rolls  is  a  friction  or  break  pulley,  S, 
which  is  keyed  upon  a  shaft,  T.  Around  this  pulley  is  a  leather 
strap,  W,  both  ends  of  which  are  fastened  to  a  foot  lever,  O, 
which  is  hung  upon  a  stud,  V.  Upon  the  long  end  of  the  foot 
lever  is  a  weight,  X.  The  lever  is  balanced  so  that  the  weight 
keeps  the  strap  tight  at  all  times.  Upon  each  end  of  the  shaft 
with  this  pulley  is  a  pinion,  R,  in  gear  with  a  rack,  P,  the  end  of 
which  is  connected  to  the  lap  roll  arbor,  L,  which  passes  through 
the  spool  upon  which  the  lap  is  wound.  As  the  lap  increases  in 
diameter,  it  lifts  the  racks,  the  upward  movement  of  which  is  re- 
tarded by  the  friction  of  the  strap  around  the  break  pulley.  By 
this  means,  the  laps  are  wound  very  firmly  and  compactly. 

In  addition  to  the  back  stop-motion,  the  machine  is  provided 
with  a  full  lap  stop-motion,  or  measuring  device,  whereby  the  size 
and  weight  of  the  laps  may  be  governed.  This  is  operated  by  a 
projecting  piece  on  one  of  the  racks  which  comes  in  contact  with 
the  stop-motion  arm  as  the  lap  reaches  its  full  diameter.  To 
remove  the  lap,  the  attendant  presses  upon  the  foot  lever,  re- 
leasing the  strap  from  around  the  break  pulley.  The  lap  is  then 
raised  clear  of  the  lap  rolls  by  the  hand  wheel,  X,  and  the  arbor  is 
withdrawn. 

The  draft  rolls  are  dead  weighted,  each  roll  having  an  inde- 
pendent weight,  G1,  hung  by  stirrups,  in  the  usual  manner.  In 
each  weight  is  a  square  hole  through  which  extends  the  shaft,  G, 
which  has  a  cajn-shaped  projection  along  its  face.  This  shaft  is 
supported  by  bearings  at  each  end  and  at  one  end  is  a  handle,  G2, 
by  which  the  shaft  may  be  turned.  When  it  is  desired  to  remove 
the  weight  from  the  draft  rolls,  this  shaft  is  given  a  quarter  revo- 


160 


130 


COTTON  SPINNING* 


lution  and  its  cam-shaped  face  brought  against  the  upper  side  of 
the  hole  in  the  weights.  In  this  manner,  the  weight  may  be 
entirely  removed  from  the  rolls  and  transferred  to  the  shaft. 

The  top  pair  of  calender  rolls  is  provided  with  a  top  clearer, 

C1,  which  consists  of  a 
heavy  iron  piece,  lined 
with  clearer  cloth.  The 
underside  of  this  piece 
is  shaped  to  fit  the  out- 
line of  the  calender  rolls, 
its  weight  holding  it 
firmly  down  upon  them. 
The  clearer,  F1,  for  the 
under  pair  of  calender 
rolls  is  also  shaped  to 
fit  the  rolls  but  is  of 
wood  instead  of  iron. 
It  is  held  up  against  the 
rolls  by  a  counter- 
weight,  H1,  which  is 
hung  upon  a  stud,  L1. 
The  draft  rolls  are  also 
provided  with  a  clearer, 
D1.  In  addition  to  their 
own  weight,  the  top  cal- 
ender rolls  are  lever 
weighted,  the  rod,  E1, 
connects  the  yoke  which 
is  over  Ihe  bearings  of 
the  top  rolls  with  the 
weight  lever,  N  %  upon 
which  is  the  weight,  PJ. 


BACK  ROLL    if'OIA 

^ •B^^gg 
^B^HBM^B 
MID.  ROLL  1 1  DIA 


Fig.  109.     Diagram  of  Gearing  of 
Sliver  Lap  Machine. 


The  fulcrum  for  the  weight  lever  is  a  projecting  lug,  S1,  upon  the 
frame  of  the  machine. 

Calculations.  Fig.  109  is  a  diagram  of  the  gearing  of  the 
sliver  lap  machine. 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  draft:  Multiply  the  number  of  slivers, 
entering  at  the  back  (16),  by  their  weight  in  grains  per  yard 


170 


0.    '- 

<   1 

«! 

W     S 

>   2 
2  s 

in   fl 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


181 


(42.5)   and  divide  the  product  by  the  weight  of  the  lap  in  grains 
per  yard  (272). 

42.5X16 
Example : 


272 


=  2.5 


This  will  require  a  draft  gear  of  55  teeth  which  is  shown  on 
the  plan  of  the  gearing. 

Rule  2.  To. find  the  production  of  the  machine:  Multiply 
together  the  revolutions  of  the  calender  roll  per  minute  (60),  the 
circumference  of  the  calender  roll  (15.70"),  the  weight  of  the  lap 
in  grains  per  yard  (272)  and  the  minutes  run  per  day  (600)  and 
divide  the  product  by  7,000  (the  number  of  grains  in  one  pound) 
multiplied  by  36  (inches  in  one  yard). 

60  X  15.70  X  272x600 
Example :    — 


7,000x36 


=  610.5 


PULLEYS  l2"X2i" 


Fig.  110.     Plan  of  Sliver  Lap  Machine. 

From  this  amount  should  be  deducted  about  ten  per  cent  for  time 
lost  in  doffing. 

An  examination  of  the  gearing  will  show  that  on  the  driving 
shaft  is  a  pinion  of  29  teeth  which  drives  the  calender  roll  gear  of 
72  teeth.  The  driving  pulleys  thus  make  2.48  revolutions  to  one 
of  the  five  inch  calender  rolls.  The  speed  of  the  driving  pulley  is 
from  125  to  250  revolutions  per  minute. 

A  plan  of  the  sliver  lap  machine  is  shown  in  Fig.  110.  The 
floor  space,  occupied  with  16  cans  at  the  back,  is  9'  0"  long  by 
4'  2"  wide.  The  driving  pulleys  are  always  on  the  left  hand  side. 


171 


132 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


The  following  table  gives  the  production  of  the  sliver  lap 
machine  per  day  with  the  lap  weighing  from  200  to  310  grains  per 
yard  and  the  speed  of  the  calender  rolls  from  50  to  100  revolutions 
per  minute. 

SLIVER  LAP  MACHINE. 

Production  Per  Day  of  10  Hours,  Less  10  Per  Cent  for  Cleaning,  etc. 


gg 

K 

Weight  of  Lap  In  Grains  per  Yard. 

fl     f-H 

3  3 

fc.""^1 

£  °  bo 

tw_C  •_ 

200 

210 

220 

230 

240 

250 

260 

270 

280 

290 

300 

'310 

o-  a 

"T<H  E 

>  '.E 

i 

K  5 

»  "3 

tf  0 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

124 

50 

336 

353 

370 

387 

404 

420 

437 

454 

471 

488 

505 

522 

136 

55 

370 

388 

407 

426 

444 

463 

481 

500 

518 

537 

555 

574 

148 

60 

404 

424 

444 

464 

484 

505 

525 

545 

565 

585 

606 

626 

161 

65 

437 

459 

481 

503 

525 

547 

559 

591 

613 

634 

656 

678 

173 

70 

471 

494 

518 

542 

565 

589 

612 

636 

659 

683 

706 

730 

198 

80 

538 

565 

592 

619 

646 

673 

700 

727 

753 

781 

808 

835 

223 

90 

606 

636 

666 

696 

727 

757 

787 

817 

848 

878 

909 

939 

248 

100 

673 

706 

740 

774 

807 

841 

875 

908 

942  976 

1010 

1044 

Ribbon  Lapper.  The  ribbon  lapper,  which  is  used  as  an  in- 
termediate process,  between  the  sliver  lap  machine  and  the  comb, 
is,  in  one  sense,  a  drawing  frame,  with  the  exception  that  the  fibers, 
instead  of  being  drawn  in  the  form  of  a  sliver,  are  spread  out  in 
a  sheet. 

The  laps  are  placed  upon  the  lap  rolls,  side  by  side,  at  the 
back  of  the  machine,  which  is  built  usually  to  take  six.  The  laps 
are  drawn  full  width  between  four  pairs  of  draff  rolls,  having  a 
draft  of  about  six.  Passing  downward  around  highly  polished 
plates  and  under  calender  rolls,  they  are  brought  together,  one 
above  another,  upon  the  sliver  plate  of  the  machine.  This  forms 
a  lap  of  six  thicknesses,  but,  as  each  lap  has  been  subjected  to  a 
draft  of  about  six,  their  combined  weight  is  the  same  as  was  that 
of  each  lap  at  the  back  of  the  machine.  The  laps  are  drawn 
along  the  sliver  plate  by  the  calender  rolls  and  then  pass  between 
two  pairs  of  heavily  weighted  calender  rolls,  which  consolidate  the 
six  laps  into  one  sheet.  This  sheet  now  passes  forward  and  is 
wound  upon  a  wooden  spool  by  contact  with  two  lap  rolls  into  a 
lap  ready  for  combing. 


172 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


The  device  for  winding  the  lap  is  exactly  the  same  in  detail 
as  that  used  on  the  sliver  lap  machine. 

The  laps,  put  in  at  the  back  of  the  ribbon  lapper,  are  usually 
made  about  one  inch  less  in  width  than  those  required  for  the 
comb,  as  they  spread  some  when  passing  through  the  draft  rolls. 

The  ribbon  lapper  is  provided  with  two  stop-motions,  one 
which  stops  the  machine  immediately  if  a  lap  runs  out  at  the  back 
and  one,  called  a  full  lap  stop-motion,  which  regulates  the  length 
of  the  laps,  so  that  they  will  all  be  wound  to  the  same  diameter. 

Fig.  Ill  shows  a  diagram  of  the  gearing  of  the  ribbon  lap- 
per. The  driving  pulleys  are  16  inches  in  diameter  by  3  inches 


12"     O/A. 
ELEVATION   OF  LAP  ROLLS. 


Fig.  111.     Diagram  of  Gearing  of  Ribbon  Lapper. 

face  and  make  three  revolutions  to  one  of  the  five  inch  calender 
roll.  The  usual  speed  for  the  driving  pulleys  is  from  250  to  300 
R.  P.  M. 

The  draft  of  the  ribbon  lapper  is  principally  between  the 
back  and  front  rolls,  but  in  addition,  there  is  also  a  slight  draft  be- 
tween the  front  roll  and  the  calender  rolls  which  is  necessary  to 
draw  the  sliver  along  the- sliver  plate. 

The  draft  change  gear  is  from  47  to  52  teeth  which  gives 
a  range  in  draft  of  5.63  to  6.23.  This  is  figured  between  the 
back  roll,  which  is  1^  inches  in  diameter,  and  the  five  inch  calender 
roll  and  can  be  found  in  the  usual  manner. 


173 


134 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


The  ribbon  lapper  occupies  a  floor  space  of  14'  2"  length  by 
4'  7"  width  and  is  built  both  right  and  left  hand. 

For  the  production  of  the  ribbon  lapper,  use  the  production 
table  for  the  sliver  lap  machine,  as  the  calender  rolls  for  both 
machines  are  the  same  diameter. 


Comb.  After  the  laps  have  been  fofmed  on  the  sliver  lap 
machine,  or  the  ribbon  lapper,  they  are  taken  to  the  comb  upon 
which  the  actual  operation  of  combing  is  carried  on.  The  comb 
is  divided  into  either  six  or  eight  heads,  or  sections,  a  six-headed 
comb  being  most  generally  used. 


174 


COTTON  SPINNING.  135 

Each  head  is  exactly  like  the  others  so  that  a  description  of 
the  movements  of  one  answers  for  all  and  it  should  be  understood 
that,  although  the  functions  of  one  part  depend  closely  upon  those 
of  another,  each  movement  will  be  considered  a  separate  action. 

Fig.  112  is  a  section  through  a  comb,  showing  enough  of  the 
principnl  parts  to  enable  its  workings  to  be  explained. 

The  lap  is  placed  upon  the  fluted  lap  rolls,  A  and  A,  by 
which  it  is  slowly  unwound.  The  cotton  passes  down  a  smooth 
plate,  B,  and  is  drawn  between  the  feed  rolls,  C  and  C.  The  move- 
ment of  these  rolls  is  intermittent  and  is  governed  by  the  length 
of  the  staple  of  cotton  being  worked  and  the  draft  of  the  machine. 

From  the  feed  rolls,  the  lap  passes  down  between  the  cushion 
plate,  D,  and  the  nipper,  E1,  which  are  at  this  particular  instant 
apart,  to  allow  it  to  pass  through. 

When  the  length  has  been  delivered  by  the  feed  rolls,  their 
movements  cease  and  the  nipper  is  brought  into  contact  with  the 
cushion  plate  and  the  cotton,  which  is  between  them,  is  held 
firmly. 

Just  beneath  the  cushion  plate  is  the  cylinder  shaft,  N,  upon 
which  are  the  cylinders,  one  for  each  section.  The  cylinders  are 
made  up  of  two  parts,  the  fluted  segment,  O,  and  the  half  lap,  P, 
which  are  separated  by  a  portion  which  is*  smaller  in  diameter. 

The  surface  of  the  fluted  segment  is  similar  to  a  feed  roll 
while  the  half  lap  is  composed  of  a  series  of  rows  of  needles  each 
row  finer  than  the  preceding  one.  The  rotary  motion  of  the  cyl- 
inders, unlike  that  of  the  feed  rolls,  is  continuous  and,  as  they  re- 
volve, the  needles  pass  through  that  portion  of  the  lap  which 
projects  downward  from  between  the  nipper  and  the  cushion  plate 
and  removes  the  short  fibers  and  neps. 

Front  of  the  nippers  are  the  detaching  rolls,  E,  F  and  G. 
E  is  a  steel  fluted  roll  which  is  driven  from  one  end  of  the  comb. 
F  is  a  brass  fluted  top  roll,  driven  by  contact  with  E,  and  G  is  a 
leather  covered  roll  heavily  weighted  also  driven  by  contact  with 
E. 

All  of  these  rolls  have  a  rotary  motion  both  backwards  and 
forwards,  while  F  and  G  have  in  addition  a  slight  movement,  cir- 
cumferentially,  about  E.  The  functions  of  these  three  rolls,  in 
connection  with  the  fluted  segment,  are  to  detach  the  fibers,  which 


175 


136 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


have  just  been  combed,  from  the  mass  held  between  the  cushion 
plate  and  nipper  and  to  attach  them  to  those  which  were  combed, 
previously,  so  as  to  make  a  continuous  sliver. 

After  the  needles  have  passed  through  the  cotton,  the  rolls, 
E,  F  and  G,  turn  backwards  a  portion  of  a  revolution  so  that  the 
cotton,  which  is  between  them,  will  be  in  a  position  to  be  attached, 
or  "pieced  up."  Meanwhile,  the  partial  revolution  of  the  cyl- 
inder has  brought  the  front  edge  of  the  fluted  segment  around 


Fig.  113.     Elevation  of  Feed  .Roll  Gearing. 

against  the  combed  fibers  which  are  hanging  from  between  the 
cushion  plate  and  nipper  and  as  it  continues  to  turn,  they  are 
made  to  lie  upon  its  surface. 

At  this  point,  the  detaching  rolls,  which  have  ceased  their 
backward  movement,  now  turn  forward  and  the  leather  roll,  G, 
which  during  its  backward  movement  was  clear  of  the  cylinder, 
is  moved  circumferentially  about  the  steel  roll,  E,  until  it  comes 
in  contact  with  the  fluted  segment.  When  these  surfaces  touch, 
the  fibers  are  carried  forward  and  are  overlapped  on  the  end  of 


176 


COTTON  SPINNING.  137 

those  ahead  and,  as  the  forward  movement  of  these  rolls  is  consid- 
erably, more  than  the  backward,  the  fibers  are  drawn  steadily 
onward. 

At  the  same  time  that  the  rolls  commence  to  turn  forward, 
the  top  comb,  H1,  descends  into  the  path  of  the  cotton  and  the  end 
of  the  fibers  that  were  between  the  cushion  plate  and  the  nipper 
also  receive  a  combing. 

From  the  detaching  rolls,  the  sliver  is  drawn  forward  through 
the  trumpet,  L,  by  the  calender  rolls,  M  and  M1,  and  along 
the  table  with  the  other  slivers  where  they  pass  through  a  draw 
box  that  usually  has  a  draft  of  five.  From  here,  they  pass,  as 
one^liver,  through  the  coiler  into  a  roving  can. 

The  short  fibers  and  neps  are  removed  from  the  cylinder  teeth 
by  a  revolving  brush,  Q,  which  is  placed  beneath  the  cylinder. 
The  surface  speed  of  the  brush  is  slightly  greater  than  that  of  the 
cylinder  and,  as  the  bristles  extend  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
below  the  points  of  the  needles,  these  are  thoroughly  cleaned. 

The  fibers  are  removed  from  the  brush  by  a  slowly  revolving 
doffer,  R,  which  is  covered  with  very  coarse  card  clothing,  and 
they  are  removed  from  the  doffer  in  a  thin  fleece,  by  an  ordinary 
doffer  comb,  S,  the  cotton  falling  into  a  box  below.  Sometimes, 
the  comb  is  provided  with  a  roll  for  winding  the  waste  into  a  lap 
as  is  done  by  the  stripping  roll  on  a  revolving  -flat  card. 

On  each  side  of  the  cylinder  and  brush  are  covers,  S]  and 
T1,  which  prevent  the  fly  from  escaping.  The  brush  is  adjust- 
able as  the  continual  wear  shortens  the  bristles  very  rapidly.  The 
doffer  and  differ  comb  are  adjustable  with  respect  to  the  brush. 

Feed  Plotiori.  First  in  order,  in  considering  the  movements 
of  the  comb  in  detail,  comes  the  feed  motion.  The  feed  rolls  are 
driven  from  the  main  driving  shaft  of  the  comb  and,  as  their 
motion  is  intermittent  while  that  of  the  driving  shaft  is  .continu- 
ous, a  device  called  a  pin  and  starwheel  is  used  which  is  shown  in 
elevation  in  Fig.  113  and  in  section  in  Fig.  114.  The  cylinder 
shaft,  N,  is  driven  from  the  driving  shaft,  A1,  by  the  pinion,  C1* 
and  the  gear,  D.  Around  the  hub  of  the  gear  is  an  adjustable 
plate,  E'2,  which  carries  the  pin,  F1.  Upon  one  end  of  the  stud, 
G1,  is  the  five-toothed  starwheel,  H2,  and  upon  the  other,  the  draft 
change  gear,  D2,  which  ranges  from  fourteen  to  twent}*  teeth. 


177 


138 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


Running  with  the  draft  gear  is  another  gear,  J2,  of  thirty- 
eight  teeth.  This  is  keyed  to  the  end  of  the  bottom  feed  roll,  C, 
any  movement  given  to  the  star  wheel  would  thus  be  communi- 
cated to  -the  feed  rolls. 

During  a  portion  of  each  revolution  of  the  cylinder  shaft,  the 
pin,  F1,  which  describes  a  circle  of  about  five  inches  in  diameter, 
engages  one  of  the  teeth  of  the  starwheel,  causing  it  to  turn  one- 
fifth  of  a  revolution,  when  it  remains  stationary  until  it  is  advanced 
another  tooth  by  the  pin  at  the  next  revolution  of  the  cylinder. 


ROLJ. 


38  TEETH 


TIMING    DIAL. 
Fig.  114.     Section  of  Feed  Roll  Gearing. 

To  prevent  any  movement  of  the  starwheel,  while  it  is  not  being 
acted  upon,  the  face  of  its  teeth  are  made  concentric  with  the 
plate,  E2,  on  the  hub  of  the  gear,  D,  with  which  it  is  in  contact. 

The  movement  of  the  feed  roll,  at  each  revolution  of  the 
cylinder  shaft,  is  very  slight.  The  largest  draft  gear  (twenty 
teeth)  will  cause  the  feed  roll,  which  is  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  to  deliver  only  about  one-quarter  of  an  inch  of  cotton. 

The  lap  rolls,  upon  which  the  lap  rests,  are  also  given  an 
intermittent  motion,  corresponding  to  that  of  the  feed  rolls,  and 
are  driven  at  one  end  of  the  comb  from  the  bottom  feed  roll. 

Timing  Dial.  All  of  the  various  parts  of  the  comb  are 
tiined  to  operate  in  regular  order  and,  as  each  part  is  dependent 


178 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


139 


upon  the  others,  any  great  variation  from  the  proper  timing  will 
cause  bad  work  and  is  liable  to  injure  the  combs  and  needles. 

The  parts  are  set  by  the  index,  or  timing  dial,  which  is  on 
the  head  end/of  the  cylinder  shaft  and  is«hown  in  the  section  of 
the  feed  roll  gearing  and  in  the  diagram  of  the  nipper  cam,  Fig. 
120. 


/^^^^ 


Figures  115  and  116.     Nipper  Cam  and  Levers. 

The  dial  is  divided  into  twenty  parts,  numbered  1  to  20, 
each  part  being  subdivided  into  quarters.  Above  the  dial  is  an 
index  finger,  fastened  to  the  comb  frame.  In  setting,  the  driving 
shaft  is  turned  by  hand  until  the  index  finger  points  to  the  proper 
figure.  The  feed  rolls  are  usually  timed  to  commence  turning 
at  41. 


179 


140 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


Nipper  and  Cushion  Plate.  Fig.  115  shows  the  cam  and 
levers  for  operating  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate  and  Fig.  116 
shows  the  parts  detached  from  the  cam. 

The  cushion  plate,  I),  is  generally  of  steel  with  a  dull- 
pointed  edge  and  the  nipper  knife,  E1,  also  of  steel,  is  recessed  to 
receive  a  cushion  of  leather  or  rubber.  This  cushion  prevents 
the  fibers  from  becoming  cut,  or  otherwise  injured,  when  the  cot- 

ton   is   gripped   between   the 
•cushion  plate  and  nipper. 

Both  the  cushion  plate 
and  the  nipper  are  carried  by 
a  cradle,  F2,  which  has  a 
slight  r  o  c  k  i  n  g  movement 
around  its  fulcrum,  Z.  The 
nipper  arm,  N2,  is  also  hung 
upon  a  fulcrum  on  the  cradle 
at  V.  In  the  upright  cradle 
arm,  P-,  is  the  nipper  set- 
ting screw,  P1,  which  bears 
against  a  stop,  formed  by 
the  frame  of  the  machine. 
The  cradle  is  held  in  its  nor- 
mal position,  which  is  with 
the  screw  bearing  against  the 

Fig.    117.    Section  showing  Nipper  and  -s'top,  by  a  strong  spring,  L3, 
Cushion  Plate.  one  end    of  whjch  is  fastened 

to  a  horn  on  the  cradle,  the  other  to  the  frame  of  the  comb. 

The  connection  to  the  nipper  cam,  T,  by  which  the  nipper 
and  cushion  plate  are  caused  to  open  and  close,  is  by  means  of  the 
upright  rod,  L1,  the  horizontal  nipper  shaft  lever,  J1,  and  the 
nipper  cam  lever,  J3.  The  last  named  carries  a  roll,  J4,  that  runs 
in  a  groove,  T5,  in  the  face  of  the  nipper  cam. 

The  nipper  cam  lever,  J3,  is  made  in  two  parts  which  enables 
a  very  fine  adjustment  to  be  made  by  means  of  the  screws,  T4  and 
T6.  The  part  carrying  the  screws  is  keyed  to  the  nipper  shaft, 
J.  This  shaft  runs  the  whole  length  of  the  machine,  and  to  it 
are  also  keyed  the  horizontal  nipper  shaft  levers,  J1,  which  con- 
nect with  the  back  end  of  the  nipper  arms,  N2,  by  the  upright 


180 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


141 


rods,  L1.  The  nipper  cam  makes  one  revolution  to  one  of  the 
cylinder  and,  at  each  revolution,  the  opening  and  closing  of 
tlie  nipper  and  cushion  plate  takes  place  which  corresponds  to  the 
movements  of  the  cylinder. 

To  follow  these  movements,  Figs.  117,  118,  119  and  120 
have  been  made.  Figs.  117  to  119  are  sections  showing  the  dif- 
ferent positions  of  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate  in  relation  to  the 


Fig.  118.  Fig.  119. 

Sections  showing  Nipper  and  Cushion  Plate. 

fluted  segment  and  half  lap.  Fig.  120  is  a  diagram  of  the  nipper 
cam  showing  certain  points  which  correspond  to  the  figures  on 
the  timing  dial. 

In  Fig.  117,  it  is  assumed  that  the  needles  have  finished 
combing  and  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate  are  open  to  allow  the 
fibers  to  be  drawn  forward  by  the  fluted  segment  The  opening 
movement  commences  at  about  3J  by  the  timing  dial.  The  front 
edge  of  the  fluted  .segment  comes  against  the  fibers  and  is  about 
half  by  when  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate  are  wide  open  which  is 
at  61.  . 

By  referring  to  the  diagram  of  the  nipper  cam  (Fig.  120),  it 
will  be  seen  that  the  point  marked  GI  is  just  at  the  cam  roll  and 
the  index  finger  points  midway  between  6  and  7  on  the  dial.  As 


181 


142 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


the  cam  continues  to  turn,  the  nipper  cam  lever,  J3,  is  depressed 
owing  to  the  shape  of  the  groove  in  which  the  cam  roll,  T4,  runs. 
This  depression  causes  the  nipper  shaft,  J,  to  turn  slightly  and  an 
upward  movement  of  the  rod,  L1,  takes  place  through  the  nipper 
shaft  lever,  J1. 

The  upward  movement  of  the   rod,  L1,  causes   the   nipper 
arm,  N2,  to  turn  about  its  fulcrum  at  V  which  brings  the  nipper 


Fig.  120.     Diagram  of  Nipper  Cam. 

knife  into  contact  with  the  cushion  plate,  gripping  the  cotton 
firmly.  This  takes  place  when  the  dial  is  at  9|  and  the  parts  are 
in  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  118. 

The  back  edge  of  the  fluted  segment  has  passed  by  the  front 
of  the  cushion  plate  and  this  brings  that  portion  of  the  cylinder, 
which  is  smaller  in  diameter  than  the  segment  and  half  lap,  just 
beneath  the  cushion  plate  and  nipper  and  permits  the  end  of  the 
lap,  which  is  held  suspended  between  them,  to  assume  a  position 
so  that  the  needles  of  the  half  lap  may  thoroughly  comb  the  mass 
of  cotton. 


182 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


143 


We  have  seen  in  Figs.  117  and  118,  that  the  movement  of 
the  nipper  arm,  N2,  is  simply  around  its  fulcrum,  V,  but,  as  the 
nipper  cam  continues  to  revolve,  the  nipper  cam  lever  is  moved 
away  from  the  center  of  the  cam,  causing  a  still  greater  depression 
of  the  nipper  knife.  It  is  evident  that  it  must  bear  with  consid- 
erable more  force  against  the  cushion  plate.  This  pressure 
causes  the  spring,  L3,  to  yield  and  the  cradle  to  move  slightly 
around  its  fulcrum,  Z,  as  shown  by  the  position  of  the  parts  in 
Fig.  119. 


Fig.  121.  Fig.  122. 

Sections  showing  Detaching  Rolls  and  Cylinder. 

This  double  motion  of  the  nipper  knife,  first  around  its  own 
fulcrum  and  then  around  the  fulcrum  of  the  cradle,  brings  the 
cotton  down  near  the  needles  just  previous  to  the  commencement 
of  the  combing  action.  This  occurs  when  the  timing  dial  is  at 
about  12,  the  parts  remaining  in  the  position  until  all  of  the 
needles  have  passed  through  this  cotton  which  is  at  about  20. 
The  nipper  and  cushion  plate  then  commence  to  raise,  from  the 
cylinder,  into  a  position  so  that  the  cotton  may  be  detached  and 
they  then  open  and  the  cycle  of  movements  is  repeated. 

Detaching  Roll  fiction.  Following  in  regular  order,  the  next 
feature,  and  one  which  requires  considerable  explanation,  is  the 
detaching  roll  motion,  by  which  the  fibers  are  detached  from  be- 


183 


144 


.COTTON  SPINNING. 


tween  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate  and  attached  to  those  fibers 
that  have  already  been  combed  at  a  previous  operation,  as  referred 
to  in  the  general  description  of  the  comb. 

It  will  be  less  confusing  to  first  follow  the  movements  of  the 
detaching  rolls  and  then  the  mechanism  for  obtaining  these  move- 
ments. Fig.  121  shows  the  rolls  in  stationary  position  with  the 
end  of  the  sliver  protruding  from  between  the  leather  covered  de- 
taching roll,  G,  and  the  steel  detaching  roll,  E,  in  the  position  it 
was  left  when  the  rolls  ceased  their  forward  rotary  motion.  The 


Fig.  123.  Fig.  124. 

Sections  showing  Detaching  Rolls  and  Cylinder. 

leather  covered  roll  is  raised  to  its  highest  position  above  the 
path  of  the  fluted  segment,  O. 

The  first  movement  of  the  detaching  rolls  is  to  turn  back- 
wards to  the  position  shown  by  the  parts  in  Fig.  122.  This  move- 
ment occurs  just  after  the  needles  have  finished  combing,  and  is 
sufficient  to  turn  the  sliver,  which  is  shown  hanging  downwards  in 
the  space  between  the  fluted  segment  and  half  lap,  back  about  one 
and  one-half  inches.  The  front  edge  of  the  fluted  segment  is  just 
coming  into  contact  with  the  fibers  which  are  hanging  from  be- 
tween the  nipper,  E1,  and  the  cushion  plate,  D,  and  the  leather 
detaching  roll  has  started  to  move  around  the  steel  roll  in  the 
direction  of  the  nipper. 

Fig.  123  shows  the  rolls  at  the  commencement  of  the  forward 


184 


COTTON  SPINNING.  145 

movement.  The  fluted  segment  has  continued  to  revolve  and  its 
front  edge  has  swept  along  under  the  down  hanging  fibers  which 
are  to  be  detached.  This  action  causes  them  to  lie  on  the  surface 
of  the  fluted  segment  and  extended  in  the  direction  of  the  leather 
covered  roll  which  has  moved  around  the  steel  roll  into  contact 
with  the  fluted  segment.  The  instant  that  these  surfaces  touch, 
the  detaching  rolls  commence  to  turn  forward  and  the  fibers,  lying 
on  the  surface  of  the  fluted  segment,  are  drawn  forward  between 
it  and  the  leather  covered  roll. 

The  finish  of  the  forward  movement  of  the  rolls  is  shown  in 
Fig.  124.  The  front  end  of  the  fibers,  between  the  fluted  segment 
and  the  leather  covered  roll,  are  over-lapped  on  the  top  of  those 
that  were  turned  backward.  The  continued  forward  movement, 
which  is  about  two  and  one-half  inches,  draws  them  upward  be- 
tween the  rolls,  G  and  E,  and  F  and  E,  until  their  back  end  is  in 
the  same  position  as  shown  in  Fig.  121.  The  pressure  of  the 
leather  covered  roll  on  the  steel  roll  incorporates  the  newly  combed 
fibers  with  those  that  were  turned  back. 

The  roll,  G,  moves  around  the  roll,  E,  so  that  its  surface  is 
raised  from  contact  with  the  fluted  segment.  The  rolls  all  cease 
their  forward  movement  an-d  remain  stationary,  until  the  next  revo- 
lution of  the  cylinder,  when  the  operation  of  detaching,  and  piecing- 
up  is  repeated.  The  approximate  gain  in  the  distance  the  sliver 
is  moved  forward  is  one  inch. 

It  would  seem  on  closely  studying  Figs.  123  and  124  that  the 
end  of  the  sliver,  which  was  turned  back  for  piecing-up,  would  be 
rolled  up  between  the  roll,  E,  and  the.  fluted  segment,  O,  particu- 
larly as  these  surfaces  turn  in  opposite  directions,  while  O  is 
passing  E,  but  this  cannot  happen  as  there  is  a  space  of  about 
one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  between  them  and  the  sliver  simply 
touches  lightly  against  the  surface  of  O,  as  it  is  drawn  upward 
between  E  and  G. 

Top  Comb.  At  this  point,  reference  should  be  made  to  the 
movements  of  the  top  comb,  H1,  which  are  connected  closely  with 
the  movements  of  the  detaching  rolls.  When  the  fibers  are  being 
combed  by  the  needles,  it  is  evident  that  the  end,  held  between 
the  nipper  and  cushion  plate,  can  receive  no  combing  but  as  they 
are  liberated  by  the  opening  of  the  nipper  and  are  carried  forward 


185 


146 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


for  pieckig-up,  the  top  comb,  H1,  descends  into  the  path  of  the 
cotton  and  it  receives  combing  by  being  drawn  through  the  teeth 
as  shown  by  the  position  of  the  comb  in  Fig.  123.  It  is  then 
quickly  withdrawn  and  remains  up>  clear  of  the  fibers,  until  the 
movements  of  the  detaching  rolls  are  repeated. 


Fig.  125.     Elevation  Showing  Detaching  Roll  Cams. 

Detaching  Roll  Cams.  To  obtain  the  various  movements  of 
the  detaching  rolls,  three  cams  are  employed;  those  which  impart 
rotary  motion  to  all  of  the  rolls  are  shown  in  Figs.  125  to  130  in- 
clusive and  the  lifting  cam  which  causes  the  rolls,  F  and  G,  to  move 
around  E  is  shown  in  Fig.  131. 

Reference  should  be  made  first  to  Figs.  125  and  126  which 
show  respectively  the  extreme  forward  and  backward  positions  of 


186 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


the  detaching  roll  cam  lever.  On  the  cam  shaft,  W,  is  keyed  a 
cam,  B1,  in  one  side  of  which  is  a  groove,  B2.  In  this  groove 
runs  a  roll,  T2,  which  is  carried  by  the  detaching  roll  cam  lever, 
S2,  the  shaft,  M2,  acting  as  a  center  around  which,  S2,is  free  to 
turn.  Upon  this  same  shaft  are  fastened  a  wheel,  U,  having 


Fig.  126.     Elevation  Showing  Detaching  Roll  Cams. 

twenty  teeth,  or  notches,  and  an  internal  gear,  C2,  of  138  teeth. 
A  pawl,  O1,  which  is  fastened  to  a  stud,  K2,  and  which  is  carried 
by  the  upper  end  of  the  detaching  roll  cam  lever,  engages  in  the 
notches  of  the  notched  wheel  and  is  held  in  contact  with  them  by 
a  spring,  F3,  while  the  internal  gear  is  in  contact  with  the  pinion, 
L2,  of  eighteen  teeth,  which  is  fast  on  one  end  of  the  detaching 
roll,  E. 


1ST 


148 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


As  the  cam-  revolves,  the  shape  of  the  groove  in  it  is  such  as 
to  cause  the  pawl  to  move  back  and  forth.  The  sides  of  the 
notches  are  square  which  permits  the  pawl  to  engage  with  them  in 
either  direction.  This  motion  is  communicated  to  the  roll,  E,  by 
the  notched  wheel,  the  internal  gear  and  the  pinion  causing  it  to 
rotate  forward  and  backward. 

By  examining  the  drawings,  it  will  be  seen  that  on  the  side 
opposite  from  the  groove  in  the  cam,  B1,  is  another  cam,  A2,  on 


Fig.  127.  Fig.  128. 

Diagrams  of  Detaching  Koll  Cams. 

the  periphery  of  which  runs  a  roll,  X,  which  is  fastened  to  the  lower 
end  of  the  arm,  Y.  The  other  end  of  the  arm  is  fastened  to  the 
same  stud  as  the  pawl,  O1.  This  cam  simply  acts  on  the  pawl, 
moving  it  in  and  out  of  contact  with  the  notched  wheel  at  the 
proper  time. 

The  next  four  drawings  Figures,  127, 128,  129  and  180,  show 
the  positions  at  different  stages.  All  the  parts,  not  absolutely 
essential  to  explain  these  movements,  are  omitted.  Fig.  127 
shows  the  position  of  the  cams  after  the  detaching  rolls  have  fin- 
ished turning  forward.  The  cam  roll,  T2,  is  on  the  largest  diame- 
ter of  the  cam  which  is  indicated  by  the  letter,  A.  The  nose  of 
the  cam,  A2,  has  just  come  into  contact  with  the  roll,  X,  which 


188 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


149 


has  lifted  the  pawl,  O1,  out  of  the  notch  in  the  notched  wheel, 
marked  by  the  numeral,  II. 

Fig.  128  shows  the  cams  as  having  made  about  one-half  of 
a  revolution.  This  movement  has  advanced  the  cam  roll  from  A 
to  B  and  has  caused  the  pawl  to  move  from  above  notch  II  to  III 
while  the  gradually  decreasing  diameter  of  the  cam,  A2,  has  caused 
the  cam  roll,  X,  to  drop  and  allow  the  spring,  F3,  to  draw  the 
pawl  into  notch  III.  But  it  will  be  noticed  that  as  yet  no  move- 
ments of  the  detaching  rolls  has  taken  place. 


Fig.  129.  Fig.  130. 

Diagrams  of  Detaching  Roll  Cams. 

In  Fig.  129,  the  cams  are  shown  as  having  completed  about 
three-quarters  of  a  revolution.  The  cam  roll,  T2,  is  on  the  smallest 
diameter  of  the  groove  at  C.  The  pawl,  which  is  shown  just  en- 
tering notch  III  in  Fig.  128,  has  engaged  the  whole  depth  of  it 
and  the  continued  revolution  of  the  cams  has  turned  the  notched 
wheel  to  its  extreme  backward  position,  as  indicated  by  the  arrow. 
This  movement  through  the  internal  gear,  C2,  and  the  pinion,  L2, 
rotates  the  steel  detaching  roll,  E,  and  turns  back  about  one  and 
one-half  inches  of  sliver.  The  distance  moved  by  the  internal  gear 
is  shown  by  the  relativ  e  positions  of  a  dark  spot  marked  upon  the 
gears  in  Figs.  127,  128  and  129. 


189 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


The  completion  of  the  revolution  of  the  cams  is  shown  in 
Fig.  130.  The  cam  roll  has  moved  from  C  back  to  A  and  the 
nose  of  the  cam,  A2,  has  come  into  contact  with  the  cam  roll,  X. 
This  action  lifts  the  paAvl  out  of  notch  III,  the  parts  remaining  in 
the  same  relative  positions  as  in  Fig.  127,  except  that  the  notched 
wheel  lias  advanced  one  notch,  and  at  the  next  revolution  of  the 


Fig.  131.     Elevation  showing  Lifting  Cam. 

cam,  the  pawl  will  drop  into  notch  IV.  The  point,  marked  by  the 
dark  spot,  has  advanced  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  notched 
wheel,  as  will  be  seen  by  its  position  above  the  pinion. 

The  detaching  rolls  turn  backwards  at  about  1|  by  the  tim- 
ing dial  and  continue  until  about  6.  The  forward  movement  then 
commences  and  continues  until  about  11. 

Pig.  131  shows  the  device  for  moving  the  leather  covered  de- 
taching roll  in  and  out  of  contact  with  the  fluted  segment. 


190 


COTTON  SPINNING.  lf>l 

On  the  cam  shaft,  W,  is  fastened  the  lifting  cam,  H3,  with  a 
groove,  A3,  cut  in  its  face.  In  this  groove  runs  a  roll,  C3,  which 
is  carried  in  one  end  of  the  lifting  cam  lever  which  is  made  in  two 
parts,  E3  and  E4.  The  part,  E3,  which  carries  the  cam  roll,  is  in 
reality  loose  on  the  lifting  shaft,  K,  while  the  part,  E4,  is  keyed 
to  K.  The  two  parts  are  connected  by  the  adjusting  screws,  D3 
andD4,  which  are  screwed  through  lugs  on  E4  and  bear  against 
the  sides  of  E3.  This  permits  a  very  close  adjustment  to  be  made 
when  setting  the  parts.  The  lifting  shaft,  K,  extends  the  whole 
length  of  the  comb  and  upon  it  are  fastened  the  lifting  shaft  arms, 
K1,  which  are  connected  to  the  top  lifting  lever,  F4,  by  the  up- 
right arms,  N1. 

On  the  back  end  of  F4  is  a  block,  B3,  which  bears  against 
the  bushing,  K3,  on  the  end  of  the  roll,  G.  These  bushings  are 
made  square  on  the  outside  so  as  to  give  ample  wearing  surface 
against  the 'blocks.  A  set  screw,  G2,  in  the  end  of  F4,  bears 
against  the  block  which  allows  for  adjustment.  A  weight,  not 
shown  in  the  drawing  but  connected  to  the  stirrup,  N3,  by  a 
chain,  holds  the  bushing  firmly  against  the  block.  It  also 
keeps  the  roll,  G,  in  contact  with  the  steel  roll,  E,  and  the  fluted 
segment. 

The  drawing  shows  the  position  of  the  cam  and*  parts  with 
the  roll,  G,  in  contact  with  the  fluted  segment,  the  outlines  of 
which  are  shown  by  dotted  lines.  »As  the  cam  revolves,  the 
groove  in  its  face  causes  the  roll,  C3,  to  move  from  the  position  it 
is  in  towards  the  center  of  the  cam  to  a  point  marked  B,  as  shown 
by  dotted  lines.  This  movement  causes  the  roll,  G,  to  move 
around  the  roll,  E,  out  of  contact  with  the  fluted  segment.  The 
cam  roll  continues  on  the  small  diameter  of  the  groove  until  it  is 
moved  out  at  the  next  revolution. 

Top  Comb  notion.  Fig.  132  shows  the  eccentric  for  opera- 
ting the  top  combs.  These  combs,  H1,  are  carried  by  the  comb 
arms,  M3,  which  are  centered  on  the  top  comb  shaft,  N3,  at  one 
end  of  which  is  an  arm,  W1,  which  carries  a  roll,  S3.  This  roll 
runs  on  an  eccentric,  O2,  which  is  fastened  on  the  cylinder  shaft, 
N.  At  each  of  the  comb  arms  is  a  dog,  N4,  which  is  fastened  to 
the  top  comb  shaft  and  through  a  lug  on  the  dog  is  a  set  screw, 
W2,  which  bears  against  the  comb  arms.  The  arms  are  thus 


191 


152 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


free  to  be  turned  up  out  of  the  way  for  cleaning  or  repairing  the 
needles.  As  the  eccentric  turns,  the  top  comb  shaft  is  turned 
slightly  and  the  combs  put  in  and  out  of  contact  with  the  cotton. 
Timing  and  Setting.  The  successful  working  of  the  comb 
depends  almost  wholly  upon  the  timing  and  setting  of  the  various 
parts  so  that  one  movement  will  follow  another  at  the  proper  time. 
These  can  be  varied,  slightly,  according  to  the  length  and  quality 


vv 


Fig.  132.     Top  Comb  Eccentric. 

of  the  cotton  being  used  and  the  judgment  of  the  one  in  charge  of 
such  work.  The  following  are  average  timings  and  settings : 

To  set  the  cylinder:  Turn  the  cylinder  shaft  around  until 
number  5  on  the  timing  dial  comes  beneath  the  index  finger,  then 
set  the  front  edge  of  the  fluted  segment  from  the  flutes  of  the 
steel  detaching  roll  with  1^-inch  gauge  and  tighten  the  cylinders 
on  the  shaft. 

To  set  the  feed  roll:  Use  li|-inch  gauge  between  the  flutes 
of  the  steel  detaching  roll  and  flutes  of  the  feed  roll,  then  tighten 
feed  roll  slides  into  place. 

To  set  the  cushion  plates  to  the  nipper  knives  :  Put  the  cushion 
plate  in  place  and  set  it  up  against  the  nipper  knife  with  one 


102 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


thickness  of  ordinary  writing  paper  between  it  at  each  end.  Press 
the  nipper  firmly  against  the  cushion  plate  and  see  that  each  piece 
of  paper  is  held  securely.  This  sets  the  cushion  plate  parallelly 
with  the  nipper  knife. 

To  set  the  cushion  plates  from  the  steel  detaching  roll :  Use 
l|-inch  gauge  between  the  lip  of  the  plate  and  the  flutes  of  the 
detaching  roll. 

To  set  the  nipper  knives  from  the  fluted  segments :  First  dis- 
connect the  upright  rods,  L1,  and  use  number  20  gauge  between 
the  edge  of  nipper  knife  and  segment.  The  nipper  stop  screw,  P1, 
must  project  through  the  arm  about  one-quarter  of  an  inch  and  a 
i-inch  gauge  must  be  placed  between  the  point  of  the  screw  and 
the  nipper  stand.  After  setting  the  right-hand  screw,  remove  the 
gauge  and  bring  the  left-hand  screw  up  against  the  nipper  stand. 
Ne"xt  put  a  strip  of  writing  paper  between  the  point  of  each  screw 
and  stand  and  see  that  it  draws  with  the  same  tension  from  each. 
The  cylinder  shaft  should  now  be  turned  around  until  number  17 
on  the  dial  is  under  the  pointer;  the  cam  roll  will  then  be  on  the 
largest  diameter  of  the  nipper  cam.  Put  on  the  right-hand  con- 
necting rod  and  spring,  try  ]  inch  gauge  between  the  nipper 
screw  and  stand,  and  adjust  the  nuts  on  the  upright  rod  until  the 
gauge  will  draw  out  with  ease.  After  this,  put  on  the  left-hand  rod 
and  spring  and  have  the  gauge  draw  out  with  the  same  tension. 
Turn  the  cam  back  to  the  first  position  and  try  number  20  gauge, 
between  the  nipper  knife  and  the  half-lap,  and  see  that  everything 
is  free. 

To  set  the  leather  detaching  rolls:  Turn  the  cylinder  shaft 
around  until  the  dial  is  at  6|,  then  put  the  rolls  in  position  with 
the  end  bushings  on  and  attach  weights.  Let  the  rolls  rest  against 
the  fluted  segment.  Use  number  23  gauge  between  the  lifter 
block  and  bushing  of  roll.  Set  the  right-hand  side  of  one  roll 
first;  then  turn  the  detaching  roll  cam  around  so  as  to  bring  the 
block  up  against  the  gauge.  Next  try  the  gauge  between  all  of 
the  other  blocks  and  bushings  and  set  the  blocks  up  so  that  the 
gauge  will  draw  from  each  with  the  same  tension  and  tighten 
blocks  in  place.  Put  a  strip  of  writing  paper  between  the  fluted 
segment  and  the  leather  detaching  rolls  at  each  end  and  adjust 
the  cam  lever  so  that  the  rolls  will  touch  the  segments  at  G|. 


193 


154  COTTON  SPINNING. 

To  time  the  nippers  :  Turn  the  cylinder  shaft  around  until 
9 1  comes  under  the  pointer.  Loosen  the  nipper  cam  and  turn  it 
around  until  the  nipper  stop  screws  leave  the  stands  at  9|  then 
make  nipper  cam  fast  on  the  shaft. 

To  set  the  top  combs  to  the  leather  detaching  rolls:  Remove 
the  end  bushings  from  the  leather  roll  and  put  ^  inch  gauge 
between  it  and  the  steel  roll  and  have  it  touch,  lightly,  against 
the  top  comb,  which  should  be  inclined  about  thirty  degrees,  then 
remove  the  gauge  from  between  the  rolls  and  see  that  the  leather 
roll  is  free  from  the  comb. 

To  set  the  top  combs  to  the  fluted  segments :  Use  number  20 
gauge  between  the  points  of  the  comb  needles  and  the  segment. 
Set  the  comb  by  the  stop  screws  with  a  strip  of  paper  under  each 
which  should  draw  out  with  the  same  tension.  Loosen  the  top 
comb  eccentric  and  turn  it  around  until  the  throw  is  downward 
and  wedge  the  eccentric  arm  in  place.  Turn  all  the  stop  screws 
against  the  top  comb  arms  and  set  each  witli  a  strip  of  paper. 
After  setting  all  the  combs,  turn  the  shaft  around  to  number  5  on 
the  dial  and  set  the  top  comb  eccentric  so  that  a  strip  of  paper 
will  not  draw  from  between  the  nipper  stop  screw  and  stand. 

To  time  the  feed  rolls:  Turn  the  cylinder  shaft  around  until 
the  dial  shows  4£-  under  the  pointer,  then  set  the  pin  so  that  the, 
feed  rolls  will  start  forward. 

To  time  the  detaching  rolls :  Turn  the  cylinder  shaft  around 
until  the  dial  is  at  6,  then  set  the  detaching  roll  cam  so  that  the 
rolls  will  start  to  turn  forward.  The  brass  top  rolls  should  be 
set  from  the  leather  rolls  with  number  21  gauge  and  their  flutes 
should  be  in  mesh  with  the  flutes  of  the  steel  roll. 

Owing  to  the  naturally  irregular  disposition  of  cotton  fibers, 
it  is  impossible  to  remove  the  waste  without  removing  more  or 
less  long  fibers,  rior  can  the  percentage  of  waste  be  known  until 
after  the  cotton  has  been  combed,  as  some  varieties  are  much  cleaner 
than  others  and  contain  fewer  short  fibers.  The  amount  of  waste 
is  often  increased  by  the  faulty  timing  and  setting  of  the  parts. 

There  are  various  ways  of  controlling  the  amount  of  waste. 
In  the  top  comb,  the  dropping  varies  from  4|  to  6|-.  If  dropped 
.at  4}.  more  waste  is  combed  out,  as  the  comb  needles  enter  the 
lap  before  it  is  drawn  forward  by  the  detaching  rolls,  while  if 


194 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


dropped  at  6i,  they  do  not  enter  the  lap  until  after  it  has  started, 
consequently  some  of  the  fibers  escape  combing. 

The  angle  of  the  top  comb  and  its  distance  from  the  fluted 
segment  also  control  the  amount  of  waste.  The  comb  needles, 
which  act  as  hooks  upon  which  the  fibers  are  caught,  enter  the 
lap  at  about  right  angles  to  the  direction  that  it  is  drawn.  Now 
it  is  evident,  that  the  more  acute  this  angle  the  greater  is  the 
retaining  power,  so  that  more  waste  will  be  removed.  The  nearer 
the  needles  are  allowed  to  approach  the  fluted  segment,  the  more 
they  penetrate  the  mass  of  cotton,  thus  giving  it  a  more  thorough 
combing. 

The  time  of  starting  the  feed  rolls  varies  from  4  to  6  ;  if 
started  at  6  more  waste  will  be  made  than  if  started  at  4,  as  the 
later  the  feed  rolls  start,  the  more  the  lap  is  liable  to  curl  and  not 
pass  freely  between  the  nipper  and  cushion  plate.  Curling  causes 
the  lap  to  bunch  in  places  and  when  these  bunches  are  acted  upon 
by  the  cylinder  needles,  more  of  the  long  fibers  are  combed  out 
than  would  be  the  case  if  the  lap  were  perfectly  smooth  and  even. 

The  closing  of  the  nippers  take.s  place  from  9  to  10.  If  closed 
at  10  more  waste  is  made  than  at  9.  The  reason  for  this  is  very 
apparent.  If  the  nipper  does  not  close  until  the  comb  needles 
have  commenced  to  work,  the  cotton  will  draw  from  between  the 
nipper  and  cushion  plate.  This  late  closing,  as  it  is  called,  should 
be  avoided,  as  many  of  the  long  fibers  will  be  combed  out  with  the 
waste  which  would  otherwise  be  carried  forward  with  the  sliver. 

The  leather  detaching  roll  is  brought  into  contact  with  the 
fluted  segment  at  6|.  If  brought  into  contact  before  6|  more 
waste  is  made. 

The  length  of  time  the  leather  detaching  roll  is  allowed  to 
remain  in  contact  with  the  fluted  segment  also  controls  the  waste. 
A  number  25  gauge,  used  between  the  lifter  blocks  and  the 
bushings  of  the  leather  roll,  will  give  more  waste  than  a  number 
21  gauge,  as  it  is  thinner  and  allows  the  leather  roll  to  remain  in 
contact  with  the  fluted  segment  longer. 

The  leather  detaching  roll  starts  to  turn  forward  at  6£.  If 
started  before  this,  more  waste  is  made  than  if  started  after,  as 
the  forward  rotary  movement  of  the  roll  together  with  the  rotary 
movement  of  the  fluted  segment  detaches  the  cotton  from  between 


195 


156 


COTTON  SPINNING. 


196 


COTTON  SPINNING.  157 

the  nipper  and  cushion  plate,  and,  if  this  movement  commences 
before  the  nipper  is  opened  sufficiently  to  allow  the  cotton  to  be 
drawn  forward,  the  fibers  are  broken. 

Gearing.  In  order  to  work,  out  the  various  calculations,  a 
diagram  of  the  comber  gearing  is  given  in  Fig.  133.  The  usual 
speed  of  the  driving  pulleys,  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  by 
three  inches  face,  is  about  300  revolutions  per  minute.  On  the  outer 
end  of  the  driving  shaft  is  a  heavy  balance  wheel,  which  serves  a 
double  purpose,  namely,  to  enable  the  cylinder  shaft  to  be  turned 
readily  when  setting  the  various  parts  and  to  prevent  any  fluctua- 
tions in  the  speed  of  the  comb,  as  the  cylinder  shaft  turns  much 
harder  while  the  needles  are  passing  through  the  cotton  than  at 
any  other  time.  Were  it  not  for  this  balance  wheel,  the  comb 
would  run  with  considerable  vibration,  which  tends  to  loosen  the 
screws  and  bolts,  as  well  as  to  disturb  the  settings. 

On  the  inside  end  of  the  driving  shaft  is  a  gear  of  21  teeth, 
in  gear  with  one  of  80  teeth  which  is  fastened  to  the  cylinder 
shaft.  The  speed  of  the  cylinders  is  therefore  about  78  revolutions 
or  nips  per  minute. 

The  feed  roll,  which  is  |  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  is  driven 
from  the  cylinder  shaft  by  a  pin  and  a  star-wheel  having  5  teeth. 
On  the  same  stud  as  the  star-wheel  is  the  draft  or  change  gear,  D, 
of  from  14  to  20  teeth,  by  which  the  feed  is  regulated. 

The  calender  rolls  in  front  of  the  cylinders  are  driven  from 
the  cylinder  shaft  by  a  gear  of  80  teeth  which  drives  a  similar 
gear  of  the  same  number  of  teeth.  On  the  shaft  with  the  latter  is 
another  gear  of  19  teeth,  which  drives  one  of  142  teeth,  which  is 
upon  the  calender  roll  shaft. 

The  draft  rolls  are  driven  from  the  foot  end  of  the  cylinder 
shaft  by  a  gear  of  25  teeth,  which  drives  another  of  25  teeth. 
On  this  same  shaft  are  two  gears,  one  of  16  teeth,  which  drives 
the  back  roll  through  an  intermediate  of  64  teeth  and  one  of  46 
teeth  which  is  upon  the  back  roll. 

The  front  roll  is  driven  from  the  gear  of  50  teeth,  through 
the  double  intermediate  of  45  teeth  and  the  gear  of  37  teeth. 
The  calender  roll  in  front  of  the  draft  rolls  is  driven  from  the  other 
end  of  the  front  roll  by  the  gears  of  20,  80  and  43  teeth.  The  mid- 
dle roll  is  driven  from  the  back  roll  by  the  gears  of  29,30  and  25  teeth. 


158  COTTON  SPINNING. 

The  coiler  is  also  driven  from  the  cylinder  shaft,  through  the 
gears  of  53,  90,  21  and  16  teeth,  the  last  being  upon  the  upright 
shaft  in  the  coiler.  At  the  top  of  this  shaft  is  a  gear  of  24  .teeth, 
driving  an  18  toothed  gear  which  is  upon  the  calender  roll. 

The  lap  rolls  are  driven  from  the  feed  roll  by  the  gears  of  23, 
22,  20,  55,  35  and  47  teeth,  The  first  and  last  mentioned  are 
upon  the  feed  roll  and  lap  roll  respectively,  and,  as  the  motion  of 
the  feed  roll  is  intermittent,  the  lap  rolls  receive  a  corresponding 
movement. 

The  doffer  is  driven  by  a  single  worm  and  worm  gear  of  32 
teeth  and  a  bevel  gear  of  25  teeth,  from  the  same  gear  which  drives 
the  draft  rolls.  The  brush  and  the  doffer  comb  are  driven  from 
the  driving  shaft,  the  brush  by  the  gears  of  28,  35  and  30  teeth 
and  the  comb  by  a  connecting  rod,  one  end  of  which  is  fastened  to 
an  arm  on  the  cam  shaft  and  the  other  working  on  a  pin  set  eccen- 
trically in  the  28  toothed  gear  on  the  driving  shaft.  By  this 
means,  the  comb  is  given  an  oscillating  motion. 

Calculations.  The  production  of  the  comb  is  governed  by 
the  weight  of  the  laps  per  yard,  the  number  of  revolutions  that 
the  cylinder  makes  per  minute,  the  draft  of  the  comb  and  the 
amount  of  waste.  A  glance  at  the  diagram  of  the  gearing  will 
show  that  the  calender  rolls  in  the  coiler  are  the  last  through 
which  the  sliver  passes,  and  the  length  delivered  by  them  at  each 
revolution  of  the  cylinder  should  be  taken  into  account  in  figuring 
the  production.  These  rolls  are  1  j*  inches  in  diameter  and  make 
1.03  revolutions  to  one  of  the  cylinder,  which  gives  a  delivery  of 
5.3  inches  for  each  revolution. 

Following  are  the  principal  calculations  for  the  comb. 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  production  of  the  comb  in  pounds: 
Multiply  together  the  number  of  revolution  of  the  cylinder  per 
minute  (80),  the  number  of  inches  of  sliver  delivered  at  each 
revolution  (5.3),  the  weight  in  grains  of  one  yard  of  lap,  less  the 
percentage  of  waste  (212.5),  the  number  of  laps  (6)  and  the 
number  of  minutes  run  per  day,  less  10  per  cent  for  time  lost  in 
cleaning  (540).  Divide  the  product  by  7,000  (the  number  of 
grains  in  one  pound),  multiplied  by  36  (the  number  of  inches  in 
a  yard)  and  by  the  draft  of  the  comb  (24.47).- 
80  X  5.3  X  212.5  x  6  X  540 


7000  X  36  X  24.47 


198 


=  47'34 


COTTON  SPINNING.  159 

In  this  example,  the  weight  of  the  laps  is  given  as  212.5 
grains,  or  250  grains  less  15  per  cent  for  waste  which  is  a  fair 
average. 

Rule  2.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  comb  between  the  calender 
rolls  in  the  coiler  and  the  feed  rolls  :  Multiply  together  the  driv- 
ing gears  and  the  diameter  of  the  coiler  calender  rolls  and  divide 
the  product  by  the  product  of  the  driven  gears  multiplied  together 
with  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roll.  (The  driving  gears-  are  C,  E, 
G,  I  and  K,  and  the  driven  gears  are  D,  draft  gear  18  teeth,  F,  H, 
J  and  L.)  To  avoid  fractions,  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roll,  which 
is  |  of  an  inch  -can  be  called  12  as  there  are  i|  in  |  of  an  inch 
and  the  diameter  of  the  coiler  calender  rolls,  which  is  111  inches, 
can  be  called  27. 

38  X  o  X  53  X  21  X  24  X  27 
Example:    18X1X90X1(3X18X12   : 
Rule  3.     To  find  the  draft  factor:  Proceed  as  in  rule  2  but 
omit  the  draft  change  gear  D. 


Rule  4.     To  find  the  draft  :  Divide  the  factor  bv  the  number 
of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear  (1  8). 

Example:  440.53-^-18  =  24.47. 


199 


COTTON  SPINNING 

PART   IV 


DRAWING 

In  all  the  processes  previously  described,  except  when  comb- 
ing was  introduced  before  drawing,  the  principal  object  has  been 
to  free  the  cotton  from  as  much  foreign  substance  as  possible,  and 
no  attempt  has  been  made  to  form  a  thread.  When  the  sliver 
leaves  the  card,  the  fibers  are  in  a  very  irregular  and  confused 
mass  and  it  is  evident  that  "the  fibers 'must  be  straightened  and 
parallelized  to  reduce  the  sliver  to  a  thread. 

The  object  of  the  drawing  process  is  threefold:  To  make  the 
fibers  lie  in  parallel  order,  to  make  the  sliver  as  even  in  weight  as 
possible  by  doubling  a  certain  number  at  the  back  of  the  machine, 
and  to  reduce  the  weight  of  the  sliver,  if  necessary,  by  a  certain 
amount  of  draft. 

Drawing  is  carried  out  on  two  distinct  types  of  machine,  the 
Railway  Head  and  the  Drawing  Frame. 

RAILWAY  HEAD 

Originally,  the  railway  head  was  used  in  connection  with  the 
stationary  fiat  card  as  the  first  drawing  process,  which  was  fol- 
lowed by  a  second  and,  usually,  a  third  process  in  which  the  draw- 
ing frame  was  used.  With  the  general  adoption  of  the  revolving 
fiat  card  the  railway  head  is  gradually  falling  into  disuse,  but  as 
many  of  the  older  mills  are  still  equipped  with  them  and  as  they 
are  found,  occasionally,  in  operation  in  some  of  the  most  recently 
constructed  mills,  it  seems  fitting  that  a  brief  description  of  the 
operations  and  arrangement  of  .the  machine  and  its  connection 
with  the  stationary  flat  card  shall  be  given. 

Fig.  134  shows  in  plan  two  lines  of  stationary  flat  cards  with 
a  railway  head  at  the  end  of  each  line.  The  slivers,  from  the  cal- 
ende~  rolls  of  the  cards  in  each  line,  are  delivered  into  a  railway 
trough  or  box,  and  on  to  an  endless  belt  and  are  carried  to  the 
head  end  of  the  trough.  Here  they  pass  between  a  pair  of  rolls 


201 


102 


COTTON  SPINNING 


and  are  drawn  between  guides  and  passed  between  the  draft  rolls 
of  the  railway  head  into  a  can  which  is  then  taken  to  the  back  of 
the  drawing  frame.  » 

The  railway  head  is  built  both   single  and  double.     A  single 
head,  or  delivery,  is  designed  to  take  care  of  the  slivers  from  six  to 


Fig.  134.    Plan  of  Two  Single  Lines  of  Cards. 

twelve  cards.  In  the  illustration  (Fig.  134)  there  are  eight  cards 
in  each  line,  delivering  into  one  single  railway  head. 

In  most  cases  two  single,  or  one  double,  railway  heads  are 
used  with  a  double  line  of  railway  troughs,  placed  as  shown  in 
Fig.  135.  This  illustration  shows  two  sections  of  seven  cards  in 
each  line,  delivering  into  separate  boxes. 

The  doffers  are  driven  from  the  railway  head  to  which  they 
are  connected  by  feed  shafts,  running  parallel  to  the  troughs,  and 
with  the  stopping  of  the  railway  head,  the  delivery  from  the  cards 

nnn 


D      p  •     p       ; 


•  I     L  •      I  •      p         D         I •      I;      B  •      p 


O       O 


Fig.  135.    Plan  of  Two  Double  Lines  of  Cards. 


also  must  cease.  This  brings  about  a  condition  for  which  the  rail- 
way head  was  primarily  designed  and  which  needs  considerable 
explanation. 

As  the  cards  require  grinding  periodically,  it  is  evident  that 
one  card  at  a  time  must  be  stopped.  This  reduces  the  number  of 
ends,  or  slivers,  entering  the  railway  head,  and  causes  a  correspond- 
ing reduction  in  the  weight  of  the  sliver  delivered.  That  is,  if  there 
are  eight  cards,  each  delivering  a  fifty  grain  sliver,  we  shall  have 
four  hundred  grains  entering  the  back  of  the  railway  head  and 


Q    2 


Of 
M 

H 

z 

3 

u 

< 

s 

a* 
•<: 

S5 

O 
03 
03 


COTTON-  SPINNING 


with  a  draft   of  eight   the  sliver  delivered  at  the  front  will  weigh 
fifty  grains: 

8  X  50 

' e =  °° 

o 

Now,  if  we  drop  out  one  sliver,  we  will  have  three  hundred   and 


Fig.  136.    Section  of  Railway  Head  Showing  Evener. 

fifty  grains  only,  entering  the  railway  head  and   with   the  same 
draft  the  delivered  sliver  will  weigh  43.75  grains: 

7X50 

-FT       =43-7;j 

To  overcome  this  difficulty,  the  railway   head  is  provided  with  an 
3vener  motion  which  is  shown  in  Fig.  136. 

Evener  Motion.     The  sliver  from  the  railway  troughs  passes 
between  the  draft  rolls,  D,  C,   B,  and  A  and  then  through   the 


203 


104 


COTTON  SPINNING 


trumpet,  E,  and  between  the  calender  rolls,  F  and  G.  The  speed 
of  the  back  roll,  D,  is  constant  as  a  certain  relation  must  be  main- 
tained between  it  and  the  speed  of  the  card  calender  rolls,  and  to 
increase  or  decrease  the  weight  of  the  sliver,  the  speed  of  the  front 
roll  must  be  changed. 

The  front  roll  is  driven  through  a  pair  of  cones,  O  and  P,  by 
a  belt,  S.  P  is  the  driver,  running  at  a  constant  speed,  and  drives 
the  back  roll  gearing.  The  speed  of  O  is  changed  according  to  the 


60 
S  fc        BACK.  ROLL 


35"DIA. 


CALENDER   ROLL  ^H 

Fig.  137.    Gearing  Connecting  Cards  with  Railway  Head 

position  of  the  cone  belt .  If  the  sliver  is  too  heavy,  the  front  roll 
must  run  faster  to  increase  the  draft  and  reduce  the  weight,  while 
if  it  is  too  light,  a  corresponding  decrease  in  the  speed  must  take 
place. 

The  cone  belt,  S,  passes  through  a  guide,  T,  which  is  mount- 
ed upon  the  screw,  L.  Fast  upon  one  end  of  the  screw  is  a  gear, 
M,  while  loose  upon  the  same  end  is  a  shield,  K,  and  a  pair  of 
pawls,  N  and  R.  The  pawls  are  given  a  reciprocal  motion  by  the 
eccentric,  U,  and  arm,  V,  and  the  shield  is  connected  to  the  trum- 
pet by  the  rod,  H,  and  the  lever,  J. 


204 


COTTON  SPINNING  165 

The  trumpet  is  balanced  so  that  when  the  sliver  is  at  its  nor- 
mal size,  the  shield,  K,  prevents  either  pawl  from  engaging  the 
teeth  of  the  gear,  M.  But  should  there  be  a  thin  place,  from  an 
end  being  out  or  from  any  cause,  the  trumpet  will  faU  back  im- 
mediately and,  through  the  connections,  allow  the  pawl,  N,  to  en- 
gage the  teeth  of  the  gear.  This  turns  the  screw  and  moves  the 
cone  belt  towards  the  large  end  of  the  driven  cone,  O,  making  a  re- 
duction in  the  speed  of  the  front  roll  and  a  corresponding  reduc- 
tion in  the  draft,  which  will  continue  until  the  light  portion  of 
sliver  has  passed  through  the  hole  in  the  trumpet. 

If  the  sliver  is  too  heavy,  the  reverse  action  of  the  parts  de- 
scribed takes  place  and  the  speed  of  the  front  roll  is  increased. 

The  action  of  the  evener  depends  wholly  upon  the  friction  of 
the  sliver  in  passing  through  the  hole  in  the  trumpet  and,  while 
no  great  change  takes  place  in  the  weight  of  the  cotton  entering 
the  back  of  the  railway  head,  unless  an  end  is  out,  the  thick  and 
thin  places  in  the  sliver  keep  the  trumpet  moving  back  and  forth 
continually  .changing,  to  a  slight  extent,  the  speed  of  the  front  roll. 

The  defect  in  the  evener  motion  is  very  apparent.  As  the 
evener  is  so  slow  in  its  movements,  a  considerable- length  of  sliver 

o 

must  be  delivered  before  the  speed  of  the  front  roll  is  changed 
enough  to  rectify  the  weight. 

Gearing.  The  gearing,  connecting  the  cards  with  the  railway 
head,  is  shown  in  Fig.  137.  On  the  driving  shaft,  A,  is  a  gear,  B, 
of  twenty-live  teeth,  which  drives  another  gear,  C,  w7hich  has  forty- 
five  teeth,  on  the  feed  shaft,  D,  through  two  carrier  gears  of 
twenty-three  and  thirty-five  teeth.  On  the  feed  shaft  at  each  card 
is  a  feed  pulley,  E,  five  inches  in  diameter,  which  drives  the  doffer 
pulley,  F,  9.8  inches  in  diameter,  by  a  belt,  and  on  the  same  stud 
with  the  doffer  pulley  is  a  gear,  G,  of  eighteen  teeth,  which  drives 
the  card  calender  rolls,  J,  through  the  calender  shaft  gear,  H,  of 
thirty-seven  teeth  and  the  doffer  gear,  K,  of  one  hundred  and 
eighty  teeth. 

The  railway  trough  drum,  L,  which  is  six  inches  in  diameter, 
is  driven  from  the  feed  shaft  by  the  bevel  gears,  M,  of  sixteen 
teeth,  and  N,  of  ninety-two  teeth,  and  the  back  roll  of  the  railway 
head  is  driven  from  the  driving  shaft  by  the  bevel  gears  O,P,R 
and  S  of  thirty-seven,  thirty,  twenty-seven  and  sixty  teeth  respec- 


205 


l()(i  COTTON  SPINNING 


lively,  shown  in  the  detached  sketch  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner. 

Between  the  back  roll  of  the  railway  head  and  the  railway 
trough  drum,  there  is  a  slight  draft  and  between  this  drum  and  the 
card  calender  roll,  there  is  also  a  draft  which  may  be  ascertained 
in  the  usual  manner. 

Draft  between  railway  head  back  roll  and  railway  trough  drum : 

9  X  27  X  87  >:  45  X  92 
60  X  BO  X  25  X  16  X  48  ~ 

Draft  between  the  railway  trough  drum  and  the  card  calender 
rolls : 

48  X  16  X  9..8  X  37 
92  >      5  X   18  X  31  ~ 

The  revolutions  of  the  railway  head  driving  pulley  determine 
the  speed  of  the  card  doffers  and  determine  the  production  of  the 
card.  Thus,  when  a  change  in  the  production  of  the  card  is  re- 
quired and  the  weight  of  the  sliver  is  to  remain  the  same,  the 
speed  of  the  driving  pulley  must  be  changed.  In  Fig.  137,  the 
driving  pulleys  are  shown  as  making  35.28  revolutions  per  minute 
to  one  of  the  doffer. 

180  X  9.8  X  45  _ 
18  X    5    X  25~ 

Fig.  138  shows  a  diagram  of  the  draft  gearing  of  the  railway 
to  which  reference  will  be  made  under  the  head  of  calculations. 
DRAWING  FRAMES 

Arrangement.  When  drawing  frames  are  used,  they  are  ar- 
ranged in  two  and  often  three  processes,  or  sets,  usually  placed 
across  the  mill  as  shown  in  plan  in  Fig.  139  anrd  in  elevation  in 
Fig.  140.  They  are  built  with  from  two  to  eight  deliveries  to  a 
head  and  from  one  to  five  heads  to  a  frame.  When  more  than  one 
head  is  used  to  a  process,  they  are  coupled  together  and  all  are 
driven  from  an  underneath  shaft;  thus  in  Figs.  139  and  140  each 
process  consists  of  one  frame  of  fmir  heads  with  six  deliveries  to 
each  head,  or  twenty-four  deliveries  to  each  process.  On  the  right 
end  of  each  frame  is  a  pulley,  A,  which  is  driven  from  a  similar 
pulley,  B,  on  the  main  line  by  a  belt,  D.  The  pulley,  A,  is  upon 
an  underneath  shaft,  F,  which  extends  the  length  of  the  frame,  and 
upon  it  are  the  pulleys,  C,  for  driving  each  individual  head.  The 
shaft,  F,  is  in  motion  all  of  the  time  that  the  main  line  is  running, 


•jot; 


COTTON  SPINNING 


167 


motion  being  transmitted  to  the  tight  and  loose  pulleys  of  each 
head  by  the  belts,  E.  By  this  means  the  stopping  of  one  head  in 
a  process  does  not  affect  the  others. 

Sometimes  the  drawing  frames  are  arranged  longitudinally,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  141,.  They  are  then  coupled  with  coilers  or  deliv- 
eries placed  alternately  as  in  the  drawing,  which  shows  three  proc- 


FRONT      ROLL      li   DIA.       25 


Fig.  138.    Diagram  of  Railway  Head  Draft  Gearing. 

esses.  The  cans  from  F  and  H  deliver  in  the  same  alley  while  those 
from  G  deliver  at  the  back  of  II. 

When  one  Jhead  is  used  in  a  process,  it  is  referred  to  as  a  frame 
and  the  underneath  shaft  is  generally  omitted,  the  frame  being 
driven  directly  from  an  overhead  counter  shaft  in  the  same  way  as 
in  Fig.  142. 

The  most  commonly  used  arrangement  of  drawing  frames, 
with  respect  to  cards,  is  the  one.  shown  in  Fig.  139. 

The  principal  point  to  be  kept  in  mind  is,  that  the  cans  of 
sliver  shall  be  taken  in  as  direct  a  line  as  possible,  from  the  card 
coilers  to  the  back  of  the  first  process  of  drawing,  and  that  no  un- 


207 


K;S 


COTTON  SPINNING 


necessary  movements  shall  be  made  by  the  tenders  of  the  drawing 

«/  «/ 

frame. 

Operation.  The  actual  operation  of  drawing  is  very  simple 
and  consists  of  passing  the  slivers  between  several  pairs  of  rolls, 
each  pair  running  at  a  greater  speed  than  the  preceding  one.  The 
rolls  are  set  at  a  certain  distance  apart,  slightly  more  than  the 
length  of  the  cotton  fibers,  so  that  two  pairs  cannot  have  any  direct 
contact  with  the  same  fibers  at  the  same  time. 

AVhat  actually  takes  place  may  be  described  best  by  referring 


J  J  JJ  J  J  J'J'O  J  J  J  J  J  MJ  JJ^>  J'^D  JJJ  j  JJ 


Fig.  1G9.    Plan  of  Card  Room  Showing  Drawing  Frames. 

to  Fig.  143,  which  shows  in  section  four  pairs  of  drawing  frame 
rolls. 

The  cotton  enters  between  the  back  rolls,  1)D,  and  is  drawn 
between  the  next  pair,  CC.  Now  as  the  speed  of  CC  is  slightly 
more  than  that  of  DD,  it  is  evident  that  the  fibers,  which  are  under 
the  influence  of  rolls,  CC,  will  be  withdrawn  from  the  mass  be- 
tween DD,  the  friction  existing  among  the  fibers  causing  them  to 
straighten  in  being  drawn  one  by  another.  This  action  is  still  fur- 


208 


COTTON  SPINNING 


Nil) 


ther  carried  out  as  the  sliver  is  drawn  between  the  remaining  rolls 
in  the  set. 

Fig.  144  shows  a  general  section  of  a  drawing  frame.     The 
slivers,  S,  are  drawn  upward  through  the  sliver  guide,  T,  and  be- 


Fig.  140.    Elevation  Showing  Drawing  Frames. 

tween  the  fluted  carrier  roll,  P,  and  the  top  roll,  N1,  then  between 
the  four  pairs  of  draft  rolls,  D,G,B,A,  where  it  receives  a  draft, 
usually  as  great  as  the  number  of  cans  put  up  at  the  back.  Thus. 


Fig.  141.    Plan  of  Card  Room  Showing  the  Drawing  Frames 
Arranged  Longitudinally. 

if  there  are  six  cans  at  the  back,  and  the  sliver  from  these  cans  is 
drawn  through  as  one  sliver,  or  doubled  six  into  one,  the  machine 
is  given  a  draft  of  six,  so  that  the  weight  of  the  sliver  being  de- 
livered is  the  same  as  the  weight  of  that  from  each  can.  While 


209 


170 


COTTON  SPINNING 


this  is  the  usual  practice,  it  is  not  a  rule  to  follow,  as  general  con- 
ditions and  requirements  determine  the  best  draft  and  weight  of 
sliver  to  be  adopted. 

Upon  leaving  the  draft  rolls,   the   sliver   is   drawn  over   the 


Fig.  142.    Front  Elevation  of  Drawing  Frame  Driven  from  Above. 

sliver  plate,  J,  through  the  trumpet,  X,  and  between  the  calender 
rolls,  E  and  F.  From  this  point,  it  falls  through  the  spout  of  the 
coiler,  G,  and  is  coiled  in  the  can,  II. 

Stop  Motions.     The  drawing  frame  is  provided. with,  four  stop 
motions:  A  full  can  stop  motion  which  operates  when  a  set  of  cans 


ABC  D 

Fig.  143.    Section  Showing  Draft  Rolls. 

at  the  front  of  the  machine  becomes  full,  two  calender  roll  stop 
motions  which  operate  when  the  sliver  is  absent  from  between  the 
calender  rolls  or  when  a  "wind-up"  occurs  on  either  of  them,  and 
a  back  stop  motion  which  causes  the  head  to  stop  when  the  sliver 
breaks  at  the  back  of  the  frame  or  a  can  becomes  empty. 

The  necessity  for  a  back  stop  motion  becomes  more  apparent 
when  we  consider  that  after  the  drawing  processes  there  is  no  op- 
portunity to  rectify,  to  any  extent,  the  inequalities  in  the  weight 


810 


S5 
O 

H    -N 

S3 

Pu    •- 

SS 

O     g 

K    !c 
O    ^ 

la 

H    f- 


2  -j 
!^  o 
£  « 

cc 
Q 


COTTON  SPINNING 


171 


of  the  sliver.  When  we  realize  that  in  doubling  six  into  one,  the 
breaking  of  an  end  means  16%  difference  in  the  weight  of  the 
sliver,  we  soon  see  the  need  of  a  stop  motion.  If  six  slivers,  each 


Fig.  144.    General  Section  of  Drawing  Frame. 

weighing  sixty  grains  per  yard,  were  doubled  with  a  draft  of  six 
we  should  still  get  a  sixty  grain  sliver,  but  if  an  end  should  break, 
the  weight  of  the  slivers  would  be  fifty  grains,  or  16%  lighter. 

Of  back  stop  motions,  there  are  two  styles  used,  mechanical 
and  electrical.  Opinions  are  divided  as  to  which  is  the  better  one. 

Electrical  Stop  Motion.     The  principle,  upon  which  the  elec- 


213 


172 


COTTON  SPINNING 


trie  back  stop  motion  operates,  depends  upon  the  fact  that  cotton 
is  an  insulator  or  non-conductor  of  electricity  and  that  the  slivers, 
passing  between  two  rolls  connected  with  opposite  poles  of  an  elec- 
tric generator,  prevent  the  flow  of  the  electric  current.  As  long 
as  the  sliver  is  between  these  rolls,  the  stop  motion  remains  in- 
operative, but  should  it  break  and  allow  the  rolls  to  come  together, 
the  circuit  is  completed  and  the  machine  stops  instantly. 

Fig.  145  shows  a  section  of  the  electric  back  stop  motion 
magnet  box  which  should  be  referred  to  in  connection  with  Fig- 
144.  The  electric  current  for  operating  this  stop  motion  is  con- 


Fig.  145.    Magnet  Box  for  Electric  Back  Stop  Motion. 

ducted  by  means  of  rods,  or  wires,  from  the  generator,  which  is 
conveniently  located  and  is  usually  furnished  for  a  certain  number 
of  deliveries  of  drawing. 

The  positive  pole  or  wire,  A1,  is  indicated  by  the  sign  -)-  and 
the  negative  wire,  Z1,  by  the  sign  — .  The  machine  is  practi- 
cally divided  into  positive  and  negative  poles  by  insulating  material 
throughout,  the  terminals  of  the  poles  being  at  the  rolls  P  and  N1. 
The  current  flows  from  the  generator,  as  indicated  by  arrows,  to 
the  contact  block,  R1,  through  the  contact  springs,  B2,  contact 
plate,  C1,  and  the  electro- magnet,  M1.  From  the  electro-magnet 
it  passes  upward  on  the  wire  connection  to  the  stop  motion  roll 
stand,  K,  and  terminates  in  the  top  roll,  N1,  which  runs  in  con- 


214 


COTTON  SPINNING 


tact  with  K.  The  only  point  where  the  current  can  return  to  the 
generator  is  through  the  bottom  or  carrier  roll,  P,  which  is  con- 
nected by  the  framing  of  the  machine  to  the  negative  pole  Z1.  So 
long  as  the  sliver  is  between  the  rolls  N1  and  P,  the  circuit  is 
broken  and  no  flow  of  the  electric  current  takes  place,  but,  should 
a  sliver  break  or  run  out,  the  top  roll,  JX1,  falls  into  contact  with 
the  carrier  roll,  P,  completing  the  circuit  from  A1  to  Z1.  The  in- 
stant that  the  current  flows  through  the  electro-magnet,  it  attracts 
the  armature  F1  into  the  path  of  the  vibrating  arm  G1.  As  aeon- 
sequence,  the  movement  of  the  arm  is  arrested  and  the  stop  motion 
spring  released,  shipping  the  belt  on  to  the  loose  pulley.  The  de- 
vice for  releasing  the  spring  rod  is  the  same  for  the  electric  stop 


Fig.  146.    Device  for  Releasing  Stop  Motion  Spring. 

motion  as  for  the  mechanical  one  and  will  be  referred  to  in  another 
paragraph. 

The  carrier  roll,  P,  is  fluted  and  extends  the  whole  length  of 
the  head,  but  the  top  rolls,  IX"1,  are  made  in  short  lengths  with  two 
bosses,  one  for  each  end  of  sliver.  A  lug  on  the  stand,  K,  projects 
into  a  groove  between  the  bosses  and  prevents  any  movement  of 
the  top  rolls,  longitudinally,  on  the  carrier  roll. 

The  sliver  guide,  R,  which  is  pivoted  at  R6,  has  a  longitud- 
inally projecting  arm,  which  is  just  clear  of  the  underside  of 
the  carrier  roll.  If  the  cotton  should  collect  and  wind  up  on  the 
carrier  roll,  its  increased  diameter  would  depress  the  horizontal 
arm,  causing  the  sliver  guide  to  turn  about  the  center  R8  and  the 
adjustable  pin  R  in  its  upper  end  will  come  in  contact  with  the 
top  roll.  This  completes  the  circuit  and  causes  the  frame  to  stop 
just  as  if  the  top  rolls  and  carrier  roll  were  brought  into  contact. 

For  explaining  the  device  for  releasing  the  stop  motion  spring, 
Figure  146  has  been  prepared.  It  shows  a  section  of  the  drawing 


215 


174 


COTTON  SPINNING 


frame  and  all  parts  not  actually  necessary  in  the  explanation  are 
omitted.  The  rocker  shaft,  <P,  is  operated  by  an  eccentric,  L", 
and  is  connected  with  it  by  an  eccentric  arm  K,  and  a  rocker  arm 
K1.  A  pin,  K",  in  the  eccentric  arm,  rests  in  the  bottom  of  a  slot 
in  the  rocker  arm  and  is  held  in  place  by  a  spring  K2. 

When  any  of  the  stop  motions  operate,  the  movements  of  the 
rocker  shaft  are  arrested,  and  as  the  eccentric  arm  is  positive  in  its 
movements,  the  stopping  of  the  rocker  shaft  causes  the  pin  in  the 
eccentric  arm  to  rise  in  the  slot  in  K  and  in  so  doing,  it  is  brought 

o'  O  .     • 

into  contact  with  the  latch  lever,  L6.  This  causes  the  latch  lever, 
which  turns  on  a  pin  at  C,  to  be  withdrawn  from  a  groove  in  the 


Fig.  147.    Mechanical  Back  Stop  Motion. 

spring  rod,  F4,  releasing  the  spring,  C4,  and  moving  the  belt  on  to 
the  loose  pulley. 

Mechanical  Back  Stop  Motion.  A  drawing  frame  with  a  me- 
chanical back  stop  motion  is  shown  in  section  in  Fig.  147.  The 
slivers  are  drawn  from  the  cans  between  two  rolls,  L  and  M.  The 
roll,  M,  is  continuous  while  L  is  made  in  short  sections  covering 

O 

two  slivers.  From  these  rolls,  the  slivers  pass  forward  over  stop 
motion  spoons,  N4,  and  between  the  draft  rolls,  D,  C,  B,  and  A, 
and  finally  pass  as  one  sliver  through  the  trumpet,  N,  between  the 
calender  rolls,  E  and  F,  and  are  coiled  up  in  the  can,  H,  by  the 
coiler  gear  G. 

The  stop  motion  spoons- are  mounted  upon  a  knife  edge,  O, 
and  they  are  so  balanced,  that  when  the  sliver  passes  over  them, 
the  back  ends,  D2,  are  held  clear  of  the  path  of  the  rocker  arm  Cs. 
If  a  sliver  breaks,  the  back  end,  which  is  heavy,  falls  instant- 


Sir. 


COTTON  SPINNING 


175 


ly  into  the  path  of  the  rocker  arm  and  arrests  its  motion  and  the 
machine  is  stopped  immediately. 

All  parts,  forward  of  the  spoons,  are  substantially  the  same 
as  those  shown  and  described  for  the  electric  stop  motion,  and 
need  no  further  explanation. 

Some  drawing  frames,  with  mechanical  back  stop  motions, 
are  built  without  the  carrying  rolls,  L  and  M,  shown  in  Figure  147. 
This  works  very  well  for  the  first  and  second  processes  of  drawing 
after  carding,  but  for  stock  which  has  been  combed,  it  becomes 
necessary  to  have  these  rolls  to  lift  the  sliver  out  of  the  cans,  as 
the  slightest  strain  will  cause  it  to  pull  apart.  With  very  short 


Fig.  148.    Full  Can  Stop  Motion. 

cotton  and  waste,  it  is  also  a  help  toward  preventing  the  sliver 
from  parting. 

Full  Can  Stop  Motion.  The  full  can  stop  motion,  as  the 
name  implies,  stops  each  individual  head  when  the  cans  in  that 
head  become  full.  This  stop  motion,  which  is  connected  with  one 
can  in  each  head,  serves  as  a  guage  for  the  others  as  the  cans  are 
usually  emptied  in  sets. 

The  stop  motion  is  shown  in  Figure  148,  which  may  be  con- 
sidered with  Figure  144.  Bolted  to  the  table  is  a  slotted  stand,  ES 
carrying  a  lever,  F2,  which  is  mounted  upon  a  pin,N2.  In  its  nor- 
mal position,  one  end  of  this  lever  rests  lightly  upon  the  top  of 
the  coiler  gear,  G,  and  the  other  just  above  a  projection  of  the  arm, 
J-.  which  is  fastened  to  the  rocker  shaft,  P2. 

When  the  can  becomes  full,  the  cotton  presses  upward  against 
the  underside  of  the  coiler  gear,  G,  causing  it  to  raise  the  short 
end  of  the  lever,  F2,  and  this  lever  turning  about  the  pin,  N2,  its 
long  end  is  lowered  into  the  path  of  the  arm,  J2,  thus  arresting  the 
motion  of  the  rocker  shaft,  P2.  This,  as  before  described,  releases 


217 


176 


COTTC  )X  S  I»  L  X  X I X  ( J 


the  stop  motion  spring  which  causes  the  belt  to  be  shipped  on  to 
the  loose  pulley. 

The  screw  at  II2  serves  as  a  means  for  a  very  line  adjustment 
of  the  stop  motion. 

Figure  149  shows  a  device  for  stopping  the  drawing  frame  if 
the  sliver  should  "wind  up"  on  either  of  the  calender  rolls  or 
"break  down"  before  it  gets  to  them.  This  stop  motion,  which  is 
really  two  stop  motions  operated  by  one  mechanical  device,  is 
caused  to  operate  by  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  outer  calender 
roll,  E.  The  bearing,  E4,  for  the  roll,  is  free  to  move  in  a  slot  in 
the  calender  stand,  while  the  bearing  for  F  is  fast.  Against  the 
underside  of  E4  is  a  lever,  C3,  pivoted  at  M2  and  heavier  at  its 


Fig.  149.    Calender  Roll  Stop  Motion. 

long  end  which  is  forked  so  as  to  engage  the  rocker  sJiaft  arm,  J2, 
when  either  raised  or  lowered. 

If  the  sliver  winds  up  on  either  calender  roll,  the  increased 
diameter  caused  will  move  the  roll,  E,  away  from  the  roll,  F,  and 
in  so  doing  will  allow  the  lever,  C3,  to  rise  and  its  long  end  to 
engage  the  rocker  shaft  arm,  J2.  While  if  from  any  cause  the  sliv- 
er breaks  down,  the  roll,  E,  will  fall  slightly  against  F  and  depress 
the  short  end  of  the  lever,  C3,  causing  the  long  end  to  be  brought 
into  contact  with  J2. 

In  the  short  end  of  the  lever,  C3,  which  is  split,  is  an  adjust- 
ing screw,  A2,  for  setting  the  stop  motion. 

Clearers.  The  electricity,  generated  by  the  friction  of  the  rolls 
and  belts  of  the  drawing  frame,  causes  the  loose  fibers  and  flyings 
to  adhere  to  the  draft  rolls  and  unless  some  means  are  taken  to 
prevent  this  happening,  the  accumulation  becomes  detached  from 
time  to  time,  and  is  carried  along  with  the  sliver.  This  makes  the 


218 


IMPROVED  RAILWAY  HEAD- FRONT  VIEW 

Saco  &  Pettee  Machine  Shops. 


COTTON  SPINNING 


177 


work  dirty  and  uneven,  and  frequently  causes  the  sliver  to  break. 
The  device  employed  to  collect  the  loose  cotton  is  called  a 
clearer  and  several  styles  are  in  use.  The  one  most  commonly 
used  is  shown  in  Figure  150.  For  the  top  rolls,  this  consists 
of  a  flat  piece  of  wood,  A,  with  wires,  B,  driven  into  the  underside 
and  supporting  a  flannel  apron  C.  The  apron  rests  lightly  against 
the  top  of  the  rolls,  and  as  they  revolve  the  loose  cotton  is  grad- 
ually collected  by  the  rough  surface  of  the  apron,  which  has  to  be 
cleaned  or  upicked"  at  regular  intervals.  If  the  accumulation  is 

allowed  to  get  too  large  it  will 

o  o 

become  loose  from  the  clearer 
and  pass  in  with  the  sliver, 
hence  the  clearer  should  be 
cleaned  as  often  as  the  case 
demands. 

For  -the  bottom  clearer, 
strips  of  wood,  D,  covered  with 
flannel  are  used.  They  conform 
in  shape  to  the  outline  of  the 
rolls  and  are  held  in  contact 
with  the  flutes  by  weights,  E. 
The  straps  holding  the  weights 
pass  upward  and  around  the 
bottom  rolls. 

Another  style  of  clearer  is 
shown  in  Figure  151.  This 
consists  of  two  wooden  rolls, 
A  and  B,  supported  in  a  frame,  C.  Around  the  roll  is  an  apron, 
D,  of  heavy  flannel  or  carpet.  The  roll,  A,  is  covered  with  per- 
forated tin  and  acts  as  a  driver  for  the  apron,  while  the  roll,  B, 
is  a  carrier  with  an  adjusting  screw,  E,  for  keeping  the  apron  tight. 
On  the  top  of  the  frame  is  a  comb,  K,  with  the  blade  set  close  to 
the  apron.  Motion  is  given  to  the  comb  by  an  arm,  F,  from  an 
eccentric,  G.  This  arm  also  carries  a  pawl,  H,  which  engages 
with  the  teeth  of  the  ratchet  gear,  J,  and  through  the  gears,  L 
and  M,  the  roll,  A,  is  turned  slightly  at  each  forward  movement 
of  the  arm,  F. 

By  this  means  the  apron,  as  it  moves  around  slowly,  wipes 


Fig.  150.    Common  Top  Clearer. 


219 


ITS 


COTTON  SPINNING 


the  top  of  the  rolls  and  the  cotton,  which  is  collected,  is  combed 
into  a  roll  as  it  reaches  the  comb  when  it  is  removed  very  easily. 

A  set  screw,  N,  is  for  adjusting  the  frame  so  that  the  apron 
shall  just  touch  lightly  on  the  top  of  the  rolls,  as  any  great  pres- 
sure will  cause  them  to  slip  on  the  bottom  rolls  and  make  uneven 
work.  All  that  is  necessary  is  to  simply  wipe  them  lightly  and 
not  retard  their  rotation. 

Diameter  of  Fluted  Rolls.  The  size  of  the  fluted  rolls,  on 
most  makes  of  drawing  frames  for  ordinary  length  staple  cotton, 
is  shown  in  Figure  152.  Sometimes  this  is  varied  and  the  back 


Fig.  151.    Revolving  Top  Clearer. 

roll  is  made  one  and  three-eighths  inches  in  diameter  instead  of  one 
and  one-eighth  inches  diameter. 

As  a  rule,  when  the  frame  is  to  be  used  for  long  staple  cotton, 
the  rolls  are  made  larger  in  diameter,  as  the  large  rolls  lessen  to 
some  extent  the  trouble  from  roller  laps.  The  most  common  sizes 
are  shown  in  Figures  153. 

For  very,  short  lap  cotton,  and  when  a  large  percentage  of 
waste  is  to  be  used,  the  rolls  are  made  of  the  diameters  indicated 
in  Figure  154. 

Setting  of  Rolls.  In  regard  to  setting  the  fluted  rolls,  no  ex- 
act rule  can  be  given  except  that  the  distance  between  the  centers 
of  the  front  and  second  rolls  should  be  from  one-quarter  to  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  more  than  the  average  length  of  staple  being 
worked,  and  this  distance  is  made  greater  between  the  centers  of 
the  second  and  third  rolls,  and  still  greater  between  the  centers  of 
the  third  and  back  rolls.  Thus,  in  Figure  152,  the  distance  be- 


220 


COTTON  SPINNING 


179 


tween  the  centers  of  the  front  and  second  rolls  is  one  and  three- 
eighths  inches,  between  the  second  and  third  rolls,  one  and  one-half 
inches,  and  between  the  third  and  back  rolls,  one  and  five-eighths 
inches. 

These  .distances  vary  under  different  conditions.     If  a  sliver 


,          .»          t 

1|  1*  IB  i 

Fig.  152.    Draft  Rolls  for  Ordinary  Length  Staple  Cotton. 

of  eighty  grains  is  being  run,  the  distance  between  the  centers  of 
the  rolls  should  be  greater  than  when  running  a  fifty  grain  sliver. 
This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  not  only  the  fibers  directly  in  contact 
with  the  bite  of  the  roll  are  being  drawn,  but  the  surrounding 
ones  are  acted  upon  also,  and  as  the  mass  of  cotton  in  a  heavy 


12 


Fig.  153.    Draft  Rolls  for  Long  Staple  Cotton. 

sliver  is  considerable,  it  is  impossible  to  produce  a  sliver  of  even 
weight  unless  there  is  more  space  between  the  bite  of  the  several 
pairs  of  rolls. 

If  the  draft  is  short,  the  rolls  may  be  set  closer  than  when  an 
excessive  draft  is  used,  but  with  a  very  long  draft  the  rolls,  must 
be  set  more  open.  In  all  cases  the  speed  must  be  reduced  with  a 
large  draft  or  a  large  amount  of  wsiste  will  be  made. 

Top  Rolls.  There  are  two  kinds  of  top  rolls  used,  leather 
covered  rolls  and  metallic  rolls.  The  leather  covered  rolls  are 
made  in  two  styles,  shell  and  solid.  The  shell  roll,  which  is  gen- 
erally used  for  all  four  lines,  is  shown  in  Fig.  155.  This  roll  is 


221 


ISO 


COTTON  SPINNING 


made  in  three  parts,  the  arbor,  the  shell  and  the  bushiny.  The 
arbor  is  stationary  and  the  shell  revolves  upon  it.  This  gives  a 
long  bearing  surface  for  the  shell  and  a  chance  for  a  thorough 
lubrication  of  the  arbor. 

The  ends  of  both   arbor  and  bushing  are  made  alike  and  are 


Fig.  154.    Draft  Rolls  for  Short  Staple  Cotton. 

held  in  place  in  the  slides  of  the  roll  stands.  The  shoulders,  A 
bear  against  the  sides  of  the  stands  to  prevent  end  movement  to 
the  rolls  and  the  weight  hooks  are  hung  upon  the  necks  of  the 
rolls  at  B. 

A    section  of    the  shell  and   bushing,    in    position   upon   the 


BUSHING 


ARBOR 


SHELL 


Fig.  155.     Shell  Top  Roll. 

arbor,  is  shown  in  the  lower  view  of  the  drawing.  The  boss  of 
the  shell,  C,  is  first  covered  with  specially  woven  cloth  and  then 
with  roller  leather  made  from  sheepskin. 

The  solid  top  roll,  which  is  sometimes  used,  is  the  same  in 


222 


COTTON  SPINNING 


181 


outline  as  the  shell  roll.  The  weight  hooks  are  hung  iii  the  same 
manner,  but  as  the  whole  roll  revolves,  it  necessitates  oiling  the 
neck  of  the  roll  where  the  weight  hook  bears. 

The  weighting  is  so  arranged  that  the  pressure  may  be  re- 
moved from  the  top  rolls  when 
the  machine  is  to  stand  idle  for 
any  length  of  time.  This  pre- 
vents the  leather  from  becoming 
grooved  by  the  flutes  of  the  bot- 
tom roller. 

As  previously  mentioned, 
the  shell  roll  is  generally  used 
for  all  four  lines,  but  for  the  Fig.  156.  Perspective  view  of 

back  line  a  steel  fluted  roll,  cue  Metallic  Top  Rolls- 

same  as  the  bottom  roll,  is  sometimes  used. 

When  metallic  top  rolls  are  used,  the  production  of  the  draw- 
ing frame  is  greatly  increased,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  flutes  of 
the  rolls  interlock  and  the  sliver,  in  passing  between  them,  is  made 
to  follow  the  outline  of  the  flutes.  This  point  may  be  seen  by 
examining  Figures  156  and  157.  The  rolls  are  prevented  from 
bottoming  by  collars,  A,  at  each  end  of  both  top  and  bottom  rolls. 
If  the  sliver  follows  the  exact  outline  of  the  flutes,  a  one  and 

three-eighths  front  roll 
will  deliver,  in  one  rev- 
olution, five  and  seven- 
ty-four one-hundredths 
inches,  while  a  common 
roll,  of  the  same  diam- 
eter, will  deliver  only 
four  and  thirty-one  one- 
hundredths  inches, 
which  shows  that  the 
delivery  of  a  metallic 
roll  is  thirty-three  per  cent  greater,  but  as  a  fact,  unless  the  sliver 
is  extremely  light,  it  will  not  follow  the  outline  of  the  flutes  closely 
enough  to  deliver  this  amount.  It  is  plain  that  on  a  heavy  sliver, 
the  thickness  prevents  the  flutes  from  interlocking  as  deeply  as  with 
a  light  one;  consequently,  one  revolution  of  the  front  roll  will  not 


Pig.  157.    Enlarged  Section  of  Metallic 
Top  Rolls. 


223 


182 


COTTON  SPINNING 


deliver  as  great  a  .length  and,  for  this  reason,  it  is  impossible  to 
figure  the  exact  production  of  a  drawing  frame  with  metallic  rolls. 
It  is,  however,  safe  to  estimate  from  twenty-five  to  thirty-three 
per  cent  greater  production  than  with  the  common  roll. 

The  front  metallic  roll,  one  and  three-eighths  inches  in  diame- 
ter, is  made  with  forty-four  flutesj  and  in  figuring  the  draft,  this 
should  be  called  y  or  1|  inches  in  diameter,  which  is  thirty-three 
per  cent  greater  than  a  common  roll.  The  second  roll,  1|  inches 
in  diameter,  is  made  with  thirty-six  fiutes  and  should  be  called  | 
or  l£  inches  in  diameter.  The  third  roll,  1^  inches  in  diameter, 


DRAFT  GEAR 
28  TO  64 


or  1| 


CALENDER   ROLL  3    D  I  A. 

Fig.  158.    Diagram  of  Drawing  Frame  Draft  Gearing. 

is  made  with  twenty-seven  flutes  and  should  be  called 
inches  in  diameter,  and  the  back  roll,  1|  inches  in  diameter,  is 
made  with  eighteen  flutes  and  is  called  y  or  1|  inches  in  diam- 
eter. With  these  points,  it  is  comparatively  easy  to  figure  the 
draft. 

A  diagram  of  the  draft  gearing  is  given  in  Fig.  158  from 
which  the  usual  calculations  may  be  made. 

CALCULATIONS 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  drawing  frame  between  the  cal- 
ender rolls  and  the  back  roll:  Multiply  together  the  driven  gears  and 
the  diameter  of  the  calender  rolls  and  divide  the  product  by  the  prod- 
uct of  the  driving  gears  multiplied  together  with  the  diameter  of 
the  back  roll.  The  driven  gears  are  L,  J,  13^  (draft  change  gear, 
-11  teeth)  D,  F  and  II,  and  the  driving  gears  are  M,  K,  A,  C, 


224 


COTTON  SPINNING  183 

E  and  G.  The  diameter  of  the  calender  rolls  is  3  inches  and  may  be 
called  24,  and  the  diameter  of  the  back  roll  is  1|  inches  and  may  be 
called  9. 

61  X  22  X  41  X  65  X  28  X  27x24  _ 
LxamPle:    45X61X26X25X25X25X   9~ 
Rule  2.     To  find  the  draft  factor:     Proceed  as  in  the  above 
rule  but  omit  the.  draft  change  gear,  B. 

61  X  22  X  65  X  28  X  27  X  24 
ExamPle:     45  X  61  X  26  X  25  X  25  X  25  X  9  =   0'15'6 

Rule  3.  To  find  the  draft:  Multiply  die  factor  by  the  num- 
ber of  teeth  in  the  draft  change  gear. 

Example:  0.1576  X  41   =   6.4616 

.Rule  4.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear: 
Divide  the  required  draft  by  the  factor. 

6.4616 

Example:  O1576  =  41> 

The  draft  of  the  drawing  frame  is  divided  between  the  rolls 
in  the  following  manner:  Between  the  front  roll  and  the  second 
roll,  it  is  3.08  draft  and  may  be  found  by  applying  the  same  rule 
as  for  the  total  draft. 

Example:  25  X  25  X    9  =  3-°8° 

An  examination  of  the  diagram  of  the  gearing,  Fig.  158,  will 
show  that  the  draft  between  the  front  and  second  rolls  is  not 
affected  by  changing  the  total  draft  of  the  machine,  and  unless  the 
total  draft  is  made  unusually  short,  the  draft  between  these  rolls 
is  not  changed,  but,  between  the  second  and  third  rolls,  the  draft 

O          '  7  ' 

is  affected  when  changing  the  draft  gear,  B.  Thus,  with  a  41 
tooth  .draft  gear,  which  is  correct  for  a  total  draft  of  6.46,  the 
draft  between  the  second  and  third  rolls  is  1.626. 

25  X  25  X  41  X  65  X  9 
LxaraPle:  45  X  35  x  26  X  25  X  9  = 

The  draft  between  the  third  and  back  rolls  is  1.209  and  is  not 
affected  by  changing  the  total  draft  as  the  back  roll  is  driven  from 
the  third. 

27  X  28  X  9 


225 


184  COTTON  SPINNING 

Between  the  front  fluted  rolls  and  calender  rolls  there  is  a 
slight  draft  which  can  be  regulated  by  changing  the  gear,  L. 
of  61  teeth. 

24  X  61  X  22 

ExamPle:  45  X  61  X  11  = 

The  total  draft  ina^  be  found  by  multiplying  together  the 
draft  between  the  rolls. 

Example:  3.080  X  1.626  X  1.209  X  1.066  =  6.45  + 

Rule  5.  To  find  the  production  of  the  drawing  frame: 
Multiply  together  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  front  roll  per 
minute  (300),  the  number  of  inches  delivered  by  the  calender  rolls 
at  each  revolution  of  the  front  roll  (4.60),  the  number  of  minutes 
run  per  day  (600)  and  the  weight  of  the  sliver  in  grains  per  yard 
(60).  Divide  the  product  by  the  number  of  grains  in  one  pound 
(7,000)  multiplied  by  the  number  of  inches  in  one  yard  (36). 

In  figuring  the  production  of  the  drawing  frame,  the  number 
of  inches,  delivered  by  the  calender  rolls  at  each  revolution  of  the 
front  roll,  should  be  considered  as  there  is  a  draft  of  1.066  between 
them  with  a  61  tooth  gear  at  L.  The  calender  rolls  deliver  4.60 
inches  at  each  revolution  of  the  front  roll. 

300  X  4.60  X  600  X  60  • 

Example:  ~7000  X  36  =  1J7'U 

From  the  number  of  pounds  given  hi  the  above  example  there 
should  be  deducted  about  20  per  cent  for  time  lost  in  cleaning, 
oiling  and  piecing  broken  ends. 

Rule  6.  To  find  the  factor  for  the  production  of  the  draw- 
ing frame:  Proceed  as  in  Rule  5,  but  omit  the  revolutions  of  the 
front  roll  and  the  weight  of  the  sliver. 

v  4.60  X  600 

Example:  7000  X  36  = -1095 

Rule  7.  To  find  the  production  with  the  factor  given  :  Mul- 
tiply the  factor  by  the. number  of  revolutions  of  the  front  roll  and 
the  weight  of  the  sliver. 

Example:  .1095  X  300  X  60  =  197.1 

Rule  8.  To  find  the  draft  necessary  to  make  a  sliver  of  a 
certain  weight:  Multiply  together  the  number  of  slivers  entering 
at  the  back  of  the  drawing  frame  (6)  by  their  weight  in  grains  per 


226 


COTTON  SPINNING 


1S5 


yard  (60)  and  divide  by  the  weight  in  grains  per  yard  of  the  sliver 
being  delivered. 

Example:  — ^ — =6. 

Rule  9.  To  find  the  weight  of  the  sliver  being  delivered: 
Multiply  together  the  nnmber  of  slivers  entering  at  the  back  (6) 
by  their  weight  in  grains  per  yard  (60)  and  divide  by  the  draft 
(6). 

6  X  60 
Example: 


6 


=  60. 


To  find  the  draft  of  the  railway  head:  Proceed  as  in  Rule  1. 
A  diagram  of  the  gearing  is  given  in  Fig.  138.  The  draft  change 
gear  is  on  the  end  of  the  top  cone  shaft  and  the  cone  belt  should  be 
considered  midway  of  the  ends  of  the  cones  when  the  diameters  of 
both  are  equal.  The  driven  gears  are  S,  P,  E  and  G  (draft  change 
gear  40  teeth)  front  roll  14  inches  diameter.  The  driving  gears 
are  R,  Q,  F  and  H,  and  the  back  roll  is  1J-  inches  diameter. 
60  X  30  X  72  X  40  X  12 

LxamPle:  2TX32X37X36X     9'= 

It  is  usually  customary  to  also  change  the  draft  between  all  of 
the  rolls  when  changing  the  total  draft  of  the  railway  head.  Be- 
tween the  back  and  third  rolls,  this  change  is  effected  by  changing 
the  gear,  B,  and  between  the  third  and  second  rolls  by  changing 
the  gear,  C.  The  table  shown  herewith  gives  the  correct  gears  for 
the  changes  in  draft. 

TABLE  OF  CHANGE  GEARS 


No.  of 

No.  of           No.  of                                No.  of 

No.  of         No.  of 

Draft. 

Teeth  in 

Teeth  in      Teeth  in        Draft.        Teeth  in 

Teeth  in    Teeth  in 

Gear  Q. 

Gear  B.  '     Gear  C. 

Gear  G. 

Gear  B.      Gear  C. 

2.10 

14 

32 

24                   4.20 

28 

57 

32 

2.23 

15 

32 

24                   4.35 

29 

58 

33 

2.40 

16 

34 

25                   4.50 

30                    61 

34 

2.55 

17 

37 

26  . 

4.65 

31 

63 

34 

2.70 

18 

37 

26 

4.82 

32 

66 

35 

2.86 

19 

40 

27 

4.95 

33 

67 

35 

3.00 

20 

42 

28 

5.10 

34 

68 

35 

3.15 

21 

42 

28 

5.25 

35 

71 

36 

3.30 

22 

45 

29 

5.40 

36 

72 

36 

3.45 

23 

47 

30 

5.55 

87 

73 

37 

3.60 

24 

50 

30 

5.70 

38 

74 

37 

3.75 

25 

52 

31 

5.87 

39                    74                  37 

3.90 

26 

53 

31 

6.00 

40                    74 

37 

4.05 

27                    55 

32 

227 


186 


COTTON  SPINNING 


FLY  FRAMES. 

In  the  process  which  follows  drawing,  the  machines  employ- 
ed are  called  fly  frames  or  roving  machines.  The  fly  frame  con- 
tinues the  drawing  process,  but  tha  cotton  is  manipulated  in  a 


different  manner.  Two,  three,  and  sometimes  four  machines  are 
necessary,  depending  upon  the  number  of  yarn  it  is  intended  to 
finally  spin,  as  the  cotton  from  the  roving  machine  goes  directly  to 
the  spinning  frame. 

The  machines  are   practically   the  same  in  mechanical  detail, 
differing  only  in  size  and  weight.    The  machine  first  used  is  called 


228 


COTTON  SPINNING 


187 


the  slubber,  the  second  is  the  intermediate,  and  the  third  is  called 
the  fine  frame.  When  a  fourth  is  necessary  to  reduce  the  cotton 
to  the  correct  weight,  it  is  called  the  jack  frame. 

The  fly  frames  may  be  arranged  longitudinally  or  transversely 
of  the  mill.  The  most  common  arrangement  is  shown  in  Fig.159. 
In  this  illustration  there  are  three  processes.  The  slubbers  are 
placed,  as  a  pair,  directly  in  front  of  the  drawing  frames,  the  inter- 
mediates are  placed  on  each  side  of  the  slubbers  and  the  fine 
frames  extend  across  the  mill  in  an  adjoining  row. 

When  practicable,  each  pair  of  machines  should  be  driven 
from  the  same  counter  shaft  pulley,  which  has  two  faces  divided  by 
a  flange.  The  counter  shaft  should  be  placed  about  over  the 


Fig.  160.    Sectional  Elevation  Showing  Fly  Frames. 

center  of  the  front  or  work  alley.  The  reason  for  this  is  very 
apparent  if  we  examine  Fig.  160,  which  is  a  sectional  elevation  show- 
ing the  fine  frames  illustrated  in  the  previous  drawing.  The 
driving  pulleys,  which  are  near  the  back  side  of  the  machine,  turn 
toward  the  back,  which  necessitates  a  cross  belt  for  one  and  a  straight 
or  open  belt  for  the  other.  AVith  the  counter  shaft  over  the  work 
alley,  the  point  where  the  belts  separate  is  high  enough  to  allow 
passage  beneath,  but  if  the  shaft  were  in  the  back  alley,  there 
would  not  be  passage  room. 

Before  entering  upon  a  description  of  the  fly  frame,  the 
methods  of  numbering  yarns  and  roving  and  the  tables  of  weights 
and  measures,  used  in  cotton  manufacturing,  should  be  fully  un- 
derstood. 

In  all  processes,  up  to  the  present  one,  reference  has  been 
made  to  cotton  as  weighing  a  certain  number  of  grains  or  ounces 


188  COTTON  SPINNING 

per  yard.  After  it  has  passed  through  the  slubber,  it  is  called 
roving  and  the  weight  is  based  upon  the  number  of  hanks,  of  840 
yards  each,  there  are  in  one  pound. 

The  English  table  of  weights  is  a  combination  of  avoirdupois 
and  troy  weights  and  enables  a  very  iine  adjustment  to  be  made. 

TABLE  OF  WEIGHT. 

24  grains  =  1  pennyweight  (dwt.) 
437.5      "        =18  "  +  5%  grains  =  1  ounce. 

7000       "         =  291          "  +  16  grains  =  1  pound. 

TABLE  OF  MEASURE. 

1.5  yards  =  1  thread. 
120     yards  =  80   threads  =  1  skein. 
840     yards  =  560  threads  =  7  skeins  —  1  hank. 

If  we  measure  840  yards  of  roving  and  find  that  it  weighs 
one  pound,  it  is  called  one  hank  and  weighs,  per  yard,  8.33  grains. 

7,000  -«-  840  =  8.33 

If  there  are  1680  yards  in  one  pound,  it  is  called  two  hank, 
and  weighs,  per  yard,  just  half  as  much  as  one  hank,  or  4.1(3  grains. 

7,000  -s-  1680  =  4.16 

If  420  yards  weigh  one  pound,  it  is  half  hank  and  weighs 
16.66  grains  per  yard. 

Number  1  roving,  or  one  hank,  and  number  1  yarn  weigh  the 
same  per  yard,  but  as  the  roving  is  twisted  so  much  less  than  the 
yarn,  it  appears  to  be  much  heavier. 

For  convenience  and  on  account  of  the  extreme  delicacy  of  rov- 
ing, it  i a  customary,  in  actual  practice,  to  measure  twelve  yards  to 
ascertain  the  weight.  The  reason  for  taking  just  this  length  is  as 
follows:  There  are  840  yards  in  a  hank  and  twelve  yards  is  ^  of 
this  amount  and  if  we  divide  twelve  yards  by  -^  of  a  pound  ( 100 
grains),  we  get  the  same  result  as  if  we  should  weigh  the  whole 
hank. 

12  yards  —  ^  of  a  hank  or  840  yards. 
100  grains  =  -fa  of  a  pound  or  7,000  grains. 

The  following  table  gives  the  weight  and  standard  twist  for 
roving  from  .25  hank  to  20.00  hank. 


230 


COTTON  SPINNING 


189 


ROVING  TABLE. 


Hank 
Roving. 

Grains  per 
Yard. 

Twist  per 
Inch. 

Hank 
Roving. 

Grains  per 
Yard. 

Twist  per 
Inch. 

.25 

33.33 

.60 

2.00 

4.16 

1.70 

.30 

27.77 

.65 

2.25 

3.70 

1.80 

.35 

23.80 

.70 

2.50 

3.33 

1.90 

.40 

20.83 

.75 

2.75 

3.30 

1.99 

.45 

18.51 

.80 

3.00 

2.78 

2.08 

.50 

16.66 

.84 

3.50 

2.38 

2.S4 

.55 

15.15 

.88 

4.00 

2.08 

1.40 

.60 

13.88 

.92 

4.50 

1.85 

2.55 

.65 

12.82 

.95 

5.00 

1.67 

9.68 

.70 

11.90 

1.00 

6.00 

1.39 

2.92 

11.11 

1.04 

7.00 

1.19 

3.18 

.80 

10.42 

1.07 

8.00 

1.04 

3.40 

.85 

9.80 

.11 

9.00 

.92 

3.60 

.90 

9.26 

.14 

10.00 

.83 

3.79 

.95 

8.77 

.17 

11.00 

.76 

3.97 

1.00 

8.33 

.20 

12.00 

.69 

4.15 

1.10 

7.58 

.26 

13.00 

.64 

4.33 

.20 

6.94 

1.31 

14.00 

.59 

4.49 

.30 

6.41 

1.37 

15.00 

.55 

4.65 

.40 

595 

1.42 

16.00 

.52 

4.80 

.50 

5.55 

1.47 

17.00 

.49 

4,95 

.60 

5.21 

1.52 

18.00 

.46 

5.09 

.70 

4.90 

1.56 

19.00 

.43 

5.23 

1.80 

4.63 

1.61 

20.00 

.42 

5.37 

1.90 

4.38 

1.65 

The  Slubber  receives  the  cans  of  sliver  at  the  back,  from  the 
last  drawing  frame  and  it  is  put  through  the  machine  and  wound 
upon  bobbins.  These  bobbins  are  then  placed  in  the  creel  of  the 
intermediate  frame  and  the  roving  is  put  through  the  same  process 
and  delivered  to  the  creel  of  the  fine  frame,  where  the  operations 
which  occur  on  the  other  machines  are  repeated. 

A  section  of  a  fine  frame  is  given  in  Fig.  161.  The  bobbins^ 
A,  are  placed  in  the  creel,  two  ends  for  each  spindle.  The  roving 
passes  around  the  rod,  B,  and  through  the  trumpets,  or  guides,  C, 
and  is  drawn  between  the  draft  rolls,  D,  Eand  F.  From  the  front 
roll  it  passes  to  the  nose  of  the  flyer,  G,  through  the  hole,  H,  and 
down  one  leg  of  the  flyer  and  through  the  eye  of  the  presser,  K,  and 
is  finally  wound  upon  the  bobbin,  L. 

The  flyers,  of  which  there  are  two  rows,  fit  snugly  in  the  top  of 
the  spindle,  J,  and  revolve  with  it.  This  causes  the  roving  to  be 
twisted,  which  gives  it  sufficient  strength  to  enable  it  to  be  wound 
upon  the  bobbins. 

The  spindles  are  stationary  so  far  as  any  vertical  movement  is 
concerned.  They  rest  in  steps,  M,  which  are  carried  by  the  step 
rail,  KX 

The  bobbins,  which  are  driven  separately,  from  the  spindles,  are 
carried  by  the  bobbin,  or  bolster  rail,  N,  which  is  made  to  traverse 


231 


190 


COTTON  SPINNING 


up  and  down  so  that  the  layers  of  roving  shall  be  wound  evenly. 

A  drawing  of  the  spindles,  bobbins  and  flyers  is  shown  in  Fig. 

162.     The  upper  part  of  the  spindle  is  supported  by  the  bolster,  P, 


Fig.  161.    Sectional  Elevation  of  Fine  Fly  Frame. 

which  is  fastened  to  the  bobbin  rail  and  the  bobbin,  which  seems 
to  be  upon  the  spindle,  is  simply  a  loose  fit  around  the  bolster. 
The  spindles  are  driven  from  the  spindle  shaft,  P2,  by  the 


232 


COTTON  SPINNING 


191 


bevel  gears,  L1  and  T1,  and  the  bobbins  are  driven  from  the  bobbin 

O  '  ' 

shaft,  J2,  by  the  bevel  gears,  M1  and  N1.     The  gear,  M1,  revolves 
upon  the  bolster  and  the  bobbin,  which  is  slotted  on  the  bottom,  is 
driven  from    the  gear  by  a  pin  which 
fits  into  one  of  the  slots.     The  bobbin 
revolves  between   the  arms  of  the  flyer 
and  in  the  same  direction  as  the  flyer, 
but  to  wind  the   roving,   it   must  run 
faster  or  slower  than  the  flyer. 

Flyer  Lead  and  Bobbin  Lead.  The 
front  roll  delivers  the  roving  at  a  con- 
stant speed  which  accords  to  the  hank 
being  spun,  and  the  roving  must  be 
wound  upon  the  bobbin  at  the  same 
speed  by  which  it  is  delivered.  There 
are  two  ways  by  which  this  is  accom- 
plished: "The  Flyer  Lead"  and  "The 
Bobbin  Lead".  The  first  mentioned  is 
•the  older  method  and  is  used  upon  the 
"Speeder",  a  machine  which  corresponds 
to  the  fly  frame  and  may  be  found  in 
operation  in  some  mills  at  the  present 
time. 

With  the  "Flyer  Lead",  the  flyer 
is  run  at  a  constant  speed,  which  is 
greater  than  that  of  the  bobbin  and  the 
roving  is  wrapped  upon  the  surface  of 
the  bobbin  by  the  excessive  speed  of  the 
flyer.  As  the  bobbin  increases  in  diameter,  its  speed  must  be 
accelerated  so  that  it  shall  wind  the  same  length  that  the  front  roll 
delivers. 

With  the  "Bobbin  Lead"  which  is  used  upon  the  fly  frame, 
the  flyer  is  run  at  a  constant  speed  but  less  than  that  of  the  bobbin. 
The  roving  is  drawn  onto  the  surface  of  the  bobbin  by  the  excess 
of  its  speed  over  that  of  the  flyer,  and  as  the  bobbin  increases  in 

L  «/ 

diameter,  its  speed  must  be  decreased  gradually. 

It  would  seem  that,  with  the  "flyer  lead,"  to  increase  the  speed 
of  the  bobbin  woald  cause  a  greater  length  of  roving  to  be  wound 


Fig.  162. 
Enlarged  View  of  Spindles. 


233 


and,  as  this  is  puzzling  to  many,  it  will  bear  further  explanation. 

We  will  call  the  speed  of  the  flyer  200  R.P.M.  and  "the  speed 
of  the  empty  bobbin,  which  is  one  inch  in  diameter,  100  R.P.M. 
As  the  circumference  of  a  one  inch  bobbin  is  3.14+  inches,  each 
revolution  that  the  flyer  makes,  more  than  the  bobbin,  will  wind 
3.14-|-  inches  of  roving,  and  while  the  flyer  is  making  two  hundred 
revolutions,  314  -f  inches  of  roving  will  be  wound  upon  the  bobbin. 

When  the  bobbin  is  two  inches  in  diameter,  its  circumference 
is  6.28 -f  inches,  and  if  the  flyer  and  the  bobbin  continue  to  run  at 


NO.2 

Fig.  163.    Diagram  Illustrating  Flyer  Lead. 

the  same  relative  speed,  two  hundred  revolutions  of  the  flyer  will 
cause  628  inches  of  roving  to  be  wound. 

The  diagrams,  shown  in  Fig.  163,  will  help  to  make  this  plain. 
Number  1  shows  the  flyer  as  having  made  one-half  of  a  revolution, 
from  A  to  B,  and  the  empty  bobbin,  which  we  will  call  one  inch 
in  diameter,  one-quarter  of  a  revolution,  from  C  to  D.  The  length 
of  roving  wound  will  be  equal  to  the  distance  around  the  barrel  of 
the  bobbin  from  D  to  E,  which  is  one-quarter  of  its  circumference 
or  about  .78  of  an  inch. 

Number  2  shows  the  bobbin  as  two  inches  in  diameter;  the 
flyer  has  made  one-half  of  a  revolution,  from  A  to  B,  and  the  bob- 
bin has  made  one-quarter  of  a  revolution,  from  C  to  D.  The 
length  wound  is  indicated  by  the  distance  measured  around  the 
bobbin,  from  D  to  E,  which  is  1.57  inches;  twice  as  much  as  the 
empty  bobbin. 

Now,  as  the  speed  of  the  flyer  is  constant  and  the  length  of 
roving  delivered  is  always  the  same,  it  is  evident  that  the  amount, 
wound  upon  the  bobbin,  can  be  only  what  is  delivered  by  the  front 
roll  and  as  the  larger  the  bobbin  grows  the  greater  is  its  circum- 


234 


3 
J 

li 

!>    e 

.     a 

S  '•? 
o    3 

fa 

I    3 

w  •< 

<     bo 

fa  I 


COTTON  SPINNING 


193 


ference,  the  only  way  that  the  same  length  of  roving  can  be  wound 
is  by  increasing  the  speed  of  the  bobbin  so  that  the  same  ratio  in  its 


circumferential  velocity  shall  be  maintained 'at  all  times  between  it 
and  the  flyer. 


239 


194  COTTON  SPINNING 

Number  3  shows  the  bobbin  as  two  inches  in  diameter,  and,  in 
order  to  wind  the  proper  length  of  roving,  it  will  have  to  make 
about  three-eighths  of  a  revolution.  The  length  wound  is  repre- 
sented by  the  distance,  D-E,  which,  measured  on  the  circumference 
of  the  bobbin,  will  be  found  to  be  the  same  as  the  distance  D-E, 
in  the  first  diagram. 

The  bobbin  lead  needs  no  further  explanation  than  has  been 
already  given;  the  larger  the  bobbin  grows,  the  slower  it  must  run 
to  wind  the  roving  at  the  same  speed,  at  all  times. 

Gearing.  The  reduction  in  the  speed  of  the  bobbin  is  accom- 
plished by  a  pair  of  cones  in  connection  with  the  differential  gear, 
and  to  enable  the  student  to  follow  clearly  the  gearing  diagram, 
Fi  £7.164  has  been  made. 

o 

Speed  of  Flyer.  The  speed  of  the  driving  shaft,  which  is  con- 
stant, is  400  R.P.M.,  and  the  flyers  are  driven  from  the  driving  shaft 
by  the  gears,  G1,  H3,  T1  and  Ll.  They  therefore  run  1254.54  R. 
P.M. 

60  ?  *»  X  400      = 

40  X  22 

Speed  of  front  Roll.  The  front  roll,  which  is  1^  inches  in 
diameter,  is  also  driven  from  the  driving  shaft  by  the  gears,A3, 
N2,  K3  and  L3.  The  speed  of  the  front  rolls  remains  constant,  except 
when  a  change  is  made  in  the  number  of  roving  being  spun.  This 
is  accomplished  by  changing  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  twist  gear, 
A*.  For  3.50  hank  roving,  the  twist  gear  should  have  40  teeth. 
The  speed  of  the  front  roll,  therefore,  is  157.72  R.P.M. 
40X97X400 


_1577g 
60  X  164 

Speed  of  Empty  Bobbin.  The  barrel  of  the  empty  bobbin  is 
If  inches  in  diameter  and  to  wind  onto  its  surface  the  roving  de- 
live-ed  by  the  front  roll,  it  must  make  129.03  R.P.M. 

157.72  X  1.125  (diameter  of  the  front  roll)  2q  . 


1.375  (diameter  of  empty  bobbin) 

As  we  have  seen,  the  speed  of  the  flyer  is  1254.54  R.P.M.,  and 
the  speed  of  the  empty  bobbin,  necessary  to  wind  the  roving,  is 
129.03  R.P.M. 

Now,  as  the  bobbins  run  at  a  greater  speed  than  the  flyers,  the 


236 


COTTON  SPINNING  195 

actual  speed  of  the  bobbins  must  be  added  to  that  of  the  flyers.     This 
will  give  1383.57  R.P.M. 

Revolutions  of  flyers  1254.5-4 

Revolutions  of  empty  bobbins 

necessary  to  wind  roving  129.03 

Actual  revolution  of  empty  bobbins  1383.57 

"When  the  bobbin  is  full,  it  is  3^  inches  in  diameter  and  to 
wind  the  roving,  it  must  make  50.09  R.P.M. 

157.72  X  1.125  (diameter  of  front  roll)  _  ~ 


3.5  (diameter  of  full  bobbin) 

To  this  sj>eed  should  be  added,  as  before,  the  revolutions  of  the 
flyer,  which  makes  the  actual  speed  of  the  full  bobbin  1305.23  R. 
P.M. 

Revolutions  of  full  bobbin  required  to  wind  roving         50.69- 
Revolutions  of  flyers  1254.54 

Actual  revolutions  of  full  bobbin  1305.23 

The  next  step  is  to  find  the  revolutions  of  the  sleeve  gear,  T, 
when  winding  upon  the  bare  bobbin.  The  gears  in  the  train  are 
M1,  N>,  U  and  T.  The  sleeve  gear  makes  441.13  R.P.M. 

1383.57  X  22  X  42 

-  =  441.13 
46  x  63 

With  the  full  bobbin,  the  revolutions  of  the  sleeve  gear  will 
be  416.16  R.P  M. 

1305.23  X  22  x  42 
--  TO  -  rrrr          —  =  416.16 
.46  x  63 

Now,  we  must  find  the  revolutions  of  the  sun  wheel,  S,but 
before  this  is  done,  it  will  be  necessary  to  refer  to  the  compound, 
or  differential  gearing  shown  in  an  enlarged  view  in  Fig.  165. 
The  purpose  of  this  train  of  gears  is  to  connect  the  positive  driv- 
ing of  the  flyers  with  the  necessarily  varying  speed  of  the  bobbins 
by  a  pair  of  cones  and  a  belt. 

The  sleeve  gear,  T,  runs  upon  a  bushing  on  the  driving  shaft, 
and  turns  in  the  opposite  direction  from  it,  as  indicated  by  the 
arrows.  The  two  mitre  gears,  A1,  of  forty-two  teeth,  are  carried  by 
a  cross,  the  extended  arms  of  which  form  bearings  for  the  gears  to 
tnrn  upon.  The  sun  wheel  and  cross  are  fastened  together  and 


237 


196 


COTTON  SPINNING 


turn  upon  a  bushing  on  the  driving  shaft,  the  same  as  the  sleeve 
gear.  The  mitre  gear,  L2,  is  fast  upon  the  driving  shaft  and  the 
mitre  gear,  S1,  is  fast  upon  the  hub  of  the  sleeve  gear. 

The  gears,  S1  and  L2,  turn  in  .opposite  directions  and,  if  they 
are  run  at  the  same  speed,  the  sun  wheel  will  remain  stationary. 
But  if  S1  is  run  at  a  greater  speed  than  L2,  each  revolution  it 
makes  in  excess  of  L2  will  cause  the  sun  wheel  to  make  one-half 
of  a  revolution  in  the  same  direction  as  S1. 

To  illustrate  this:     If  S1  is  given  four  revolutions  and  L2,  two 


60 


Fig.  165.    Fly  Frame  Differential  Gearing. 

revolutions,  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  sun  wheel  will  turn  one 
revolution  or  one-half  the  difference  between  the  revolutions  of 
the  gears,  S1  and  L2,  but  in  the  direction  of  S1. 

The  speed  of  the  driving  shaft  is  400  R.P.M.  and,  as  we  have 
found,  the  speed  of  the  loose  sleeve  is  441.13  R.P.M.  but  in  the 
opposite  direction.  The  sun  wheel,  then,  must  make  20.56  R.P.M., 
which  is  one-half  the  difference  between  the  speed  of  the  driving 
shaft  and  the  speed  of  the  sleeve  gear. 

With   the  full  bobbin,  the  sleeve  gear  makes  41(3.16  R.P.M., 

o 

which  is  16.16  revolutions  more  than  the  speed  of  the  driving 
shaft.  The  speed  of  the  sun  wheel  will  be  8.0.8  R.P.M.,  a  dif- 
ference of  only  12.78  revolutions  between  the  full  and  the  empty 
bobbin. 

We  must  find  next  the  revolutions  of  the  bottom  cone,  B8,  for 


238 


COTTON  SPINNING  197 

both  the  full  and  the  empty  bobbin.  The  sun  wheel  is  driven  from 
the  bottom  cone  by  the  gears,  C2,  R2,  Q,  P1  and  O.  Starting  with 
20.56  revolutions  we  get  187.04+  R.P.M.  for  the  bottom  cone. 

20.56  x  150  x  68  x  68 


25  x  68  x  22 


=  381.29  + 


With  the  full  bobbin, the  speed  of  the  bottom  cone  will  be  149.84  + 
R.P.M. 

8.08  x  150  x6«X«8_    _  U9  84 


25  x  68  x  22 

Cones.  We  will  find  next  the  sizes  the  cones  must  be  to  give  the 
necessary  range  in  speed.  The  top  or  driving  cone,  C3,  is  driven  from 
the  driving  shaft  by  the  gears,  A3,  H4  and  N2.  A3  is  the  twist  gear,  as 
already  mentioned.  The  speed  of  the  top  cone  is  266.66  +  R.P.M. 

400  *  40  .  266.66+          ' 
60 

The  diameter  of  the  large  end  of  the  top  cone  is  six  inches  and  the 
small  end  three  inches.  The  bottom  cone  is  the  same  in  diameter  at 
the  ends  as  the  top  cone.  With  the  cone  belt  upon  the  large  end  of  the 
top  cone,  the  speed  of  the  bottom  cone  will  be  533.33  -f  R.P.M. 

266.66  X  6 

=  o33.33  + 

o 

With  the  cone  belt  at  the  small  end  of  the  top  cone,  the  speed  of 
the  bottom  cone  will  be  133.33  +  R.P.M. 

266.66  X  3 


6 


=  133.33  + 


With  the  cones  of  the  diameter,  at  the  ends,  as  given  above,  the 
difference  in  the  extreme  speeds  of  the  bottom  cone  is  400  R.P.M. 
and  the  difference  in  the  speeds,  required  to  wind  a  full  bobbin,  is 
231.45  R.P.M. 

The  cones  may  be  made  any  diameter  or  length  consistent  with 
the  allotted  space  in  the  machine,  but  the  difference  between  the  diam- 
eters of  the  small  and  large  ends  must  be  more  than  enough  to  give  the 
extreme  speeds  necessary  to  wind  a  bobbin. 

The  faces  of  the  cones  are  curved,  the  top  cone  concave  and  the 
bottom  cone  convex. 


239 


198 


COTTON  SPINNING 


The  cone  belt  is  upon  the  large  end  of  the  top  cone  when  the 
winding  begins  and,  as  each  successive  layer  of  roving  is  added,  it  is 
shifted  a  little  distance  along  the  cones,  according  to  the  hank  roving, 
being  spun.  With  coarse  numbers,  the  size  of  the  bobbin  increases 
rapidly,  and  it  requires  a  greater  movement  of  the  cone  belt  than  when 
fine  numbers  are  being  spun. 

To  illustrate  this:     A  pair  of  cones  and  four  bobbins,  in  different 


BOBBIN  I' DIA 
SPEED  1200  RPM 


BOBBIN  2'  DIA 
SPEED  600 R. P.M. 


BOBBIN  3"  DIA. 
SPEED  400  RPM. 


BOBBIN  4'  DIA. 
SPEED300R.PM. 


Fig.  166.    Diagram  of  Cones. 


stages  of  building,  are  shown  in  Fig.  166.  The  diameter  of  the  empty 
bobbin  is  one  inch  and  that  of  the  full  bobbin,  four  inches.  The  rov- 
ing, which  we  will  call  one-sixteenth  inch  in  diameter,  will  add  one- 
eighth  of  an  inch  to  the  diameter  of  the  bobbin  for  each  layer  wound. 
We  will  call  the  speed  of  the  empty  bobbin  1200  R.P.M.,  which 
is  three  times  that  of  the  bottom  cone  and,  as  the  bobbin  is  3.14  -f 


240 


COTTON  SPINNING  199 

inches  in  circumference,  there  will  be  wound  3768  inches  of  roving. 

3.14X1200  =  3768. 

When  eight  layers  have  been  added,  the  bobbin  will  be  two  inches 
in  diameter  or  6.  28+  inches  in  circumference  and  to  wind  3768  inches 
of  roving,  its  speed  must  be  600  R.P.M. 


The  belt  will  have  made  eight  shifts  along  the  cone,  from  A  to  B, 
and  the  speed  of  the  bottom  cone  will  be  200  R.P.M. 

When  sixteen  layers  of  roving  have  been  wound  the  diameter  of 
the  bobbin  will  be  three  inches  and  the  circumference  will  be  9.42 
inches.  To  wind  3768  inches,  its  speed  must  be  400  R.P.M. 


The  belt  will  have  moved  from  B  to  C  and  the  speed  of  the  bottom 
cone  will  be  133.33  R.P.M. 

When  the  bobbin  is  full,  twenty-four  layers  have  been  added  to 
make  four  inches  in  diameter  and  its  circumference  will  be  12.56  -f- 
inches.  The  speed  must  be  300  R.P.M. 


=  300. 
12.56 

The  movement  of  the  cone  belt,  from  A  to  B,  is  one-third  the 
length  of  the  cones,  but  the  speed  of  the  bobbin  decreases  one-half, 
from  1200  td  600  R.P.M.  From  B  to  C  the  distance  is  one-third  and 
the  bobbin  decreases  in  speed  from  600  to  400  R.P.M.,  only  one-third. 
The  remaining  distance,  C  —  D,  is  one-third  and  the  speed  decreases 
from  400  to  300  R.P.M.  or  one  quarter  the  number  of  revolutions. 

If  the  roving  were  twice  the  diameter,  it  would  be  necessary  to 
shift  the  cone  belt  just  twice  as  far  along  the  cones  and  there  would  be 
four  layers,  only,  for  each  inch  added  to  the  diameter  of  the  bobbin. 

Reversing  Motion.  The  reversing  motion,  commonly  called 
rail  motion  and  traverse  motion,  is  the  mechanism  employed  to  change 
the  direction  of  the  bobbin  rail  at  each  end  of  the  traverse. 

At  the  beginning  of  a  set,  the  rail  moves  its  greatest  distance  and 
the  roving  is  wound  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the  bobbin,  as  shown  in 


241 


200 


COTTON  SPINNING 


T 


Fig.  167,  by  the  distance  C  — D.  As  each  layer  is  added,  the  traverse 
of  the  rail  is  shortened,  slightly,  until,  at  the  completion. of  the  building 
of  the  bobbin,  it  is  a  little  more  than  one-half  as  much  as  at  the  start. 
This  is  shown  by  the  distance  E  —  F.  The  amount  that  the  traverse  is 
shortened  is  governed  by  the  taper  gear  F3  (shown  in  Fig.  168),  and 
the  speed  that  the  rail  is  traversed,  by  the  lay  gear  E1. 

It  is  desirable  to  get  as  much  roving  upon  a  bobbin  as  possible,  as 
the  machine  will  not  have  to  be  doffed  as  often  but,  at  the  same  time, 

if  the  traverse  is  not  shortened  enough, 
the  ends  of  the  bobbins  will  be  too  square, 
and  the  layers  of  roving  will  be  apt  to 
"slough  off"  and  the  roving  break  when 
unwound. 

The  reversing  motion  is  shown  in 
Figs.  168, 169, 170, 171  and  172. 

On  the  end  of  the  top  cone  shaft,  X1, 
is  a  bevel  gear,  X,  of  nineteen  teeth  and 
upon  the  top  of  the  tumbling  shaft,  Y2,  is 
a  bevel  gear,  Y,  of  forty  teeth,  called  the 
gap  gear  from  the  fact  that  several  teeth 
are  omitted  on  opposite  sides  in  its  diam- 
eter, leaving  spaces  in  which  the  gear  on 
the  cone  shaft  can  revolve  without  im- 
parting motion  to  the  tumbling  shaft. 


In    n  icrl  ' 

Fig.  167.  Fly  Frame  Bobbin. 


Lower,  on  the  tumbling  shaft  is  the  tumbling  dog,  F3,  and  on  the 
extreme  lower  end  is  a  mitre  gear,  H2. 

On  the  horizontal  shaft,  K2,  called  the  reverse  shaft,  is  the  reverse 
crank,  T2,  starting  cam,  W,  and  mitre  gear,  H2.  The  last  is  in  gear 
with  the  gear,  H2,  on  the  tumbling  shaft. 

Builder.  The  builder,  which  should  be  described  in  connection 
with  the  reversing  motion,  consists  of  a  main  piece,  B2,  builder  screw, 
D2,  with  right  and  left  threads,  builder  rack,  I2,  and  top  and  bottom 
jaws,  V,  and,  X2.  A  gear  J3,  which  is  upon  the  lifting  shaft,  A2,  is  in 
contact  with  the  builder  rack.  The  rotations  of  the  lifting  shaft  cause 
the  builder  to  slide  up  and  down  on  the  guide  rod,  W1.  . 

On  the  stem  of  the  builder  screw  is  a  gear,  Z1,  of  twenty  teeth, 
which  is  driven  from  a  similar  gear,  V2,  of  twenty-eight  teeth,  which  is 
upon  the  stud  with  the  taper  gear,  F3.  Motion  is  given  to  the  builder 


243 


COTTON  SPINNING 


201 


243 


202 


COTTON  SPINNING 


screw  from  the  cone  rack,  I3,  by  the  taper  gear.  At  each  end  of  the 
traverse,  the  builder  screw  is  turned  a  trifle  and  the  jaws  are  brought 
more  closely  together.  The  builder  and  parts  directly  connected  are 
shown  on  an  enlarged  scale  in  Fig.  170. 

When  the  bobbin  rail  is  moving  upward,  the  builder  is  moving  in 
the  opposite  direction.  In  the  drawing,  Fig.  1705  we  will  assume  that 
the  builder  is  going  downward.  The  upper  arm  of  the  tumbling  dog, 
F-,  is  pressed  firmly  against  the  top  builder  by  the  starting  spring,  U1. 
When  the  builder  descends  enough  to  clear  the  arm  of  the  tumbling 
dog,  several  changes  take  place  instantly. 

The  starting  presser,  T3,  which  is  actuated  by  the  spring,  U1, 


FLOOR   LINE 


Fig.  169.    Elevation  Showing  Starting  Cam. 

turns  the  tumbling  shaft  slightly  so  that  the  bevel  on  the  top  cone  shaft, 
which  is  revolving  rapidly,  engages  the  toothed  portion  of  the  gap  gear 
and  gives  the  tumbling  shaft  one-half  of  a  revolution. 

The  reverse  shaft,  which  is  driven  from  the  tumbling  shaft,  also 
turns  half  around  and  shifts  the  reverse  gearing,  changing  the  direction 
of  the  bobbin  rail. 

The  tension  gearing,  which  is  driven  from  the  bevel  gear,  E5,  on 
the  reverse  shaft,  is  turned  a  little  and  the  cone  rack  is  moved  and 
shifts  the  belt  along  the  cones. 

The  taper  gear  is  driven  from  the  cone  rack,  and  is  turned  part  of 


244 


COTTON  SPINNING 


203 


a  revolution,  and  the  builder  jaws  are  brought  together  more  closely, 
thus  shortening  the  traverse  of  the  rail. 

All  these  movements  take  place  simultaneously,  the  half  revolu- 
tion of  the  tumbling  shaft  brings  the  opposite  space  in  the  gap  gear 


j 

Q 

(I 

Q 

n 

I 

SIDE    VIEW 


END   VIEW 


Fig.  170.    Builder. 

under  the  top  cone  shaft  bevel,  and  the  lower  arm  of  the  tumbling  dog 
is  brought  up  against  the  lower  builder  jaw,  where  it  is  held  firmly  by 
the  starting  cam  and  presser.  This  leaves  the  various  parts  in  position 
to  operate,  when  the  end  of  the  traverse  is  reached  again. 


245 


204 


COTTON  SPINNING 


The  drawings  of  the  reverse  gearing,  in  Figs.  171  and  172,  show 
the  method  employed  to  change  the  direction  of  the  traverse  of  the  rail. 

On  the  reverse  shaft,  K2,  is  a  crank,  T2,  which  works  in  a  slot  in 
the  end  of  the  reverse  arm,  O3.  The  upper  part  of  this  arm  is  con- 
nected to  a  plate,  W4,  which  is  mounted  upon  the  shaft,  U2,  and  carries 
studs  upon  which  are  the  gears,  A4,  B5  and  C8.  The  gear  X3,  is  upon 


Fig.  171.    Elevation  Showing  Reverse  Crank  arid  Gearing. 

the  lay  shaft  and  D8  is  upon  the  shaft,  U2.  The  connection  of  these 
shafts  and  gears  with  the  lifting  shaft  is  shown  in  the  diagram  of  gear- 
ing  (Fig.  164). 

When  the  rail  is  rising,  the  lifting  shaft  is  driven  through  the  gears, 
D8  and  C6,  and  gear,  X3,  is  turned  in  the  direction,  indicated  by  the 
arrow  in  Fig.  171.  But  when  the  reverse  shaft  makes  the  half  revolu- 
tion, the  crank  shifts  the  reverse  arm,  which  turns  about  the  shaft  U2, 
as  a  center,  to  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  172;  This  throws  C6  out  of 
contact  with  X3,  and  A4  into  contact  with  it,  and  X3  is  driven  by  the 
gears,  D8,  B5  and  A4,  which  results  in  changing  the  direction  of  the  lay 
shaft,  as  may  be  seen  by  comparing  the  two  drawings. 


246 


COTTON  SPINNING 


205 


The  teeth  of  X3,  C6  and  A4  are  made  pointed  so  that  they  may 
engage  readily.  This  overcomes  also,  in  a  measure,  the  danger  of 
breaking,  always  liable  to  occur  with  involute  teeth  if  the  points  come 
into  contact. 

Tension  gearing  for  fly  frames  is  shown  in  Fig.  173  and,  to  make 
this  drawing  as  simple  as  possible,  all  parts,  which  are -not  required 
in  explaining  the  device,  are 
omitted.  Reference  should  also 
be  made  to  Fig.  168. 

The  cone  rack,  I3,  is  driven 
from  the  reverse  shaft,  K2,  by 
the  gears,  E5,  F»,  G5,  H6,  B1,  J4 
and  V1.  The  bevel,  E5,  is  keyed 
to  the  reverse  shaft  but  is  free  to 
slide  in  and  out  of  gear  with  F6. 

When  the  machine  is  start- 
ed, the  shipper  rod,  K4,  is  moved 
in  the  direction  of  the  arrow  and 
the  dog,  L4,  comes  in  contact  with 
the  stop-motion  arm,  I1,  which 
turns  about  the  stud,  M4.  This 
moves  the  stop  motion  latch,  Z3, 
so  that  the  notch,  N5,  catches  on 
the  support,  H1,  and  holds  the 
latch  in  place. 

The  bevel,  E5,  is  formed  with 
an  annular  groove  in  which  is  a  fork,  Z,  pivoted  to  a  stand  at  Z6. 
The  upright  arm  of  the  fork  is  connected  with  the  stop  motion  latch 
by  a  rod,  I.  In  starting  the  frame,  the  movement  of  the  latch  draws 
the  gear,  E5,  into  contact  with  F6  This  completes  the  train  of  gears 
so  that  the  half  revolution  of  the  reverse  shaft,  which  takes  place  at 
each  end  of  the  traverse,  causes  the  cone  belt  to  be  moved  to  a  differ- 
ent place  on  the  cone. 

The  gear,  B1,  is  the  tension  gear,  which  is  changed  to  give  the 
correct  distance  that  the  cone  belt  must  be  moved,  and,  as  this  gear  is  a 
driver,  the  greater  number  of  teeth  it  contains,  the  greater  will  be  the 
distance  that  the  cone  belt  is  moved. 

When  the  attendant  wishes  to  stop  the  machine,  the  shipper  rod 


Fig.  172.    Elevation  Showing  Reverse 
Crank  and  Gearing. 


247 


206 


COTTON  SPINNING 


is  moved  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  indicated  by  the  arrow 
and  the  belt  is  shifted  onto  the  loose  pulley.  This  movement  does  not 
disconnect  the  train  of  gears,  between  the  reverse  shaft  and  cone  rack 
as  the  stop-motion  latch  is  not  moved. 

Full  Bobbin  Stop  Motion.     When  the  bobbin  has  reached  its  full 
diameter,  it  is  stopped  automatically,  and  while  it  is  not  necessary  to 


Fig.  173.    Tension  Gearing. 

wait  for  this  stop  motion  to  operate  before  doffing,  it  acts  as  a  safe- 
guard, for,  if  the  frame  is  allowed  to  run  too  long,  there  is  danger  of 
the  builder  jaws  coming  together,  which  often  results  in  stripping  the 
builder  screw.  There  is  also  some  difficulty  in  doffing,  if  the  bobbin 
is  too  large. 

This  stop  motion,  which  is  shown  in  Figs.  174  and  175,  and  in  the 


248 


COTTON  SPINNING 


207 


drawing  of  the  reverse  motion  and  builder  Fig.  168,  consists  of  three 
pieces,  a  bracket,  D,  lifter,  C,  and  cam,  B. 

The  bracket,  which  is  fastened  to  the  cone  rack,  I3,  by  a  screw,  F, 
carries  the  lifter,  and  the  cam  is  fastened  to  the  lifting  shaft,  A2,  at  a 
point  directly  under  the  end  of  the  stop-motion  latch,  Z',  which  pro- 
jects through  the  rectangular  slot  in  the  support,  H1. 

As  the  lifting  shaft  revolves,  the  cam  is  brought  into  contact  with 
the  lifter,  forcing  it  upward  against  the  underside  of  the  stop-motion 
latch  and  lifting  the  latch  so  that  the  notch,  NJ,  in  its  underside,  is  clear 
of  the  support. 

The  stop-motion  spring,  W3,  is  mounted  upon  the  spring  rod,  M3. 
One  end  of  the  spring  bears  against  the  support  and  the  other  end 


A* 
Fig.  174.    Full  Bobbin  Stop  Motion. 

against  a  collar,  P6,  which  is  fastened  to  the  rod  and  which  may  be  set 
to  increase  or  decrease  the  tension  upon  the  spring.  The  free  end  of 
the  spring  rod  passes  through  a  hole  in  the  support,  and  the  other 
end  is  connected  to  the  stop-motion  latch. 

When  the  notch  in  the  latch  is  clear  of  the  support,  the  spring  rod 
pushes  the  latch  in  the  direction  shown  by  the  arrow  and  this  move- 
ment is  communicated  to  the  shipper  rod  by  the  shipper  arm,  I1. 

When  the  frame  is  to  be  doffed,  the  attendant  raises  the  bottom 
cone,  B3,  by  turning  the  cone  raise  handle,  W8,  a  half  revolution.  This 
leaves  the  cone  belt  free  and  the  cone  rack  is  moved  back,  for  starting 
a  new  set  of  bobbins,  by  turning  the  hand  wheel,  S6.  A  collar  on  the 


249 


208 


COTTON  SPINNING 


rack  comes  against  a  stop,  which  insures  the  belt  starting  in  the  same 
position,  on  the  face  of  the  cone,  for  each  set. 

When  the  stop  motion  operates,  the  movement  of  the  lever,  Z3, 
disconnects  the  tension  gearing  by  sliding  E5  out  of  contact  with  F6. 
This  allows  the  cone  belt  to  be  wound  back  which  cannot  be  done  with 
these  gears  in  contact,  and  as  the  builder  screw  is  driven  from  the  cone 
rack,  the  winding  back  of  the  rack  opens  the  builder  jaws. 

Before  doffing,  the  frame  is  started  with  the  bottom  cone  raised 
and  a  few  inches  of  roving  are  delivered  by  the  front  roll  to  be  used  for 


Fig.  175.    Full  Boobin  Stop  Motion. 

twisting  around  the  empty  bobbins.  The  bobbins  are  driven  from 
the  bottom  cone  through  the  differential  gearing  and,  with  the  cone 
raised,  they  do  not  revolve,  consequently,  the  roving  is  not  wound. 

The  power  for  driving  the  bobbins  and  the  traverse  of  the  rail  is 
transmitted  through  the  cone  belt  and,  for  this  reason,  there  must  be  as 
little  slip  as  possible  to  this  belt.  The  bottom  cone  is  iron  and  it  is 
carried  in  a  frame,  H8,  called  the  cone  swing  frame.  It  is  hung  from 
the  shaft,  Y3.  The  weight  of  the  cone  hangs  upon  the  cone  belt,  D3, 
and  keeps  it  tight. 

The  connection,  from  the  bottom  cone  to  the  gearing,  is  through 
the  cone  gear,  C2,  which  has  twenty-two  teeth.  This  gear  is  some- 
times changed  when  the  diameter  of  the  empty  bobbin  is  so  small  that 
the  difference  in  the  diameters  of  the  cones,  with  the  belt  upon  the  large 
end  of  the  top  cone,  is  not  sufficient  to  wind  the  roving.  '  When  this 
is  the  case,  a  cone  gear  of  more  teeth  is  put  on  the  cone,  which  causes 


250 


as  "- 
o  6 

3  o 


W  * 

s  ? 

w  3 

S  "E1 


CJ    £ 

5  » 

Qu 
(A 


COTTON  SPINNING 


209 


the  bobbins  to  run  at  a  greater  speed.  The  cone  belt  is  then  shifted 
along  the  cones  until  the  position  of  the  belt  is  such  that  the  roving 
"takes  up"  or  winds  correctly. 

The  taper  gear,  F3,  has  from  eleven  to  fourteen  teeth.  This  is  a 
driven  gear  and  the  fewer  teeth  it  has,  the  faster  the  builder  jaws  close. 
The  end  bearing,  X5,  for  the  top  cone  shaft,  is  open  on  the  top  so  that 
the  cone  may  lift,  if  the  tops  of  the  tee  "  come  together,  when  the  gap 
gear  is  thrown  in. 

Back  Stop  Motion.  Sometimes,  a  back  stop  motion  is  applied  to 
the  slubber,  so  the  machine  will  stop  when  an  end  is  out,  but  is  not 
applied  to  any  other  fly  frame.  By  many,  a  back  stop  motion  is  con- 


Fig.  176.    Section  of  Fly  Frame  Showing  Back  Stop  Motion. 

sidered  unnecessary  because  if  there  is  none,  the  attendant  will  watch 
for  a  broken  end  in  the  sliver,  and  will  anticipate  a  can  becoming  empty 
and  piece  the  sliver  onto  a  full  can,  whereas,  with  a  stop  motion,  he 
knows  the  machine  will  stop  when  an  end  is  out  and  he  becomes  in- 
attentive and  allows  the  machine  to  stand  idle  too  long  before  piecing 
up. 

Fig.  176  shows  a  section  of  a  slubber  fly  frame  fitted  with  a  back 
stop  motion.  The  sliver,  A,  is  lifted  out  of  the  cans  by  the  carrier  roll, 
Q1,  and  passes  over  the  stop-motion  spoon,  G2,  and  between  the  three 
pairs  of  draft  rolls  to  the  flyer,  G. 

Directly  beneath  the  tail  of  each  spoon  is  a  finger  L,  mounted  on 
the  rocker  shaft,  T2.  Motion  is  given  to  the  rocker  shaft  from  an 
eccentric,  J,  which  runs  loose  upon  the  top  cone  shaft,  X1,  but  is  driven 
from  the  top  cone  shaft  by  a  train  of  gears.  By  this  means  the  eccen- 
tric is  given  a  much  slower  speed  than  the  cone  shaft. 

The  carrier  roll,  Ql,  is  driven  from  the  end  of  the  back  roll  by  the 


251 


210 


COTTON  SPINNING 


sprocket  chain,  D4,  and  the  sprocket  wheels,  L2  and  N.  The  connec- 
tion between  the  rocker  shaft  and  eccentric  is  through  the  eccentric 
arm,  S,  rocker,  T,  link,  P,  and,  arm,  R. 

.  The  rocker  is  hung  in  the  bottom  of  a  slot,  Y,  in  the  stand,  V,  and 

the  pin,  M,  upon  which  the  rocker 
is  hung,  projects  into  a  hole  in  the 
lever,  X,  and  in  its  normal  position, 
is  kept  from  rising  by  the  spring, 
W.  The  arm,  R,  is  keyed  to  the 
rocker  shaft  which  is  given  a  re- 
ciprocal motion  by  the  revolutions 
of  the  eccentric. 

The  stop-motion  spoons  are 
mounted  in  stands  and  are  so  bal- 
anced that  the  friction  of  the  sliver, 


Fig.  177.    Back  Stop  Motion. 

in  passing  over  them,  holds  the 
tails  clear  of  the  path  of  the  fin- 
ger, L. 

When  the  machine  is  started 
the  spring  rod,  K,  which  moves 
with  the  shipper  rod,  slides 
along  until  a  slot  cut  in  its  upper 
surface  is  beneath  one  end  of 
the  lever,  X.  When  this  happens, 
X,  which  is  pivoted  at  Z,  drops 
into  the  slot  and  holds  the  rod 
stationary  until  X  is  lifted  out  of 
the  slot. 

If  a  sliver  breaks  or  runs  out,  the  spoon  assumes  a  vertical  posi- 
tion, immediately,  and  the  tail  is  brought  into  the  path  of  the  finger 
which  arrests  the  movements  of  the  rocker  shaft.  As  soon  as  this 
occurs,  the  fulcrum  of  the  rocker,  T,  is  transferred  from  the  pin,  M, 


Fig.  178.    Back  Stop  Motion. 


252 


COTTON  SPINNING 


211 


in  the  slot  of  the  stand,  to  the  pin,  W2,  in  the  lower  end  of  the  link,  P. 
The  spring,  W,  yields  and  allows  the  eccentric  to  lift  the  pin,  M,  and 
with  it  the  lever,  X,  withdrawing  X  from  the  slot  in  the  spring  rod, 
which  is  released  and  the  belt  is  shipped. 

Figs.  177  and  178  show  the  positions  of  the  levers  when  the  ma- 
chine is  running  and  when  the  stop  motion  operates.  A  weight,  F, 
mounted  upon  a  rod,  may  be  moved  in  or  out  as  a  counterbalance  for 
the  spoon  G3  to  accommodate  a  heavy  or  light  sliver. 

The  roll  stand,  for  carrying  the  steel  fluted  rolls,  is  shown  in  Fig. 


Fig.  179.    Roll  Stand. 

179.  This  stand  consists  of  four  parts:  the  main  piece,  A,  the  two 
slides  or  bearings,  B  and  C,  for  the  middle  and  back  rolls,  and  the 
bracket,  D,  upon  which  the  top  roll  clearer  is  hinged.  The  bearing 
for  the  front  roll  is  usually  lined  with  bronze  as  the  wear  on  the  front 
roll's  bearing  is  much  greater  than  upon  the  bearings  for  the  other  rolls 
The  slides  are  screwed  to  the  main  part  of  the  stand  and  are  ar- 


253 


212 


COTTON  SPINNING 


ranged  so  that  they  may  be  adjusted  to  suit  the  various  lengths  of 
staple.  The  slide  for  the  back  roll  is  slotted  for  a  bearing  for  the 
roving  traverse  rod,  L,  and  for  the  rod,  O,  upon  which  the  wires,  E, 
supporting  the  cap  bar  nebs  F,  G,  and  H,  are  fastened.  The  front 
neb,  F,  is  made  with  projections  above  and  below.  The  upper  one 
serves  as  a  stop  for  the  top  clearer  and  the  lower  one  as  a  support  for 
holding  the  nebs  on  center  with  the  axis  of  the  top  rolls.  A  detached 
view  of  the  cap  bar  is  shown  in  Fig.  180. 

The  wires,  E,  are  flattened,  slightly,  upon  the  upper  surface, 
where  the  screws  bear,  to  hold  the  nebs  in  place,  which  insures  their 
standing  perfectly  true  with  the  top  rolls. 

The  spaces  in  the  nebs  into  which  the  gudgeons  of  the  top  rolls 


a    Ha 


G  H 

PLAN 


END  VIEW 


G  H 

SIDE  VIEW 

Fig.  180.    Cap  Bar. 


project,  are  made  wide  enough  to  allow  perfect  freedom  to  the  top  rolls 
but  with  not  enough  play  to  allow  them  to  get  out  of  line  with  the  steel 
rolls. 

The  top  rolls,  for  the  front  line,  are  usually  shell  rolls  and  for  the 
middle  and  back  lines,  solid  rolls.  The  top  roll  clearer  is  shown  in 
Fig.  179  and  is  similar  to  the  common  clearer  used  upon  the  drawing 
frame.  A  flat  board,  K,  is  faced  on  the  underside  with  clearer  cloth, 
supported  by  wires.  The  board,  which  is  carried  in  a  frame,  R,  is 
hinged  upon  the  rod,  S,  and  is  hung  so  that  it  adjusts  itself  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  top  rolls.  The  under  clearer,  N,  which  is  seldom  used  upon 
anything  but  the  slubber  fly  frame,  is  held  in  place  by  straps  which 
have  a  weight,  P,  suspended  from  the  end. 

Sometimes,  self-weighted  top  rolls  are  used  on  fly  frames  intended 
for  working  long  stock  and  for  fine  counts  of  yarn.  A  roll  stand,  with 


254 


COTTON  SPINNING 


213 


top  rolls  of  this  kind,  is  shown  in  Fig.  181.  The  front  and  back  steel 
rolls  are  one  and  one-quarter  inches  in  diameter  and  the  middle  roll  is 
one  and  one-eighth  inches  in  diameter.  The  front  top  roll  is  the  usual 
shell  roll,  weighed  in  the  ordinary  way  by  a  hook,  A,  stirrup,  B,  and 
weight,  C. 

The  middle  top  roll  usually  is  made  of  thin,  brass  tubing,  one  and 


Fig.  181.    Roll  Stand  for  Self- Weighted  Top  Rolls. 

one-eighth  inches  in  diameter,  filled  with  lead  to  give  it  additional 
weight,  and  sometimes  of  cast  iron.  The  gudgeons,  for  this  roll,  are 
of  iron  wire  put  through  the  lead. 


255 


214 


COTTON  SPINNING 


The  back  top  roll  is  made  of  cast  iron,  two  inches  to  two  and  one- 
half  inches  in  diameter.  Both  of  the  top  rolls  are  sometimes  covered 
with  leather. 

The  top  clearers  for  self-weighted  rolls  are  usually  rotary,  either 
conical  or  straight.  They  are  shown  in  Fig.  182. 

The  conical  clearer  roll  is  made  of  wood,  covered  with  clearer 


Fig.  182.    Top  Clearer  Rolls. 

cloth.  The  large  end  bears  upon  all  of  the  top  rolls  and  the  small  end 
bears  upon  the  middle  and  front  rolls  only.  As  the  front  roll  runs  at  a 
much  greater  speed  than  the  middle  and  back  rolls,  the  clearer  must 
partake  of  an  intermediate  speed  to  collect  the  loose  fibers.  When 
the  frame  is  in  operation,  the  conical  shape  of  the  clearer  causes  it  to 
travel  along  the  rolls  slowly.  Upon  reaching  the  end  of  the  frame,  it  is 


ROLL    24"  LONG 

DOUBLE     BOSS     ROLL    6"  SPACE 


I— ROU.  to"    LONG ; 

SNGLE      BOSS     ROUL    6"  SPACE 

Fig.  183.    Single  and  Double  Boss  Rolls. 

reversed  by  the  attendant  and  it  works  back  to  the  other  end.  A 
straight  roll  is  sometimes  used  with  the  conical  roll,  placed  ahead  and 
pushed  along  by  it. 

When  straight  clearer  rolls  are  used,  they  are  made  of  a  diameter 
to  bear  upon  all  of  the  top  rolls.  They  are  made  in  short  lengths,  two 
for  each  roll  stand. 

Fluted  Rolls.  The  fluted  rolls,  for  slubbers  and  intermediate  fly 
frames,  are  made  "single  boss."  For  fly  frames  of  five  and  a  quarter 
and  six  inch  space,  they  are  made  either  "single  boss"  or  "double 


COTTON  SPINNING 


215 


boss",  but  for  all  fly  frames  under  five  and  a  quarter  inch  space  they 
are  made  "double  boss"  only. 

The  terms  "single  boss"  and  "double  boss"  mean  the  number  of 
ends  of  roving  to  each  fluted  boss  of  the  roll.  On  a  slubber,  nine  and 
one-half  inch  space,  the  rolls  are  nineteen  inches  long,  which  is  the 
distance  between  the  centers  of  the  roll  stands.  There  are  four  bosses 


( 


WEIGHT 


WEIGHT 


Fig.  l&J.    Weighting  for  Top  Rolls. 

and  four  spindles  in  this  length  and  one  end  of  roving  for  each  boss 
or  single  boss. 

On  a  fly  frame,  four  and  one-half  inch  space,  the  length  of  the 
roll  is  eighteen  inches.  There  are  eight  spindles  in  this  distance, 
which  is  too  short  to  allow  eight  separate  bosses  and  still  have  room 
for  the  weight  stirrups  and  saddles,  which  must  hang  between  every 
two  bosses.  To  provide  for  this,  the  rolls  are  made  with  bosses  long 
enough  to  permit  of  two  ends  of  roving,  side  by  side,  or  "double  boss." 

Fig.  183  shows  two  steel  fluted  rolls  for  a  six  inch  space  fly  frame 


257 


216  COTTON  SPINNING 

and  the  leather  covered  top  rolls  for  each  roll.  The  upper  fluted  roll 
is  double  boss  and  is  twenty-four  inches  long  and  the  lower  one  is 
single  boss  and  is  eighteen  inches  long.  There  are  four  bosses  and 
eight  ends  for  the  double  boss  and  six  bosses  and  six  ends  for  the  single 
boss.  The  roving  is  represented  by  the  lines,  R,  and  the  weight  is 
hung  between  the  bosses  at  W.  There  is  one  weight  for  four  ends  on 
the  double  boss  and  one  weight  for  two  ends  on  the  single  boss.  The 
double  boss  rolls  are  seldom,  if  ever,  used  on  any  space  more  than  six 
inches,  as  the  length  of  the  boss  would  be  so  great  that  the  weights 
would  have  a  tendency  to  spring  the  steel  rolls  enough  to  cause  the  top 
rolls  to  bear  unevenly. 

The  usual  method  of  weighting  the  top  draft  roll  is  shown  in 
Figure  184.  For  the  front  roll  a  separate  weight  is  used  which  is  hung 
from  a  stirrup,  3,  and  hook,  T.  For  the  middle  and  back  rolls,  the 
weight  is  divided.  The  stirrup  is  hung  from  a  saddle,  F,  by  a  hook 
T,  and  the  saddle  bears  upon  the  middle  and  back  top  rolls. 

For  the  slubbers,  eight  and  one-half  inch  space  and  over,  weights 
are  usually  eighteen  pounds.  For  intermediate  frames,  they  are 
seventeen  pounds  and  for  fine  frames,  seventeen  pounds.  For  single 
boss  rolls,  six  inch  space,  they  are  twelve  pounds.  For  fine  frames,  five 
and  one-quarter  inch  space  or  under,  and  all  jack  frames,  the  weights 
are  fifteen  pounds.  Sometimes  a  separate  weight  is  used  for  each  roll. 
The  weights  may  then  be: 


Front  Roll 

Middle  Roll 

Back  Roll 

Slubber 

18 

14 

10 

Intermediate 

14 

10 

8 

Fine  and  Jack     - 

10 

8 

6 

Double  Boss  Fine  Frame 

18 

14 

12 

Fly  frames  are  built  both  right  and  left  hand.  A  frame  is  said  to 
be  right  hand,  when,  in  standing  on  the  front  or  spindle  side  and  facing 
the  machine,  the  pulley  is  on  the  right  hand  end. 

By  the  gauge  or  space  of  a  fly  frame  is  meant  the  distance  between 
the  centers  of  two  adjoining  spindles  in  the  same  row.  The  slubbers 
are  build  eight  and  one-half  inch,  nine  inch,  nine  and  one-half  inch, 
and  ten  inch  space.  Intermediates  are  built  seven  inch,  and  seven 
and  one-half  inch  space.  Fine  frames  are  built  five  and  one-quarter 


258 


COTTON  SPINNING 


217 


inch  and  six  inch  space;  and  jack  frames,  three  and  three-quarters 
inch,  four  and  one-quarter  inch,  and  four  and  one-half  inch  space. 


Frame 

Space 

Size  of 
Bobbin 

Speed  of 
Flyer 

No.  of 
Spindle 
per  Roll 

Weight  of 
Cotton  on 
Full 
Bobbin 

Length  of 
Roll 

Traverse 
of  Frame 

Slubber 

10" 

6"  x  12" 

625 

4 

44  oz. 

20" 

12" 

Slubber 

9%" 

5%'xll" 

700 

4 

32  oz. 

19" 

11" 

Slubber 

9" 

5"  x  10" 

750. 

4 

24  oz. 

18" 

10" 

Slubber 

8%" 

4%"  x  9" 

800 

A 

18  ox. 

17" 

9" 

Intermediate 

7%" 

6"  x  10" 

82o 

6 

24  oz. 

22%" 

10" 

Intermediate 

7" 

4i.i"  x  9" 

950 

6 

18  oz. 

21" 

9" 

Fine 

6" 

4"  x  8" 

1100 

8 

14  oz. 

24" 

8" 

Fine 

*%" 

3%"  x  8" 

1250 

8 

12  oz. 

21" 

8" 

Fine 

*%" 

3%"  x  7" 

1250 

8 

10  oz. 

21" 

7" 

Jack 

±%" 

3"  x  6" 

1400 

8 

7  oz. 

18" 

6" 

Jack 

4M" 

2%"  x  5" 

1600 

8 

4  oz. 

17" 

5" 

Jack 

3%" 

21"x4V' 

1800 

12 

3oz. 

22%" 

4%" 

The  fluted  rolls  for  fly  frames  are  made  of  the  diameters  shown 
in  Fig.  185.  Those  most  commonly  used  for  medium  staple  cotton 
are  shown  in  the  upper  view  in  the  drawing.  For  Egyptian  and  Sea 
Island  cotton,  the  rolls  are  usually  larger  and  of  the  diameters  shown 
in  the  middle  drawing.  For  self-weighted  top  rolls,  the  usual  diame- 
ters are  shown  in  the  lower  drawing.  The  diameter  of  the  back  top 
roll  is  made  from  two  to  two  and  one-half  inches  to  suit  the  weights  of 
the  sliver.  A  heavy  sliver  and  a  long  draft  require  the  largest  sized 
roll. 

Fig.  186  shows  the  sizes  and  dimensions  of  fly  frame  bobbins. 
The  dimensions  vary  but  slightly  for  the  different  makes  of  fly  frames. 
The  bottom  of  the  bobbin  is  made  with  both  four  and  six  notches  for 
the  dog  or  bobbin  driver.  The  bobbins  shown  in  the  diagram  have 
six  notches.  To  prevent  splitting,  the  bottoms  are  either  brass  bound 
or  wired. 

It  is  very  necessary  that  the  diameter  of  the  holes  in  the  bobbins 
shall  be  exact,  and  to  :avoid  any  mistakes,  most  mills  have  a  standard 
plug  for  each  sized  bobbin  used,  made  similarly  to  the  one  shown  in  the 
upper  right  hand  corner  of  the  drawing.  This  plug  is  made  the  small 
end  for  the  spindle  hole,  the  large  end  for  the  bolster  gear  and  the 


259 


218 


COTTON  SPINNING 


intermediate  for  the  bolster  hole.  The  diameter  of  the  spindle  hole 
is  about  one  sixty-fourth  of  an  inch  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the 
spindle;  the  hole  in  the  bottom  of  the  bobbin  is  one  thirty-second  of 
an  inch  larger  in  diameter  than  the  bobbin  gear,  and  the  bolster  hole 
is  about  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  larger  in  diameter  than  the  bolster. 


SLUBBER    AND 

INTERMEDIATE 


FINE:  AND  JACK 


MEDIUM     STAPLE 


SLUBBER  AND 

INTERMEDIATE 


FINE  AND    JACK 


LONG    STAPLE 


i*-4—  if — •> 

INTERMEDIATES  FINE  AND    JACK 

SELF  WEIGHTED    ROLLS. 
Fig.  185.    S.zes  of  Steel  Fluted  Rolls. 

To  find  the  length  of  a  fly  frame:    Multiply  one  half  the  number 
of  spindles  by  the  space  in  inches  and  add  38  inches. 

The  power  required  to  drive  fly  frame  spindles  is  as  follows: 
Slubbers  35  to  45  spindles  per  H.  P. 

Intermediates  65  to  75         "         "       <' 

Fine  and  Jack  frames  95  to  105        "         '' 

Calculations.    The  general  diagram  of  fly  frame  gearing,  given 


260 


COTTON  SPINNING  219 

in  Fig.  164,  shows  all  of  the  gears  necessary  in  calculations,  but,  to 
avoid  confusion,  the  draft  gearing  is  shown  separately  in  Fig.  187  and 
the  twist  gearing  in  Fig.  188. 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  draft  of  the  fly  frame:  Multiply  together 
the  driven  gears  and  the  diameter  of  the  front  roll  and  divide  the  prod- 
uct by  the  product  of  the  driving  gears  multiplied  together  with  the 
diameter  of  the  back  roll.  (The  driven  gears  are  E3  and  O1  and  the 
driving  gears  are  M2  and  D1.)  The  front  roll  is  1^  inches  in  diame- 
ter and  the  back  roll  is  1  inch  in  diameter. 

T-,  100X56X9       Kr 

Example:  -   =  o.OO 

37X34X8 

Rule  2.  To  find  the  draft  factor:  Proceed  as  in  the  previous 
rule,  but  omit  the  draft  change  gear  D1. 

T-,  100X56X9 

Example:  -  =  1/0.2/ 

37X8 

Rule  3.  To  find  the  draft:  Divide  the  factor  by  the  number  of 
teeth  in  the  draft  gear. 

T-,  170.27       „  nn 

Example:  =  o.OO 

34 

Rule  4.     To  find  the  draft  gear:     Divide  the  factor  by  the  draft. 

170.27 
Example: 

5 

The  draft  between  the  back  roll  and  the  middle  roll  is  very  slight 
and  is  only  the  difference  of  one  tooth  in  the  gears,  as  will  be  seen  by 
referring  to  the  diagram.  On  the  back  roll  is  a  gear  of  21  teeth  and  on 
the  middle  roll  is  a  gear  of  20  teeth. 

Sometimes  the  crown  gear  is  changed,  as  well  as  the  draft  gear, 
when  a  very  fine  adjustment  in  the  draft  is  needed,  and  a  difference  of 
one  tooth  in  the  draft  gears  makes  too  great  a  change  in  the  draft. 

The  definition  of  the  word  twist,  as  used  in  reference  to  yarn  and 
roving,  is  the  number  of  turns  that  the  spindles  or  flyers  make  to  each 
inch  of  roving  that  is  delivered  by  the  front  roll.  If  the  spindles  make 
100  revolutions  and  the  front  roll  delivers  40  inches  of  roving,  the 
twist  will  be  2.5  per  inch.  100  -h  40  =  2.5. 

Rule  5.  To  find  the  twist  per  inch :  Multiply  together  the  driven 
gears  and  divide  the  product  by  the  product  of  the  driving  gears  multi- 


261 


220 


COTTON  SPINNING 


3HOH 
«V30  NIS909 


262 


COTTON  SPINNING  221 

plied  together  with  the  circumference  of  the  front  roll.  Assuming  the 
twist  gear  to  be  a  driving  gear,  the  driven  gears  are  L3,  N2,  G1,  and  T1. 
The  driving  gears  are  K3,  A3,  H3,  and  L1,  and  the  circumference  of  the 
1J  inch  front  roll  is  3.  5343  inches. 

r  164X60X60X46 

Example:  =  2.25 

97X40X40X22X3.5343 

Rule  6.  To  find  the  twist  factor:  Proceed  as  in  the  previous 
rule  but  omit  the  twist  gear. 

Example:  _164X_60X  60X46 

97X40X22X3.5343 

Rule  7.  To  find  the  twist :  Divide  the  twist  factor  by  the  num- 
ber of  teeth  in  the  twist  gear. 

,,  90.02          0_ 

Example:  -  =  2.2o 

40 

Rule  8.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  twist  gear:  Divide 
the  factor  by  the  twist  per  inch. 

QO  0? 

T1  1  t/V/.V/W  A  f\ 

Example:  _^  -  40 

The  standard  twist  for  roving  is  the  square  root  of  the  hank  multi- 
plied by  1.2,  and  is  expressed  thus  I7 Hank  X  1.2 

This  multiplier  is  the  one  that  is  used  by  most  machinery  builders 
in  the  construction  of  twist  tables  and  is  correct  for  cotton  of  ordinarv 
length  staple,  but  for  Sea  Island,  Egyptian  and  other  long  staple 
cottons,  the  multiplier  may  be  as  low  as  .8,  and  for  very  short  staple  as 
high  as  1 .5. 

All  that  is  required  is  sufficient  twist  to  hold  the  roving  together, 
as  too  much  twist  destroys  the  effectiveness  of  the  drawing  operation 
in  the  successive  processes. 

When  there  is  very  little  twist  put  into  the  roving,  the  production 
of  the  machine  is  increased  as  the  speed  of  the  spindles  is  constant  and 
the  front  roll  must  run  faster  to  give  less  twist. 

There  are  several  things  to  be  considered  in  figuring  the  produc- 
tion of  the  fly  frame;  revolutions  of  spindle,  hank  roving,  twist  per 
inch,  weight  of  cotton  upon  full  bobbin  and  time  lost  piecing-up  and 
doffing.  With  these  factors  known,  we  can  find  the  approximate 
production. 

First,  it  is  necessary,  to  find  the  time  required  to  spin  a  set  of 


263 


000 


COTTON  SPINNING 


bobbins,  then  the  number  of  sets  per  day,  and  finally  the  production 
per  spindle  in  a  day  of  ten  hours. 

Rule  9.  To  find  the  time  required  in  spinning  a  set  of  bobbins 
on  3^  hank  roving:  Multiply  together  the  number  of  yards  in  one 
hand  (840),  the  number  of  inches  per  yard  (36),  the  twist  per  inch 
(2.25),  the  number  of  roving  (3.5),  and  the  number  of  ounces  of  cotton 
upon  a  full  bobbin  (10),  and  divide  this  product  by  the  number  of 
revolutions  of  the  spindles  per  minute  (1250)  multiplied  by  the  number 
of  ounces  in  one  pound  (16). 

840X36X2.25X3.5X10 


Example: 


=  119.07 


1250X16 

Rule  10.     To  find  the  number  of  sets  of  bobbins  spun  in  ten 
hours:     Multiply  the  minutes  per  hour  (60)  by  the  number  of  hours 


DRAFT  GEAR  16  TO  50  TEETH. 


SACK    ROLL   1"D1A. 
20  MIDDLE   ROLL  l"DIA 


Fig.  187.    Diagram  of  Draft  Gearing. 

run  per  day  (10),  less  10%,  and  divide  this  product  by  the  number  of 
minutes  occupied  in  spinning  one  set  plus  the  number  of  minutes 
required  to  doff  a  set  (15). 

60X9 


Example: 


=  4.02 


119.07+15 

Rule  11.  To  find  the  production  in  pounds  of  a  day  of  ten  hours : 
Multiply  together  the  number  of  sets  spun  in  ten  hours  (4.02),  by  the 
number  of  grains  of  cotton  on  a  full  bobbin  (10  oz  ==  4375  Grains) 


2«4 


COTTON  SPINNING 


223 


and  divide  the  product  by  the  number  of  grains  in  one  pound  (7000) 

4.02X4375 


Example : 


7000 


=  2.51 


The  time  required  to  doff  a  machine  will  vary  from  ten  to  twenty 
minutes  according  to  the  number  of  spindles  in  the  frame  and  the  skill 


I? 


FRONT   ROLL    1       DIA. 


mr TWIST  GEAR 
\  16T054-TTH 


SPINDLE    SHAFT 

Fig.  188.    Diagram  of  Twist  Gearing. 

of  the  attendant.  The  time,  lost  in  piecing  broken  ends  and  cleaning> 
varies  from  3  per  cent  on  very  fine  work  to  as  high  as  25  per  cent  on 
slubber  roving. 

The  number  of  teeth  in  the  tension  and  lay  gears  cannot  be  figured 
with  absolute  certainty  as  the  character  of  the  stock,  the  amount  of 
twist  in  the  roving  and  atmospheric  conditions  affect  the  winding  of 
the  roving. 


a«5 


224  COTTON  SPINNING 

When  the  roving  is  hard  twisted,  it  is  smaller  in  diameter  than 
when  soft  twisted  and  does  not  fill  the  bobbin  as  rapidly.  This  con- 
dition demands  a  tension  gear  with  fewer  teeth  so  the  belt  will  not  be 
shifted  so  far  along  the  cones  or  the  speed  of  the  spindle  be  reduced 
to  such  an  extent  as  to  wind  slack  roving.  The  tension  gear  is  a  driver 
and  the  greater  number  of  teeth  it  contains  the  more  the  speed  of  the 
bobbin  is  reduced  at  each  shift  of  the  cone  belt. 

The  lay  gear  is  also  a  driver,  and,  with  hard  twisted  roving,  the 
bobbin  should  have  more  coils  per  inch  to  be  wound  correctly.  To 
accomplish  this,  the  rail  must  be  run  slower,  which  requires  a  smaller 
number  of  teeth  in  the  lay  gear. 

If  the  rail  is  not  fast  enough,  the  coils  of  roving  will  be  crowded 
and  overlap  each  other  and  a  very  uneven  bobbin  will  be  the  result. 
If  the  roving  winds  properly  at  the  beginning  of  a  set,  but  gets  too  soft 
towards  the  finish,  it  is  evident  that  a  smaller  tension  gear  is  needed  so 
that  the  bobbin  will  run  faster.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  bobbin 
becomes  too  hard,  and  the  roving  pulls  apart  towards  the  end  of  a  set, 
it  indicates  that  a  larger  tension  gear  is  needed  to  reduce  the  speed  of 
the  bobbin. 

On  a  particularly  damp  day,  the  cotton  fibers  are  heavy,  and  lie 
closely  together,  which  makes  the  roving  smaller  in  diameter  and  in 
consequence  the  bobbins  do  not  fill  so  rapidly.  This  causes  the  roving 
to  drag  and  not  take-up,  which  necessitates  a  tension  gear  of  one,  and 
sometimes  two  teeth  less,  so  that  the  speed  of  the  bobbin  shall  not 
decrease  so  rapidly. 

In  the  practical  operation  of  a  mill,  when  starting  up  a  fly  frame 
to  make  a  certain  number  of  roving,  the  table  of  change  gears  is  usually 
consulted  for  the  correct  tension  and  lay  gears,  and  while  two  frames 
may  not  start  up  with  gears  exactly  alike,  a  change  of  one  or  two  teeth 
is  most  always  sufficient  to  produce  satisfactory  results. 

If  no  table  of  gearing  is  available,  the  following  rules  will  be 
found  useful. 

Rule  12.  To  find  the  tension  gear  to  make  6  hank  roving: 
(Tension  gear  on  frame  41  teeth.  Roving  being  spun,  3.5  hank.) 
Find  the  square  root  of  the  present  tension  gear,  squared,  multiplied 
by  the  present  hank,  and  divide  this  sum  by  the  required  hank. 

Example:  1/4PX3.5  =  32  M 


286 


H 

Z 

1 
H 

cc 

Du 

g| 
SI 

Q      5 
W      P^H 


w   ^ 

S    S 


COTTON  SPINNING  225 

Rule  13.  To  find  the  lay  gear  to  make  6  hank  roving:  (Lay 
gear  on  frame,  35  teeth.  Hank  roving  being  spun  3.5.)  Find  the 
square  root  of  the  present  lay  gear,  squared,  multiplied  by  the  present 
hank,  and  divide  this  sum  by  the  required  hank. 


Example:  i/352X3.5  =  2y  31 

Rule  14.  To  find  the  twist  gear  for  6  hank  roving:  (Twist  gear 
for  3.5  hank,  40  teeth.)  Find  the  square  root  of  the  present  twist  gear 
squared,  multiplied  by  present  hank,  and  divide  this  sum  by  the 
required  hank. 


Example:  l    =  30.54 

Rule  15.  To  find  draft  gear:  (Draft  gear,  34  teeth.)  Multiply 
the  present  hank  by  the  present  draft  gear  and  divide  this  product  by 
the  required  hank 

Example:  3.5X34  =  28J6 


267 


Eeo 
•s- 

<e  13 


o   ® 

SS     Pi 

I! 

55      ra 

w    g 

ll 


COTTON  SPINNING 

PART  V 


SPINNING 

In  the  final  process  of  forming  the  cotton  into  yarn,  there  are 
two  wholly  different  types  of  machines  used,  the  ring  frame  and  the 
mule. 

The  ring  frame  is  used  more  extensively  than  the  mule,  owing  to 
its  simplicity  and  the  cost  of  operating  being  less.  While  the  ring 
frame  is  not  adapted  for  spinning  as  fine  numbers  or  as  soft  twisted 
yarns  as  the  mule,  wherever  ring-spun  yarn  can  be  used  with  satis- 
factory results,  the  ring  frame  is  generally  used. 

RING  SPINNING 

The  placing  of  ring  frames  requires  careful  consideration. 
There  are  two  common  arrangements.  In  a  mill  of  a  width  of  one 
hundred  feet  or  less,  the  frames  should  be  placed  as  shown  in  Fig.  189. 
This  drawing  shows  a  room  seventy-five  feet  wide  with  two  lines  of 
columns,  making  three  spans,  each  about  twenty-five  feet  wide. 
Each  span  will  accommodate  four  lines  of  ring  frames  with  the  proper 
alleys,  which  should  be  from  twenty-eight  inches  to  thirty-six  inches 
wide. 

There  is  one  main  line  of  shafting  from  which  are  driven  the 
countershafts.  The  frames  are  offset  so  that  two  can  be  driven  from 
a  pulley  which  has  a  center  flange.  Each  countershaft  carries  two 
pulleys  for  driving  four  frames.  The  head  or  pulley  ends  of  the 
frames  are  about  twelve  inches  apart,  which  is  as  close  as  they  can  be 
placed  to  give  ample  room  for  removing  the  driving  pulleys  when 
necessary. 

When  the  room  is  intended  for  spinning  only,  the  main  line  is 
placed  so  that  it  will  come  between  two  rows  of  ring  frames,  to  be 
best  adapted  for  driving. 

When  a  mill  is  of  sufficient  width,  the  ring  frames  may  be  placed 
crosswise  of  the  room  as  in  Fig.  190.  This  drawing  shows  a  room 


269 


228 


about  one  hundred  twenty-five  feet  wide  with  four  rows  of  columns. 
There  are  four  ring  frames  in  each  line,  across  the  room,  and  a  wide 
alley  in  the  center,  extending  the  length  of  the  room,  and  also  alleys 
along  the  side  walls.  The  machines  pre  arranged  in  pairs  with  the 
pulley  ends  toward  each  other  for  convenience  in  driving. 


1 

1 

•ffl  D 

M 


4  B 


J 


1 1- 


There  are  but  two  lines  of  shafting,  which  extend  lengthwise 
of  the  room  at  right  angles  to  the  machines,  and  upon  these  main 
lines  are  the  pulleys,  each  pair  of  frames  being  driven  from  one  pulley 
by  the  same  belt. 

A  plan  and  an  elevation  of  a  drive  of  this  description  are  shown 


270 


COTTON  SPINNING 


229 


271 


230 


COTTON  SPINNING 


in  Fig.  191.  The  belt,  A,  drives  downward  from  the  pulley,  B,  on 
the  line,  C,  and  around  the  pulley,  D,  on  the  frame  at  the  left  hand, 
then  upward  over  the  carrier  pulleys,  E  and  F,  downward  around  the 


ELEVATION    OF  DRIVE 

Fig.  191.    Pulleys  for  Drawing  Frames  Placed  at  Right  Angles  to  Main  Line. 

pulley,  G,  on  the  frame  at  the  right  hand,  then  up  and  around  the 
pulley,  B. 

This  method  of  driving  two  frames  from  one  pulley  makes  a 
very  neat  and  simple  drive  and  saves  shafting  and  belting  compared 


272 


COTTON  SPINNING 


Fig.  192.    Sectional  Elevation  of  Ring  Frame. 


273 


232 


COTTON  SPINNING 


to  the  arrangement  shown  in  Fig.  189,  but  the  room  should  be  wide 
enough  to  place  four  frames  across  the  room  so  that  an  operative 
can  tend  at  least  eight  sides. 

A  sectional  elevation  of  a  ring  frame  is  shown  in  Fig.  192.  The 
various  parts  of  the  machine  may  be  referred  to  briefly  as  the  creel, 
C,  for  supporting  the  bobbins  of  roving,  the  roll  stands,  F2,  carrying 
the  steel  fluted  roll,  the  top  rolls,  cap  bars,  trumpet  rod,  clearers, 
weights,  saddles,  etc.,  thread  board,  G1,  with  the  thread  guide  or 
"pig  tail",  J2,  roller  beam,  H1,  for  supporting  the  roll  stands  and 


BETWEEN   ROLL  STANDS  2j 
8  -SPINDLES  PER  ROLL 


Fig.  193.    Plan  of  Creel  for  Double  Roving. 

thread  board,  the  ladder  or  spindle  rail,  I,  spindle,  N,  ring  rail,  E2, 
rings,  L1,  drum,  F1,  supports,  I1,  creel  rod,  O2,  cross  shafts,  M1, 
lifting  rods,  C2,  separators,  N4,  adjustable  feet,  J2,  and  drum  box,  N2. 
The  roving,  A,  from  the  top  row  of  bobbins,  is  drawn  over  the 
rod,  A2,  and  down  to  the  trumpet,  B,  while  the  ends  from  the  lower 
bobbins  draw  directly  to  the  trumpet.  Both  ends  pass  through  the 
same  trumpet,  as  one  end,  then  between  the  draft  rolls,  D,  E  and  F, 
and  down  through  the  thread  guide,  J2,  to  the  ring  traveler,  H,  and 
are  wound  finally  upon  the  bobbin,  O. 


274 


COTTON  SPINNING 


233 


The  drum,  F1,  extends  the  whole  length  of  the  frame,  and  upon 
one  end  of  it  are  the  driving  pulleys.  The  spindles  are  driven  from 
the  drum  by  the  bands,  B2,  one  for  each  spindle. 

The  ring  rails  are  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  lifting  rod,  by 
which  they  are  traversed  up  and  down  for  winding  the  yarn  evenly 
upon  the  bobbin. 

Creels.  The  Creels  are  built  one  or  two  stories  high  and  for 
single  or  double  roving.  If  for  single  roving,  there  is  only  one  bobbin 


Fig.  194.    Elevation  Showing  Roll  Stand  and  Weighting. 

for  each  spindle  and  the  creel  is  one  story,  usually.  For  double 
roving,  there  are  two  bobbins  or  ends  for  each  spindle  and  the  creel 
is  two  storied. 

A  plan  of  a  creel  for  a  two  and  three-quarter  inch  spaced  ring 
frame,  for  double  roving  with  bobbins  three  and  one-half  inches 


275 


COTTON  SPINNING 


in  diameter,  is  shown  in  Fig.  193  and  an  elevation  is  shown  in  Fig.  192. 
The  creel  consists  of  bottom,  middle  and  top  boards.  The  top  board 
serves  for  a  shelf  upon  which  full  bobbins  can  be  placed.  The 
skewers,  A1,  for  holding  the  bobbins,  A,  rest  in  porcelain  steps  which 


WEIGHT 
i"  POUNDS 


Fig.  195.  •  Diagram  of  Weighting.  ' 

are  flush  with  the  boards,  forming  the  creel.     The  porcelain  offers 
little  resistance  to  the  rotation  of  the  bobbins. 

The  bobbins  in  the  upper  tier  are  shown  by  full  lines  and  those 
in  the  bottom  tier  by  dotted  lines.  They  are  so  spaced  that  the  back 
row  can  be  removed  without  disturbing  the  front  ones,  a  point  which 


276 


COTTON  SPINNING  235 

will  be  appreciated  in  a  frame  of  this  space  and  sized  creel  bobbins. 

Roll  Stands  and  Weighting.  An  elevation  of  a  common  roll  is 
shown  in  Fig.  194.  The  stand  consists  of  a  main  piece,  F2,  which 
carries  the  front  steel  fluted  roll,  F,  and  a  slide,  D1,  in  which  are  the 
bearings  for  the  middle  roll,  E,  and  the  back  roll,  D.  The  slide  is 
adjustable  so  that  the  middle  roll  may  be  set  to  the  front  roll  with 
respect  to  the  length  of  the  cotton  staple. 

The  roving  rod,  R,  carries  the  brass  trumpets,  B,  through  which 
the  roving  is  drawn,  and  rests  in  a  slot  just  behind  the  back  rolls. 
It  is  traversed  a  distance,  a  little  short  of  the  length  of  the  fluted 
portion  of  the  steel  roll,  so  that  the  wear  will  not  come  on  the  same 
part  of  the  boss  at  all  times. 

The  cap  bars,  U,  for  holding  the  top  rolls  in  place,  are  pivoted 
in  a  slot  in  the  extreme  back  end  of  the  roll  stand  slide. 

The  scavenger,  or  waste  roll,  G,  upon  which  the  yarn  collects 
when  an  end  breaks,  thus  preventing  a  roller  lap,  is  a  wooden  roll 
covered  with  denim  or  light  weight  flannel.  In  each  end  of  the  roll 
are  wire  gudgeons  which  rest  in  open  bearings  in  the  scavenger  roll 
weights,  J.  The  weights  are  pivoted  at  M  and  are  balanced  so  that 
the  roll  is  held,  lightly,  against  the  steel  front  roll. 

Sometimes,  a  spring  is  used  in  place  of  the  welgnts  for  holding 
the  scavenger  roll,  as  shown  in  Fig.  192,  but  this  is  not  as  satisfactory 
as  it  is  apt  to  break. 

The  top  rolls  are  both  lever-weighted  and  self-weighted.  In  the 
drawing,  a  system  of  lever-weighting  is  sho\vn  by  which  all  the  rolls 
receive  pressure  from  one  weight. 

There  are  two  saddles  used;  front  saddle,  L,  and  back  saddle, 
S.  The  back  saddle  rests  upon  the  middle  and  back  top  rolls  and  the 
front  saddle  upon  the  front  top  roll  and  the  back  saddle.  The 
weight,  X2,  is  hung  from  the  lever,  V,  by  a  weight  hook.  The  fulcrum 
of  the  lever  is  at  the  lever  screw.,  W,  and  the  stirrup,  Y,  serves  to 
communicate  the  pressure  from  the  weight  to  the  front  saddle.  For 
single  boss  rolls,  the  weight  is  from  two  to  three  pounds  and  for 
double  boss  rolls  about  six  pounds. 

A  diagram  for  use  in  figuring  the  distribution  of  weight  on  the 
different  rolls  is  shown  in  Fig.  195. 


277 


236  COTTON  SPINNING 

Front  Roll A 

Middle  Roll :   B 

Back  Roll C 

Front  Saddle D 

Back  Saddle E 

Fulcrum F 

Power P 

Weight W 

To  find  the  weight  in  pounds  upon  the  front  saddle:  Multiply 
the  weight  (2.5  pounds)  by  the  distance,  F-W,  and  divide  by  the 
distance,  F-P. 

„  2.5  X  3.5 

Example:  -   =17.5 

.o 

To  find  the  weight  in  pounds  upon  the  front  roll:  Multiply  the 
weight  upon  the  front  saddle  (17.5  pounds)  by  the  distance,  E-D, 
and  divide  by  the  distance,  E-A. 

„  17.5  X  1.25 

Example:  =12.5 

1. i  o 

To  find  the  weight  in  pounds  upon  the  back  saddle:  Subtract 
the  weight  upon  the  front  roll  from  the  weight  upon  the  front  saddle 

Example:  17.5  -  12.5  =  5 

To  find  the  weight  in  pounds  upon  the  back  roll:  Multiply  the 
weight  upon  the  back  saddle  by  the  distance,  E-C,  and  divide  by  the 
distance,  B-C. 

T-,  5  X  .75 

Example:  =  3 

I .— o 

To  find  the  weight  in  pounds  upon  the  middle  roll:  Subtract 
the  weight  upon  the  back  roll  from  the  weight  upon  the  back  saddle. 

Example:  5—3  =  2 

Sometimes,  it  is  desired  to  run  the  frame  with  no  weight  upon 
the  middle  .roll.  Then,  the  saddle  is  pushed  back  until  the  curved 
part,  X,  comes  over  the  neck  of  the  back  roll  arbor.  This  removes 
the  flat  part  of  the  saddle  from  the  middle  roll  and  the  weight  is  borne 
by  the  front  and  back  rolls. 

Roll  stands  are  made  with  the  rolls  inclined  from  a  horizontal 
line  at  various  angles  from  twenty-five  to  thirty-five  degrees.  For 
spinning  warp  and  other  hard  twisted  yarns,  the  twenty-five  degree 
pitched  stand,  shown  in  Fig.  196,  is  largely  used.  For  ring  frames 
to  be  used  for  spinning  both  warp  and  filling  yarn,  the  thirty  degree 
pitched  stand,  shown  in  Fig.  197,  is  sometimes  used.  While  for 


278 


COTTON  SPINNING 


237 


filling  yarn  and  any  soft  twisted  yarn,  the  thirty-five  degree  pitched 

stand,  shown  in  Fig.  198,  is  often  used. 

The  reason  for  inclining  the  rolls  is  very  simple.     As  the  yarn 

leaves  the  bite  of  the  front  roll,  it  is  important  that  it  shall  receive 

twist  at  once,  as  the  high  speed  that  the  spindles  run  and  the  tension 

upon  the  yarn  due  to  drawing  the 

traveler  around  the  ring,  tend  to  break 

the  yarn.     If  the  yarn,  after  leaving 

the  bite  of  the  roll,  is  caused  to  draw 

around  a  portion  of  its  circumference, 

the  twist  will  not  readily  pass  this  point 

of  contact  and  the  yarn,  between  this 

point  of  contact  and  the  bite  of  the 

roll,  receives  little  or  no  twist.     The 

roll  stands,  therefore,  are  inclined 

enough  to  allow  the  twist  to  run  nearly 

to  the  bite  of  the  front  roll.     This  is 

particularly  necessary  when  spinning 

filling  yarn,  which  has  less  twist  than  warp  yarn,  and  not  only  are 

the  stands  inclined  at  a  great  angle,  but  sometimes,  the  front  roll   is 

set  nearer  over  the  spindles  so  that  the  yarn  shall  draw  more  nearly 

in  a  straight  line  from  the  front  roll  to 
the  traveler. 

J        >xX  A  roll  stand  of  this  type  is  shown 

in  Fig.  199.  The  center  of  the  spindle 
is  about  four  and  one-quarter  inches 
from  the  face  of  the  roller  beam,  and 
the  center  of  the  front  roll  is  about 
midway  of  this  space. 

Self-Weighted  Top  Rolls.  Ring 
frames,  for  spinning  long  staple  cot- 
ton, are  frequently  provided  with  self- 
weighted  top  rolls  for  the  middle  and 
back  lines.  A  frame  with  rolls  of  this 


25 "ROLL  STAND 

Fig.  196.    Warp  Roll  Stand, 
25°  Pitch. 


30°  ROLL  STAND 


Fig.  197.  combination  ROII  stand,   kmo!  is  shown  in  sectional  elevation  in 

Fig.  200. 

The  front  top  roll,  B,  which  is  a  shell  roll  one  and  three-eighths 
inches  in  diameter,  is  weighted  by  a  weight,  G,  which  extends  from 


279 


COTTON  SPINNING 


35°  ROLL  STAND 

Fig.  198.    Filling  Roll  Stand, 
35°  Pitch. 


side  to  side  of  the  frame  and  is  connected  to  the  top  rolls  by  hooks,  F, 

and  stirrups,  E.     Holes  are  drilled  in  the  roller  beams  to  allow  the 

hooks  to  connect  with  the  stirrups.     The  hook  shaped  projection 

on  the  top  of  the  stirrups  is  to  allow 
the  operative  to  lift  the  weight  clear  of 
the  top  roll,  when  necessary,  and  the 
round  eye,  formed  on  the  top  of  the 
hook,  prevents  the  weight  from  drop- 
ping down  upon  the  drum  when  the 
top  roll  is  removed,  as  the  eye  is  larger 
in  diameter  than  the  hole  in  the  roller 
beam  and  can  not  pull  through. 

The  top  roll  for  the  back  line  is 
one  and  three-quarters  inches  in  diam- 
eter and  for  the  middle  line  is  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  The 
rolls  are  made  of  cast  iron  and  are  not 
covered  with  leather,  a  saving  in  repairs. 
The  top  clearer  is  conical  and  is  the  same  as  those  used  on  fly 

frames  with  self-weighted  top  rolls,  as  shown  and  described  in  a 

previous  chapter. 

Sometiihes,  a  double   cone 

clearer  is  used  with  a  device  at  each 

end  of  the  frame  that  tips  the  clearer, 

automatically,  when  it  reaches  the 

end,  allowing  it  to  work  back. 

In  addition  to  the  usual  front 

scavenger   roll,  a  second  roll  is 

sometimes  used  which  bears  against 

the  underside  of  the  middle  and  back 

steel  rolls.    It  is  one  inch  in  diameter, 

covered  with  denim,  and  supported 

by  springs  held  in  sockets.     The  ar- 
rangement is  such  as  to  allow  the  rolls 

to  be  easily  detached  for  cleaning. 

The  middle  and  back  rolls  are  carried  by  the  same  slide  and 

are  set  about  one  and  three-fourths  inches  between  centers.     The 

adjustment  is  between  the  front  and  middle  rolls. 


30 "ROLL  STAND 

Fig.  199.    Roll  Stand,  30°  Pitch,  for 
*    Overhanging  Front  Rolls. 


280 


COTTON  SPINNING 


239 


X  K«w  K!;:: 


Fig.  290.    Sectional  Elevation  of  Ring  Frame  with  Self-Weighted  Top  Rolls. 


240  COTTON  SPINNING 

In  setting  a  frame  with  self-weighted  top  rolls,  it  is  the  practice 
to  "set  on  the  staple,"  which  means  to  make  the  distance  between 
the  centers  of  the  front  and  middle  rolls  a  trifle  less  (one-sixteenth 
to  one-eighth  of  an  inch)  than  the  length  of  the  cotton  staple.  This 
is  just  opposite  to  the  method  of  setting  weighted  rolls,  which  are  set 
from  one-sixteenth  to  one-eighth  more  on  centers  than  the  length 
of  the  staple. 

It  is  frequently  argued  that  no  great  range  in  counts  can  be  spun 
with  self-weighted  rolls,  as  the  weight  of  a  roll,  correct  for  spinning 
10's  yarn  is  not  right  for  30's.  This  is,  however,  a  mistake  as  from 
10's  to  80's  can  be  spun  with  rolls  of  the  sizes  mentioned. 

Thread  Boards.  The  thread  boards  for  supporting  the  thread 
guides  are  made  of  wood  or  metal.  Figures  192  and  200  show  a 
common  wooden  thread  board,  G1,  consisting  of  a  doffing  strip,  which 
is  secured  to  the  roller  beam  by  hinged  brackets,  and  blocks  for 
holding  the  thread  guides,  which  are  hinged,  to  the  thread  board. 
The  thread  guide  is  made  with  various  shaped  eyes  and  is  screwed 
into  the  block. 

The  metallic  thread  board  is  made  of  thin  sheet  metal,  nickel 
plated  and  secured  to  the  roller  beam  similarly  to  the  wooden  one. 

Metallic  boards  are  considered  to  be  an  improvement  over 
\vooden  ones,  as  there  is  an  adjustment  for  the  thread  guide  in  all 
directions  in  a  horizontal  plane,  and  the  eye  of  the  guide  may  be  very 
easily  set  in  the  correct  position  over  the  spindle.  With  the  wooden 
thread  board,  the  eye  can  be  adjusted  only  by  screwing  it  in  or  out  of 
the  block,  and  for  any  side  movement,  the  only  way  is  to  bend  the 
guide  to  meet  the  spindle.  This  is  apt  to  loosen  the  guide  and  cause 
it  to  work  out. 

A  large  per  cent  of  broken  ends  is  caused  by  faulty  setting  of  the 
thread  guides,  a  point  which  should  not  be  overlooked.  In  setting 
the  guide,  it  is  customary  to  put  a  round,  wooden  piece  called  a  "set" 
on  the  spindle.  This  is  made  with  a  pin  in  the  top.  The  length  of 
the  set  is  such  as  to  bring  the  pin  up  just  under  the  thread  guide. 
The  guide  is  then  set  so  that  the  thread  will  draw  from  the  back  side 
of  the  eye  to  the  center  of  the  spindle. 

Spindles.  A  type  of  spindle,  commonly  used  on  modern  ring 
frames,  is  shown  in  Fig.  201.  It  consists  of  a  base,  bolster,  step, 
spindle  blade,  whirl  and  cup. 


282 


o  = 

«  s: 

a  » 

H  a 

S  3 

*  5 


COTTON  SPIXXIXG 


241 


The  whirl  is  driven  on  to  the  spindle,  and  the.  cup,  which  helps 
center  and  rotate  the  bobbin,  is  forced  on  to  the  sleeve  of  the  whirl. 
The  lower  part  of  the  bolster  is  covered  with  packing,  tied  with  a 
fine  string.  This  gives  greater  steadiness  to  the  running  of  the 
spindle  and  better  wearing  qualities. 

The  step  is  made  of  hardened  steel,  has  a  flat  top,  and  is  screwed 
into  the  bottom  of  the  bolster. 

The 'base  is  made  with  an  upward  projecting  nose,  or  oil  tube, 


-BLADE. 


-BOLSTER. 


-PACKING. 


BASE 


-STEP. 


Fig.  201.    Spindle  Parts. 

S,  the  cover,  C,  of  which  forms  a  lock  to  prevent  pulling  the  spindle 
out  of  the  bolster  when  doffing.  The  stem  of  the  bolster  is  threaded 
to  receive  a  nut  for  securing  the  base  to  the  spindle  rail. 

The  cups  are  usually  of  brass  and  are  made  several  sizes  to  suit 
the  different  sized  bobbins.  They  are  called  warp  cups  and 
filling  cups.  Many  prefer  to  have  the  cups  all  one  size,  particularly 


283 


242 


COTTON  SPINNING 


•when  frames  are  to  be  run  for  both  warp  and  filling,  so  that  the  bobbins 
will  be  interchangeable. 

Fig.  202  shows  a  spindle  and  bolster  assembled. 
Separators.     Separators  are  usually  applied  to  frames  for  spin- 
ning warp  yarn  and,  sometimes,  to  those  for  filling  yarn,  as  the  high 
speed  of  the  spindles,  and  the  long  traverse  of  modern 
frames,  cause  the  ends  to  whip  and  break  down. 

The  separator  blades,  N4,  (Fig.  192)  are  thin,  steel 
plates,  of  a  size  to  suit  the  length  of  traverse,  and  are 
mounted  upon  light  rods  which  extend  parallelly  with 
the  ring  rails.  They  are  connected  with  the  traverse 
motion  from  the  cross  shaft  arm,  M1,  by  the  rods,  L8, 
so  they  rise  and  fall  with  the  ring  rail,  and  are  arranged 
so  that  they  can  be  tipped  back  out  of  the  way  while 
doffing.  The  blades  are  placed  midway  of  the  spaces 
between  the  center  of  the  spindles,  and  tlie  ballooning 
yarns  are  kept  from  whipping  together 

This  ballooning  is  very  apparent  on  warp  frames, 
when  the  rail  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  traverse,  as  there 
is  considerable  length  of  yarn  between  the  thread  guide 
and  the  traveler. 


Fig.  203.  Spindle 
Assembled. 


Fig.  203.    Double  Ring  in  Cast  Iron  Holder. 


Spinning  Rings.  Rings  that  are  supplied  with  new  ring  frames 
are  usually  double  rings,  set  in  either  cast  iron  or  plate  holders. 
The  ring  shown  in  Fig.  203  is  such,  in  a  cast  iron  holder  with  wire 
traveler  cleaner;  A,  is  the  holder,  B,  the  ring,  and,  C,  the  cleaner. 
A  recess  is  formed  on  the  inside  of  the  holder  and  the  traveler  cleaner 
lies  around  the  recess,  between  the  ring  and  holder. 

The  position  of  the  upturned  end  of  the  traveler  cleaner  is  such 
that,  as  the  traveler  rotates,  the  loose  fibers  and  fly,  which  are  always 


284 


COTTON  SPINNING 


243 


Double  Ring  in  Plate  Holder. 


floating  about  a  spinning  room,  and  which  are  bound  to  gather  on 

the  traveler,  are  wiped  off  and  the  traveler  kept  clean.     Unless  the 

traveler  is  kept  free  from  this  accumulation,  uneven  yarn  will  be 

caused. 

The  traveler  cleaner  is  set  just  far  enough  away  so  that  it  cannot 

interfere  with  the  rotation  of  the 

traveler.     It  cannot  get  out  of 

place,  because  the  tail  is  always 

set  concentric  with  the  ring. 

Another  style  of  "double 

ring",  in  a  plate  holder,  is  shown 

in  Fig.  204.     This  is  known  as  a 

double  adjustable  ring.      It  is  in  a  plate  holder  with  part  of  the 

plate  turned  up  to  form  the  traveler  cleaner.     A,  is  the  ring,  B,  the 

plate  holder,  and,  C,  is  the  part  of  the  plate  which  forms  the  traveler 

cleaner. 

The  advantage  claimed  for  a  double  ring,  is,  that  when  the  top 

flange  becomes  worn,  it  may  be  reversed  in  the  holder,  the  other  side 

used,  prolonging  very  much  the  wear  of  the  ring. 

The  plate  holders  are  made  round,  oval  or  square.     A  round 

holder  is  shown,  with  the  ring, 
in  Fig.  204,  and  an  oval  plate 
holder  with  a  double  ring  is 
shown  in  Fig.  205. 

The  oval  holder  has  two 
screw  slots  at  AA,  for  securing- 
the  holder  to  the  ring  rail,  and 
two  lugs  at  BB  for  fastening  the 
ring  to  the  holder.  The  slots 
permit  the  holder  to  be  adjusted 
so  the  ring  can  be  set  concentric 
with  the  spindle. 

A  square  holder  is  shown  in 
Fig.  206.     This  one  has  also  two 

slots,  AA,  for  fastening  it  to  the  rail  but  has  three  lugs,  BBB,  for  fast- 
ening the  ring  to  the  holder. 

The  cast  iron  holder  is  secured  to  the  ring  rail  by  three  screws, 

two  in  front  and  one  in  the  rear  of  the  ring,  and,  by  loosening  one  and 


Fig.  205.    Oval  Plate  Holder  and  Ring. 


285 


COTTON  SPINNING 


tightening  the  other  two,  the  ring  can  be  moved  a  slight  distance  for 
setting  it  in  position.  The  cast  iron  holder  is  made  with  a  split  so 
that  it  can  be  sprung  open,  slightly,  to  remove  the  ring. 

Rings,  known  as  solid  rings  are  also  used.     They  are  without 

holders  and  are  made  to  fit  the 
holes  in  the  ring  rail  with  a 
very  slight  adjustment  by 
screws  the  same  as  the  cast 
iron  holders. 

Rings  are  often  specified 
as  one  and  one-half  inch  ring 
in  a  holder  for  one  and  three- 
fourths  inch  ring.  This  per- 
mits the  holder  to  be  removed 
and  a  one  and  three-fourths 
inch  ring  and  holder  to  be 

Fig.  206.    Square  Plate  Holder  and  Ring.     ^  used  in  the  same  place.      The 

hole  in  the  ring  rail  is  made  large  enough  that  a  one  and  three-fourths 
inch  ring  may  be  used. 

The  flanges  for  the  rings  for  ring  frames  are  known  as  numbers  1, 
2,  etc.  Number  1  flange  is  one-quarter  of  an  inch  wide,  and  is  usually 
used  for  rings  up  to  one  and  three-fourths  inches  in  diameter,  while 
number  2  flange,  which  is  five  thirty- 
seconds  of  an  inch  wide,  is  used  for  sizes 
up  to  two  and  one-fourth  inches  in  di- 
ameter. This  is  not  an  absolute  rule  to 
follow  but  is  recommended  by  some  of 
the  prominent  ring  makers. 

Enlarged  sections  of  flanges,  num- 
bers one  and  two  with  the  respective 
sizes  of  the  traveler,  are  shown  in  Fig.  207. 

Ring  Travelers.  There  is  no  rule  by  Flange  of  Rings  and  Travelers- 
which  the  correct  weight  of  travelers  may  be  determined  for  a  cer- 
tain number  of  yarn,  as  the  size  of  ring,  speed  of  spindle,  number 
of  yarn  and  twist  per  inch,  introduce  elements  which  affect  the  size 
of  the  traveler,  and,  also,  the  different  makes  of  travelers  vary  slightly 
in  the  numbers  of  different  sizes. 

The  following  table  gives  approximately  the  correct  size  of  ring 


No  I 


No2 


Fig  207.    Enlarged  Section  of 


286 


COTTON  SPINNING 


245 


travelers  to  use  for  spinning  yarns  of  ordinary  twist  and  of  various 
sizes  of  rings.  This  table  is  given  as  a  guide  to  select  travelers,  but 
it  must  be  understood  that  the  numbers  will  vary  somewhat  owing 
to  circumstances  as  referred  to  above. 


No.  Yarn    1%"  Ring 

iys"  Ring 

IK"  Ring 

No.  Yarn 

154"  Ring 

1H"  Ring 

IK"  Ring 

8 

10 

9 

8 

30 

u 

* 

§ 

10 

8 

7 

6 

32 

* 

5 
Iff 

1 
u 

12 

7 

6 

5 

34 

1 

A 
TT 

* 

14 

6 

5 

4 

36 

6 
TT 

T5 

R 
TJ 

16 

5 

4 

3 

38 

I 

§ 

9 

18 

4 

3 

2 

40 

8 
Ti 

§ 

V- 

20 

3 

2 

1 

42 

9 

T» 

1  0 

TT 

22 

2 

1 

t     ' 

44 

-v- 

1  1 
"TT 

24 

1 

} 

ff 

46 

1  1 
TT 

V 

26 

I 

3 

T 

1 

48 

1  2 
~TT 

1  3 
TT 

28 

TF 

« 

* 

50 

V 

V 

Principle  of  the  Traveler.  The  traveler  receives  its  motion  by 
being  dragged,  by  the  yarn,  around  the  ring,  and,  in  the  passage  of  the 
yarn  from  the  front  roll  to  the  bobbin,  it  is  turned  at  a  right  angle 
at  the  point  where  it  passes  through  the  traveler.  Therefore,  all  of 
the  twist  is  introduced  between  the  traveler  and  the  front  roll.  In 
fact,  the  traveler  performs  a  double 
duty,  giving  the  twist  to  the  yarn 
and  guiding  it  on  to  the  bobbin. 

The  size  and  weight  of  the  trav- 
eler must  be  adapted  to  the  number 
of  yarn  being  spun.  This  is  neces- 
sary so  that  the  revolutions  of  the 
traveler  shall  fall  behind  the  revo- 
lutions of  the  bobbin  enough  to 
maintain  a  tension  upon  the  yarn, 
sufficient  to  wind  the  same  length, 
that  is  delivered  by  the  front  roll, 
less  a  small  amount  due  to  contraction  in  consequence  of  the  twist. 

The  smaller  the  diameter  of  the  bobbin,  the  more  revolutions  are 
necessary  to  wind  the  same  length,  and,  as  the  speed  of  the  bobbin  is 
constant,  it  is  evident  that  the  tension  upon  the  yarn  must  relax  and 


Fig.  208.    Diagram  Showing 
Principle  of  Traveler. 


287 


246  COTTON  SPINNING 

allow  the  traveler  to  fall  behind  the  bobbin  and  cause  more  yarn  to  be 
wound.  This  may  be  understood  by  noting  the  two  diagrams,  Figs. 
208  and  209.  In  these  illustrations,  R  is  the  ring,  T,  the  traveler, 
S,  the  spindle,  F,  the  full  bobbin,  and  E,  the  empty  bobbin.  The 
yarn  is  represented,  as  passing  through  the  traveler,  .  by  the  line  Y. 
With  the  full  bobbin  (Fig.  209),  the  pull  of  the  yarn  is  nearly 
parallel  with  the  ring,  and  the  traveler  is  rotated  with  comparative 
ease,  but  with  the  empty  bobbin  (Fig.  208),  the  pull  of  the  yarn  ap- 
proaches a  radial  line  and  is  not  as 
well  suited  to  rotate  the  traveler. 
^^\  \  We  will  assume  that  the  empty 

bobbin  is  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
in  diameter  (2.35  inches  circumfer- 
ence) and  the  full  bobbin  is  one 
and  three-quarters  inches  in  diame- 
ter (5.49  inches  in  circumference). 
If  the  traveler  is  held  stationary 
and  the  empty  bobbin  given  one 
Fig.  209.  Diagram  showing  revolution,  there  will  be  wound  2.35 

Principle  of  Traveler.  . 

inches  or  yarn,  while  with  the  full 
bobbin,  one  revolution  will  wind  5.49  inches. 

If  the  rotations  of  the  traveler  were  not  retarded,  it  would  travel 
around  the  ring  a  distance  equal  to  2.35  inches,  for  an  empty  bobbin 
and  5.49  inches  for  a  full  bobbin,  and,  as  each  rotation  of  the  traveler 
gives  one  twist  to  the  yarn,  a  considerable  difference  in  the  twist  per 
inch  will  be  produced,  but  as  the  traveler  falls  behind  the  bobbin 
only  enough  to  cause  the  yarn  to  be  wound,  the  difference  in  the 
twist  is  not  appreciable. 

If  the  bobbin  makes  one  hundred  revolutions  and  in  the  same 
time  the  front  roll  delivers  ten  inches  of  yarn,  the  twist  can  be  called 
ten  per  inch. 

The  empty  bobbin  will  have  to  make  4.25  revolutions. 

fi  ^  ,-.,'.:•; 

The  traveler  will  make  95.75  rotations,  or  the  speed  of  the  bobbin 
less  the  number  of  revolutions,  necessary  to  wind  the  yarn. 
100  -  4.25  ~  95.75 


288 


COTTON  SPINNING 


247 


At  each  rotation  of  the  traveler,  the  yarn  receives  one  twist,   so 
the  actual  twist  per  inch  will  be  9.57. 

With  the  full  bobbin,  1.84  revolutions  are  necessary  to  wind  the 
ten  inches  of  yarn,  delivered  by  the  front  roll. 

10 


5.49 


=  1.84 


The  traveler  will  then  make  only  98.16  rotations. 
100  -  1.84  =  98.16 

The  difference  in  twist  per  inch  between  a  full  bobbin,  one  and 
three-fourths  inches  in  diameter  and  an  empty  one,  three-fourths  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  is  the  difference  between  9.81  and  9.57  or  .24 
of  one  turn  in  a  length  of  ten  inches. 

Builders.  There  are  three  kinds  of  builders  used  upon  the  ring 
frame.  The  warp  builder  is  shown  in  Fig.  210,  the  filling  builder  in 


M 


N 


Fig.  210.    Warp  Builder. 

Fig.  213  and  the  combination  builder,  which  can  be  changed  for 
either  warp  or  rilling  wind,  in  Fig.  215. 

With  the  warp  builder,  the  yam  is  wound  the  whole  length  of  the 
bobbin  at  first  and  the  length  of  the  traverse  is  gradually  shortened 
at  each  end  as  the  bobbin  increases  in  diameter,  as  shown  by  the 
distance  A-B,  Fig.  211. 

The  warp  builder  consists  of  a  main  piece  or  arm,  S2,  rack,  N1, 
hook,  M2,  worm,  W2,  worm  shaft,  F6,  ratchet  gear,  T,  pawl,  V1, 
counterbalance  weight,  S4,  and  roll,  Z.  All  these  parts  are  mounted 
upon  the  builder  arm  which  is  hung  upon  a  stud  at  Q.  The  worm  is 


289 


248 


COTTON  SPINNING 


—  ^r-   A 


fastened  to  one  end  of  the  worm  shaft,  and  engages  the  teeth  of  the 
rack,  and  the  ratchet  is  fastened  to  the  other  end  of  the  shaft  and  its 
teeth  are  acted  upon  by  the  pawl. 

The  means  for  producing  the  up  and  down  movement  of  the 
rail  is  by  a  uniform  motion  cam,  J2,  which  bears  against  the  cam 

roll  and  this  motion  is  communicated  to 
the  ring  rail  by  a  chain  from  the  hook 
fastened  to  the  builder  rack. 

The  connection  from  the  chain  to  the 
ring  rail  is  shown  in  perspective  in  the 
drawing  Fig.  212.  The  cross  shafts,  M1, 
by  which  the  guide  rods  are  operated,  are 
supported  in  hangers,  V2,  which  are 
bolted  to  the  underside  of  the  ladders. 
An  upward  projecting  arm,  X1,  carries  a 
swivel  to  which  is  connected  the  builder 
chain,  Y1,  and  a  horizontal  arm,  C7,  car- 
ries a  roll,  Y2,  which  bears  against  a  shoe 
on  the  lower  end  of  the  guide  rod,  C2. 
The  ring  rails,  E2,  rest  upon  brackets  on 
the  top  of  the  guide  rods.  A  counterbal- 
ance weight,  not  shown  in  the  drawing 
but  attached  to  each  cross  shaft  and  shown 
as  G2  in  Fig.  192,  keeps  the  builder  cam 
roll  up  against  the  cam,  so  that  there  shall 
be  no  backlash  at  the  end  of  the  traverse. 
The  cam  is  fastened  to  the  cam  or  heart  shaft,  K,  which  is  driven 
from  the  foot  or  gear  end,  P1,  to  which  reference  will  be  made  later. 
The  rack  is  shown  wound  out  to  the  extreme  end  of  the  arm, 
and  the  ring  rail  moves  the  full  length  of  its  traverse,  but  at  each 
upward  swing  of  the  arm,  the  pawl  is  brought  into 'contact  with  the 
dagger,  E2,  which  is  fastened  to  the  ladder.  This  gives  the  ratchet 
gear  a  partial  turn,  and  the  rack  is  drawn  back  toward  the  fulcrum  of 
the  arm  and  the -traverse  of  the  rail  is  shortened. 

The  ratchet  gears  are  made  with  various  numbers  of  teeth  and 
the  dagger  is  adjustable  so  that  it  can  be  set  to  take  up  more  or  less 
teeth. 


Fig.  211.    Warp  Bobbin. 


290 


COTTON  SPINNING 


249 


When  the  bobbin  is  full,  the  rack  is  wound  out  to  commence  a 
new  set  by  the  crank,  Z2,  called  the  builder  key. 

The  filling  builder  (Fig.  213)  is  connected  to  the  ring  rail  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  one  just  described,  but  with  the  filling  wind,  the 
rail  starts  at  the  lowest  point  in  the  traverse  and,  instead  of  winding 


the  yarn  the  whole  length  of  the  bobbin,  it  is  wound  a  short  distance, 
as  shown  by  A-B  in  Fig.  214.  The  length  of  the  traverse  remains 
the  same  throughout  the  whole  length  of  the  bobbin,  but  its  position 
gradually  goes  higher  until  it  reaches  the  top  of  the  bobbin.  Thi3 


291 


250 


COTTON  SPINNING 


is  accomplished  in  the  following  way:  The  worm,  W2,  instead  of 
engaging  a  rack  as  on  the  warp  builder,  is  in  gear  with  a  worm  gear, 
V2,  the  hub  of  which  is  made  as  a  drum  upon  which  the  builder  chain, 
T5,  is  wound.  The  ratchet  gear  is  turned  in  the  same  manner  as  for 
the  warp  builder. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  set,  when  the  rail  is  at  its  lowest  position, 
the  chain  is  wound  around  the  drum,  but  as  the  ratchet  gear  is  slowly 


M 


w 


Fig.  213.  .  Filling  Biiilder. 


turned,  it  is  gradually  unwound  and  the  traverse  is  allowed  to  go 
higher  on  the  bobbin.  The  builder  is  wound  back  with  a  key,  the 
same  as  the  warp  builder. 

The  filling  cam,  O1,  is  made  with  three  lobes,  so  each  revolution 
of  the  cam  shaft  causes  the  ring  rail  to  make  three  complete  traverses 
against  one  complete  traverse  of  the  warp  cam.  Owing  to  the 
peculiar  outlines  of  the  filling  cam,  the  rail -is  made  to  traverse  in  one 
direction  faster  than  in  the  other.  The  cam  can  be  put  on  to  the  cam 
shaft  so  as  to  give  either  a  fast  or  slow  down  traverse  to  the  ring  rail. 
The  slow  down  traverse  is  generally  preferred,  as  the  yarn  draws  off 
the  bobbin  much  better  and  with  less  danger  of  breaking  when 
afterwards  used  in  the  shuttle  in  weaving. 

The  object  in  having  the  rail  ruri  faster  one  way  than  the  other 
is  to  permit  the  coils,  wound  on  the  slow'  traverse,  to  be  covered  by 
the  coils  of  the  fast  traverse  which  wind  more  openly  and  this,  in  a 
measure,  prevents  the  yarn  from  becoming  tangled,  and  allows  it  to 
unwind  from  the  bobbin  more  freely. 


292 


COTTON  SPINNING 


251 


— i_  B 


The  combination  builder  (Fig.  215)  may  be  used  for  either  a 
warp,  or  a  filling  wind,  by  making  a  slight  change  in  the  arrangement 
of  parts,  but  it  is  necessary  to  use  both  warp  and  filling  cams  to  produce 
this  change. 

The  drawing  shows  the  builder  arranged  for  a  filling  wind.     The 
chain  is  fastened  to  the  hook,  formed  in  the  end  of  the  filling  arm, 
K1,  which  is  pivoted  on  the  builder  at  Z1. 
Upon  commencing  to  spin  a  set,  the  builder 
is  drawn  out  until  the  roll,  J1,  which  is  fas- 
tened to  the  rack,  N1,  is  brought  against  the 
neck  of  the  filling  arm  in  the  position  shown. 

The  builder  arm  is  caused  to  traverse 
by  the  filling  cam,  O1,  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  other  builders,  and  the  rack  is  grad- 
ually moved  back  towards  the  fulcrum  of 
the  builder  arm,  carrying  with  it  the  roll. 
This  movement  allows  the  filling  arm  to  rise 
•and  the  traverse  of  the  rail  to  approach  the 
top  of  the  bobbin.  The  length  of  the  trav- 
erse remains  the  same,  as  the  position  of 
the  point,  to  which  the  chain  is  attached  to 
the  filling  arm,  is  not  changed. 

When  the  builder  is  to  be  changed  from 
filling  to  warp,  the  filling  cam  is  loosened 
and  slipped  along  the  shaft,  and  the  warp 
cam  is  put  in  its  place;  the  chain  is  then 
unhooked  from  the  filling  arm  and  fastened 
to  the  pin  in  the  rack. 

In  setting  the  warp  builder  shown  in  Fig.  210,  the  rack,  N1,  is 
first  drawn  out,  as  shown  in  the  drawing,  and  the  traverse  is  set  by 
running  the  ring  rail  down,  to  bring  the  traveler  to  the  position  wanted 
on  the  bobbin.  The  rail  is  then  raised  to  the  desired  point,  and  by 
adjusting  the  length  of  the  chain  arm,  Z3  (Fig.  212),  the  exact  length 
of  the  traverse  can  be  determined. 

The  length  of  taper,  for  the  top  or  bottom  of  the  bobbin,  can 
be  varied  by  raising  or  lowering  the  fulcrum,  Q,  of  the  builder  arm. 
This  may  be  understood  by  reference  to  Fig.  210.  The  builder  is 
set  for  the  same  length  of  taper  for  both  ends  of  the  bobbin.  The 


Fig.  214.    Filling  Hobbin. 


293 


252 


COTTON  SPINNING 


fulcrum  of  the  builder  arm  is  at  Q;  the  throw  of  the  cam  is  shown  by 
the  distance  between  the  center  of  the  cam  rolls,  A  and  B. 

When  the  rail  is  traversing  its  greatest  distance  and  the  rack  is 
wound  out,  the  hook  is  at  G  and  the  length  of  the  traverse  is  repre- 


N 


Fig.  215.    Combination  Builder. 

sented  by  the  distance  between  the  horizontal  lines,  C-D.  But  when 
the  bobbin  is  full  and  the  traverse  is  shortened  to  its  extent,  the  point, 
G,  where  the  hook  is  attached,  has  moved  in  to  H  and  the  traverse 
of  the  rail  is  represented  by  the  distance  E-F.  The  distance  between 


Fig.  216.    Diagram  Showing  Taper  at  Top  and  Bottom  of  Bobbin. 

C-E  and  F-D  is  the  same  and  the  bobbin  has  the  same  amount  of 
taper  at  each  end. 

If  it  is  desired  to  have  a  long  taper  upon  the  top  of  the  bobbin, 
the  fulcrum  of  the  builder  arm  is  dropped,  as  in  Fig.  217,  which 


294 


COTTON  SPINNING 


253 


results  in  making  a  long  nose  on  the  top  of  the  bobbin.  The  greatest 
traverse  of  the  rail  is  represented  by  the  distance,  C-D,  and  the 
shortest  traverse  by  the  distance,  E-F.  Unlike  the  previous  drawing, 
the  distance  between  the  horizontal  lines,  D-F,  which  represents  the 
lowest  position  of  the  rail  for  both  the  long  and  the  short  traverse, 
is  much  less  than  the  distance,  C-D. 

If  the  long  taper  is  wanted  upon  the  bottom  of  the  bobbin,  the 
fulcrum  is  raised.  The  length  of  the  taper  can  be  regulated  to  a 
certain  extent  by  raising  or  lowering  the  dagger  so  as  to  let  off  a 
greater  or  lesser  number  of  teeth. 

In  starting  the  filling  builder,  the  chain  should  be  wound  up  as 
shown  in  the  drawing  (Fig.  213)  until  the  double  tooth,  P2,  comes 
around  against  the  worm,  which  forms  a  stop,  so  that  the  rail  shall 


Fig.  217.    Diagram  Showing  Taper  at  Top  and  Bottom  of  Bobbin. 

start  in  the  same  position  each  time.  The  length  of  taper  may  then  be 
regulated  by  raising  or  lowering  the  fulcrum  of  the  builder  arm  and 
also  by  letting  off  teeth  on  the  ratchet  gear 

In  using  the  combination  builder,  for  a  filling  wind,  the  fulcrum 
of  the  filling  arm  is  raised  or  lowered  in  the  slot,  Z*,  instead  of  raising 
the  fulcrum,  Q,  of  the  arm. 

A  word  in  regard  to  the  respective  merits  of  stick  doffing  and 
twist  doffing.  The  method,  employed  by  most  of  the  mills,  through- 
out the  country,  where  modern  spindles  are  used,  is  "stick"  doffing. 
This  is  done  by  running  the  ring  rail  to  the  lowest  point  in  its  traverse, 
and  winding  a  few  coils  of  loose  yarn  around  the  cup,  so  that  when 
the  full  bobbin  is  drawn  off,  this  loose  yarn  will  wind  closely  around 


295 


COTTON  SPINNING 


the  blade  of  the  spindle.  The  empty  bobbin  is  then  pushed  down 
on  the  spindle,  and  the  loose  yarn  is  caught  be.tween  the  spindle  and 
the  bobbin,  so  when  the  frame  is  started,  the  yarn  is  ready  to  wind  on. 

The  system,  called  "twist"  doffing,  is  used  where  old  style  spin- 
dles are  used.  This  method  consists  in  stopping  the  frame  about 
in  the  middle  of  the  extreme  ends  of  the  traverse  on  both  warp  and 
filling  frames.  When  the  full  bobbin  is  removed,  the  empty  one  is 
twisted  around  the  loose  yarn  and  pushed  down  on  the  spindle.  When 
the  frame  is  started,  a  slight  ridge  is  sometimes  formed  before  the  rail 
begins  to  traverse.  This  is  a  serious  fault,  on  a  rilling  wind,  for  as  the 
yarn  grows  less  on  the  bobbin  and  begins  to  draw  from  a  point  below 
the  ridge,  it  breaks,  causing  frequent  stopping  of  the  loom  when 
weaving. 

The  "stick"  method  cannot  be  used  successfully,  on  the  old 
style  spindles,  as  the  yarn  cannot  be  wound  around  the  base  of  the 
blade  without  seriously  interfering  with  the  putting  on  of  the  empty 
bobbins. 

The  "twist"  doff  takes  considerably  longer  than  the  "stick"  doff, 
and  for  that  reason,  the  latter  is  used  whenever  possible. 

Gearing.  An  elevation,  showing  the  gear  end  of  a  ring  frame, 
is  shown  in  Fig.  218.  The  front  rolls,  F,  are  driven  from  the  drum 
shaft,  G6,  by  the  drum  gear,  A4,  the  stud  gear,  C6,  the  twist  gear,  K6, 
intermediate  gears,  N6,  and  the  front  roll  gear,  S4. 

The  cam  shaft,  K,  is  driven  from  the  sprocket  gear,  J4,  on  the 
hub  of  the  intermediate  gear,  N6,  by  a  chain,  A4,  a  sprocket  gear,  D6, 
the  bevel  gears,  E6  and  F6,  the  worm,  W6,  and  the  worm  gear,  J7, 
which  is  upon  the  cam  shaft. 

The  draft  gearing  is  shown  on  the  right  hand  side  of  the  frame. 
The  gear,  A,  on  the  front  roll  drives  the  crown  gear,  M6,  and  on  the 
stud  with  the  crown  gear  is  the  draft  gear,  D8,  which  drives  the  gear, 
K6,  on  the  back  roll.  The  gear,  O6,  on  the  back  roll  drives  the  middle 
roll  through  the  carrier  gear,  P6  and  middle  roll  gear,  R6.  The  draft 
gearing  is  alike  on  each  side  of  the  frame  and  for  extremely  long 
frames  a  set  of  draft  gears  is  used  upon  each  end;  "double  geared", 
it  is  called. 

The  arrangement  of  the  twist  gearing  is  such  that  a  combination 
of  gears  may  be  applied  that  will  give  a  wide  range  of  twist. 

The  drum  and  stud  gears  are  of  twenty-four  and  ninety-one 


296 


COTTON  SPINNING 


teeth.     These  can  be  changed  to  thirty  and  eighty-five  or  forty  and 
seventy-five  teeth. 

The  twist  gear,  which  has  from  twenty  to  fifty  teeth,  is  carried 
by  a  link,  A7,  which  swings  on  the  hub  of  the  drum  box,  and,  as  shown 


Fig.  218.    End  Elevation  Showing  Gearing. 

in  the  drawing,  it  is  in  gear  with  the  intermediate  gear  on  the  left 
hand  side  of  the  frame. 

The  driving  belt  should  never  be  crossed,  and  it  frequently 
happens  that  the  direction  of  the  main  line  is  such  that  the  front  roll 
will  turn  in  the  wrong  direction.  To  remedy  this,  the  twist  link  is 


297 


250 


COTTON  SPINNING 


swung  over  so  that  the  twist  gear  will  engage  the  intermediate  gear 
on  the  opposite  side  from  that  shown  in  the  drawing. 

The  drums  are  seven,  eight  or  nine  inches  in  diameter  and  the 
whirl  of  the  spindle  is  three-fourths,  thirteen-sixteenths,  seven-eighths 
of  an  inch  or  one  inch  in  diameter.  The  sizes,  most  commonly 


s DRAFT  GEAR 
20  TO  45 TEETH 


FRONT    ROLL 
I'  DIA. 


Fig.  "H9.    Diagram  of  Draft  Gearing. 

used,  are  seven  inch  drum  and  three-quarters  or  thirteen-sixteenths 
inch  whirl. 

The  spindle  makes  a  certain  number  of  revolutions  to  each 
revolution  of  the  drum,  and  this  is  called  "relation  of  drum  to  whirl". 
This  relation  must  be  known  in  figuring  the  speed  of  the  spindle,  hence 
the  following  table: 

Revolutions  of  Spindle 


Dia.  of  whirl 

1"  drum 

8"  drum 

9"  drum 

r 

8.12 

9.20 

10.72 

w 

7.58 

8.64 

9.94 

i" 

7.05 

8.10 

945 

6.48 

7.18     .     •;•' 

825 

The  speed  of  the  cam  shaft  is  often  changed,  as  the  filling  wind 
is  run  at  a  greater  speed  than  the  warp  wind.  The  traverse  must  also 
run  at  a  greater  speed  for  coarse  yarn  than  for  fine  yarn.  These 


298 


w    •/ 

BS 


•  I 

K     o 


W     to 

*  I 
W  ^ 
J 

D 


COTTON  SPINNING 


257 


changes  in  speed  are  made  by  having  a  different  number  of  teeth  in 
either  the  upper  or  lower  sprocket  gear.  The  binder  pulley,  T6, 
which  is  carried  by  an  arm,  V6,  is  for  taking  up  the  slack  of  the  chain 
when  necessary. 

To  change  the  draft,  various  combinations  are  used.     In  the 
drawing,  a  front  roll  gear  of  twenty  teeth  and  a  crown  gear  of  seventy 


TWIST  GEAR 
STUD  GEAR 
DRUM  GEAR' 

Fig.  220.    Diagram  of  Twist  Gearing. 

teeth  are  shown.  These  may  be  changed  to  twenty  and  sixty-four 
teeth  or  thirty  and  one  hundred  four  teeth. 

The  back  roll  gear  shown  has  fifty-six  teeth  but  it  is  also  supplied 
with  fifty,  fifty-four  or  fifty-five  teeth. 

The  regular  draft  gearing  is  sixteen  pitch,  but  where  a  very  fine 
range  is  wanted,  the  gears  are  made  twenty-four  pitch  so  that  a  change 
of  one  tooth  will  make  a  small  change  in  the  draft. 


258  COTTON  SPINNING 

Yarn  is  made  both  right  and  left  twist.  When  it  is  to  be  doubled 
on  a  twister,  it  is  necessary  to  spin  it  with  the  spindle  rotating  in  the 
opposite  direction  from  that  of  the  twister  spindle.  If  two  threads 
are  to  be  twisted  on  a  ring  twister  and  given  a  right  hand  twist,  they 
must  have  a  left  hand  twist  in  spinning. 

A  diagram  of  the  draft  gearing  is  shown  in  Fig.  219  and  the  twist 
gearing  is  shown  in  Fig.  220. 

Rule  1.  To  find  the  draft  between  the  front  and  back  rolls: 
Multiply  the  driven  gears  by  the  diameter  of  the  front  roll  and  divide 
the  product  by  the  product  of  the  driving  gears  multiplied  by -the 
diameter  of  the  back  roll.  The  driven  gears  are  M6  and  K6  and  the 
diameter  of  the  front  roll  is  1.  inch.  The  driving  gears  are  A  and  D8 
and  the  back  roll  is  f  inches  diameter. 

70  X  56  X  8 
Example:  20  X  28  X  7  =    8'°C 

Rule  2.  To  find  the  draft  factor:  Proceed  as  in  the  previous 
rule  but  omit  the  draft  change  gear  D6. 

70  X  56  X  8 
Example:  20  X  7 

Rule  3.  To  find  the  draft:  Divide  the  factor  by  the  number 
of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear. 

224 
Example:  -~~-  =  8.00 

Rule  4.  To  find  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  draft  gear:  Divide 
the  factor  by  the  draft. 

224 
Example:  -~-  =  28.00 

Rule  5  To  find  the  twist  per  inch  in  the  yarn:  Multiply  the 
driven  gears  by  the  ratio  of  spindle  to  drum  and  divide  the  product 
by  the  product  of  the  driving  gears  multiplied  by  the  circumference 
of  the  front  roll.  The  driven  gears  are  C6  and  S4  and  the  ratio  of  a 
|  inch  whirl  to  a  7  inch  diameter  drum  is*  8.12.  The  driving  gears 
are  A4  and  K6  and  the  circumference  of  the  front  roll  is  3.14. 
85  X  91  X  8.12 

ExamPle:  aoTxsnrsii  ==  21'50 

Rule  6.  To  find  the  twist  factor:  Proceed  as  in  Rule  5  but  omit 
the  twist  change  gear. 


300 


COTTON  SPINNING  259 

85  X  91  X  8.12 

Example:  —         —      -  -666.75 

^l.oU 

Rule  7.     To  find  the  twist  gear:  Divide  the  factor  by  the  required 
twist. 

V  666'75  Q1 

Example:  ~-^ 

Rule  8.     To  find  the  twist  per  inch:  Divide  the  factor  by  the 
number  of  teeth  in  the  twist  gear. 


Example:  ~      =  21.50 

ol 

The  standard  twist  for  warp  yarn  is  the  square  root  of  the  number 
of  yarn  multiplied  by  4.75.  For  filling  yarn,  multiply  by  3.20.  For 
hosiery  yarn,  and  other  soft  twisted  yarn,  the  factor  is  as  low  as  2.50, 
and  for  extra  hard  twisted  yarns,  as  high  as  5.00.  The  standard 
twist  tables  are  based  on  the  multiple  of  4.75  for  warp  and  3.20  for 
filling. 

Rule  9.  To  find  the  number  of  hanks  per  spindle:  Multiply 
together  the  revolutions  of  the  front  roll  per  minute  (132),  the  circum- 
ference of  the  front  roll  (3.14")  and  the  estimated  number  of  minutes 
run  in  ten  hours  (570).  Divide  the  product  by  the  number  of  inches 
in  one  hank  (30,240). 
_,  132  X  3.14  X  5.70 

ExamPle:  30,  240  =  '-81 

Rule  10.  To  find  the  number  of  pounds  per  spindle:  Divide 
the  number  of  hanks  per  spindle  (7.81)  by  the  number  of  yarn  (20). 

7  81 
Example:  =  .39 

£\) 

Rule  11.     To  find  the  revolutions  of  the  spindle  per  minute: 
Multiply  together  the  revolutions  of  the  front  roll  (132),  the  twist 
per  inch  (21.24)  and  the  circumference  of  the  front  roll  (3.14). 
Example:  132  X  21.24  X  3.14  =  8803.55 

Rule  12.'  To  find  the  weight  in  grains  per  yard  of  any  number 
of  yarn  :  Divide  the  weight  per  yard  of  No.  1  yarn  (8,333  grains)  by 
the  number  of  yarn  (20). 

„  8.333 

Example:  =.416 

£i\) 

The  production  of  the  ring  frame  is  governed  by  the  speed  at 
which  the  front  roll  can  be  run,  and  this  speed  is  determined  by  the 


301 


COTTON  SPINNING 


quality  and  counts  of  yarn  being  spun.  All  machinery  builders 
publish  tables  giving  the  speeds  of  the  front  roll  and  the  spindle  for 
the  different  numbers  of  yarn  These  speeds  are  based  upon  the 
result  of  experiments,  and  may  be  increased  ten  to  fifteen  per  cent, 
when  the  nature  of  the  stock  is  such  that  it  will  allow  it. 

In  Rules  9  and  11,  the  speed  of  the  front  roll,  which  is  132 
R.  1\  M.,  is  the  table  speed  for  No.  20  warp  yarn;  and  in  Rule  11 
the  twist  per  inch,  which  is  21.24,  is  the  standard  for  No.  20  warp 
yarn  also. 

The  actual  time  that  the  frame  is  stopped  for  cleaning  and  doffing 
varies  very  much  with  the  number  of  the  yarn  and  the  quality  of  the 
cotton.  This  amounts  to  from  2  to  12  per  cent. 

The  tables  given  show  the  speeds  at  which  the  front  roll  and  the 
spindles  may  be  safely  run,  for  both  warp  and  filling  yarn,  from 
numbers  4  to  60. 

WARP  YARN 


Number 
of  Yarn 

Revs,  of 
1  Inch 
Front  Roll 
Per  Minute 

Revs,  of 
Spindle  Per 
Minute 

Hanks 
Per  Day 
Per  Spindle 

Pounds 
Per  Day 
Per  Spindle 

Estimated 
Time  Run 
Per  Day 
in  Minutes 

4 

155 

4600 

8.64 

2.16 

537 

5 

153 

5100 

8.57 

1.71 

538 

6 

152   • 

5600 

8.50 

1.41 

539 

7 

150 

5900 

8.43 

1.20 

540 

8 

148 

6300 

8.36 

1.04 

540 

9 

147 

6600 

8.29 

0.92 

541 

10 

145 

6900 

8.22                0.82 

542 

12 

142 

7400 

8.08                0.67 

544 

14 

189 

7800 

7.93 

0.56 

546 

16 

136 

8200 

7.78                 0.48 

548 

18 

133 

8500 

7.64 

0.42 

550 

20 

130 

8700 

7.49 

0.374 

552 

22 

127 

8900 

7.34 

0.333 

554 

24 

124 

9100 

7.19 

0.299 

556 

26 

121 

9200 

7.03 

0.270 

558 

28 

118 

9300 

6.88 

0.245 

560 

30 

115 

9400 

6.72 

0.224 

562 

32 

112 

9500 

6.57 

0.205 

564 

34 

109 

9500 

6.41 

0.188 

565 

36 

106 

9500 

6.25 

0.173 

567 

38 

103 

9500 

6.09 

0.160 

569 

40 

100 

9500 

5.93 

0.148 

571 

42 

98 

9500 

5.83 

0.138 

573 

44 

96 

9500 

5.73 

0.130 

575 

46 

94 

9500 

6.63 

0.122 

577 

48 

92 

9500 

5.53 

0.115 

579 

50 

90 

9600 

5.43 

0.108 

581 

60 

85 

9800 

5.20 

0.086 

590 

302 


COTTON  SPINNING 


261 


FILLING  YARN 


Number 
of  Yarn 

/ 

Revs,  of 
linen 
Front  Roll 
Per  Minute 

Revs,  of 
Spindle  Per 
Minute 

Hanks 
Per  Day 
Per  Spindle 

Pounds 
Per  Day 
Per  Spindle 

Estimated 
Time  Run 
Per  Day 
in  Minutes 

4                   169                   3400 

9.22                 2.30                   525 

5                   168                   8775 

9.17                 1.83                   526 

6                  166                  4100 

9.12                 1.52 

527 

7                   165                  4400 

9.08                 1.29 

528 

8 

163                    4650 

8.99                 1.12 

529 

9 

162                   4900 

8.95                 0.99                   530 

10 

160                   5100 

8.85                 0.88 

531 

12                  158                  5500 

8.75 

0.72 

533 

14                   155                   5850 

8.65 

0.61 

535 

16                   151                   6100 

8.47 

0.52 

537 

18                   147                   6800 

8.28 

0.46 

540 

20                   144                   6500 

8.14 

0.407 

542 

22 

142                   6700 

8.03 

0.365 

544 

24 

136                   6700 

7.72 

0.321 

546 

26 

134 

(5900 

7.67 

0.295 

548 

28 

130                   6950 

7.47 

0.266 

550 

30 

126                   6950 

7.25 

0.241 

552 

32 

123                   7000 

7.09 

0.221 

555 

34 

119                   7000 

6.91 

0.203                557 

36 

116                   7000 

6.74 

0.187                 559 

38 

114                   7100 

6.68 

0.175                 561 

40 

112 

7150                  6.58 

0.164 

563 

42 

110 

7200 

6.49 

0.154 

565 

44 

108 

7200 

6.37 

0.144 

567 

46 

105 

7200 

6.25 

0.135 

570 

48 

103 

7200 

6.14 

0.128 

572 

50 

101 

7200 

6.04 

0.102 

574 

60                     93 

7300 

5.69 

0.094 

585 

The  draft  of  the  ring  frame  varies  much  with  the  quality  of 
cotton,  the  number  of  yarn  being  spun  and  whether  the  yarn  is  single 
or  double  roving. 

It  is  a  fault,  with  many  mill  superintendents,  to  have  the  hank 
roving,  of  the  fine  fly  frame,  coarse  so  the  production  will  be  large 
which  makes  the  draft  of  the  ring  frame  long.  This  is  productive 
of  uneven  yarn,  particularly  when  spun  from  single  roving.  In  many 
cases,  the  roving  should  be  made  fine  enough  so  that  the  draft  will  be 
from  six  to  eight  for  single  roving  and  from  eight  to  twelve  for  double 
roving. 

The  following  program  is  for  a  mill,  making  flat  duck,  seven  to 
twelve  ounces  per  yard,  number  ten  warp,  number  five  and  one-half 
filling  from  single  roving. 


•303 


262  COTTON  SPINNING 

PROGRAM  OF   DRAFTS   AND  WEIGHTS 

NO.  10  WARP.     NO.  5$  FILLING 

Weight  of  PicKer  Lap 16  ounces 

Weight  of  Card  Lap  less  5  per  cent 6630  grains 

Draft  of  Card 102 

Weight  of  Card  Sliver 65  grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process 6 

Draft  on  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process. 5.4 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  1st  process 72.2  grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process -.  .  .6 

Draft  on  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 5.4 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  2nd  process 80 . 2  grains 

Draft  of  Slubber 4.80 

Hank  Roving  of  Slubber 50 

Double  on  Fine  Frame 2 

Draft  on  Fine  Frame 4  . 00  and  5 .20 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame 1 . 00  and  1  .30 

Draft  of  Ring  Frame 5.50  and  7. 70 

No.  of  Yarn 5.50  filling  and  1 0  warp 

The  slubber  roving  is  .50  hank,  and  on  account  of  the  extreme 
difference  between  the  warp  and  filling  yarn,  it  is  necessary  to  make 
two  numbers  of  roving,  on  the  fine  frame,  namely,  1.00  hank  and 
1.30  hank. 

The  weight  of  the  picker  lap  is  given  in  ounces  per  yard,  but  the 
weight  of  the  card  lap  is  given  in  grains  per  yard,  as  the  weight  of 
the  card  sliver  is  expressed  in  grains  and  the  draft  can  be  figured 
more  easily. 

The  weight  of  the  card  lap  is  figured  as  five  per  cent  less  than  the 
picker  lap.  Actually,  there  is  no  difference,  as  the  lap  from  the 
finisher  picker  goes  directly  to  the  back  of  the  card,  but  as  there  is  a 
loss  of  about  five  per  cent  in  carding,  it  is  customary  to  take  this 
amount  out  of  the  weight  of  the  lap. 

The  weight  of  slubber  roving  is  given  by  the  hank  and,  to  find  the 
necessary  draft  to  make  the  required  hank  roving,  the  following  rule 
may  be  used:  Multiply  the  weight  of  the  drawing  sliver  (80.2  grains) 
by  the  required  hank  roving  and  divide  by  the  weight  of  number  one 
hank  roving  (8.333  grains). 

80.2  X  .50 
Example:  *        =  4.81  + 

o.ooo 

The  next  program  is  that  of  a  mill,  making  cotton  cloth,  weighing 
about  three  yards  to  the  pound,  thirty-six  inches  wide,  number  fourteen 
warp  and  filling  yarn,  from  single  roving. 


304 


COTTON  SPINNING  263 


PROGRAM   OF    DRAFTS   AND   WEIGHTS 

NO.  14  WARP.     NO.  14  FILLING 

Weight  of  Picker  Lap 14  ounces 

Weight  of  Card  Lap  less  5  per  cent 5818   grains 

Draft  of  Card 97 

Weight  of  Card  Sliver GO  grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  1st  process 60   grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  2nd  porccss 60  grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  3rd  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  3rd  process. .  . 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  3rd  process 60  grains 

Draft  of  Slubber , 5.00 

Hank  Roving  of  Slubber 70 

Double  on  Fine  Frame : 2 

Draft  of  Fine  Frame 5.70 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame 2 . 00 

Draft  of  Ring  Frame 7 . 00 

No.  of  Yarn 14 .00 

The  third  program  is  for  a  yarn  mill  also  making  fourteen  yarn 
but  from  double  roving. 

PROGRAM  OF   DRAFTS   AND  WEIGHTS 

NO.   14  HOSIERY  YARN 

Wright  of  Picker  Lap 14  ounces 

Weight  of  Card  Lap  less  5  per  cent 5819   grains 

Draft  of  Card 100 

Weight  of  Card  Sliver 58   grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process G 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  1  st  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  1st  process 58   grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  2nd  process 58    grains 

Draft  of  Slubber 3.5 

Hank  Roving  of  Slubber 50 

Double  on  Intermediate 2 

Draft  on  Intermediate 4.4 

Hank  Roving  of  Intermediate 1.10 

Double  on  Fine  Frame 2 

Draft  of  Fine  Frame 5.5 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame 3 . 00 

Double  on  Ring  Frame 2 

Draft  of  Ring  Frame 9.4 

No.  of  Yarn 14  . 00 


305 


264  COTTON  SPINNING 

Yarn,  spun  from  double  roving,  produces  a  more  even  thread 
than  that  spun  from  single  roving,  owing  to  the  doubling  of  the  two 
ends.  A  thin  or  light  place,  in  one  end,  will  be  offset  by  the  other 
end,  but  if  an  end  breaks  or  runs  out,  the  yarn  spun  from  the  remain- 
ing end  will  be  "single"  and  of  incorrect  weight. 

The  last  program  is  for  a  mill  making  mule-spun  hosiery  yarn, 
numbers  ten  to  twenty-four,  from  2.30  and  4.00  hank  roving,  double. 

PROGRAM   OF   DRAFTS   AND   WEIGHTS 

FROM  10's  TO  24's  HOSIERY  YARN 

Weight  of  Picker  Lap 14  ounces 

Weight  of  Card  Lap  less  5  per  cent  '. 5819   grains 

Draft  of  Card 100 

Weight  of  Card  Sliver 58    grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  1st  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  1st  process 58   grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  2nd  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  2nd  process 58    grains 

Double  on  Drawing  Frame,  3rd  process 6 

Draft  of  Drawing  Frame,  3rd  process 6 

Weight  of  Drawing  Sliver,  3rd  process 58    grains 

Draft  of  Slubber 3.83 

Hank  Roving  of  Slubber 55 

Double  on  Intermediate 2 

Draft  of  Intermediate 4  and  5 . 2 

Hank  Roving  of  Intermediate 1.10  and    1 . 43 

Double  on  Fine  Frame 2  and  2 

Draft  of  Fine  Frame 4.4    and    5 . 7 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame 2 . 42  and    4 . 00 

Double  on  Mule 2  and  2 

Draft  of  Mule 9.1    and  12.00 

No.  of  Yarn 1 1 . 01  and  24 . 00 

NO.  OF  YARN  10's  NO.   OF  YARN  16's 

% 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   2.30  Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   4 . 00 

Double  on  Mule 2  Double  on  Mule 2 

Draft  of  Mule 8.7  Draft  of  Mule 8 

No.  of  Yarn 10.00  No.  of  Yarn 16.00 

NO.  OF  YARN  ll's  NO.  OF  YARN  18's 

Hank  Roving  of  Fino  Frame ...    2.30  Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   4.00 

Double  on  Mule 2  Double  on  Mule 2 

Draft  of  Mule 9.6  Draft  of  Mule 9 

No.  of  Yarn .  .  .  .  1 1 . 04  No.  of  Yarn . .  .  .  18  . 00 


303 


COTTON  SPINNING 


265 


NO.  OF  YARN  12's 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   2 . 30 

Double  on  Mule 2 

Draft  of  Mule 10.5 

No.  of  Yarn 12.07 

NO.   OF  YARN  14's 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...    2 . 30 

Double  on  Mule 2 

Draft  of  Mule 12.2 

No.  of  Yarn. .  .  .14.03 


NO.  OF  YARN  20  's 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   4 . 00 

Double  on  Mule 2 . 

Draft  of  Mule -.  .  . 10 

No.  of  Yarn 20 . 00 

NO.   OF  YARN  24's 

Hank  Roving  of  Fine  Frame ...   4 . 00 

Double  on  Mule 2 

Draft  of  Mule 12 

No.  of  Yarn .  .  24 


MULE  SPINNING 

Briefly  speaking,  the  mule  consists  of  three  parts :  The  beam  for 
supporting  the  rolls,  creels,  etc;  the  carriage  which  contains  the  drums 
spindles,  fallers  and  parts  directly  connected;  and  the  headstock,  or 
mule  head,  which  contains  the  various  parts  that  control  the  move- 
ments of  the  machine.  The  mules  are  placed  in  pairs,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  221,  with  the  carriages  toward  each  other,  the  headstock  is  located 
a  little  nearer  one  end  of  the  mule  than  the  other,  thus  making  a  long 
and  a  short  side  to  the  mule  carriage,  the  short  side  always  being  to 
the  right  hand  of  the  headstock. 

In  explanation,  the  operations  of  the  mule  may  be  divided  into 
four  stages.  The  first  stage  is  called  drawing  and  twisting;  the 


§ 

t-O/VG    <S/OC 

SHORT  SIDE. 

WORK 

fl 

ALLEY 

SHORT  S/OE 

1 
LONG    <f/0f 

Fig.  221.    Plan  of  a  Pair  of  Mules. 

second,  backing  off;  the  third,  winding  and  the  fourth,  re-engaging. 

The  roving  is  placed  in  the  creels  and  passes  through  the  rolls  by 
which  it  is  drawn  in  the  same  manner  as  on  the  ring  frame. 

An  elevation  of  the  mule  carriage  is  shown  in  Fig.  222  and  a 
plan  of  the  gearing,  in  Fig.  223.  The  spindles,  I/',  and  the  drum, 
C6,  are  in  the  carriage,  E,  which.moves  back  and  forth  in  a  horizontal 
direction  upon  tracks,  E8,  which  are  called  carriage  tracks. 


307 


266 


COTTON  SPINNING 


When  the  operation  of  drawing  and  twisting  commences,  the 
carriage  is  at  the  innermost  point  of  its  traverse,  the  point  nearest 
the  rolls,  and  as  the  rolls  revolve  and  deliver  the  yarn,  the  spindles 


commence  to  turn  and  at  the  same  instant,  the  carriage  begins  its 
outward  run  and  the  yarn,  being  delivered  by  the  rolls,  is  kept  under 
a  slight  tension  and  is  twisted;  when  the  carriage  reaches  the  end  of 


308 


COTTON  SPINNING 


2(>7 


its  outward  run,  or  stretch,  which  is  about  sixty-four  inches,  it  is 
stopped  and  held  for  a  brief  period. 

On  the  outward  run,  the  driving  belt  is  on  the  tight  pulley,  A, 
and  the  spindles  and  rolls  are  revolving,  the  backing-off  cone  friction, 

o      < 


Fig.  223.    Plan  of  Gearing  of  the  Mule. 

B,  is  out  of  gear  as  is  also  the  drawing-up  friction,  T3.  The  backing- 
off  friction  is  revolving,  as  it  is  driven  from  a  gear  on  the  hub  of  the 
loose  pulley,  which  revolves  all  the  time,  as  the  driving  belt  is  slightly 
wider  than  the  face  of  the  tight  pulley  and  a  portion  of  it  runs  upon 
the  loose  pulley. 


309 


2GS  COTTON  SPINNING 

The  speed  of  the  driving  pulley  is  500  R.  P.  M.  The  spindles 
are  driven  from  the  rim  or  twist  pulley,  A2,  which  is  eighteen  inches 
in  diameter  and  which  is  fast  on  the  driving  shaft,  A3.  The  rim  band, 
C,  runs  from  the  rim  pulley  around  the  carrier  pulley,  C1,  which  is 
fastened  to  the  headstock.  From  this  point,  it  passes  forward  and 
around  the  carrier  pulley,  C4,  which  is  upon  the  carriage,  and  then 
passes  back  and  around  the  drum  pulley,  C3,  which  is  ten  inches  in 
diameter.  From  here,  the  band  passes  forward  around  the  carrier 
pulley,  C2,  which  is  carried  by  an  adjustable  screw,  E5,  and  which 
is  used  for  keeping  the  band  tight,  then  it  passes  back  and  around  a 
carrier  pulley,  C5,  and  back  to  the  twist  pulley. 

The  drum,  C6,  is  six  inches  in  diameter  and  the  whirl,  C7,  is 
three-quarters  of  an  inch.  The  speed  of  the  spindles  will  be  7105 
R.  P.  M. 

Example:  -  X  500  =7105 

10  X  /-o 

The  front  roll,  D,  is  driven  from  the  ma"in  shaft  by  the  twist  gear, 
D1,  which  has  twenty-seven  teeth,  and  the  gears,  D2,  of  fifty  teeth,  D3, 
of  twenty-five  teeth  and  the  front  roll  gear,  D4,  of  fifty  teeth. 

The  speed  of  the  front  rolls  will  be  135  R.  P.  M. 

Example:  }-??  X  500  ==  135 

The  front  roll  is  one  inch  in  diameter,  therefore,  135  revolutions 
will  give  a  delivery  of  423.90  inches  of  yarn  and  during  this  time, 
the  spindles  have  made  7105  revolutions. 

The  twist,  therefore,  will  be  16.76  twists  per  inch. 

7105 
Example:  423^0  = 

The  carriage,  E,  is  drawn  out  by  the  back,  or  carriage  shaft,  E1, 
which  extends  the  whole  length  of  the  mule  and  has  fast  upon  it  three 
scrolls,  E2,  one  in  the  center  and  one  at  each  end  (the  end  ones  are 
not  shown),  which  are  about  seven  inches  in  diameter  but  terminate 
at  the  ends  in  a  smaller  diameter. 

The  drawing-out  bands,  E3,  which  are  fastened  to  the  carriage, 
pass  back  and  around  the  scrolls  and  around  carrier  pulleys,  E2. 
The  center  carrier  pulley  runs  loose  upon  the  quadrant  shaft  while 
the  end  ones  turn  on  studs  which  are  screwed  to  the  ends  of  the  mule 


310 


COTTON  SPINNING  269 

framing.     From  the  carrier  pulleys,  the  bands  pass   back  and  are 
fastened  to  the  mule  carriage. 

The  carriage  shaft  is  driven  from  the  front  roll  gear  of  fifty  teeth 
and  through  the  intermediate  gear  of  fifty  teeth  and  the  gears  of 
ninety-six  and  twenty-six  teeth  and  the  carriage  shaft  gear,  D7,  of 
one  hundred  teeth.  The  speed  of  the  carriage  shaft  is  18.28  R.  P.  M. 

Xf)    -y    OA 

Examp'e:  anna  x  135  =  18-28 

The  scrolls  are  about  seven  inches  in  diameter  and  the  scroll  band 
will  be  about  seven  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  when  passed 
around  the  scroll. 

The  traverse  of  the  carriage  will  then  be  430.67  inches  per  minute. 
Example:  7.5  X  3.1416  X  18.28  =>  43067 

The  stretch  of  the  carriage  is  sixty-four  inches  and  as  the  carriage 
runs  at  the  rate  of  430.67  inches  per  minute,  each  stretch  of  sixty-four 
inches  will  require  about  nine  seconds  time  and  as  the  rolls  deliver 
the  yarn  at  the  rate  of  423.90  inches  per  minute,  in  nine  seconds,  they 
will  deliver  g9^  of  423.90  which  is  63.58  inches.  This  shows  that  the 
carriage  travels  a  slight  distance  more  than  the  inches  delivered  by 
the  front  roll.  This  excess  in  travel  is  called  the  "gain"  of  the  carriage 
and  amounts  sometimes  to  two  or  three  inches  in  each  stretch,  depend- 
ing upon  the  quality  and  length  of  the  cotton  staple. 

The  advantage  of  the  carriage  gain  is  to  subject  the  yarn  to  a 
slight  draft  after  it  has  left  the  rolls  and  as  the  twist  in  the  yarn  always 
runs  to  the  thin  places,  this  additional  drawing  elongates  the  soft  or 
untwisted  places  which  are  thicker  or  larger  in  diameter  and  thus  a 
more  even  thread  is  produced." 

Long  staple  cotton  will  permit  of  considerable  draft,  but  with 
short  cotton  little  or  no  draft  can  be  given  the  yarn  after  it  has  left 
the  rolls. 

At  the  commencement  of  the  outward  run  of  the  carriage,  the 
drawing-out  bands  are  wound  upon  the  large  diameter  of  the  scrolls 
and  the  carriage  runs  at  a  uniform  speed,  but,  as  the  scrolls  terminate 
in  a  smaller  diameter,  the  carriage  moves  at  a  relatively  slower  speed 
as  it  approaches  the  end  of  the  run. 

Backing-Off  Motion.  The  next  stage  in  the  operations  is  called 
the  backing-off.  By  this  is  meant  the  reversion  of  all  the  necessary 
parts  from  the  position,  occupied  during  the  outward  run,  to  the  posi- 


311 


270 


COTTON  SPINNING 


tion  which  they  are  obliged  to  assume  during  winding.     The  mechan- 
ism is  shown  in  Figs.  224,  225  and  226. 

At  the  end  of  the  outward  run,  the  carriage  shaft  clutch,  H1,  is 
thrown  out  of  gear,  the  rolls  and  spindles  cease  to  turn  and  the  carriage 
is  stationary.  During  this  period,  the  spindles  are  caused  to  revolve 
a  few  turns  in  the  opposite  direction  to  that  which  they  turned  in 


B- 


Fig.  224.    Detail  of  Cam  Shaft. 

spinning.  This  unwinds  the  few  coils  of  yarn  that  are  around  the 
spindle  between  the  top  of  the  cop  and  the  point  of  the  spindle.  The 
winding  faller,  K2,  which  acts  as  a  guide  for  the  yarn,  is  brought  down 
into  position  and  the  counterfaller,  K3,  ascends,  until  it  meets  the 
yarn,  so  as  to  maintain  an  even  tension  as  it  is  wound  upon  the  spindle. 
The  fallers  are  shown  in  this  position  in  Fig.  226.  This  is  brought 


312 


COTTON  SPINNING  271 

about  by  the  backing-off  friction  wheel,  B,  being  brought  into  contact 
with  the  tight  pulley,  A  (Fig.  222). 

The  cone  clutch  on  the  cam  shaft  is   put   in  gear,  and,   just 
previous  to  the  carriage  arriving  at  the  end  of  the  run,  the  belt  is 
moved  on  the  loose  pulley,  allowing  the  carriage  to  finish  the  stretch , 
by  its  momentum. 

At  this  point,  it  will  be  well  to  explain  just  how  the  backing-off 
friction  changes  the  direction  of  the  rotations  of  the  spindles. 

The  backing-off  friction  acts  first  as  a  stop  for  the  rim,  or  driving 
shaft,  and  secondly,  to  impart  motion  to  it  in  the  opposite  direction. 
The  backing-off  friction  revolves  all  of  the  time  because  a  part  of  the 
driving  belt  is  upon  the  loose  pulley  at  all  times  and  as  the  latter 
drives  the  backing-off  wheel  by  the  gear  of  twenty-seven  teeth,  which 
is  fast  upon  the  hub  of  the  loose  pulley,  and  the  gears  of  seventy-seven 
and  eleven  teeth,  which  are  upon  the  backing-off  shaft,  W,  and  the 
backing-off  wheel  of  eighty  teeth.  The  last  is  driven  in  the  opposite 
direction  from  the  tight  pulley  at  a  very  slow  speed  and,  when  suddenly 
thrown  into  contact  with  the  tight  pulley,  the  friction  acts  first  as  a 
brake  and  then  turns  the  spindles  a  few  revolutions,  in  the  opposite 
direction,  before  it  is  drawn  out  of  contact. 

In  Fig.  225,  is  shown  the  device  by  which  the  backing-off  friction 
is  operated.  In  the  hub  of  the  friction  is  a  groove,  in  which  runs  a 
clutch  lever,  P1,  with  its  fulcrum  at  P2.  The  long  end  of  the  lever  is 
connected  to  a  bell  crank,  P3.  To  the  end  of  this  bell  crank  is  fastened 
one  end  of  the  backing-off  rod,  B1,  the  other  end  being  connected 
to  the  backing-off  lever,  O5,  by  the  spring,  O6.  The  backing-off 
lever  is  fastened  to  the  headstock  by  a  stud,  S7. 

As  the  carriage  moves  out,  the  tight  pulley,  A,  and  the  backing-off 
friction,  B,  are  disengaged,  but  when  the  carriage  arrives  at  the 
end  of  the  run,  the  backing-off  arm,  K7,  comes  against  the  roll,  S6, 
which  is  upon  the  lever,  O5,  the  last,  being  raised.  By  so  doing, 
the  rod,  B1,  is  drawn  forward  in  the  direction  shown  by  the  arrow, 
the  friction  is  caused  to  engage  with  the  tight  pulley,  and  the  spindles 
are  rotated  in  the  opposite  direction. 

After  the  spindles  have  unwound  sufficient  length  of  yarn,  by 
their  reverse  movement,  it  is  evident  that  they  must  be  stopped  else 
too  much  yarn  will  be  unwound.  This  is  accomplished  by  the  locking 
of  the  fallers,  whose  movement  causes  the  backing-off  arm,  K7,  to  be 


313 


COTTON  SPINNING 


314 


& 
o   3 

«  s 
a* 
il 

.  fc. 
"2   a 


<   g 
*    H 

C/)      ~ 

Eo 
73 

O     ra 


COTTON  SPINNING 


273 


dropped,  suddenly,  out  of  contact  with  the  roll  on  the  backing-off 
lever;  this  allows  the  spring,  O6,  to  draw  back  on  the  lever  which 
comes  against  the  collar,  O7,  upon  the  backing-off  rod,  moving  the 
rod  back  and  the  friction  becomes  disengaged. 

The  fallers  are  drawn  down  and  locked  in  the  following  manner : 
Upon  the  drum  shaft,  R4,  is  a  plate,  P,  to  the  hub  of  which  is  fastened 
one  end  of  the  backing-off  chain,  L4,  the  other  end  being  fastened 
to  an  arm,  K5,  which  is  upon  the  winding  faller  shaft,  K1.  During 
the  operation  of  drawing  and  twisting,  the  revolutions  of  the  drum 


FLOOR      LINE 


Fig.  236.    Elevation  Showing  Details  of  Mule  Carriage. 

shaft  have  no  effect  on  the  plate,  as  it  is  loose  upon  the  drum 
shaft.  But  when  the  direction  of  the  drum  shaft  is  reversed,  to  unwind 
the  yarn  from  around  the  spindles,  the  plate  also  rotates,  being  driven 
by  a  pawl  and  ratchet.  The  chain  is  thus  wound  around  the  hub  of 
the  plate  and  the  faller  is  drawn  down  into  the  position  for  winding 
as  shown  in  Fig.  226. 

Resting  upon  the  top  of  the  builder,  or  copping  rail,  L3,  is  the 
copping  rail  roll,  L2,  which  is  supported  by  an  arm,  L,  called  the 


315 


274 


COTTON  SPINNING 


trailer  and  which  is  fastened  to  the  carriage  by  a  stud,  S3.  The  for- 
ward end  of  this  arm  is  free  to  swing  up  and  down,  and  is  supported 
by  a  guide,  P4.  Just  above  the  roll,  L2,  is  a  similar  roll,  L1,  called 
the  locking  roll  against  which  rests  the  lower  end  of  a  lever,  K4, 
which  is  called  the  faller  lock.  This  lock  is  hung  from  the  arm,  K5, 
which  is  fastened  to  the  winding  faller  shaft,  K1. 

When  the  carriage  is  on  its  outward  run,  the  fuller  lock  rests 
against  the  locking  roll  as  shown  in  Fig.  225.  But  when  the  direction 
of  the  drum  is  reversed  and  the  faller  is  drawn  down  into  position  for 
winding,  the  faller  lock  is  drawn  upwards,  until  the  recess  in  its  lower 
part  is  raised  high  enough  to  fall  forward  over  the  locking  roll,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  226,  in  which  position  the  lock  remains  during  the 
inward  run. 

In  transferring  the  driving  belt  on  to  the  loose  pulley,  just  previous 
to  the  arrival  of  the  carriage  at  the  end  of  its  outward  run,  a  great 
saving  in  time  is  made  by  a  quicker  backing-off.  The  device  which 


Fig.  227.    Belt  Relieving  Motion. 

controls  this  motion  is  called  the  belt  relieving  motion  and  is  shown 
in  Fig.  227.  As  the  carriage  comes  out,  a  projecting  part,  H5,  comes 
against  the  lever,  H4,  which  through  the  rod,  H7,  bell  crank,  H8,  and 
connection,  H8,  moves  the  belt  guide,  D6,  on  to  the  loose  pulley. 

During  the  backing-off  and  while  the  fallers  are  being  locked,  the 
carriage  is  held  rigidly  for  a  brief  period  to  enable  this  motion  to 
operate  before  the  carriage  starts  on  its  inward  run.  If  some  means 
were  not  provided,  the  carriage,  upon  arriving  at  the  end  of  the  out- 
ward run,  would  start  back  before  the  backing-off  and  the  locking 
of  the  fallers  could  take  place.  To  prevent  this,  the  mule  is  provided 
with  a  holding-out  catch  which  is  shown  in  Figs.  225  and  226.  Fas- 
tened to  the  carriage  by  a  stud,  N3,  is  a  lever,  K9,  called  the  holding-ouC 
finger,  while  upon  the  fore  part  of  the  headstock  is  a  lever,  R2,  called 
the  holding-out  lever,  one  end  of  which  is  provided  with  a  roll,  R3,  the 


316 


COTTON  SPINNING 


275 


other  end  is  fastened  to  the  holding-out  rod,  R6,  by  collars,  R5.  This 
lever  has,  for  its  fulcrum,  a  stud,  R4. 

When  the  carriage  arrives  at  the  end  of  the  outward  run,  the  hold- 
ing-out finger  comes  against  the  roll  in  the  end  of  the  holding-out 
lever  and  holds  it  firmly  in  position.  By  so  doing,  the  drawing-up 
friction,  by  which  the  carriage  is  drawn  in,  is  held  out  of  gear.  When 
the  backing-off  is  completed  and  the  fallers  locked,  the  finger  is  lifted 
clear  of  the  roll  and  the  holding-out  rod  allows  the  drawing-up 
friction  to  drop  into  gear. 

Backing=0ff  Chain  Tightening  Motion.  We  have  seen, 
already,  that  at  the  end  of  the  outward  run,  and  after  the  carriage  has 
come  to  a  dead  stop,  the  winding  faller  descends  and  guides  the  yarn 


Fig.  228.    Elevation  Showing  Fallers. 

on  to  the  spindle,  while  the  counter  faller  rises  until  it  meets  the 
yarn,  acting  as  a  tension  upon  it.  There  remains  to  explain,  in 
connection  with  the  fallers,  the  different  conditions  under  which 
they  must  work. 

When  drawing  and  twisting  take  place  during  the  outward  run 
of  the  carriage,  the  fallers  are  in  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  228. 
The  winding  faller,  K2,  is  above  the  yarn  and  the  counter  faller,  K3, 
is  below,  both  clear  of  the  yarn.  But  during  the  operation  of'backing- 
off,  the  fallers  are  made  to  assume  the  position  shown  in  Fig.  229. 


317 


276  COTTON  SPINNING 

The  winding  faller  descends  and  guides  the  yarn  on  to  the  spindles, 
and  the  counter  faller  rises  until  it  meets  the  underside  of  the  yarn  and 
acts  as  a  tension  upon  it. 

When  the  cop  is  in  the  early  stages  of  formation,  the  length  of 
yarn,  unwound  from  the  bare  spindle  between  the  cop  and  point, 
is  considerable,  as  shown  in  Fig.  230  by  the  distance  between  the 
point  of  the  spindle,  A,  and  the  top  of  the  cop,  B.  In  order  to  move 
the  yarn  from  A  to  B,  the  winding  faller  wire  must  descend  from  C 
to  D  while  the  counter  faller  wire  rises  from  E  to  F. 

As  the  cop  grows  longer  and  the  position  of  the  winding  gradually 
approaches  the  top  of  the  spindle,  the  length  cf  yarn  to  be  un wound- 
is  considerably  less  as  shown  by  the  distance  between  G  and  II  in 


Fig.  229.    Elevation  Showing  Fallers. 

Fig.  231.  The  winding  faller  will  move  from  K  to  L  only  and  the 
counter  faller,  from  M  to  N.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  movements 
of  the  fallers,  during  the  early  stages  of  the  building  of  the  cop,  are 
considerably  greater  than  when  approaching  the  finish  and  that  the 
length  to  be  unwound,  from  around  the  bare  spindle,  is  considerably 
more,  and  it  follows  that  the  revolutions  given  to  the  spindle  in  a 
reverse  direction  must  gradually  decrease. 

The  gradual  decrease  in  the  revolutions  of  the  spindle  and  the 
distance  moved  by  the  faller  wires  are  regulated  by  the  backing-off 
chain  tightening  motion. 


318 


COTTON  SPINNING 


277 


We  have  seen  that  the  fallers  are  drawn  down  by  .the  backing-off 
chain,  which  is  wound  around  the  backing-off  plate,  P,  by  the  reverse 
direction  of  the  drum. 

During  the  first  part  of  the  formation  of  the  cop,  a  slack  backing- 
off  chain  is  of  no  objection,  as  it  gives  the  spindles  an  opportunity 
to  unwind  the  yarn  before  the  faller  wires 
move  down.  In  Fig.  230,  the  faller  wire 
moves  from  C  to  D  in  about  the  same 
time  as  it  does  from  K  to  L  in  Fig.  231. 
This  is  a  very  much  shorter  distance,  and, 
unless  the  spindles  have  unwound  a  con- 
siderable length  of  yarn,  there  is  great 
danger  of  the  winding  faller  wire  over- 
taking and  breaking  the  yarn. 

As  the  cop  grows  longer,  and  the  re- 
verse movement  of  the  spindles  less,  there 
is  not  as  much  danger  of  this  as  the 
movement  from  the  position,  occupied 
during  spinning,  to  that  which  is  neces- 
sary for  winding,  is  considerably  less  and 
the  faller  starts  downward  earlier  at  each 
layer  wound  until,  at  the  finish,  it  comes 
down  and  just  touches  the  yarn  the  mo- 
ment the  spindles  commence  their  reverse 
movement. 

The  device,  by  which  this  motion  is 
governed,  is  shown  in  Fig.  225  and  is 
operated  in  the  following  way.  Attached 
to  the  backing-off  plate  is  one  end  of  the 
tightening  chain,  S3,  the  other  end  is 
fastened  to  a  lever,  O9,  called  the  chain 
tightening  lever,  which  turns  on  a  stud,  S4.  As  the  carriage  moves 
out,  this  lever  hangs  in  a  position  which  causes  its  lower  end  to  just 
touch  the  chain  tightening  incline,  O8.  This  incline  is  fastened  to 
the  builder  shoe  connecting  rod,  O4,  which  connects  the  front  and 
back  builder  shoes. 

As  the  building  of  the  cop  progresses  and  the  builder  shoes  are 
moved  back,  the  incline  is  brought  more  and  more  into  the  path  of  the 


Fig.  230.    Diagram  Showing 
Movement  of  Fallers. 


319 


278 


COTTON  SPINNING 


chain  tightening  lever  which  causes  the  lever  to  unwind  the  tightening 
chain  and  to  wind  the  b'acking-off  chain  on  to  the  plate.  By  this 
movement,  the  slack,  which  exists  in  the  backing-off  chain  during  the 
early  stages  of  the  cop  building,  is  gradually  taken  out  and  the  fallers 
are  drawn  down  a  little  earlier  for  each  stretch  of  the  carriage. 

Winding.  The  third  stage  in  the  op- 
erations of  the  mule  is  called  winding. 

Immediately  after  the  fallers  have 
been  brought  into  position  and  locked, 
the  carriage  commences  its  inward  run, 
and  the  spindles  rotate  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  when  twisting  and,  in  so  doing, 
wind  on  to  the  cops  the  yarn  that  is  re- 
leased as  the  carriage  runs  in.  The  wind- 
ing faller  descends  rapidly,  and  guides  a 
few  coils  down  the  cop  and  then  rises 
very  slowly  and  arrives  at  the  starting 
point  as  the  carriage  reaches  the  end  of  its 
inward  run. 

Before  describing  the  winding  opera- 
tion, it  is  necessary  to  know  what  causes 
the  carriage  to  be  drawn  inward  and  also 
to  understand  the  changes  that  take  place 
by  the  partial  rotation  of  the  cam  shaft 
sleeve. 

In  Fig.  224  is  shown  a  detail  of  the 
cam  shaft  and  in  Fig.  232  an  end  elevation. 
The  cam  shaft,  D1,  rotates  all  of  the 
time  that  the  mule  is  running  and  is  driven 
from  the  backing-off  shaft  by  the  gears  of 
nineteen  and  thirty-eight  teeth. 
Covering  almost  the  whole  length  of  the  cam  shaft  is  a  shell  or 
sleeve,  D8,  called  the.  cam  shaft  sleeve  upon  which  are  the  various 
cams.  The  first  .one  is  the  cam  clutch  and  is  made  in  halves,  one 
piece,  D2,  is  fastened  to  the  cam  shaft  and  the  other  half,  D3,  to  the 
sleeve.  The  second  cam  is  the  front  roll  clutch  cam,  J8;  the  third  is 
the  carriage  shaft  clutch  cam,  H3;  and  the  fourth  is  the  shipper  cam, 
I)5. 


Fig.  231.    Diagram  Showing 
Movement  of  Fallers. 


320 


COTTON  SPINNING 


279 


On  the  outside  of  the  headstock  are  two  levers,  B6  and  B7,  called 
the  front  and  back  change  motion  levers  and  which  are  connected 
by  a  rod,  B5,  called  the  change  motion  rod.  On  the  forward  end  of 
the  rod  is  the  shipper  dog,  B4,  which  operates  the  cam  clutch  lever,  B2. 

Just  as  the  carriage  reaches  the  end  of  the  outward  run,  a  roll 
B9,  which  is  carried  by  a  stand,  forming  part  of  the  carriage,  comes 
against  the  lever,  B6,  and  causes  the  rod  to  move  forward  and  with  it 


Fig.  232.    End  Elevation  of  Cam  Shaft. 

the  cam  clutch  lever.  This  movement  causes  the  two  parts,  D2  and 
D3,  of  the  cam  clutch  to  engage  and  the  cam  shaft  shell  is  given  a  half 
revolution,  causing  all  of  the  cams  to  assume  opposite  positions  to 
those  which  they  occupied  during  the  outward  run. 

When  the  cam  sleeve  has  made  a  half  revolution,  the  clutch  is 
caused  to  be  disengaged  by  the  peculiar  shape  of  the  cam  clutch  lever. 

In  Fig.  233,  it  will  be  seen,  that  both  parts,  J  and  J1,  of  the  front 
roll  clutch,  are  engaged  and  we  will  assume  that  the  front  roll  is 
revolving,  which  is  the  case  when  the  carriage  runs  out,  but  when  the 
cam  sleeve  changes,  the  position  of  the  cam  is  directly  opposite  from 
that  which  is  shown  in  the  drawing.  This  disengages  the  clutch 
and  stops  the  rotation  of  the  front  roll. 

Fig.  234  shows  both  parts,  H  and  H1,  of  the  carriage  shaft  clutch 


321 


280 


COTTON  SPINNING 


as  engaged  for  drawing  the  carriage  out,  but  with  the  changing  of  the 
cam  sleeve,  the  clutch  is  disengaged  and  the  revolutions  of  the  carriage 
shaft  cease.  H1  is  made  in  two  pieces  with  corrugated  faces  which 
are  kept  in  contact  by  a  heavy  steel  spring,  W6.  Should  anything 
obstruct  the  outward  movement  of  the  carriage,  this  spring  will  "give" 
and  allow  the  clutch  to  rotate  without  imparting  movement  to  the 
carriage. 

In  the  end  elevation  (Fig.  232)  the  belt  shipper  cam,  D5,  is  shown 
in  the  position  necessary  on  the  outward  run.     The  belt  is  upon  the 


Fig.  233.    Elevation  Showing  Front  lloll  Clutch. 

tight  pulley,  but  with  the  half  revolution  of  the  cam  sleeve,  the  belt 
guide  is  locked  into  position  over  the  loose  pulley. 

We  have  already  seen  that  just  before  the  carriage  arrives  at 
the  end  of  the  outward  run,  the  belt  is  moved  on  to  the  loose  pulley 
by  the  belt  relieving  motion,  but  unless  the  belt  is  locked  into  position 
by  the  shipper  cam,  it  will  be  moved  back  on  to  the  tight  pulley  by  the 
inward  run  of  the  carriage. 

The  carriage  is  drawn  in,  in  the  following  manner :  On  the  scroll 
shaft,  R10,  Fig.  223,  are  the  scrolls,  A,  B  and  C,  upon  which  are  wound 
the  drawing-up  bands.  The  scroll  shaft  is  driven  from  the  backing- 
off  shaft  through  the  gears  of  fifteen,  nineteen,  thirteen  and  thirty- 
eight  teeth. 

On  the  lower  end  of  the  drawing-up  shaft,  S,  is  the  drawing-up 


322 


COTTON  SPINNING 


281 


friction,  P,  which  rotates  with  the  shaft.  The  bottom  of  the  friction, 
T3,  upon  which  is  the  bevel  gear  of  thirteen 
teeth,  is  mounted  loosely  upon  the  shaft. 

During  the  outward  run,  the  scroll  shaft 
is  caused  to  rotate  by  the  movement  of  the 
carriage,  but  when  the  outward  movement 
ceases  and  the  cam  shell  changes,  the  drawing- 


H 


H 


Fig.  234.    Elevation  Showing  Carriage  Shaft  Clutch. 

up  friction,  P,  engages  with  the  lower  part,  T3, 
and  the  carriage  is  drawn  in.  The  scrolls,  A 
and  B,  serve  for  this  purpose,  while  the  scroll, 
C,  acts  as  a  check  upon  the  carriage.  The 
scroll  band  unwinds  from  C  while  the  other 
bands  are  winding  around  A  and  B. 

It  will  be  necessary  to  refer  to  Fig.  235  to 
understand  the  actual  winding  operation. 
During  the  outward  run,  sixty-four  inches  of 
yarn  have  been  delivered  and  it  is  necessary 
that  the  spindles  shall  be  given  a  sufficient  number  of  revolutions, 
and  at  the  correct  speed,  to  wind  on  this  length  as  it  is  released  by 
the  inward  run. 

We  will  assume,  that  while  winding  the  first  layer,  the  spindle 


Fig.  235.    Diagram  of  Cop 
Showing  Winding. 


323 


282  COTTON  SPINNING 

will  be  one-quarter  inch  diameter  in  the  distance,  A-B,  and  it  must 
be  revolved  at  a  constant  speed  to  wind  the  sixty-four  inches,  but  as 
succeeding  layers  are  added,  and  the  diameter  of  the  cop  increases, 
the  commencing  point  is  higher  each  time  and  the  finishing  point  is 
raised  at  a  greater  proportion.  This  lengthens  the  "chase",  as  the 
surface  of  the  cop  is  called,  which  is  shown  by  the  line,  C-D.  There 
is  produced  a  cone-shaped  surface  until,  when  the  cop  reaches  its 
full  diameter,  as  shown  by  the  lines,  E-E,  the  commencing  and 
finishing  points  are  raised  in  the  same  proportion  at  each  stretch, 
which  forms  a  straight  cylindrical  shape  as  shown  by  the  outlines, 
E-E  and  G-G. 

When  winding  the  first  layer,  the  speed  of  the  spindle  must  be 
constant  and,  as  its  diameter  is  one-quarter  of  an  inch,  81.48  revolu- 
tions will  be  necessary  to  wind  sixty-four  inches  of  yarn. 

-  81-48 


When  the  cop  reaches  the  diameter  shown  at  C-C,  which  we  will 
call  one-half  of  an  inch,  its  speed  at  the  bottom  must  be  40.74  revolu- 
tions. 


As  the  winding  moves  up  the  cone,  the  speed  of  the  spindle 
increases  until  at  the  point,  DD,  which  is  one-quarter  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  its  speed  is  81.48  revolutions. 

When  the  cop  reaches  its  full  diameter  at  EE,  which  we  will  call 
one  inch,  its  speed  must  be  20.37  R.  P.  M.  or  one-fourth  as  great  as 
the  speed  of  the  bare  spindle. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  increase  in  speed  of  the  spindle  must  be 
proportionate  to  the  decrease  in  its  tliameter,  as  the  yarn  is  wound 
up  toward  the  top  of  the  chase,  and  the  speed  decreases  for  each  new 
layer,  while  the  bottom  of  the  cop  is  being  formed,  until  the  full 
diameter  is  reached.  From  this  point,  the  speed  of  the  cop,  at  the 
commencement  of  each  layer,  is  the  same,  20.37  R.  P.  M.,  while  the 
speed  of  the  spindle,  at  the  finish  of  each  layer,  is  also  the  same,  81.48 
R.  P.  M.,  except  the  number  of  revolutions  necessary  to  compensate 
for  the  taper  of  the  spindle  which  will  be  considered  later. 

Quadrant.  When  the  carriage  runs  out,  the  spindles  are  driven 
by  the  rim  band,  but  when  winding,  the  spindles  are  caused  to  rotate 


324 


COTTON  SPINNING 


283 


by  the  quadrant  chain,  Q1,  one  end  of  which  is  attached  to  the  quad- 
rant arm,  Q,  the  other  fastened  to  the  winding  drum,  W5,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  223.  Connected  to  this  drum  is  a  gear  of  sixty-eight  teeth,  which 


-1-i-l 


-4_4 


a         & 

•*-     fo 


drives  a  gear  of  thirty-four  teeth,  the  latter  connected  to  the  drum 
shaft  by  a  pawl  and  ratchet;  the  spindle  drum  makes  two  revolutions 
to  one  of  the  winding  drum. 


325 


284  COTTON  SPINNING 


While  drawing  and  twisting  are  going  on,  the  winding  drum  is 
driven  by  a  special  band  and  the  chain  is  wound. 

Fig.  236  is  a  diagram  of  the  quadrant  arm  and  winding  drum  in 
several  positions.  The  quadrant  arm  moves  about  ninety  degrees, 
from  A  to  B,  while  the  carriage  is  making  the  whole  of  its  run  from 
I  to  L.  While  the  first  layer  is  winding,  the  nut  by  which  the  chain 
is  attached  to  the  arm  is  at  C,  its  lowest -position,  nearest  the  fulcrum 
at  S,  and  as  the  quadrant  arm  moves  the  ninety  degrees,  this  point 
will  move  to  D  while  the  carriage  moves  the  whole  length  of  the  inward 
run. 

The  movement  of  the  nut  as  compared  to  the  movement  of  the 
carriage  will  be  very  slight,  and  the  spindles  will  be  rotated  at  nearly  a 
uniform  speed. 

When  the  cop  has  reached  one-half  inch  diameter,  the  nut  will 
have  moved  up  the  arm  to  a  point  at  E.  Here  it  is  shown  in  four 
positions  marked,  E,  F,  G  and  H.  The  winding  drum  is  shown  also 
in  four  positions,  marked  I,  J,  K  and  L. 

When  the  nut  moves  from  E  to  F,  the  chain  will  have  moved  in  a 
horizontal  line,  equal  to  the  distance  from  O  to  P,  and  the  drum  will 
move  from  I  to  J.  When  it  reaches  G,  the  movement  is  less  as  shown 
by  the  distance,  P-Q,  and  the  drum  moves  from  J  to  K,  the  same 
distance  as  before.  As  the  nut  reaches  the  point  H,  the  movement 
wrill  be  considerably  less,  as  shown  by  the  distance,  Q-R,  and  the 
carriage  moves  from  K  to  L,  the  same  distance  as  in  each  of  the  other 
stages. 

During  the  early  stages  of  the  building  of  the  cop,  the  horizontal 
movement  of  the  quadrant  nut  is  more  uniform  and  the  spindles  are 
run  at  nearly  a  uniform  speed. 

When  the  carriage  starts  to  run  in,  from  I  to  J,  the  horizontal 
movement  of  the  nut,  from  C  to  D,  corresponds,  nearly,  to  the  move- 
ment of  the  carriage  and  the  spindles  run  at  a  comparatively  slow 
speed  but  as  the  carriage  recedes  from  the  starting  point,  the  hori- 
zontal movement  of  the  nut  decreases  in  proportion  to  the  movement 
of  the  carriage  and  the  spindles  are  turned  at  a  proportionately  faster 
speed,  by  more  of  the  chain  unwinding  from  around  the  drum. 

When  the  cop  reaches  its  largest  diameter,  the  nut  is  at  its  highest 
point,  A,  and  remains  at  this  point  until  the  cop  is  finished.  The 
speed  of  the  spindles,  at  different  points  for  each  stretch,  is  the  same. 


326 


COTTON  SPINNING 


285 


Reference  has  been  made  to  the  fact  of  the  spindle  being  larger 
at  the  base  than  at  the  point,  and  that  some  means  must  be  employed 
to  make  up  for  this  difference.  If  this  is  not  done,  the  noses  of  the 


[ol 


ftl  *- 


m 


cops  will  be  soft,  caused  by  slack  winding.     To  overcome  this,  a 
device,  called  the  automatic  nosing  motion,  is  used. 

The  winding  drum  is  made  with  a  straight  face,  for  the  greater 


327 


286 


COTTON  SPINNING 


portion  of  its  length,  but  terminates  in  a  smaller  diameter  at  the  end 
of  which  the  chain  is  fastened. 

While  the  first  half  of  the  cop  is  building,  the  chain  unwinds  from 
the  straight  face  of  the  drum,  but  as  the  cop  approaches  the  finish, 
the  chain  is  gradually  shortened  by  winding  around  a  drum  formed 
on  the  quadrant  nut.  This  causes  the  chain  to  unwind  on  to  the 
smaller  diameter  of  the  winding  drum  and  g'ves  the  spindles  a  few 
additional  turns  just  as  the  carriage  arrives  at  the  end  of  the  run. 

Builder.  By  referring  to  Fig.  225,  the  builder,  or  copping  rail, 
will  be  seen  to  consist  of  two  parts,  a  main  piece,  L3,  and  a  short  piece, 
'O3,  called  the  loose  incline. 

The  main  piece  is  supported  at  the  front  by  the  builder  shoe, 
O1,  and  at  the  back  by  the  shoe,  O10.  The  forward  end  of  the  loose 
.incline  is  supported  by  the  shoe,  O2.  The  shoes  are  connected  by  the 

rod,  O4.  At  each  stretch,  the  shoes  are 
moved  back,  causing  the  rail  to  drop  a 
little  and  the  fallers  to  rise  a  correspond- 
ing distance,  thus  bringing  the  winding 
higher  upon  the  spindles. 

Fig.  237  shows  the  copping  rail,  A, 
composed  of  one  piece  and  supported  at 
each  end  by  shoes,  B  and  C.  The  fal- 
lers are  shown  above  in  three  positions, 
1,  2  and  3. 

When  winding  commences,  the  faller 
wire  is  in  the  first  position  but,  when  the 
carriage  reaches  the  highest  point  in  the 
rail,  at  the  second  position,  the  faller 
wire  has  descended  to  the  lowest  point. 
From  here  to  the  third  position,  the  faller 
rises  slowly  until  it  reaches  the  same  height  as  the  starting  point. 
This  will  cause  the  yarn  to  wind  on  to  the  spindle,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
238,  by  the  distance  C  to  D.  The  distance,  C  to  D,  is  considerably 
greater  than  the  distance,  A  to  B,  and  the  finishing  point,  D,  has 
risen  from  A  to  D  at  a  much  quicker  rate  than  the  commencing, 
which  has  moved  from  B  to  C,  only.  It  is  evident  that  if  the  rail 
is  composed  of  one  piece,  it  will  cause  all  of  the  layers  to  be  wound 
the  same  height. 


Fig.  238.    Diagram  of  Cop 
Showing  Winding. 


328 


COTTON  SPINNING  287 

The  way  to  overcome  this  is  to  have  a  loose  incline  as  shown 
in  Fig.  239. 

The  builder  rail,  H,  I  and  J,  is  made  in  two  pieces,  the  surface, 
H-I,  is  hinged  to  J  at  I.  By  this  means,  it  is  possible  to  lower  the 
points,  H  and  J,  as  much  as  is  shown  by  the  distance,  M,  and  as  these 
points  represent  the  start  and  finish  of  the  stretch,  it  will  be  seen  that 
the  yarn  must  commence  and  finish  winding  at  the  same  point,  while 
the  point,  I,  must  fall  to  a  less  extent  than  either  the  points,  J  or  H, 
as  shown  by  the  distance,  L.  The  distance,  L,  represents  the  move-1 
ment  B  to  C  in  Fig.  238  and  the  distance,  M,  represents  the  movement 
AtoD. 

This  continues  while  the  bottom  of  the  cop  is  building  after 
which  the  points,  H,  I  and  J,  fall  to  the  same  extent,  as  the  winding 
gradually  approaches  the  top  of  the  spindle. 

When  the  inward  run  is  finished,  the  fallers  are  unlocked.  The 
cam  sleeve  is  given  a  half  revolution  and  the  parts  are  caused  to  re-eri- 


Fig.  239.    Diagram  Showing  Loose  Incline. 

gage  ready  to  commence  the  operation  of  drawing  and  twisting  again. 
The  front  roll  clutch  is  put  in  gear,  the  drawing-up  friction  is  disen- 
gaged and  the  belt  is  moved  on  to  the  tight  pulley. 

During  the  run  in,  while  the  front  roll  clutch  is  disengaged,  the 
front  roll  is  caused  to  turn  about  one  revolution,  being  driven  from 
the  carriage  shaft  by  what  is  called  the  roller  motion,  shown  in  Fig. 
240.  This  consists  of  a  plate,  A4,  keyed  to  the  front  roll  which  carries 
a  pawl,  A8,  held  by  a  spring,  A7,  in  contact  with  teeth  formed  on  the 
inside  of  the  roller  motion  gear,  A5. 

When  the  carriage  runs  out,  the  front  roll  is  driven  from  the 
twist  gear,  as  already  described,  but  when  it  runs  in,  motion  is  com- 
municated to  the  front  roll,  from  the  carriage  shaft,  through  the  gears 
of  twenty-two,  fifty  and  seventy  teeth  (Fig.  222)  by  the  pawl  engaging 
the  teeth  of  the  roller  motion  gear. 


288 


COTTON  SPINNING 


Snarls    are   produced    in   yarn  in  many  ways.     Following  are 
some  causes: 

The  quadrant  nut  may  be  too  high. 

The  fallers  may  unlock  too  soon. 

The  nosing  motion  may  not  operate  until  the  cops  get  too  full. 


Fig.  240.    Roller  Motion. 

There  may  not  be  enough  gain  in  the  carriage. 

If  the  counter  faller  is  too  high  on  the  outward  run,  it  will  lift 
the  yarn  from  the  points  of  the  spindles. 

The  rim  and  spindle  bands  may  be  too  slack. 

If  the  ends  are  left  down  too  long,  snarls  will  be  made,  when  the 
end  is  pieced  up,  by  the  cop  not  being  pushed  up  the  spindle. 

The  snarling  motion  may  not  be  set  correctly. 

The  bolsters  and  steps  for  the  spindles  may  be  badly  worn. 

.Uneven  roving  will  cause  snarls  by  winding  loosely  on  some 
spindles  and  tightly  on  others. 

Snarling  Motion.  To  overcome  snarling  of  the  yarn,  the  mule 
is  provided  with  what  is  called  a  snarling  motion,  which  is  shown  in 
Fig.  241. 

Around  the  loose  half  of  the  front  roll  clutch,  J1,  passes  a  strap, 
J3,  connected  to  the  back  end  of  which  is  a  weight,  J5;  on  the  front 
end  is  a  smaller  weight,  J6.  Both  parts,  J  and  J1,  of  the  clutch  are 
mounted  loosely  upon  the  front  roll,  D.  A  dog,  J2,  is  keyed  to  the 
shaft.  On  the  part,  J1,  of  the  clutch  are  two  lugs  which  project 
between  the  ears  of  the  dog,  J2. 


330 


COTTON  SPINNING 


289 


When  the  teeth  of  J1  are  caused  to  engage  with  the  teeth  of  J, 
motion  is  communicated  to  the  front  roll  by  the  lugs  on  J1  turning 
until  they  come  in  contact  with  the  ears  of  the  dog.  When  J1 
turns,  the  friction  of  the  strap  carries  the  weight,  J5,  up,  until  it  comes 
in  contact  with  J1,  where  it  remains  until  the  end  of  the  outward  run 

50  TEETH 


^   D 


Fig.  241.    Snarling  Motion. 

is  reached.  When  the  clutch  is  thrown  out,  the  part,  J1,  is  turned 
backward  by  the  weight,  J5,  overbalancing  J6,  until  the  lugs  come 
against  the  back  side  of  the  ears  of  J2.  The  carriage  starts  out  at 
the  same  time  that  the  clutch  is  thrown  in,  and,  as  no  movement  is 
given  to  the  front  roll  until  the  lugs  come  against  the  ears  of  the 
carrier,  the  snarls  are  taken  out  of  the  yarn  by  the  outward  movement 
of  the  carriage. 


331 


INDEX 


The  page  numbers  of  this  volume  will  be  found  at  the  bottom  of  the 
pages;  the  numbers  at  the  top  refer  only  to  the  section. 


Adjustable  cylinder  bearing 
Applying  clothing 
Automatic  feeder  and  opener 
Automatic  feeder,  evener  for 
Automatic  safety-stop 


Back  plate 

Back  stop  motion  of  slubber 

Backing-off  chain  tightening  motion 

Backing-off  motion 

Bale 

dimensions  of 

opening  of 
Bale  breaker 
Baling  cotton 

Bessonette 

"Lowry  bale" 

"round-lap"  system 

square  bale 
Beaters 

Bessonette  bale 
Bobbin  lead 

Botanical  varieties  of  cotton 
Breaker  picker 

with  condenser  and  gauge-box 

with  screen  section 
Builder 

Builders  used  on  ring  frame 
Burnishing 


Calculations 

of  card  production 

for  comb 
Note. — For  page  numbers  see  foot  of  pages. 


127 

132 

46 

74 

91 


114 
251 
317 
311 


Calculation 

of  draft 

of  production  of  machine 

of  weight  of  lap 
Cap  bars 

Card  clothing,  kinds  of  wire  for 
Card  room,  arrangement  of 
Carding 

theory  of 
Carrier  roll 
Change  gears,  table 
"Churka" 
Cleaning  trunk 


Page 

170 

171 

93 

277 

136 

101 

101 

.105 

215 

227 

17 

43 


39 

Clearers 

218 

32 

Clothing 

33 

applying  of 

132 

20 

for  cylinders,  doffer,  and  flats 

129 

21 

defects  in 

129 

22 

number  of  wire  and  points  per  square 

21 

foot  hi 

133 

20 

Coiler 

119 

•    57 

Color  of  cotton 

31 

21 

Comb 

174 

233 

Combed  yarns 

165 

13 

Combination  breaker  and  finisher 

64 

43 

Combing 

165 

51 

Combing  machines,  arrangement  of 

165 

61 

Condenser 

51 

242,   328 

Cones 

239 

289 

eveners  for 

186 

149 

Cotton 

baling  of                                            20. 

39 

botanical  varieties  of 

13 

color  of 

31 

152 

cultivation  of  American 

15 

19S 

drawing  of 

201 

333 


II 

INDEX 

Page 

I 

'age 

Cotton 

Empty  bobbin,  speed  of 

236 

Egyptian 

26 

Even  running  as  to  length  of  staple 

32 

ginning  of 

17 

Evener  cones 

86 

grading  of 

27 

Evener  motion 

203 

Gulf 

26 

Eveners 

74 

invoicing  of 

32 

for  pickers 

81 

length  of  staple 

30 

mixing  of 

34 

F 

moisture  in 

31 

Fan  draft 

54 

motes  in 

28 

Feed  motion 

177 

neps  in 

28 

Feed  plates                                              jo7, 

114 

opening  of 

40 

Filling  cam 

292 

Peruvian 

27 

Filling  yarn,  table 

303 

picking  of 

16.   40 

Flat  chain 

127 

pulling  of 

130 

Flat  grinders 

142 

round  bale 

39 

Flats 

115 

Sea  Island 

25 

Flexible  bend 

122 

strength  of  staple 

30 

Fluted  rolls 

256 

Texas 

27 

diameter  of 

220 

uniformity  in  length 

30 

Fly  frames 

228 

Upland 

27 

Flyer,  speed  of 

236 

in  the  U.  8. 

12 

Flyer  lead 

233 

value  of 

24 

Friction  let-off 

89 

Cotton  fiber 

11.   36 

Front  roll,  speed  of 

236 

Cotton  plant,  history  of 

11 

Full  cam  stop  motion 

217 

Cotton  spinning 

39.   331 

Full  bobbin  stop  motion 

248 

Cotton  wax 

23 

"Furnace  test"  for  moisture  in  cotton 

31 

Creels 

275 

Cultivation  of  American  cotton 

15 

G 

Cut  staple 

19 

Gauge-box 

52 

Cylinder  doffer  and  flats 

111 

Gauges  for  setting  doffer,  etc. 

113 

Cylinder  screen 

113 

Gearing                                                     115, 

296 

D 

comber 

197 

Detaching  roll  cams 

186 

Ginning  cotton 

17 

Detaching  roll  motion 

183 

Gins 

Diameter  of  fluted  rolls 

220 

prior 

18 

Doffer 

115 

roller 

17 

Doffer  comb 

115 

saw 

17 

Double  boss 

257 

Gossypium  arboreum 

13 

Drafts  and  weights 

304,   306 

Gossypium  barbadense 

13 

Drawing  of  cotton 

201 

Gossypium  herbaceum 

14 

Drawing  frames 

206 

Gossypium  hirsutum 

14 

operation  of 

208 

Grading  of  cotton 

27 

Dust-room 

43 

Grinder  rolls 

driving  of 

138 

E 

speed  of 

142 

Egyptian  cotton 

26 

Grinders 

Electrical  stop  motion 

213 

flat 

142 

Note. — For  page  numbers  see  foot  of  pages. 


334 


Grinders 

long-roll 

traverse 

Grinding  of  cylinder  and  doffer 
Grinding  former     i    . 
Gulf  cotton 

H 

Horizontal  cleaning  trunk 


Inclined  cleaning  trunk 
Intermediate  and  finisher  pickers 
Invoicing  of  cotton 


K 


Knock-off  device 


Lap,  weight  of 
Laps  from  the  breaker 
Leader,  cylinder,  and  flats 
Leader  and  leader  screen 
Leader  clothing 
Long-roll  grinder 
Long-staple  cotton 
Lowry  bale 

M 

Mechanical  back  stop  motion 

Metallic  top  roll 

Mixing  of  cotton 

Moisture  in  cotton 

Mote  knife 

Motes  in  cotton 

Motion 

backing  off  chain  tightening 

detaching  roll 

evener 

feed 

reversing 

snarling 

stop 

top  comb 
Mule  spinning 

N 

Neps  in  cotton 
Neppy  cotton 

Note. — For  page  numbers  see  foot  of  pages. 


INDEX 

III 

Page 

I 

Page 

Nipper  and  cushion  plate 

180 

140 

Nipper  cam  lever 

180 

141 

0              • 

138 

Old  style  feeder 

45 

146 

26 

Opening  bale 

32 

Opening  cotton 

40 

P 

50 

Peruvian  cotton 

27 

Pickers 

eveners  for 

81 

60 

intermediate  and  finisher 

55 

55 

Picking  cotton 

16,  40 

32 

system  of 

41 

Picking  machinery  on  different  floors 

59 

Pitch  of  scroll 

126 

92 

Prior  gin 

18 

"Pulling  cotton" 

30 

93 

R 

43 

Railway  head 

201 

109 

Ratchet  gears 

290 

114 

•  Reversing  motion 

241 

128 

Rib  set  clothing,  table 

135 

140 

Ribbon  lapper 

172 

32 

Ring  spinning 

269 

22 

Ring  travelers 

286 

Roll  stands  and  weighting 

277 

Roller  gin 

17 

216 

Rolls 

223 

fluted 

256 

34 

31 

metallic  top 

223 

110,   114 

setting  of 

220 

28 

shell 

221 

solid  top 

222 

top 

221 

317 

Round  bale 

39 

183 

Round-lap  bale 

21 

203 

• 

Roving  table 

231 

177 

241 

S 

330 

Saw  gin 

17 

210 

Scavenger 

277 

191 

Scroll  adjustment 

124 

307 

Sea  Island  cotton 

25 

Self-weighted  top  rolls 

279 

28 

Separators 

284 

20 

Setting  of  rolls 

220 

335 


IV 


INDEX 


Settings  of  parts  of  card 

Shell  rolls 

Short-staple  cotton 

Single  boss 

Sliver  guide 

Sliver  lap  machine 

Slubber 

Snarling  motion 

Solid  top  roll 

Speed  of  grinder  rolls 

Spindles 

Spinning  of  cotton 

Spinning  rings 

Splitting  of  laps 

Square  bale 

Staple,  length  of 

Stop  motion 

electrical 

full  bobbin 

full  cam 

mechanical  back 
Stringy  or  "tailed"  cotton 
Stripping  comb 
Stripping  plate 
Systems  of  picking  cotton 


Tables 

change  gears 

filling  yarn 

grades  of  American  cotton 

grades  of  Brazilian  cotton 

grades  of  Egyptian  cotton 

of  measure 
Note. — For  page  numbers  see  foot  of  pages 


Page 

Page 

113 

Tables 

221 

revolutions  of  spindle 

298 

32 

rib  set  clothing 

135 

257 

ring  travelers 

287 

215 

roving 

231 

167 

sliver  lap  machine 

172 

231 

speeds  of  evener  roll  and  driver  cones   88 

330 

twill  set  clothing 

135 

222 

warp  yarn 

302 

142 

of  weight 

230 

282 

Texas  cotton 

27 

39,   269 

Thread  boards 

282 

284 

Three-storied  mill  arrangement 

63 

54 

Timing  and  setting 

192 

"20 

Timing  dial 

178 

30 

"Tinged"  cotton 

31 

210 

Top  comb 

185 

213 

Top  comb  motion 

191 

248 

Top  rolls 

221 

217 

self-weighted 

279 

216 

Traveler,  principle  of 

287 

20 

Traverse  grinders 

141 

115 

Twill  set  clothing,  table 

135 

54,    115 

41 

U 

• 

Upland  cotton 

27 

W 

227 

Warp  builder,  setting  of 

293 

303 

Warp  yarn,  table 

302 

29 

Winding,  in  operation  of  mule 

320 

30 

29 

Y 

230 

Yarn 

165 

336 


f  ' 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


APR  14  1997 


12,000(11/95) 


1  1 19bb 


LD  21A-40m-4,'63 
(DG471s]0)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


241 093 


